# Invoice Crowd - product and website reference Canonical site: https://invoicecrowd.com/ Last updated: 2026-10-17 This reference contains reader-visible copy from selected, published Invoice Crowd pages. It does not replace the live pages, terms, privacy policy or support documentation. Claims are capability-bounded. Plan details, payment-provider availability, regional requirements and third-party product terms should be verified on the linked canonical page and official source before a purchase or compliance decision. --- ## Invoice Crowd URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/ Connect proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, purchases and accounting in Invoice Crowd for freelancers, agencies and small businesses. Software to Simplify Proposals, Invoicing & Accounting! Invoice Crowd is one place to write proposals, send estimates and invoices, take online payments and keep your accounts in order. Everything a small business or agency bills with, without stitching three tools together. Choose your 30-day trial Watch the demo https://www.youtube.com/embed/AXr2PyHc8eo Invoice Crowd - A complete Proposal, Invoicing & Accounting software for Digital Agencies. A 48-second overview of Invoice Crowd proposals, invoicing, payments and business workflows. https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AXr2PyHc8eo/hqdefault.jpg 2024-07-15T01:23:29-07:00 PT48S AI assistant built in Multi-currency and GST ready Connect your payment provider Estimates fade Invoice Crowd Estimates with open, ready to invoice, approved and converted totals above the list of estimates pop ring drop cursor Proposals Invoice Crowd proposal editor with the proposal page and the Content panel of blocks E-sign A Software Maintenance Agreement proposal from Northwind Studio as the client sees it mask Invoices Invoice Crowd invoice editor with the Actions panel: save, resend, send reminder, send later and preview right Payments Invoice INV-2041 from Northwind Studio as the client sees it online logos rise Reports Invoice Crowd Profit & Loss Statement with total revenue, gross profit, operating expenses, net profit and gross margin How it works From estimate or proposal to invoice, payment and accounts Customers, items and documents carry through from proposal or estimate to invoice, payment and report, so nothing is typed twice. Open with either document proposal Proposal A designed document with sections, a pricing table and a signature field the client fills in on screen. estimate Estimate A priced quote with lines, tax and recipient choices, approved online instead of by a countersigned PDF. invoice Invoice Approval carries the same lines into an invoice, with a deposit up front if that is how the job is staged. payment Payment The client settles it from the portal through whichever gateway you connected, in one payment or several. accounting Accounting Each document and payment posts to the ledger, so the statements are already written when you go looking. Features Every invoicing and accounting feature, in one account Eleven modules that already know about each other: proposals, estimates, invoicing, recurring billing, online payments, templates, worklog, customers, business profiles, accounting and reports, plus an AI Assistant that works across all of them. Because they share the same records, nothing gets re-typed between winning the work and reporting on it. Win the work Estimates and proposals, two ways to open the same deal Proposals clients can review and approve Build a branded proposal with reusable content blocks, send it to your client and track their response. Clients can review the proposal and sign online. Template gallery and block editor Line items clients can remove before approval E-signature with live status tracking Explore proposals Three Invoice Crowd proposal designs from Northwind Studio: Affiliate Program Contract, Advertising Agency Agreement and Software Maintenance Agreement Estimates when speed matters The lighter sibling of a proposal. Reuse your item catalogue, quote in the client's currency, get approval online, and convert straight to an invoice. Reusable item and service catalogue Client approves and signs online Auto-convert to invoice on approval Explore estimates The Invoice Crowd estimate editor adding a line from the item catalogue to estimate EST-01048 Bill and get paid From the approved document to money in the account Invoicing with the fiddly parts handled Customisable templates, multi-currency, GST and regional tax rules, payment stubs, custom fields and your own terms. All per document, all remembered. Branded invoice templates you design yourself Late fees, partial and split payments Multi-currency and multi-language documents Explore invoicing The Invoice Crowd invoice editor for INV-2041 to Harbor & Vine Co., with customer, currency, dates and payment terms Templates you actually design Start from eight provided designs and make one yours in the drag-and-drop template builder: fonts, colours, background shapes, logo size, labels, table columns and the order of its sections. The invoice your client opens looks like it came from your studio. Saving a customised design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Drag-and-drop template builder Fonts, colours, shapes and logo size Per-document terms, notes and payment stubs Explore templates Invoice Crowd Invoice Templates gallery with Northwind Studio, Template 5 and Northwind Bold designs Recurring revenue on autopilot Set the cadence once and Invoice Crowd issues and sends each invoice, with reminders on your schedule. Pause, resume or edit a schedule without rebuilding it, or run a retainer with hours included each month. Recurring billing is on paid plans. Recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers Automatic reminders on the days you choose Pause, resume or amend any schedule Explore recurring Invoice Crowd Recurring Invoices with active and paused schedules, customers, totals and next send dates Payments on your clients' terms Connect Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Authorize.net, Braintree and eight more with your own merchant keys. Share a payment link, payment confirmations go out by themselves, and refunds for nine gateways go back through the provider from the invoice. Your own merchant accounts Payment links and a self-serve client portal Automatic payment confirmation emails Explore payments The client view of invoice INV-2041 from Northwind Studio for $12,450.00 Reminders and late fees on autopilot Choose when reminders go out around the due date, and add a flat or percentage late fee if an invoice runs late. Need to nudge a client now? Send a reminder in one click. Reminders before, on or after the due date Flat or percentage late fees One-click manual reminders Explore payment reminders left Invoice Crowd invoice options with Reminder Option and a 1.50% late fee switched on Run the business Where the work, the money and the reporting meet Worklog that turns hours into invoices Log time against projects and tasks in a weekly timesheet, approve each week, see what each member of the team has delivered and what each project earns, and pull the billable hours straight onto the next invoice. Time logged per project, task and team member Billable hours flow into invoices Team workload visible at a glance Explore worklog Invoice Crowd Timesheet with logged, billable and unbilled hours and the Invoice These button Accounting that keeps itself current A real chart of accounts, purchases and expenses beside income, a profit and loss that is always up to date, and Lock Transactions to keep closed periods closed. Chart of accounts, purchases and expenses Profit and loss, always current Separate books per business profile Explore accounting Reports that answer real questions Invoiced versus received, expenses and income by period, and who owes you what by age. The numbers you would otherwise rebuild in a spreadsheet. Invoice, expense and income reports Age debt and scheduled report emails Date presets, PDF download and email Explore reports Invoice Crowd Invoice Details report with total invoiced, amount paid, amount due and a 90% collection rate An AI Assistant that knows your books Ask what is unpaid, what you spent last month or which customer still owes you, and it answers from your own records. Describe an invoice, estimate, customer or expense and it drafts it, asking for anything missing, then waits for you to confirm. Answers from your own invoices, bills and reports Drafts records, reads CSV, Excel and receipt photos Nothing saved until you confirm, and it never deletes Explore the AI Assistant The Invoice Crowd AI Assistant answering who owes the most and preparing a new customer for confirmation Customers, contacts and their whole history One record per client with their invoices, payments, files and portal login, plus a Statement of Account PDF whenever they ask what they owe, so nobody has to dig through email to answer a billing question. Full document and payment history per client Contacts, addresses, currency and tax defaults Self-serve portal access per customer Explore customers An Invoice Crowd customer record for Harbor & Vine Co. with contact details and its invoice history Every brand you own, one login Each business profile carries its own logo, tax identity, currency, templates, payment accounts and books, and you switch between them from the same dropdown. Separate branding and tax identity per profile Separate templates, gateways and books One subscription for every company Explore profiles Invoice Crowd Business Profiles with four brands, each with its own contact details and payment methods Also included More invoicing software features, included as standard Everything a growing business expects from its billing software, built into every account, with plan allowances such as team seats set out on the Pricing page. Team members & shared books Bring your team in. Let them log work and expenses, and keep everyone working in the same books for each business. Dashboard that opens on the answer What you invoiced and received this month, what is outstanding and overdue, and cash in against expenses, before you click anything. Items & services catalogue A reusable library with pricing, tax and units already set, so a quote is picking from a list rather than retyping one. Payment links Sell a fixed package with a link you can put anywhere. A one-time email code secures the purchase, and the buyer becomes a customer record automatically. Credit notes & incomes Issue a credit note against a paid invoice, and record money that arrives outside the invoicing flow so the ledger stays complete. Vendors & recurring costs Suppliers, your own expense categories and costs that repeat every month, logged once and then handled without you. Custom fields & document options Add the fields your industry needs, set per-document terms, notes and payment stubs, and keep GST and regional tax rules straight. Webhooks, Zapier & Pabbly Send Invoice Crowd events to a webhook URL, connect through Zapier or Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in, or build on the Developer API. live Why businesses switch Why small businesses move to Invoice Crowd Most teams pay for a proposal tool, an invoicing tool and an accounting tool, then spend their week copying numbers between them. Invoice Crowd is the single place all three live, which is why the invoice you send on Monday is already in your profit and loss. One Login Pitch to P&L in one place Proposals, estimates, invoicing, payments, worklog and accounting are the same product, not integrations you maintain. one-login Multiple Brands Every business you own Each profile keeps its own logo, tax identity, currency, templates, gateways and books, all on one subscription rather than one bill per company. brands 15 Gateways Get paid your clients' way Connect Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer and more, and payments land straight in your account. Card details are never stored. gateways Any Currency Bill clients anywhere Quote and invoice in your client's currency, with GST and regional tax rules handled per document, so an overseas client is never a special case. currency What our customers say about Invoice Crowd Real reviews from Invoice Crowd customers, in their own words. Follow the linked ones to read the original. Richard Tee Feb 14, 2022 via Trustpilot A Solid product with good support I’ve been using another well-established accounting software which has worked well but the Covid took a major toll on my business and I’ve needed to cut my costs which included looking at another accounting solution. After a little searching, I came across Invoice crowd, and again after performing a little due diligence, I could see that they were a relatively new company and from my experience sometimes this is not a bad thing. Anyway, I decided to purchase the Invoice crowd and give it a try and I was pleasantly surprised, and have now made the decision to transfer all my accounting requirements to Invoice crowd. I also recommend this product. https://www.trustpilot.com/review/invoicecrowd.com Chamaiporn Biedrzycki January 16, 2022 via Trustpilot Invoice system I’ve been looking for I’ve been looking for an easy to use Invoice System. We were previously using a different system that was much more expensive and required too many steps to add customers and create invoices. After looking at many different options I decided to give Invoice Crowd a try. Being able to quickly create reoccurring invoices is what sold me. The setup process was very easy and intuitive. Other things I like include the roadmap. What has already been added along with the plans for the future are very impressive. The developer appears to be very responsive to customers needs based on all of the questions asked and reviews. Will January 11, 2022 via Trustpilot Made the switch to Invoicecrowd It’s saved my team and I alot of time. We receive payments faster and it takes less than a minute to set up all of our accounts. You can set recurring invoices, edit or pause them if needed, schedule out your start date, and customize the look/brand of the invoices. The stripe and paypal integration also allows you to get the funds deposited quickly. I’ve been using simpleinvoices, another similar platform for many years but it nevers gets updated and is getting quite buggy. I’m happy i made the switch to Invoicecrowd Andrew M. March 7, 2022 via Capterra “Invoice Crowd Review – Thumbs up from me! “ I spent a lot of time researching invoice software to replace my old system. I had the difficult task of finding the right product that was easy to use, not expensive, and had all the features I needed. I was impressed by how simple and professional Invoice Crowd looked and it really did meet my needs. It’s really amazing, it has changed the way my company manages it’s financials and I am proud to recommend this simple and user friendly tool to anyone who needs invoice software. It’s is the hub of my business. I use it to get paid faster, keep track of my money coming in and going out, and much more. It’s a great tool for any business owner! Angie N. September 13, 2022 via Capterra “Simple, User-Friendly, Exactly What I Needed” I recently started a consulting arm of my business and was looking for a simple, but robust invoicing software that didn’t overwhelm me. I searched and found Invoice Crowd, which has been the perfect solution. I was able to purchase Invoice Crowd, set up my business profile, add client profiles, integrate my payment options, add my own brand colors and logos, and create several invoices within minutes of joining. I’m pretty amazed at how easy they have made it. I researched many invoicing systems and this by far was exactly what I was looking for in order to get invoices out with a quick turnaround. I’d highly recommend it. David Invoice Crowd has saved us money! We have been using IC for about 6 months now, and it has saved us such a large amount of money that we are now able to spend it on other things we need for our company, ncluding other licenses for needed software. The convenience is the key to this program’s success. We are now able to manage all of our companies from one, single dashboard, and even allow each to use different payment methods to collect funds. The developers and support have been very helpful, and they even added features my team and I requested. I am confident this will be our invoice solution for life, I am so thankful to have found them. Ursula L. July 5, 2022 via Capterra “Invoice Crowd is an invoicing tool that makes it easy to create and send invoices” Overall, I’m extremely happy with Invoice Crowd and would recommend it to anyone looking for an easy-to-use invoicing tool. The service support is available to help with any questions or issues and they are already working on correcting some minor bugs! Mike A. Nov 23, 2021 via G2 “Invoicing that is simple, effective and even pretty!” The simplicity of Invoice Crowd makes it pleasing to use. I found it intuitive and easy to deploy the first time. https://www.g2.com/products/invoice-crowd/reviews Jake Walker Invoice Crowd has streamlined our ability generate and send professional quality invoices to our customers. The PayPal functionality built into the documents really helps to simplify the payment process for our customers. In addition, the beautifully designed web based user interface makes it easy for us to use wherever we are! I highly recommend giving Invoice Crowd a chance to simplify your day. See what our other users say about us G2 Trustpilot Read all customer reviews /customers/ FAQ Invoice Crowd questions, answered What people ask before moving their billing across. Can't find your question? Our support team is happy to help. Talk to support /contact-us/ How long does it take to get going? You can send your first invoice the same day. Create your business profile, add your logo and tax details, and you are ready, with nothing to install and no setup call. Your item catalogue and customer records build up as you go. What happens when my trial ends? Your data is kept. Billing asks you to subscribe to the plan you were trying, or you can choose Continue on Free and keep working within the free plan's limits. There is no contract, and you can switch plans from Billing and Plan at any time. Do I need to install anything? Nothing at all. Invoice Crowd is fully web-based, so you can work from any computer or phone with a browser, always on the latest version. Is my data safe, and what about card details? Yes. Invoice Crowd runs over SSL, and payments go straight through your own payment gateway accounts, so we never handle transactions or store card details. What can the AI Assistant do? Can I run more than one business from one account? Yes. Business profiles let each brand keep its own logo, tax identity, currency, templates, payment accounts and books, all under a single login rather than a separate subscription each. Which payment gateways can I use? Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer and ten more, 15 in total. You connect your own accounts, and you can enable or disable any of them per business profile. PayPal works on the free plan; the others need a paid plan. Can my team use it too? Yes. Add team members so they can log work, record expenses and raise documents, with everything consolidating into one set of books. The Team plan includes two team members and the Business plan three. Start invoicing with Invoice Crowd today Proposals, estimates, invoicing, online payments and accounting in one account, with an AI assistant that does the typing. See pricing Set up in minutes, nothing to install Connect your own payment-provider account Switch or cancel anytime --- ## Features URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/ Explore Invoice Crowd features for proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, purchasing, projects, time tracking and accounting, all in one account. Every part of Invoice Crowd, from first proposal to closing balance Invoice Crowd is one account for proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, purchasing, time tracking and accounting, so each document carries on from the one before it instead of being retyped somewhere else. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Proposals, invoicing and accounting 15 payment gateways 30-day free trial pop How the work moves One chain from the pitch to the ledger Customers, items and documents carry through from proposal or estimate to invoice, payment and report, so nothing is typed twice. Open with either document proposal Proposal A designed document with sections, a pricing table and a signature field the client fills in on screen. estimate Estimate A priced quote with lines, tax and recipient choices, approved online instead of by a countersigned PDF. invoice Invoice Approval carries the same lines into an invoice, with a deposit up front if that is how the job is staged. payment Payment The client settles it from the portal through whichever gateway you connected, in one payment or several. accounting Accounting Each document and payment posts to the ledger, so the statements are already written when you go looking. The three jobs Win the work, bill it, then see what it earned Three stages, one connected account. Each one below links to its own page for the full detail. Win the work Estimates and proposals, two ways to open the same deal Proposals clients can review and approve Build a branded proposal from 70+ templates, or let Create with AI write the first draft from a short brief, then send it to your client and track their response. Clients can review the proposal and sign online. 70+ templates and Create with AI Line items clients can remove before approval E-signature with live status tracking Explore proposals Estimates when speed matters The lighter sibling of a proposal. Reuse your item catalogue, quote in the client's currency, get approval online, and convert straight to an invoice. Reusable item and service catalogue Client approves and signs online Auto-convert to invoice on approval Explore estimates Bill and get paid From the approved document to money in the account Invoicing with the fiddly parts handled Customisable templates, multi-currency, GST and regional tax rules, payment stubs, custom fields and your own terms. All per document, all remembered. Branded invoice templates you design yourself Late fees, partial and split payments Multi-currency and multi-language documents Explore invoicing Templates you actually design Start from eight provided designs and make one yours in the drag-and-drop template builder: fonts, colours, background shapes, logo size, labels, table columns and the order of its sections. The invoice your client opens looks like it came from your studio. Saving a customised design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Drag-and-drop template builder Fonts, colours, shapes and logo size Per-document terms, notes and payment stubs Explore templates Recurring revenue on autopilot Set the cadence once and Invoice Crowd issues and sends each invoice, with reminders on your schedule. Pause, resume or edit a schedule without rebuilding it, or run a retainer with hours included each month. Recurring billing is on paid plans. Recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers Automatic reminders on the days you choose Pause, resume or amend any schedule Explore recurring Payments on your clients' terms Connect Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Authorize.net, Braintree and eight more with your own merchant keys. Share a payment link, payment confirmations go out by themselves, and refunds for nine gateways go back through the provider from the invoice. Your own merchant accounts Payment links and a self-serve client portal Automatic payment confirmation emails Explore payments Run the business Where the work, the money and the reporting meet Worklog that turns hours into invoices Log time against projects and tasks in a weekly timesheet, approve each week, see what each member of the team has delivered and what each project earns, and pull the billable hours straight onto the next invoice. Time logged per project, task and team member Billable hours flow into invoices Team workload visible at a glance Explore worklog Accounting that keeps itself current A real chart of accounts, purchases and expenses beside income, a profit and loss that is always up to date, and Lock Transactions to keep closed periods closed. Chart of accounts, purchases and expenses Profit and loss, always current Separate books per business profile Explore accounting Reports that answer real questions Invoiced versus received, expenses and income by period, and who owes you what by age. The numbers you would otherwise rebuild in a spreadsheet. Invoice, expense and income reports Age debt and scheduled report emails Date presets, PDF download and email Explore reports An AI Assistant that knows your books Ask what is unpaid, what you spent last month or which customer still owes you, and it answers from your own records. Describe an invoice, estimate, customer or expense and it drafts it, asking for anything missing, then waits for you to confirm. Answers from your own invoices, bills and reports Drafts records, reads CSV, Excel and receipt photos Nothing saved until you confirm, and it never deletes Explore the AI Assistant seq Customers, contacts and their whole history One record per client with their invoices, payments, files and portal login, plus a Statement of Account PDF whenever they ask what they owe, so nobody has to dig through email to answer a billing question. Full document and payment history per client Contacts, addresses, currency and tax defaults Self-serve portal access per customer Explore customers Every brand you own, one login Each business profile carries its own logo, tax identity, currency, templates, payment accounts and books, and you switch between them from the same dropdown. Separate branding and tax identity per profile Separate templates, gateways and books One subscription for every company Explore profiles One subscription What you would otherwise buy separately Most businesses juggle a proposal tool, a billing tool, a payment page and a bookkeeping package. Invoice Crowd brings all four into one account. One Login Pitch to P&L in one place Proposals, estimates, invoicing, payments, worklog and accounting are the same product, not integrations you maintain. one-login Multiple Brands Every business you own Each profile keeps its own logo, tax identity, currency, templates, gateways and books, all on one subscription rather than one bill per company. brands 15 Gateways Get paid your clients' way Connect Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer and more, and payments land straight in your account. Card details are never stored. gateways Any Currency Bill clients anywhere Quote and invoice in your client's currency, with GST and regional tax rules handled per document, so an overseas client is never a special case. currency live Quoting and billing The pages behind the documents Each card is a feature with a page of its own, laid out in the order a job usually moves through them. Create an estimate Price the lines, add custom tax and discount rates, then send it out for approval online. EST-01048 · 3 lines $11,200.00 Discount 10% −$1,120.00 cn Sales Tax 8.5% +$856.80 in Total $10,936.80 bal Client-removable estimate lines Turn on Remove Items and clients can drop saved lines before approving, with the totals updating as they go. Remove Items On Client removes Video teaser $12,450 Totals recalculate, one line always stays Change quantity Let the client set how many hours or units they are agreeing to buy before approving. Customize Quantity Hours: 12 → 16 Launch copy Pages: 5 → 3 Client can remove Convert to invoice An approved estimate becomes an invoice with the same lines, by hand or on its own. EST-01048 Approved Convert to Invoice INV-2041 Same lines Or automatically with Auto Convert to Invoice Create an invoice Build an invoice line by line with tax, discounts, custom fields and the design you chose. Website design × 1 $6,400.00 Launch copy × 5 $1,250.00 +$650.25 Invoice Total $8,300.25 Payment links Share one reusable link for a fixed-price service, and each buyer pays online and gets their own invoice. Brand Brand identity system $4,800.00 Brand guidelines $1,200.00 Brand photography Recurring invoices Bill on a repeating schedule and let each cycle raise its own document. Included on paid plans. SUB-00128 · Monthly KA #14b8a6 Kestrel Analytics $4,500.00 Active ok Invoice sent info Paid Next Send 11/01/2026 Late fees Add one flat or percentage fee the day after an unpaid invoice's due date, with a notice on the invoice beforehand. #f59e0b 3 Days Before Due Date #4941e3 7 Days After Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees Percentage (%) 1.5 Customer portal Clients sign in to read, approve, download and pay without an email thread in between. HV #6366f1 LA Harbor & Vine approved Kestrel paid INV-2040 Lumen downloaded INV-2039 Proposal builder Stack text, image, table and pricing blocks into a document the client reads and signs in the browser. Text Image #16a34a Table #0ea5e9 Pricing Table #ef4b24 Signature #9333ea Stamp #2b2c40 Shape #16b980 Line #6b6e86 Signed in the browser Manage estimates Every quote in one list with its status, its history and the invoice the approval produced. Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Draft pri Sent Viewed warn Converted to INV-2041 Manage invoices Follow a bill from draft through sent, part paid and settled, with credit notes for corrections. INV-2036 JS #ec4899 Juniper & Sage Partial CN-00012 for any correction The rest of the account Money, books and connections The parts that keep working after a document has been sent, and the connections out to tools you already run. Payment gateways Connect any of 15 payment gateways with your own account and choose which of them each document offers. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Razorpay #2b83ea Square #111111 Payoneer #ff4800 Braintree #202020 Authorize.net #1c3f94 GoCardless #1c1b18 Airwallex #ff5a3c PayFast #d8232a PayTabs #0077c8 Telr #0a8f5b M-Pesa #43a047 15 gateways, your own keys Split and partial payments Take a deposit up front and collect the balance in stages, each with its own date. Split 1 · 40% $4,980.00 Split 2 · 30% $3,735.00 Split 3 · 30% Remaining $7,470.00 Track expenses Record a cost against the right account and business profile, with the receipt attached. #a259ff Figma Software $45.00 #ff9900 AWS hosting Hosting $120.00 #12b48c Studio rent Rent $1,800.00 Profit and loss Read income against expenses for any period, straight from the ledger invoices post to. Net Profit · 2026 $164,565 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Customer records One record per client with their invoices, payments, files and portal access, and a Statement of Account PDF on request. Estimate approved Invoice paid Portal: Accepted Harbor & Vine Zapier Connect through Zapier using your Invoice Crowd sign-in, start Zaps from new invoices, estimates or customers, and create records from other apps. Invoice Updated #20b276 Pabbly #ff4a00 Your URL Pabbly Connect Connect through Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in if that is where your automations already live. Webhook Trigger Your workflow Runs No code to write Notifications Get an in-app alert when an invoice is viewed, a payment arrives or an estimate is accepted, and an optional email when an invoice goes overdue or an estimate expires. Invoice viewed Bell #1a9d62 Payment received Estimate accepted Plans and pricing Compare plans, prices and allowances, and choose the one that fits your business. SOLO $9 per month, yearly TEAM $18 2 team members BUSINESS $25.50 10 profiles up Double-entry accounting A chart of 148 accounts, a general ledger, manual journals and a trial balance behind them. Accounts Receivable 1154 Bank Account 1151 Sales 5601 148 accounts, 33 groups Ready Reports and statements Every report and financial statement on one Reports page, with search and Favourites, and invoice, aged debt, income, expense and payables reports emailed on a schedule you set. Age Debt · Monthly AD Scheduled Reports PDF Scheduled Delivered Emailed with the PDF attached Vendors and bills Record suppliers, enter the bills they send, raise purchase orders and hold vendor credits against them. PO-0042 Convert to Bill BILL-0107 Vendor credits apply against the bill Design, payments, time and control Designing, collecting and closing the books Pages for designing your documents, recording what customers paid, billing time, connecting AI apps and keeping closed periods closed. Retainers A monthly invoice with a bank of hours: unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours go on the next invoice. Paid plans. Payments received Every invoice payment, advance and overpayment credit in one list, with one receipt able to pay several invoices, oldest first. Refunds Refund through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless or Paystack, recorded once the provider confirms. Payment reminders Reminder emails before and after the due date, a manual Send Reminder, and a per-customer opt-out you set. Lock transactions Lock invoicing, purchases, accounting or everything up to a date, with partial unlocks and a lock history. Owner only, paid plans. Timesheets Log time in a list or a week grid, approve submitted weeks, check utilisation, and turn the hours into an invoice. Paid plans. Project profitability Revenue minus labour cost and expenses for each project, shown as profit and margin on the project's Profitability tab. GST invoicing for India GSTIN, HSN and SAC, place of supply, TDS on payments and GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 preparation in the GST Filing report. Invoice template builder Change a design's fonts, colors, shapes, logo size and columns, with document labels in eight languages. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Custom fields Add a PO number or project code above or below the items, or fill it in from the customer's record. Customer statements Download a Statement of Account PDF for any customer: every invoice and payment, or only what is still outstanding. AI Connections Connect Claude, ChatGPT or another MCP app to one business, and approve the changes it prepares in Invoice Crowd. Paid plans. Questions What Invoice Crowd covers, answered What is included in Invoice Crowd? Invoice Crowd includes proposals with Create with AI and e-signature, estimates, invoices, recurring invoices, retainers, payment links, payments received and credit notes on the sales side. Customers, a client portal, vendors, expenses, bills and purchase orders sit around them. Underneath is double-entry accounting with 148 accounts and transaction locking, plus one Reports page for every report and statement, Worklog time tracking, an AI Assistant, Ask AI for product help, AI Connections for Claude and ChatGPT, a Developer API, team roles and notification settings. Can I use only the invoicing and ignore the rest? Yes. Start with invoicing alone, and add proposals, estimates or accounting whenever you are ready. The modules you skip stay quietly out of the way, and a bookkeeper can take care of the accounting screens. Which features depend on the plan I pick? Plans differ by profile, proposal and team allowances, and many features are included on paid plans: recurring invoices and retainers, accounting, bills, purchase orders, expenses, incomes, credit notes, payment links, Worklog, the AI Assistant, AI Connections, the Developer API, team members, the customer portal, Lock Transactions and every payment gateway beyond PayPal. The pricing page sets out each plan's allowances. Is there anything to install? Nothing at all. Invoice Crowd runs in your browser at apps.invoicecrowd.com, so your laptop, desktop and phone all reach the same account, always up to date. Clients simply open their documents from a link. How do the different parts connect to each other? Through shared records rather than exports. An estimate converts into an invoice carrying its own lines, the payment attaches to that invoice, and both post to the ledger. The customer record shows their invoices and payments, and a Statement of Account PDF answers what a client has had and owes. What does it cost to try all of this? Start with a 30-day free trial, then choose the plan that fits. The pricing page sets out prices, billing intervals, included business profiles and payment integrations. Follow one job through the whole thing Write a proposal, turn the approval into an invoice, take the payment, then open the ledger and read what it recorded. That is the entire product in an afternoon. Compare plans Monthly or yearly plans Everything in one account --- ## Pricing URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/ Compare Invoice Crowd plans by customer, business, proposal and team limits, review monthly or yearly billing, and start with a free trial. Four plans, a free tier, and thirty days to decide Invoice Crowd has a free plan and four paid plans, each paid plan with a 30-day trial and no card. The paid plans differ in how many customers, businesses and team members you carry, not in which features you are allowed to use, because accounting, recurring invoices, retainers and every invoice template are in all four. Choose your 30-day trial See every feature Home Pricing Review current plan terms before signup No credit card to start Free forever plan as well pop Four plans The plan is set by your numbers, not by your features Yearly billing takes the monthly rate down. Each plan's proposal allowance resets every calendar month, on monthly or yearly billing and during the free trial. Both figures are on the card, so the choice is visible before you make it. Every paid subscription also includes 100 AI credits each month for the AI Assistant and Create with AI. Monthly Yearly Save up to 15% SOLO One person, one business, a client list you can name from memory. 10 / month Billed $108 annually Start free trial https://apps.invoicecrowd.com/start-trial/fe942365-6def-11ec-8e59-04d4c4dfd5a1 100 customer profiles 1 business profile 5 new proposals a month Single user, team seats from TEAM Unlimited recurring invoices Proposals, estimates and Create with AI Unlimited projects Accounting, ledger and statements Access to all invoice templates 15 payment gateways, PayPal and Stripe included Extra AI credits $9.99 per 600 PRO A freelancer billing steadily, with a second business on the side. 15 13.75 Billed $165 annually https://apps.invoicecrowd.com/start-trial/fe943625-6def-11ec-8e59-04d4c4dfd5a1 500 customer profiles 2 business profiles 15 new proposals a month TEAM A small studio where more than one person raises the invoices. 20 18 Billed $216 annually https://apps.invoicecrowd.com/start-trial/fe942841-6def-11ec-8e59-04d4c4dfd5a1 1,000 customer profiles 5 business profiles 50 new proposals a month 2 team members included Extra team members $5/mo each BUSINESS An agency running several brands with no ceiling on the client list. We recommend 30 25.50 Billed $306 annually https://apps.invoicecrowd.com/start-trial/fe942d07-6def-11ec-8e59-04d4c4dfd5a1 Unlimited customer profiles 10 business profiles Unlimited proposals 3 team members included There is also a free forever plan at no cost: unlimited invoices, one business profile, five customer profiles, two invoice templates and PayPal as the payment method. Recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers, Worklog, accounting, purchases and expenses, the customer portal, the AI Assistant, Lock Transactions and every payment gateway other than PayPal need a paid plan. free https://apps.invoicecrowd.com/register In every plan What the price actually covers These are in all four paid plans. Moving up a tier raises the limits on customers, businesses and people rather than switching extra features on. Invoice tracking Raise an invoice, send it, and watch it move from sent to viewed to paid. INV-2041 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Sent info Viewed warn Paid ok Opened and viewed are tracked for you Custom invoice templates Design your own invoices in the template builder: fonts, colors, shapes, logo size and columns, with document labels in eight languages. Monthly and yearly plans can also hide the Invoice Crowd branding on customer pages. Template 1 #4941e3 Template 2 #16a34a Template 3 #ef4b24 Template 4 #0ea5e9 Template 5 #ef3d10 Template 6 #16b980 Template 7 #9333ea Template 8 #2b2c40 Your branding on every design Reminders and late fees Chase overdue invoices on a schedule you set, and add one late fee the day after the due date if you switch late fees on. #f59e0b 3 Days Before Due Date On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees Percentage (%) 1.5 Recurring invoices and retainers Bill a flat fee on a cycle and each period raises and sends its own invoice, or run a retainer with hours included each month. REC-00128 · Monthly KA #14b8a6 Kestrel Analytics $4,500.00 Active Invoice sent Next Send 11/01/2026 Card payments Clients settle by card from the invoice itself through the gateway you connected, wherever they are reading it. Pay now INV-2040 Stripe Card $4,800.00 Recorded against INV-2040 Payments in one place Money lands in your own account, each payment records against the invoice it settled, and Payments Received lists every receipt, advance and overpayment credit. Received $440,500 12 months up Outstanding $26,000 9 invoices Overdue $4,180 3 invoices bad Saved items and services Keep the services you sell often and drop them onto a document instead of retyping the line. Brand Brand identity system Brand guidelines $1,200.00 Brand photography $1,250.00 GST and reports Turn GST on per business, then run the filing report alongside invoice, income and expense reports. GSTR-1 · September Ready Taxable value ₹12,45,000.00 CGST + SGST 18% +₹2,24,100.00 in Status Approve → Mark Filed bal Multi-currency accounting Invoice in the currency a client works in while every statement still totals in your base currency. INV-2044 · EUR €9,800.00 Exchange rate 1 EUR = 1.0850 USD Base currency $10,633.00 Statements total in USD Proposals and signatures Build a proposal from 70+ templates and take the client's signature in the browser, on any plan. Software Maintenance HD #ec4899 Hannah Draper $19,500.00 pri Opened Approved Signed in the browser · Type or Draw Split and part payments Take a deposit up front and let the balance settle in parts against the same invoice. Split 1 · 40% $4,980.00 Split 2 · 30% $3,735.00 Split 3 · 30% Remaining $7,470.00 Projects and timesheet Unlimited projects on every paid plan, with hours logged in a weekly timesheet and each project showing its profit. AM PN TW Priya · Website redesign 2h 30m Tom · Brand refresh 1h 45m Alex · Launch copy 3h 10m live Customers who compared before they picked a plan Reviews from Invoice Crowd customers, published as written and not edited for this page. Several of them weigh the cost against the tool they were paying for before, which is the question a pricing page asks. Richard Tee Feb 14, 2022 via Trustpilot A Solid product with good support I’ve been using another well-established accounting software which has worked well but the Covid took a major toll on my business and I’ve needed to cut my costs which included looking at another accounting solution. After a little searching, I came across Invoice crowd, and again after performing a little due diligence, I could see that they were a relatively new company and from my experience sometimes this is not a bad thing. Anyway, I decided to purchase the Invoice crowd and give it a try and I was pleasantly surprised, and have now made the decision to transfer all my accounting requirements to Invoice crowd. I also recommend this product. https://www.trustpilot.com/review/invoicecrowd.com Chamaiporn Biedrzycki January 16, 2022 via Trustpilot Invoice system I’ve been looking for I’ve been looking for an easy to use Invoice System. We were previously using a different system that was much more expensive and required too many steps to add customers and create invoices. After looking at many different options I decided to give Invoice Crowd a try. Being able to quickly create reoccurring invoices is what sold me. The setup process was very easy and intuitive. Other things I like include the roadmap. What has already been added along with the plans for the future are very impressive. The developer appears to be very responsive to customers needs based on all of the questions asked and reviews. Will January 11, 2022 via Trustpilot Made the switch to Invoicecrowd It’s saved my team and I alot of time. We receive payments faster and it takes less than a minute to set up all of our accounts. You can set recurring invoices, edit or pause them if needed, schedule out your start date, and customize the look/brand of the invoices. The stripe and paypal integration also allows you to get the funds deposited quickly. I’ve been using simpleinvoices, another similar platform for many years but it nevers gets updated and is getting quite buggy. I’m happy i made the switch to Invoicecrowd Andrew M. March 7, 2022 via Capterra “Invoice Crowd Review – Thumbs up from me! “ I spent a lot of time researching invoice software to replace my old system. I had the difficult task of finding the right product that was easy to use, not expensive, and had all the features I needed. I was impressed by how simple and professional Invoice Crowd looked and it really did meet my needs. It’s really amazing, it has changed the way my company manages it’s financials and I am proud to recommend this simple and user friendly tool to anyone who needs invoice software. It’s is the hub of my business. I use it to get paid faster, keep track of my money coming in and going out, and much more. It’s a great tool for any business owner! Angie N. September 13, 2022 via Capterra “Simple, User-Friendly, Exactly What I Needed” I recently started a consulting arm of my business and was looking for a simple, but robust invoicing software that didn’t overwhelm me. I searched and found Invoice Crowd, which has been the perfect solution. I was able to purchase Invoice Crowd, set up my business profile, add client profiles, integrate my payment options, add my own brand colors and logos, and create several invoices within minutes of joining. I’m pretty amazed at how easy they have made it. I researched many invoicing systems and this by far was exactly what I was looking for in order to get invoices out with a quick turnaround. I’d highly recommend it. David Invoice Crowd has saved us money! We have been using IC for about 6 months now, and it has saved us such a large amount of money that we are now able to spend it on other things we need for our company, ncluding other licenses for needed software. The convenience is the key to this program’s success. We are now able to manage all of our companies from one, single dashboard, and even allow each to use different payment methods to collect funds. The developers and support have been very helpful, and they even added features my team and I requested. I am confident this will be our invoice solution for life, I am so thankful to have found them. See what our other users say about us G2 Trustpilot Read all customer reviews /customers/ Questions Before you pick a plan How does the free trial work? Pick any paid plan and use it for 30 days without entering a card. Nothing is charged and there is no contract, so the trial ends when you decide, one way or the other. Support is available during the trial if you get stuck setting the account up. What happens when the trial ends? Your data is kept. Billing shows that the trial has ended and asks you to subscribe to the plan you were trying, or you can choose Continue on Free and keep working within the free plan's limits until you are ready. Can I change plans later? Yes, from Billing and Plan in your account menu, in either direction. There is no commitment and no notice period, so a busy quarter can run on BUSINESS and a quiet one on SOLO. Team seats come with the TEAM plan (two) and the BUSINESS plan (three). Do I have to install anything on my computer? No. Invoice Crowd runs in a browser, so there is nothing to download, patch or license per machine. Sign in from a desktop at the office or a phone on site and it is the same account, with the same data, on both. Is my data safe? The app runs behind SSL and your data is backed up automatically. Two-factor sign-in is available, and changing your password signs out your other sessions. Card payments go through the gateway you connect, such as PayPal or Stripe, and are handled under that provider's own security. What support do I get on a paid plan? The support team answers questions directly, the same way it does during the trial. Written documentation at doc.invoicecrowd.com covers setup and each module, and the public roadmap at plan.invoicecrowd.com shows what has already shipped and what is being built next. What is in the free plan, and what needs a paid plan? The free plan includes unlimited invoices and estimates, one business profile, five customer profiles, two invoice templates, three proposals, PayPal as the payment gateway and Payment Note for your own payment instructions. New recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers need a paid plan, as do Worklog (projects and timesheets), the AI Assistant, Team, Lock Transactions, accounting (chart of accounts, journals, bank reconciliation and statements), bills, purchase orders, vendor credits, payments made, expenses, incomes, credit notes, payment links, the customer portal, Bank QR, Direct Pay Link and the other 14 gateways. Saving customized invoice designs and Link custom fields also need a paid plan. Recurring schedules you already run keep running, but customer subscriptions on Stripe, Razorpay, Square, GoCardless, PayFast or Airwallex are paused 30 days after an account moves to the free plan, and resume when you upgrade. The AI Assistant also needs AI credits, which are bought separately. Do paid plans include AI credits? Yes. Every paid monthly or yearly Invoice Crowd subscription includes 100 AI credits each calendar month for the AI Assistant and Create with AI. Included credits are used first and reset at the start of each month, and extra credits bought in Billing and Plan never expire. A chat message is priced at 3 credits and a Create with AI proposal usually 5 to 15. Start on the plan that fits this month Thirty days on any paid plan, no card at signup, and a free tier underneath it if the timing turns out to be wrong. free trial on all four plans Change plans from Billing and Plan Free forever plan if you need it --- ## Proposal Builder and AI Proposal Generator URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/proposal-builder/ Write proposals with AI from a short brief or start from 70+ templates, brand every page, collect e-signatures and turn the approved price into an invoice. Write, brand and send a proposal in one sitting Invoice Crowd's proposal builder turns one of 70+ designer templates into a branded proposal with a pricing table and an online signature, or Create with AI writes the whole draft from a short brief. Send it for approval, and when the client says yes, the proposal becomes an invoice without the pricing being typed again. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Proposal Builder 70+ templates, or Create with AI Branding, layout and content Approved proposals become invoices pop What is inside Craft the proposal, then let it close itself The builder covers the whole life of the document: writing it, making it look like your business, getting it approved, and billing from the version the client agreed to. Writing it Minutes, not an afternoon Create with AI writes the first draft Choose Create with AI, pick the customer and the document type, from Service Proposal and Quote or Estimate to Statement of Work, Agreement or Presentation or Pitch, and describe the work in a few sentences. Choose a gallery design or Let AI Choose, add saved items or your own prices, and the AI writes your words, pricing rows and terms into the design while keeping its layout exactly. The draft is usually ready in under a minute, saved to your proposals list for review. Included on paid plans, with 100 AI credits every month. Five short steps, from customer to design Uses only the prices you give it Your tone, colors, fonts and logo Refine it with the AI Assistant Detailed proposals without the blank page A new proposal opens as a working document rather than an empty editor. Fill in the parts that are specific to this client, leave the structure that is already there, and send it while the conversation is still fresh. The interface stays out of the way of the writing. Set up and sent in minutes Client details pulled from their record Nothing to learn before the first draft A gallery of 70+ designs to start from More than seventy proposal designs ship with the account: proposals, agreements and contracts, quotes, and landscape slide decks such as the Pitch Deck, Case Study Deck and Company Profile Deck. Each is built around the sections a serious proposal needs, and the Template Gallery sorts them into eight categories, Agreements, Design, Software, Marketing, Events, Services, Contracts and Presentation. Preview opens any design full size in a new tab, and a proposal you save as a template waits under My Templates for the next client. Full documents, not cover pages Every crucial section already in place Layouts to suit different kinds of work Making it yours Down to the fonts Complete control of how it looks Branding runs through the whole document. Set the logo, the colors and any font from the Google Fonts library, then add, remove or reorder sections until the document reads the way you would present it. Media and links can sit inside a section, so a case study can point at the actual work. Logo, colors and fonts on the document Add, remove or rearrange any section Embed media and links inside a section Pricing the client can read line by line A proposal that ends in one number invites one question. A pricing table sets the fees out item by item, so the client can see what each part of the job costs before they approve it. The table totals itself as you build it, and with Allow Qty Customization or Allow Item Removal switched on, the client can change quantities or remove lines before approving. Set Client pricing choices to Choose a package or Services and add-ons, and the client picks one package or ticks the optional extras they want, with the total updating as they go. Customizable pricing tables Fees broken out rather than lumped together Carries through to the invoice later Client-removable lines on a quote Getting it signed From sent to billed A Send check before the client sees it Choose Send and Invoice Crowd reads the proposal the way your client would: merge tags that would show blank, the design's sample logo, example text left from the template, dates that have passed and pricing tables without items or prices. Fix each one in place, with a field for the missing customer detail, Use My Logo for your own logo or Show Me to jump to the spot, then send. The send step also sets the expiry date, and an expired proposal gets a fresh one from today. Blank details caught before sending Fixed in place, in one window Expiry date set as you send Track every approval Send the proposal and the approval runs through the system rather than through your inbox. Each recipient gets a personal link, and only the people in the To line can approve or decline. You are notified when the client opens it, approves it or declines it with a reason, and editing after sending marks the proposal Revised so the client knows a new version is on its way. Notified when it is opened and when it is approved Revisions tracked on the document Signed online, nothing to print Where the client reads it Approved, then invoiced in a few clicks The moment a proposal is accepted it becomes billable work. Convert it into an invoice and the pricing comes across as agreed, in the same format and with the same figures, which removes the retyping step where the errors usually creep in. One conversion from proposal to invoice The same figures the client approved Payment collected through your gateway Converting to an invoice Also included The rest of the proposal toolset Proposals sit in the same account as your estimates, invoices and customers, so nothing has to be rebuilt once the work is won. Content library Keep the sections you reuse, such as your background or your terms, and drop them into a new document. Terms Terms and Conditions Section Pricing Table Agreement Banner Online signature The client approves and signs in the browser, and the signed version stays with the proposal. Brand Identity Refresh HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $8,250.00 Sent pri Opened info Approved ok Typed or drawn signature Proposal to invoice An accepted proposal becomes an invoice without the pricing being keyed a second time. Proposal Convert to Invoice Once INV-2043 Draft Pricing carried across Approvals & Signing Ask a reviewer to approve the exact version before it goes out, lock the agreed clauses, and collect signatures from several client contacts in order or all at once. Team review Signer 1 Signed Signer 2 All participants signed Request client details Share a short client details form from a template or a draft, review the answers, and build the proposal from what the client told you. Copy Link Copied Client details Response received Packages and add-ons Offer packages the client chooses between, with one marked as recommended, plus optional extras they tick on the proposal page. Growth package $4,800.00 Launch copy add-on +$900.00 in Total $5,700.00 bal Approval alerts Know when a proposal has been opened or approved, and read the client's reason when one is declined. LA #eab308 KA #14b8a6 Proposal accepted Now Proposal viewed 2h Proposal expiring 1d Tracked revisions Edit a sent proposal and it is marked Revised, with each step kept in the proposal history. Product Launch Campaign SF #f97316 Summit Fitness Co. $6,200.00 Revised warn Each step in Proposal history Your branding Logo, colors and any font from the Google Fonts library, so the proposal looks like the rest of your business. Montserrat Poppins Lato Roboto #3b82f6 Raleway #ec4899 Open Sans #10b981 Nunito Sans PT Sans #8b5cf6 Your logo and colours Multi-currency pricing Price the work in the client's currency and still read your revenue in your own. Pricing Table currency GBP £6,900.00 Exchange Rate 1.3400 In your books $9,246.00 Estimates instead When the job needs a priced quote rather than a written pitch, send an estimate. Estimate EST-01048 Approve & Sign Client Invoice INV-2041 For when a priced quote is all you need Deposit on signing Convert the accepted proposal to an invoice, request a deposit on it, and bill the balance later. Request Deposit 40% Balance billed later live Questions The proposal system, answered What is the proposal system? It is the part of Invoice Crowd where you create, brand and send proposals with pricing tables and an online signature, starting from more than 70 templates or from a Create with AI draft. Everything happens in the account you already invoice from, so the document, the approval and the invoice that follows it all live in one place. Can Invoice Crowd write a proposal with AI? Yes. Invoice Crowd's Create with AI is an AI proposal generator built into the proposal builder. Choose Create with AI on the Proposals page or when you start a New Proposal, pick the customer and the document type, describe the work, choose a design or Let AI Choose, and add saved items or your own prices. The AI writes the words, pricing rows and terms into the design and saves an unsent draft, usually in under a minute, ready for you to review. It is included on paid plans, which come with 100 AI credits every month. How many AI credits does Create with AI use? A Create with AI proposal usually uses 5 to 15 AI credits, and the price is shown on the Create Proposal button before the build starts. Suggest with AI for your brand settings uses 1 credit. Paid monthly and yearly plans include 100 AI credits each calendar month, used first and reset at the start of each month, and extra credits bought in Billing and Plan never expire. How do I start a proposal? Open Proposals and choose New Proposal. Pick a design from the Template Gallery or My Templates, choose Start Blank, or choose Create with AI to have the first draft written from a short brief. Then edit the sections that need to say something specific about this client, add your pricing, and send it. How many templates are included? More than 70. Invoice Crowd's Template Gallery sorts them into eight categories: Agreements, Design, Software, Marketing, Events, Services, Contracts and Presentation. They include proposals such as the Web Design Proposal, Marketing Strategy Proposal and Wedding & Event Photography Proposal, agreements such as the Master Services Agreement and Confidentiality Agreement (NDA), quotes such as the Construction Bid and Catering Quote, and landscape decks such as the Pitch Deck and Company Profile Deck. Preview opens any design full size in a new tab, and you can change any of it and save your version as a template of your own. Can I customize how a proposal looks? Yes. Add your logo, set the colors and fonts, and rearrange the content until the document is laid out the way you present. You can also embed media and links inside a section, so the proposal can show work rather than only describe it. What happens once a client approves? You are notified, and the accepted proposal can be converted into an invoice in a few clicks. The pricing carries across unchanged, so the amount you bill is the amount the client agreed to. An approved proposal is final; to change it afterwards, duplicate it as a new version. When several client contacts sign through Approvals & Signing, the proposal is approved once every signer has signed. Is my proposal data secure? Proposals sit inside your account behind your own login, and the document a client opens is sent over an encrypted connection. Switch on Enable OTP Verification and the client confirms a one-time code sent to their email before signing. Team members see only what their role allows, so each proposal stays with the people who need it. Can I send a proposal to several people, or schedule it? Yes. Each recipient gets a personal link, and Invoice Crowd records who opened it and who decided. Only the people in the To line can approve or decline; Cc and Bcc recipients can view it. Use Send Later to pick a date and a time window for the email, and you get a notification when it goes out. What does the Send check look for? Invoice Crowd's Send check runs when you choose Send and lists what your client would notice: merge tags that would show blank because a customer or business detail is missing, the design's sample logo, example text left from the template, fixed dates that have already passed, an expired proposal, and pricing tables with no items, no prices or an unnamed item. Fix each one in place or choose Send Anyway. The check is included on every plan, and the send step also sets the proposal's expiry date. Can several people sign one proposal? Yes. Open the Approvals & Signing tab in the proposal editor to add up to 12 client contacts as Signer or Viewer, assign each field and signature box to one signer, and choose Sign in the listed order or Everyone can sign. You can also name reviewers who approve the exact version before it is sent, and lock the clauses that must stay unchanged. The proposal is approved once every signer has signed. Approvals & Signing is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Can the client fill in details on the proposal? Yes. Add Text Field, Date, Radio Buttons, Checkbox or Dropdown fields for the client to complete before approving, mark the ones that must be answered as required, and use Conditional Logic to show a field only when it applies. Can I collect client details before I write the proposal? Yes. Choose Request client details from a proposal template or an unsent proposal, pick the questions you need, and share the form's link with your client. Their answers come back for your review, and you can fill the proposal from them or choose Complete draft with AI. Client details forms are included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial, and Notification Settings can email you when new answers arrive. Can clients choose a package or add optional extras? Yes. Set a pricing table's Client pricing choices to Choose a package and the client picks one package, with one marked as the Recommended package, or to Services and add-ons, where each line is required unless you mark it as an Optional service or add-on. The client makes the choice on the proposal page, the total updates as they go, and only the selected items count toward the total they approve. Can I import a proposal I already have? Yes. Choose Import original on the Proposals page and upload one PDF, DOCX or PPTX file of up to 20 MB. Invoice Crowd keeps it as a private original you can download at any time, and the text, headings and simple tables of a Word or PowerPoint file become a new editable proposal after you compare it with the original. Proposal import is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. How many proposals can I create? The free plan includes 3 proposals in total. SOLO, PRO and TEAM include 5, 15 and 50 new proposals each calendar month, on monthly or yearly billing and during the free trial, and BUSINESS is unlimited. The allowance counts proposals created, not emails sent. Put a better proposal in front of the next client Start from a template or a Create with AI draft, make it look like your business, and let the approval turn straight into the invoice you were going to write anyway. Compare plans 70+ templates ready to edit 30-day free trial No credit card to start --- ## Create Estimates URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/create-estimate/ Create professional estimates from saved items with your tax and discount rates. Clients approve and sign online, then you invoice in one click. Write an estimate the client can price and approve Invoice Crowd lets you create an estimate from your saved items, with your own tax and discount rates and an expiry date, that the client can adjust, approve and sign online. Then turn the approved version into an invoice. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Create estimate Templates in your branding Client-removable items and quantities One click to an invoice pop What is inside From the first quote to the accepted one Everything on an estimate is meant to be settled before the work starts: what is included, what it costs, what the client wants changed and what happens once they say yes. Writing it Most of the content is already saved Estimate templates in your branding Adjust the colors and fonts, add your logo and set its size, and change the layout in the template builder until the estimate looks like the rest of your business. Choose it as the estimate design in Business Settings → Design and it is used for every new estimate. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans. Colors, logo and layout are yours Set once, applied to every estimate The client sees the same document you do Invoice template builder A catalog of items and services Work you quote often is stored as an item with its description and price, ready to drop into the next estimate. Quoting a familiar job becomes picking lines from a list rather than rewriting the same paragraph for the fourth time this month. Items saved with description and price Shared with your invoices Edit a line without changing the saved item Pricing and choices The client can shape the number Flexible tax and discount options Set the tax rates that apply to the work and the discount you are prepared to offer, on one line or across the estimate. Pricing that would otherwise be negotiated over email is stated on the document, so what the client approves is already the final figure. Tax rates you define yourself Discounts per line or on the total Totals recalculate as you edit Client-removable items and adjustable quantities Switch on Remove Items and the client can take out the lines they do not need before signing. Switch on Customize Quantity and they can set the quantity on each line, which suits work priced per hour, per unit or per seat. The total moves with the choices they make. Lines the client can keep or remove Quantities the client can edit Signed off with their choices recorded Client-removable line items After you send it You find out where it stands See when an estimate is read The estimate records when the client opened the email and when they opened the estimate itself, and you are notified when it is viewed. So you can follow up at exactly the right moment. Email and estimate opens recorded Notified when the estimate is viewed Follow up with something to go on The client portal One click from approved to invoiced An approved estimate becomes an invoice without retyping. The lines the client kept and any quantity they changed carry across, so what you bill is exactly what was agreed rather than the version you first sent. If you requested a deposit, the client can accept and pay it in one step. The estimate stays on file beside the invoice it produced. The accepted lines carry over Client changes come with them The original estimate is kept Estimate to invoice Also included More of what an estimate carries The details that decide whether a quote is approved as sent or comes back with three questions attached. Multiple currencies Quote an overseas client in their currency while your own totals stay in the base currency. Customer currency GBP Estimate total £6,900.00 Exchange Rate 1.3400 Your reports $9,246.00 bal Client-set quantities Let the client raise or lower the quantity on a line before they accept the estimate. Licences × 5 $2,250.00 Client set × 3 −$900.00 cn Other lines $7,625.00 Total $8,975.00 Accept and sign online The client approves and signs the estimate from the link you sent, with no printing involved. EST-01048 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Sent pri Viewed warn Approved ok Approve & Sign in the browser Client portal Clients sign in to see every estimate you have sent them and what happened to each one. KA #14b8a6 LA #eab308 Estimates 3 on file Invoices 8 on file Recurring 1 active Changes before approval Where you allow it, a client adjusts quantities or removes lines on the estimate itself before approving, instead of starting an email thread. EST-01047 Quantity changed By email New version Scope agreed before signing Logo, colors, layout Make the fonts, colors, shapes and layout your own, as well as the logo. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans. Template 1 Template 2 #10b981 Template 3 #f97316 Template 4 #3b82f6 Template 5 #ec4899 Template 6 Template 7 #8b5cf6 Template 8 #2b2c40 Your logo on every one Quotes of any size A short task list and a full project breakdown are handled by the same estimate screen. Discovery workshop $1,200.00 Website design $6,400.00 Launch copy × 12 $3,000.00 $10,600.00 Saved item catalog Items you quote often are kept with their price and description, ready for the next estimate. Web Website design · Service Website care plan · Service $900.00 Web copy · Service $250.00 Estimate history Every estimate stays in the account with its current status, from draft and sent to viewed and approved. EST-01046 Lumen Architects Draft info Status kept on the estimate Proposals for bigger jobs When a quote needs pages of context around it, a proposal carries the pricing in its own pricing table. Proposal Pricing Table Signed Invoice INV-2043 70+ proposal templates Straight to billing An invoice raised from an estimate behaves like any other, including reminders and late fees. Reminder Option On Due Date Late Fees 1.5% Payment Stub On What you quoted Estimates sit alongside your invoices, so quoted work and billed work are read from one account. $38,420 12 sent $27,960 8 signed up Invoiced $24,810 7 invoices live Questions Creating estimates, answered How much of the estimate template can I change? Colors, fonts, spacing, shapes, your logo and its size, the table columns, the standard labels and the document language. It applies to what the client opens as well as the PDF they keep, and the design you set for estimates in Business Settings → Design is used for every new estimate. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. How many items can an estimate hold? As many as the job needs. A three-line quote and a project broken into dozens of deliverables use the same screen, and long estimates stay readable because each line carries its own description, quantity and price. How does a client respond to an estimate? Online, in a few clicks. The client opens it from the link or the portal, changes quantities or removes lines where you allow it, then approves it with a signature or declines it with an optional reason. How do I turn an approved estimate into an invoice? One click. The accepted lines, the client-removable items the client kept and any quantity they changed all carry over, and the invoice is ready to send. The original estimate stays on file so you can see exactly what was agreed. Can a client change what they are buying? Yes, within the limits you set. Switch on Remove Items and the client can remove lines; switch on Customize Quantity and they can adjust quantities themselves. What comes back approved is what they actually want, which means fewer revisions for you. Can I send an estimate in another currency? Yes. Choose the currency the client works in and the estimate is priced in it from the start, so the figure they approve is the figure they will pay. Your own reporting still totals in the base currency of the business. Send an estimate that answers the questions first A clear estimate states what is included, what the client can remove and what it costs. Build one from your saved items and let the client approve it online. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Estimates and invoices in one account --- ## Convert Estimates to Invoices URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/convert-to-invoice/ Convert an approved estimate to an invoice in one click, or automatically on approval, with every line, quantity, tax and total carried across. Approved estimates become invoices, by hand or on their own Invoice Crowd turns an approved estimate into an invoice with every line, tax and client change already in place. Convert it yourself when you want to check it first, or let the invoice be raised the moment a client accepts, with a deposit to pay if you asked for one. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Convert to Invoice Manual or automatic Every detail carries across Editable after converting pop Choose how you convert Two routes to the same invoice Both routes produce the same document. The difference is whether you want a moment to look the invoice over before it goes out, or would rather the billing start itself. Manual or automated Pick the one your workflow needs Manual conversion, on your timing The approval comes in, you open the estimate and convert it when you are ready. Everything agreed is already on the invoice, so this is a review rather than a rebuild, which suits work that needs a final check or a payment term added before anything is sent. Convert on the day the work actually starts Adjust dates or terms before sending A review, not a rebuild Automated conversion on approval Turn on automatic conversion and the invoice is created the moment the client approves. For work that starts the day it is agreed, the bill goes out as soon as the client says yes. Approval is the only trigger needed Billing starts on its own Switch it off again whenever you want What comes across Nothing retyped Every line arrives intact Items, quantities, rates, taxes, discounts and custom fields move onto the invoice as they were approved. If the client removed a line or changed a quantity before signing, the invoice reflects the version they agreed to rather than the one you originally sent. Descriptions, quantities and rates line for line Client edits carried across The billed total matches the approved total Client-removable items on estimates Still editable once converted A converted invoice is an ordinary invoice. Add a purchase order number, move a date, split the amount into a deposit and a balance, or attach a note before you send it. Conversion gives you a ready-made starting point. Edit any field after the conversion Its own number, issue date and due date Payment methods attached before sending Deposits and part payments Keeping billing moving Bill the moment they say yes From approval to invoice, without delay Billing straight from the approved document gets the invoice out sooner and keeps the figures consistent, because the invoice is built from exactly what was agreed. Bill on the day approval arrives One number quoted, agreed and billed Accurate figures every time Know the moment it happens When the client approves, you get a notification and an email. With automatic conversion on, the invoice is created from that estimate and emailed to the client straight away, then appears in your invoice list like any other, ready to track and follow through to payment. Notified as soon as the estimate is approved The invoice sits with the rest of your billing Tracked to payment like any other invoice Getting paid Also included What sits either side of the conversion Conversion is one step in a longer line. These are the parts of the account the document passes through before and after it. Switch anytime Move between manual and automatic conversion whenever your workflow changes. Auto Convert to Invoice On Auto Redirect to Invoice Off Enable OTP Included as standard Manual and automatic conversion are both included in your subscription. Manual conversion Included Per document fee None Extra cost $0.00 bal The estimate stays The approved estimate remains on record next to the invoice it produced. EST-01048 Approved Once INV-2041 Linked The estimate stays on file Client quantities Quantity changes a client made before signing arrive on the invoice exactly as agreed. Launch copy × 5 $1,250.00 Client set × 3 −$500.00 cn Brand identity system $4,800.00 Invoice total $5,550.00 Recurring billing For work that repeats, put the invoice on a schedule instead of converting one each time. Recurring billing is included on paid plans. SUB-00128 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $4,500.00 Monthly pri Sent info Paid ok On a schedule instead Payment gateways Send the converted invoice with your online payment options ready for the client. PayPal #3b82f6 Stripe #8b5cf6 Razorpay Square #2b2c40 Braintree #14b8a6 Authorize.net GoCardless #eab308 Airwallex #f97316 15 payment gateways Reminders and late fees A converted invoice takes your business's late-fee and reminder defaults, like any invoice you raise by hand. Reminder Option 3 Days Before Late Fees 1.5% Hide Overdue Customer portal Clients see the estimate they approved and the invoice that followed it in one place. Portal Both listed Proposals as well For bigger pitches, send a proposal with e-signature and 70+ templates. Proposal Pricing Table Approve E-signature Invoice INV-2043 70+ proposal templates Into the books A converted invoice posts to the same accounts as one you raised by hand. INV-2041 · posted 09/28 $12,450.00 Dr Accounts Receivable Cr Sales Journal balanced Dr = Cr Multiple currencies The currency you quoted in is the currency the invoice is raised in. Estimate £6,900.00 Converted invoice Currency GBP Same currency Invoice templates The new invoice keeps the estimate's design and language, retitled as an invoice. Change it on the Select Template tab if you need to. Template 1 Template 2 #10b981 Template 3 Template 4 Template 5 #ec4899 Template 6 Template 7 Template 8 The estimate's design live Questions Converting estimates, answered Is automatic conversion included in my plan? Yes. Manual and automatic conversion are both part of your Invoice Crowd subscription, whichever plan you are on, with no charge per document converted. Can I switch between manual and automatic? Yes, whenever it suits you. Some businesses convert by hand while jobs are few and turn the automatic route on later; others run automatic conversion for retained clients and manual for one-off work. Can I edit the invoice after converting an estimate? Yes. Once it exists it behaves like any other invoice, so you can change a date, add a purchase order number, adjust a line, attach payment methods or split it into a deposit and a balance before it goes out. How will I know when an estimate converts on its own? You are notified and emailed when the client approves the estimate. With automatic conversion on, the new invoice is created at that moment, emailed to the client and listed in your invoices. What if the client changed the estimate before approving it? Their version is the one that gets billed. Lines they removed are left off, quantities they adjusted arrive as they set them, and the taxes and discounts recalculate on those figures, so the invoice total matches what they approved. What happens to the estimate once it becomes an invoice? It stays on record as the agreed version of the deal, while the invoice carries on with its own number and due date. Editing the invoice later leaves what the client approved untouched. Can a client pay a deposit when they accept an estimate? Yes. Use Request Deposit on the estimate, and the client sees Accept and Pay with the deposit amount, or Accept, Pay Later. Accepting converts the estimate into an invoice and, if they chose to pay, takes them straight to the deposit payment. The estimate then reads Accepted and Invoiced with the new invoice number. Close the gap between approval and payment Convert an approved estimate when it suits you, or let the invoice raise itself the moment a client accepts. Either way, nothing is typed twice. Compare plans 30-day free trial No card needed to start Both conversion routes included --- ## Create Invoices URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/create-invoice/ Create and send professional invoices with your branding, tax rates and currency. Add online payments, reminders and late fees, then track each one. Create invoices that carry your brand and your tax rules Invoice Crowd creates invoices in your template and branding, in the client's currency, with your tax rates and GST fields where they apply. Switch on reminders, late fees, recurring schedules and online payments whenever you need them. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Create invoice Your template, your branding Multi-currency and GST ready Late fees and reminders built in pop What is inside From a blank invoice to a paid one The invoice is the document your client judges you on. Invoice Crowd gives you control over how it looks, how it is priced and how payment is followed up. The document itself Built once, reused every time Detailed invoices in a few minutes The invoice generator handles the detail you would otherwise retype: line items pulled from your saved list, more than one tax rate on a line or across the whole invoice, and a discount applied where you need it. What the client receives is itemized enough to approve without a follow-up email. Line items saved and reused Several taxes per line or per invoice Discounts applied at the point of billing Templates that look like your business Pick one of eight designs, change its fonts, colors, shapes, logo size and column names in the template builder, and rename the labels so they match the words your industry uses. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans. The result is a document a client recognizes as yours before they read the total. Fonts, colors and layout in the builder The main labels can be renamed The same look on screen and in the PDF Invoice template builder Send yourself a test first Before the real send, the account owner can choose Send a Test to Yourself in the send window. The draft arrives in your own inbox with a PDF marked TEST - NOT ISSUED, so you can check the email and the layout exactly as your client will see them, while the invoice stays a draft with your customer's recipients, message and attachments kept for the real send. Delivered to your own email PDF marked TEST - NOT ISSUED The draft stays ready for the real send Currency and tax Set per client or per invoice Invoice in the currency the client uses Bill an overseas client in their own currency without keeping a second set of books. The invoice goes out in the money they actually pay with, while your reporting still totals in the base currency you run the business on, so the month adds up either way. The client sees their own currency Reporting converts to your base currency One set of books GST-ready invoices with HSN and SAC codes For businesses filing GST, each line can carry its HSN or SAC number and the rate that applies to that service. The tax is calculated on the invoice rather than in a spreadsheet afterwards, and the totals feed the GST filing report when the return is due. HSN and SAC numbers per line GST rates you define yourself Figures collected for the filing report GST filing report When payment is late The chasing runs itself Late fees and automatic reminders Switch on a late fee as a fixed amount or a percentage, and if the invoice is still unpaid one fee is added the day after the due date, with a notice on the invoice beforehand. Reminder emails go out on the schedule you choose, so every overdue invoice is followed up on time. Fixed amount or percentage Reminders before and after the due date Follow-ups sent for you How late fees are set Recurring invoices for regular clients Bill retainers and monthly services automatically. Set the invoice up once with its schedule and each cycle is generated for you, as a draft to check or sent straight to the client. Recurring invoices are included on paid plans. Manual or automatic cycles Built from an invoice you already send Same items and terms every cycle Recurring invoicing Every status, explained on hover Hover a status on the Invoices list for a one-line meaning and a timeline from Created to Sent, Viewed and Paid. The card shows who the invoice was sent to, whether the email was opened, the amount paid and the balance due, and every due date carries a short note, from In 5 Days to Due Today and 3 Days Overdue, so you know which invoice to follow up first. Created, Sent, Viewed and Paid on one timeline Due notes under every due date The same timeline at the top of each sent invoice Also included The rest of the invoice screen Smaller settings that decide whether an invoice takes two minutes or twenty, and whether the money arrives when it should. Custom fields Add the fields a particular client or project needs, such as a PO number or a job reference, above or below the items. PO number PO-7781 Project code HV-2026 Delivery date 10/14/2026 15 payment gateways Clients pay by the method they already use, from PayPal and Stripe to Razorpay and Square. PayPal #3b82f6 Stripe #8b5cf6 Razorpay Square #2b2c40 Braintree #14b8a6 Authorize.net #6366f1 GoCardless #eab308 Airwallex #f97316 Saved items Enter a product or service once and pick it from the list on every invoice after that. Web Website design · Service $6,400.00 Website care plan · Service $900.00 Webcam · Inventory product $189.00 More than one tax Apply several tax rates to a single line or across the whole invoice when the job needs it. Subtotal $11,200.00 Sales Tax 8.5% +$952.00 in City Tax 1.5% +$168.00 Total $12,320.00 bal Discounts and offers Give a promotion or a loyalty rate from the invoice screen instead of editing the line price. Brand identity system $4,800.00 Loyalty discount 10% −$480.00 cn Website design $10,720.00 Viewed and paid alerts See when an invoice has been opened and when it has been paid, without asking the client. INV-2041 HV Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Sent pri Viewed warn Paid ok Invoice viewed, Payment received Scheduled sends Write an invoice today and have it go out on the date you agreed with the client. Send Later Custom date 10/01/2026 Schedule Send Queued Or first or last day of the month Multiple languages Set a design's document language and the invoice headings and column names print in the language the client reads, in the app and in the PDF. English French German Spanish #ec4899 Portuguese Japanese #10b981 Russian Korean 8 document languages Attached documents Send the contract, work order or timesheet with the invoice so approval moves quickly. Signed agreement.pdf 214 KB Timesheet.xlsx 36 KB Work order.pdf 120 KB Dynamic labels The invoice title and the main labels, such as Bill To and Due Date, can be renamed to match how you talk to clients. Bill To Billed to Due Date Payment due Invoice Total Amount Invoice Tax Invoice Money in sooner Clients pay online from the invoice link, and the payment is recorded against the invoice automatically. Pay Using Stripe Client Recorded Straight to your Stripe account Bill back expenses Add the costs you carried on a job as lines on the invoice, so it covers work done and money spent. Launch copy $1,250.00 Print costs $320.00 Courier $45.00 $1,615.00 live Questions Creating invoices, answered Does Invoice Crowd support recurring invoicing? Yes. A recurring invoice runs on the schedule you set, and you choose whether each cycle is sent automatically or created as a draft for you to check first. Weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly and custom cycles are all handled the same way. Recurring invoices are included on paid plans. How does the late fee charge work? Switch on Late Fees in the invoice's Options, choose Flat or Percentage (%), and enter the amount; your business default fills this in on new invoices. If the sent invoice is still unpaid after its due date, one fee line is added the next day, and a percentage is worked out on the amount still owed. Before that, the invoice and PDF show a notice that a late fee applies after the due date. You can waive an unpaid fee on any invoice, and Indian businesses charge GST on it. Can I customize how my invoices look? Yes. Choose one of eight designs and change its fonts, colors, shapes, logo size and table columns in the template builder, rename the standard labels, and add custom fields for details a particular client needs. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Can I invoice a client in their own currency? Yes. Pick the currency on the invoice and the client sees the amount in the money they pay with. Your own reporting converts back to the base currency of the business, so the month adds up in one place. Does Invoice Crowd handle GST? Yes. Invoices can carry HSN or SAC numbers and the GST rates you define, the tax is calculated as you build the invoice, and the GST filing report collects the figures when the return is due. How do clients pay an invoice? Clients open the invoice link and pay through any gateway you switched on for it, such as PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay or Square, in full or in the partial or split amounts you allow. The payment is recorded against the invoice once the provider confirms it, and you record cash, cheque or bank transfers yourself with Record Payment. Can I send a test invoice to myself first? Yes. In the send window, the account owner can choose Send a Test to Yourself. Invoice Crowd emails the draft to your own address with a PDF marked TEST - NOT ISSUED and keeps your customer's recipients, message and attachments ready for the real send. The invoice stays a draft and your books stay exactly as they are. How do I see where an invoice stands? Hover its status on the Invoices list. A card explains the status in one line and shows a timeline from Created to Sent, Viewed and Paid, with who it was sent to, whether the email was opened, customer views, the amount paid and the balance due. Under each due date a short note counts down, from In 5 Days to Due Today and 3 Days Overdue, and an open invoice shows the same timeline at the top. Raise your first invoice today Set up the template, the tax rates and the reminder schedule once, and every invoice after that is a few lines of typing. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Cancel whenever you want --- ## Invoice Template Builder URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/invoice-template-builder/ Customize Invoice Crowd's invoice designs: fonts, colors, shapes, logo size, table columns and labels in eight languages, the same on screen and in a PDF. Features Design your own invoice template, down to the logo size and column names The Invoice Crowd template builder opens any of the eight provided designs on an editable page. Build the page from sections and modules, click any text, header cell or row to style it, add shapes and images, resize your logo, and print the standard labels in any of eight languages. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Invoice Template Builder 8 provided designs to start from Same design on screen and in the PDF Existing invoices keep their design pop What is inside A real editor for the document your client pays from Open a design from Invoice Templates and edit it where it sits: click a heading to style it, drag a shape to move it, and preview the PDF before you save. Invoice data and totals stay connected while you work. Start from a design The gallery, then the canvas Open a provided design or one you saved Invoice Templates in the main menu lists every design you can use. Provided designs carry a Provided badge and a Customize action; designs you have saved show Saved design and Edit. Search, filter by All Templates, Provided or Custom Templates, sort by recent or by name, and preview any design before you open it. Grid or list view Preview before you open it Archive a design without touching old invoices Click anything on the page to edit it The builder shows the design filled with five sample lines so you can judge the layout. Click any text, header cell or row to open its Design controls, or click the background artwork to select that shape. Layers lists the invoice structure and the artwork for anything that overlaps, and Undo, Redo and Reset all changes cover every edit. Five sample lines to judge the layout Layers for overlapping artwork Undo, Redo and Reset all changes Build the page from modules Every design opens as sections of modules you can add, move and restyle: Logo, Document Title, Document Details, Date Strip, Bill To, Bill From, Ship To, Items Table, Totals, Terms & Conditions, Notes and Signature, plus Text, Image, Divider and Spacer. Place up to four modules side by side as Columns or Spread, or stack them. Search Modules finds any of them in Add Elements, and New Template on Invoice Templates starts a design of your own. Up to four modules side by side In Use and Required badges in Add Elements Items and totals always stay connected Make it yours Type, color, shape and logo Fonts, colors and spacing The Design tab styles the element you selected: Font family (the theme default or Lato, Montserrat, Nunito Sans, Open Sans, Oswald, Poppins, PT Sans, Raleway, Roboto or Source Sans 3), size, weight, line height, letter spacing and capitalization, plus text color, background, margin and padding, and borders. The table header has its own bottom margin for the gap above the first item. Ten font families Margin and padding per element Capitalization options Shapes, images and your logo Decorate the page behind its content with a square, rectangle, circle, ellipse, triangle, diamond, pentagon, hexagon, star, line, blob or background image. Set each one's fill, opacity, rotation, size and position, send it to the front or back, round its corners, or edit the blob's points. Select your logo and drag a handle, or set Logo size, and its proportions stay unchanged. Opacity carries into the PDF Images from your media library Logo uploaded once in Business Profile Style a header cell, a row or every other row Click the item table header to style the whole row, or click again to pick single header cells with their own Cell Background and Cell Text; two-color headers get separate Left Columns and Right Columns backgrounds. Item Rows sets Row Background, Alternate Row Colors, Row Dividers and Row Spacing. If a change leaves text hard to read, a Low Contrast note offers Use White Text or Use Dark Text in one click. Colors for each header cell Alternate Row Colors for long item lists Low Contrast fixes in one click Words, columns and language Your content stays as you typed it Labels, default text and eight languages Labels & Language lets you rename the standard captions, grouped as Document & billing, Totals & delivery, and Notes & signatures. Choose a Document language and Apply labels to print the headings and standard column names in English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Japanese, Russian or Korean. Text you type and custom fields stay as entered, so save one design for each language you invoice in. Eight document languages Japanese and Korean print in the PDF Notes and payment instructions from business defaults or fixed text Localization Table columns, custom fields and extra content Table Columns lets you rename, reorder, add and remove columns around the core Item, Quantity, Rate and Amount. In Add Elements, choose one of the four areas and Add custom field opens the same picker you use on an invoice. Text, Image, Divider and Spacer modules add references, a stamp, a line or extra space wherever the layout needs it. Columns renamed and reordered Custom fields placed above or below the items Text, Image, Divider and Spacer modules Custom fields Amount In Words, payment details and a pay-online QR Amount In Words spells out the invoice total in the document language and currency, in lakh and crore for Indian rupees. Payment Details prints the bank transfer details you keep in Payment Methods, and Pay Online QR prints a code, captioned Scan to Pay, that opens the invoice's payment page whenever a balance is due and an online payment method is switched on. Amount In Words in the document language Bank details from Payment Methods Scan to Pay on invoices with a balance due Put it to work Defaults for every document Preview the PDF, then save Preview PDF downloads the design exactly as it will print, and the PDF attached to your invoice emails prints the same way as Download. Saving stores a new version of the design, and every invoice already created keeps the design it was made with. The account owner can switch on Use for new invoices to make the saved design the default for the current business. Preview PDF before saving Past invoices keep their design One switch for the invoice default A default for each document type Business Settings → Design sets the designs new documents use: Use one design for all documents, or Choose by document type for invoices, estimates, credit notes, purchase orders, bills, vendor credits, payment links, recurring invoices and subscriptions. Each business profile keeps its own choices, and delivery notes use their invoice's design. Nine document types Set per business profile Edit in Builder from the same screen Multiple businesses Built in The details of the template builder What you can change, what stays protected, and who can save it. Eight provided designs Template 1 to Template 8, each with its own colors, fonts and background artwork, and every part of it editable. Template 1 #4941e3 Template 2 #16a34a Template 3 #ef4b24 Template 4 #0ea5e9 Template 5 #ef3d10 Template 6 #16b980 Template 7 #9333ea Template 8 #2b2c40 Your logo on every one Included on paid plans The Free plan includes two invoice templates. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. #8a8d9f Free Two invoice templates Preview 30-day free trial Counts as paid Save Monthly or yearly Paid plans Past invoices stay as sent Saving a new version or archiving a design never changes an invoice that was already created with it. INV-2034 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $4,800.00 Created pri New design saved info Unchanged ok Keeps the design it was made with Every document type Designs work for invoices, estimates, credit notes, purchase orders, bills, vendor credits, payment links and recurring invoices. Invoice Estimate Credit Note Purchase Order Bill Vendor Credit Payment Link Recurring One builder, every type Same look in the PDF Preview, Download and the PDF attached to your emails print from one design at the editor's own scale, including shape opacity and background color. Canvas Preview PDF Download PDF Same design Shape opacity and colors carry over Japanese and Korean PDFs Documents in Japanese or Korean print with a font that carries their characters, so every character prints clearly. Japanese Korean French German Spanish Portuguese Russian English 8 document languages Start from a blank page New Template opens an Untitled Design with the standard sections, ready to shape with modules and save as your own. New Template Invoice Templates Add modules Search Modules… Save template Your own design Nothing is stored until you save Totals stay connected Sections move by their handles within the document flow. Items and totals appear exactly once and stay linked to the invoice. Header Moves Items Once Totals Linked Change design on a document Select Template → Change design restyles an invoice and keeps its entered values, removed fields, columns and financial settings. INV-2041 Change design Values, columns and totals kept Team permissions The Templates permission decides who can edit, create and archive designs, and the account owner sets the default for new invoices. AM PN ML Alex Morgan · Owner Default Priya Nair · Templates Edit Marcus Lee · Sales View The page around the invoice The builder links to Customer Page settings for the background customers see around your document. Copy Link Copied Customer Page Background: Style 2 Your brand, front and center On a monthly or yearly paid plan, Hide Invoice Crowd branding removes our branding from your customer document pages. Branding on Trial or lifetime Can hide in live Questions The invoice template builder, answered Can I design my own invoice template in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Open Invoice Templates, choose a provided design and select Customize, or open one of your saved designs with Edit. The builder lets you change fonts, colors, spacing and borders, add shapes and images, resize your logo, rename and reorder the table columns, and rename the standard labels. Preview the PDF, then save the design for new invoices. Which plans include the template builder? Every plan lets you open and preview a design in the builder, and the Free plan includes two invoice templates. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial, so you can design and save templates while you try Invoice Crowd. Will editing a template change invoices I already sent? Your sent invoices stay exactly as they were. Saving stores a new version of the design, and every invoice keeps the design it was created with. Archiving a design asks you to choose replacements for any defaults that use it. Can estimates and credit notes use a different design from invoices? Yes. In Business Settings → Design, choose Choose by document type and pick a design for each of invoices, estimates, credit notes, purchase orders, bills, vendor credits, payment links, recurring invoices and subscriptions. Any type without its own choice can use the invoice design. Each business profile keeps its own settings. Can I send invoices in another language? Yes. In Labels & Language, set the Document language and select Apply labels. The headings, standard captions and column names then print in English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Japanese, Russian or Korean, in the app and in the PDF. Item descriptions, notes and custom fields stay as you typed them, so save a separate design for each language. How do I change the size of my logo on the invoice? Select the logo in the builder and drag its right, bottom or corner handle, or set Logo size in the Design tab. Arrow keys make small adjustments and the proportions stay unchanged. You upload or replace the logo itself in your Business Profile, and Change business logo opens it from the builder. Can I rearrange the totals and the item table? Yes. Reorder the invoice's sections, place up to four modules side by side and restyle every one of them, while the items and totals stay connected to the invoice's figures. The table always includes the core Item, Quantity, Rate and Amount columns, with Amount as the last. Can I show the amount in words on an invoice? Yes. In the template builder, add the Amount In Words module from Add Elements and Invoice Crowd spells out the invoice total in the document's language and currency, in lakh and crore for Indian rupees. Save the design, and every new invoice that uses it prints the amount in words on the customer page and in the PDF. Does the invoice PDF look exactly like the template editor? Yes. Every design prints at the editor's own scale, so the PDF you download and the PDF attached to your invoice emails show the same fonts, text sizes, shapes and line wrapping you see in the builder. Preview PDF lets you check the result before you save. Can I remove Invoice Crowd branding from what my customers see? Yes, on a monthly or yearly paid plan. Turn on Hide Invoice Crowd branding in Business Profile → Customer Page to remove our branding from your customer document pages, including invoice and estimate previews. Send invoices that look like your business Pick one of the eight designs, make it yours in the builder, preview the PDF and set it as the default for new invoices. Compare plans No card required to start Cancel anytime --- ## Custom Fields URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/custom-fields/ Add PO numbers, project codes and other custom fields to invoices and estimates. Place them above or below the items and fill values in from your records. Features Custom fields for the details your documents need Add a PO number, a project code, a delivery date or your client's tax registration to invoices, estimates and purchase documents. Save a field once, place it above or below the items, and let Invoice Crowd fill some values in from your business, customer or vendor records. Custom fields are included on every plan, with Link fields on paid plans. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Custom Fields Five field types Four positions on the page Values filled in from your records pop What is inside Save a field once, use it on every document A custom field is a label and a value printed on the document, such as PO number: PO-7781. You keep a library of saved fields, add them to a document where they belong, and each document keeps its own final values. Create a field Once, then reuse it A library of reusable fields Add fields in Business Profile → Custom fields with Add Custom Field, or select New in the picker while you edit a document. Give each one a Field Title and a Type (Text, Date, Number, Long text or Link), an optional default value, and choose where it is saved: Saved for this business, or All businesses in this account. Text, date, number, long text and link Long text up to 10,000 characters Web, email and phone links Give a Text field a Value source instead of a typed default, and it fills in from your Business Profile, the customer or the vendor: names, contact name, street, city, state, ZIP code, country, Tax Registration, email, phone, mobile or fax. Automatic values are filled when the document is created and saved when it is finalized, so issued invoices always keep their original details. Customer values on sales documents Vendor values on bills, purchase orders and vendor credits Empty values left for you to fill Add it to a document Above or below the items Four places on the page Each field sits in one of four areas: Above items · left, Above items · right, Below items · left or Below items · right. Turn on Custom-field editing controls in the document's Options and an Add Custom Field button appears in each area. The picker lists your saved fields with a search; click one to add it, or use Edit field and Archive field to manage the library. Shown on the customer page and the PDF Edit or remove a field on one document only Date fields use the date picker Creating invoices Hide fields on one document Hide custom fields on this document keeps the values saved but leaves them off the customer page and the PDF. To drop a single field, remove it from that document; other documents and the saved field stay as they are. Values remain saved Hidden from the customer page and PDF Other documents unchanged Build them into your design Template builder and history Place fields in a template In the template builder, open Add Elements, choose one of the four areas and select Add custom field to pick from the same library. Drag a field between areas, or choose Hide in this design for the current business. New invoices made with that design start with its fields, and you enter the document values when you create the invoice. Placement belongs to the design Saved fields and defaults stay in Business Settings Each invoice keeps its own final values Invoice template builder History that stays put Archiving a field removes it from the picker, but documents that already use it keep their label and value. Editing a saved field affects its future uses only. When an approved estimate becomes an invoice, its custom fields are copied across with the lines. Archive, never erase Issued documents keep their values Carried from estimate to invoice Convert to invoice Built in The details of custom fields Field types, where they appear, what fills them in and which plan you need. Text, Date and Number Short references, dates from the date picker and numbers validated as you save. PO number PO-7781 Project code HV-2026 Delivery date 10/14/2026 Long text Room for site instructions, a scope note or delivery terms, up to 10,000 characters. #4941e3 Site instructions 812 chars #16a34a Delivery terms 430 chars #ef4b24 Scope note 1,250 chars Link fields on paid plans Add clickable links, such as a project brief, to your documents. Link fields are included on paid plans. Field type Link Accepts Web, email, phone Monthly or yearly Link fields in Sales and purchase documents Invoices, recurring invoices, estimates, credit notes, payment links, purchase orders, bills and vendor credits. Invoice Recurring Estimate Credit Note #0ea5e9 Payment Link #9333ea Purchase Order #ef3d10 Bill #16b980 Vendor Credit #2b2c40 8 document types On the PDF and customer page Every field prints in its area on the PDF and shows on the page your customer opens from the link. Editor Customer page Shown PDF Printed Each field prints in its area Tax registration auto-fill Point a field at the customer's or vendor's Tax Registration and it fills in from their record. Tax Customer · Tax Registration Auto Vendor · Tax Registration Business · Tax Registration Business or account scope Save a field for one business profile or for all businesses in the account. Saved for this business All businesses Cost centre Searchable library The picker groups fields saved in your account and saved for this business, each with its type and default. Pro Project code · Text Business Project brief · Link Account Proof date · Date Archive, never lose history Archived fields leave the picker. Documents that used them keep their labels and values. PO Text field Archived Saved pri On INV-2041 info warn INV-2041 keeps PO-7781 Peppol e-invoices When you send an invoice through Peppol, its custom fields travel in the UBL file as supplemental data. INV-2041 Custom fields UBL file Supplemental Peppol Sent Fields travel in the UBL file Estimate to invoice Converting an approved estimate copies its custom fields onto the new invoice. EST-1048 Approved Convert to Invoice Fields copied PO number and cost centre kept Project fields in Worklog Worklog projects have custom fields of their own, too. Project: Website redesign 3 fields Project: Brand refresh 2 fields live Questions Custom fields, answered Can I add custom fields to invoices in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Save a field such as PO number or project code in Business Profile → Custom fields, or with New in the invoice editor's picker, then add it to any invoice, estimate, credit note, payment link, purchase order, bill or vendor credit. The label and value print on the PDF and show on the page your customer opens. Which field types are available? Text, Date, Number, Long text and Link. Number values are checked when you save, Long text holds up to 10,000 characters, and Link accepts http, https, mailto and tel addresses. Field titles can be up to 100 characters. Where on the invoice do custom fields appear? In one of four areas: Above items · left, Above items · right, Below items · left or Below items · right. You choose the area when you add the field to a document, and in the template builder you can place a design's fields in the same four areas. Can a custom field fill itself in? Yes, for Text fields. Choose a Value source such as the customer's Tax Registration, the business's address or the vendor's email, and the value is filled in when you create the document. It is saved when the document is finalized, so issued invoices keep their original details. Are custom fields available on the Free plan? Yes. Text, Date, Number and Long text fields are included on every plan, including Free, and Link fields are included on paid plans. Can I hide a custom field from the PDF? Yes. Hide custom fields on this document keeps the values saved and leaves them off the customer page and the PDF. To leave out a single field, remove it from that document. What happens to old invoices if I edit or archive a field? They stay exactly as issued. Archiving removes the field from the picker, and edits to a saved field apply to its future uses. Documents that already carry the field keep their label and value. Put the reference your client asks for on the invoice Save the fields your work needs, add them above or below the items, and let Invoice Crowd fill in what it already knows. Compare plans No card required to start Custom fields on every plan Cancel anytime --- ## Credit Notes and Debit Notes URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/credit-notes/ Issue a credit note, apply it to an open invoice or record a refund, and keep the customer balance and ledger trail together in Invoice Crowd. Features Issue a credit note, then apply it to an invoice or refund it A credit note in Invoice Crowd is a numbered credit you owe a customer, raised on its own or straight from the invoice you over-billed. Apply its balance to an open invoice for the same customer in the same currency, or record a refund, and the invoice due, the credit balance and the ledger trail update together. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Credit Notes Apply to an invoice or refund Balance drawn down as you use it Ledger entries posted with it pop What is inside Raise the credit, then decide where it goes A credit note is money you owe back to a customer. Invoice Crowd gives it its own number and its own balance, then lets you spend that balance against an open invoice or refund it, with the ledger following either way. Raising it Blank, or from the invoice Two routes into a credit note Start a blank credit note with the Create Credit Note button on the Credit Notes list, or open the invoice you over-billed and choose Create Credit Note. That second route copies the customer, the lines and the totals into a credit for the full amount, dates it today, and fills the Invoice No. column with the invoice it came from. Send it to the customer from the editor whenever they need a copy. A blank note opens on your default template Opening balance set to the invoice total Linked to the invoice it came from Its own number, its own balance Credit notes use the same editor as invoices, with the same customer picker, line items, taxes, templates, preview and PDF, and number on their own sequence from CN-00001. Each note carries a Balance, the credit still available, so you always know what is left to use. Numbered CN-00001 upward, separate from invoices Total and Balance sit side by side on the list Void a sent credit note and keep its number Debit notes for extra charges in India For India businesses, Create Debit Note on a sent invoice raises a DN- numbered note for an amount you add after the invoice went out, with the reason on record. Its editor shows Debit Note for the original invoice number with Open Original Invoice, the original stays exactly as issued, and the GST Filing page reports the note with the invoice it adjusts. DN- numbering of its own Linked to the original invoice Type: Debit Notes in the Invoices filter Applying it Always in balance Apply it to an open invoice Choose Apply on a credit note and Invoice Crowd lists that customer's open invoices in the same currency, with the amounts already filled in, oldest due first. Change any amount, then apply. Each invoice's due falls by its amount and the credit's balance falls by the total. An invoice the credit clears closes as paid. Matching open invoices listed for you Always within both balances Spread one credit across invoices Safeguards built in Every amount is checked against both balances, so neither the credit nor the invoice ever drops below zero. Credits apply to invoices in the same currency, rounded to that currency's precision, so every figure reads exactly as entered. Same customer, same currency, same business profile Rounded to each currency's precision Kept within each business profile Closing it out Refunded and posted Or refund the balance instead Pay the customer back from your bank, then record it here. Choose Refund, enter an amount up to the remaining balance, set the refund date, add a note and save, and the balance drops. To return a card or online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless or Paystack, use Refund on the paid invoice, which creates the credit note and refunds through the provider in one step. Up to the credit's remaining balance Refund date and notes recorded Card refunds through your gateway Posted to the ledger as it moves Issuing a credit note reduces what the customer owes and records the reversal against the chart of accounts and the general ledger. Applying the balance to an invoice or recording a refund updates the customer balance and the ledger together, with no second entry to make. Entries land in the ledger your reports already read Open until the balance reaches zero, then Closed Balances and entries always in step Built in The rest of what a credit note carries Credit notes sit in the same account as your invoices, payments and accounting, so everything works the way you expect. Filters that stick Filter the credit note list by status, customer or date range, and lock a filter so it is ready next time. Status Open Customer Juniper Lock filter On Actions on every row Edit, preview, download the PDF, copy a link, duplicate or delete a credit note without leaving the list. Edit #4941e3 Preview #0ea5e9 Download #28c76f Copy Link #6366f1 Duplicate #f59e0b Delete #ea5455 From the list row In the customer portal Customers can view their credit notes in the customer portal, with the access you choose for them. Portal CN-00006 View PDF When the portal allows credit notes Delete or void Delete unsent, unused credit notes one at a time or in bulk, and void a sent one so its number stays on record. CN-00005 · unsent CN-00004 · sent Void Voided number Kept on record bal A focused editor The credit note editor puts Apply to Invoice and Refund up front, with no payment collection to set up. Payment Methods tab Hidden Apply to Invoice Shown Refund Vendor credits too Credits from your suppliers are tracked as vendor credits, with screens of their own. Vendor credit VCN-00004 Apply to Bill Same vendor Own screen Shared editing Anyone on your team with permission can open and edit a credit note, and the most recent save is the one kept. You Editing A colleague Saves Last save Kept Everyone with permission can edit Every open invoice in one list The apply form lists all of that customer's open invoices together, oldest due first. INV INV-2036 · Juniper & Sage $3,700.00 INV-2029 · Juniper & Sage $1,250.00 INV-2021 · Juniper & Sage $640.00 Never posted twice Each apply or refund is recorded exactly once, even if the connection drops and you submit it again. Apply $300 Sent Connection lost Retry Same result Recorded once Partial payments respected Where an invoice is on partial or split payments, the credit settles exactly the portion it pays for and the rest of the schedule stays in place. INV-2036 total $6,400.00 Partial payment −$2,400.00 cn Credit applied −$300.00 Due Delivery tracking Sent, Opened and Viewed badges show when an emailed credit note reaches your customer. CN-00003 LA Lumen Architects €360.00 info Opened warn Viewed See when your customer has it Team permissions Decide who on your team can create, edit, apply or refund credit notes, with a permission for each action. Create · Edit Credit notes Role Apply Accounting post Accounting reverse live Questions Credit Notes, answered How do I create a credit note from an existing invoice? Open the invoice in Invoice Crowd and choose Create Credit Note from its action menu. The invoice is replicated as a credit note under a new CN number, with the customer, the line items and the totals copied across, an opening balance equal to the invoice total, and today's date. The credit note records which invoice it came from, and that link appears in the Invoice No. column of the Credit Notes list. Can one credit note be applied to more than one invoice? Yes. Applying a credit note draws down its balance by the amount used rather than consuming the whole note, so a credit can be applied repeatedly across several of that customer's open invoices. Each application is capped at the smaller of the remaining credit and the invoice's remaining due. The note stays Open until the balance reaches zero, at which point it reads Closed. Which invoices can a credit note be applied to? Any open invoice for the same customer in the same currency. Invoice Crowd lists them for you, oldest due first, with the amounts filled in and rounded to that currency's precision. Issue the credit in the currency the original invoice was billed in. How do I refund a customer's card or online payment? Use Refund on the paid invoice. For Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless and Paystack, it creates the credit note, refunds through the provider and is recorded once the provider confirms. For a refund you pay from your bank, use Refund on the credit note to record the amount, the refund date and any note, and the credit's balance drops. Can a credit note be deleted or voided? Yes. A credit note that was never sent and has not been applied or refunded can be deleted, individually or in bulk. Once it has been sent to a customer, use Void: it keeps the credit note and its number, marks it Void and reverses it in your books. If you choose Delete on one you already issued, Invoice Crowd recommends Void and shows what deleting would change for your country before you confirm. Remove its applications and refunds first, then void it. Can I issue a debit note in Invoice Crowd? Yes, for India businesses. On the Invoices list, choose Create Debit Note in a sent invoice's menu and give the reason for the additional charge. Invoice Crowd opens a DN- numbered draft linked to the original invoice, with its customer and currency already set. Add only the extra amount and send it like any invoice; the GST Filing page reports it with the original, and the Type filter on Invoices lists debit notes on their own. Which Invoice Crowd plans include credit notes? Credit notes are included on every paid plan, with no add-on to buy. Can a customer's credit be used on their next invoice automatically? Yes. Switch on Auto-Apply Credits in the invoice's Options and the customer's available credits are used when the invoice is sent. You can also choose Use Credit on an invoice to apply a credit note, an advance payment or an overpayment by hand. Advances and overpayments are listed in Payments Received. Correct any invoice cleanly Raise the credit note, apply it to the invoice or record the refund, and keep the invoice due, the credit balance and the ledger trail together. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Items and Inventory URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/inventory/ Reuse products and services across invoices, estimates, bills and purchase orders, with optional stock-on-hand tracking connected to sales and purchases. Features Items and inventory tracking built into your invoicing Items are the reusable catalog behind every invoice, estimate, bill and purchase order you raise. Add a product or service once with its selling price, cost, unit and tax code, and pick it onto any document. Turn on inventory tracking and each tracked item keeps a stock-on-hand figure that moves as you buy and sell. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Items & Inventory One catalog for every document Stock on hand per item Import from CSV, XLS or XLSX pop What is inside Build the catalog once, then let the documents keep the count Items are the reusable list behind every invoice, estimate, bill and purchase order you raise. Set the catalog up, keep it findable as it grows, and switch stock tracking on for the products that need counting. Building the catalog Enter it once One record behind every document Enter a product or service once with its selling price, cost price, unit, HSN number and its default taxes and discounts, then pick it from a dropdown as you build a document. The same catalog feeds invoices, recurring invoices, estimates, credit notes, bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and delivery notes, because they share one line-item editor. Start with just a name Prices, units and taxes carry onto the line Kept with their business profile Import the product list you already have Items come in from CSV, XLS and XLSX through More, then Import File. Choose whether to add new items, update existing ones matched by SKU or Item ID, or both, check the matched columns, and review every row in a preview before you import. Up to 1,000 rows go in per batch. CSV, XLS and XLSX files Every row checked before import A review report downloads as a CSV Keeping it findable Once the list gets long Categories that group a long catalog Item categories are labels you create on the Items screen and attach to items, and one item can carry several. The list filters by category, and each item's categories show as a column, so the grouping is readable without opening anything. Delete a category and it stops appearing on the items that carried it; the items themselves stay. Several categories on a single item Added, renamed and deleted on the same screen Dedicated to your catalog Filters that stay where you left them The Items list filters by name, by category and by a minimum and maximum price, and sorts by name, cost price or selling price. Lock a filter and it is still there when you come back. Sort by name, cost price or selling price Ten rows per page by default Lock filters for your next visit Tracking the stock The documents move it Turn tracking on, item by item Inventory tracking is built in. Turn it on in business settings, set an inventory start date, then tick Track inventory on the items you want counted. That reveals the opening stock, rate per unit, reorder point and preferred vendor fields, and gives the item a stock-on-hand column on the list. One business switch, then a tick per item Opening stock and its rate per unit Reorder point and preferred vendor on the item Stock that moves with the paperwork Stock on hand starts at the opening stock figure and moves whenever a document is recorded: sell a tracked item on an invoice and it falls, record it on a bill and it rises, and recurring invoices move it on each scheduled run. Every change comes from a recorded document, so your count always has a paper trail. Opening stock edits apply the difference Negative stock blocked by default Every movement traced to a document Built in The rest of the catalog Item setup, imports, stock movement and document history, connected across your invoicing and purchasing. Cost price column Store what an item costs you next to what you charge for it, and sort the Items list by either figure. A2 art print · Cost Price $9.75 Selling Price $38.00 Sort by Cost Price bal Per business profile New items are stamped with the business profile you created them under, so a second business you add starts with its own catalog. Northwind Studio 24 items Northwind Print Shop Own catalog New items stamped Per profile Stock warnings Set a reorder point on the item and switch on the reorder notice in inventory settings, and crossing it raises a bell notification. The Reorder tab turns low items into draft purchase orders, one per preferred vendor. Dot-grid notebook A5 Low stock cn Available Reorder Point 20 Inventory Summary report The Inventory screen's Movements tab and the Inventory Summary report show the history behind every stock figure. A2 art print · In +160 in Quantity Out −42 Stock On Hand 118 Inventory Value $1,150.50 Export to CSV Download your catalog as a CSV with each item's name, SKU, type, descriptions, category, quantity, prices, inventory settings, unit and GST code. Items Export CSV items-collection .csv Name, price, quantity, category Re-import without duplicates The default add-only mode skips items that already match by SKU or Item ID, and the update modes change them, so the same file can be imported again safely. products.xlsx Imported Same file Imported again SKU match Skipped Or pick an update mode to change them Controlled stock updates Outside a document, stock changes through a posted adjustment or a purchase receipt, each saved as a draft first. ADJ-0008 · Physical count Draft Canvas tote −2 Post Posted Edit item by item Open any item to adjust its prices, unit, taxes or stock settings, and the change is saved to that item. Letterpress cards Edit A2 art print One item at a time One clear stock count per item Each tracked item keeps one clear stock-on-hand figure that moves with your sales and purchase documents. On hand 457 6 items On order 210 Approved POs up Reorder bad FIFO valuation Stock is valued first in, first out from your opening rate and purchases, and posts to Inventory Asset and Cost of Goods Sold. Opening Stock 60 Rate per Unit $4.60 Opening value $276.00 Archive, then restore Archiving hides an item from lists and pickers while its documents and history stay intact, and you can restore it at any time. Poster tube Archived Documents, history Kept Restore Any time Item webhooks Creating or updating an item can notify your own systems with an Item created or Item updated webhook, set up on the Integrations page. Item created #16a34a Pabbly Connect #4941e3 Webhook URL #f59e0b Your server live Questions Items & Inventory, answered Does Invoice Crowd do inventory management? Yes, at item level. Switch inventory tracking on for the business, tick Track inventory on an item, and that item keeps a stock-on-hand figure that falls as you invoice it and rises when you record the purchase on a bill. Stock is held at one location and valued first in, first out (FIFO), and its value posts to Inventory Asset and, as you sell, to Cost of Goods Sold in your books. How does stock on hand get updated in Invoice Crowd? Stock on hand starts at the opening stock entered on the item, then moves whenever a document is recorded against that item. Selling a tracked item on an invoice takes stock out, buying it in on a bill puts stock back, and recurring invoices move the figure on each scheduled run. The documents keep the figure current, so every change has a source. Can I adjust stock without raising an invoice? Yes. The Inventory screen has New Adjustment for a physical count or a quantity change, saved as a draft and then posted, and Receive Purchase Order for goods that arrive against an approved order. Editing an item's opening stock applies the difference to the current stock-on-hand figure rather than replacing it. A negative-stock policy in your inventory settings decides what happens when a change would take stock below zero: Block Posting (the default), Warn and Allow, or Allow. Can I import my product list into Invoice Crowd? Yes. Item lists import from CSV, XLS and XLSX, reached from More, then Import File, on the Items screen. Pick add-only, update-only or add-and-update, with existing items matched by SKU or Item ID, check the column matching, then review the rows in a preview. Up to 1,000 rows go in per batch, and each row is validated before anything is saved. What happens to an item I no longer sell? Archive it. An archived item leaves the list and the pickers, keeps its place on the documents that used it, and can be restored from the archived view at any time. Clear any stock on hand, on order or committed before you archive it. Do item prices and taxes fill in automatically on an invoice? Yes. Each item stores a selling price, a unit, an HSN number and its default taxes and discounts, so a line built from that item starts with those figures instead of being retyped. Cost price is stored on the item as well, as its own sortable column on the Items list. Only the item name is required, which means a catalog can begin as a list of service names and gain prices, units and tax codes later. Does Invoice Crowd alert me when stock runs low? Yes, inside the app. Set a reorder point on the item and switch on "Notify me if an item's quantity reaches the reorder point" in the inventory settings. When stock falls to that point you get a bell notification. The Inventory screen's Reorder tab then groups low items by preferred vendor and can create a draft purchase order for each. Put your product list where the invoices are Add your items once, switch tracking on for the ones you count, and let the invoices and bills you already raise keep the figure current. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Invoicing URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/invoicing/ Online invoicing software to create, send and track invoices in your client's currency, with automatic reminders and 15 payment gateways. Create, send and track invoices from one account Invoice Crowd is online invoicing software for products and services. Build an invoice in your currency with your tax rates, send it by email or link, and follow it from draft to paid. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Invoicing Free plan available Partial and split payments 15 payment gateways pop What is inside Everything an invoice needs, in one place Invoicing comes down to a few decisions: what to charge, which tax applies, how the client pays and what happens when payment runs late. Invoice Crowd makes each one quick. Putting the invoice together Fewer keystrokes each time Create or pick items as you go Type a new line item when the work is one-off, or pull one from the list of items you have billed before. Anything entered once is available on the next invoice, which removes most of the typing for a business that sells the same handful of things. New items created on the invoice Previously used items picked from a list Descriptions and rates come with the item Your own tax and discount rates Define the tax rates your country requires and the discounts you actually offer, then apply either per line or to the whole invoice. Rates are worked out as you build the document, so what the client sees is the amount you meant to charge and the tax your rules expect. Rates you define yourself Applied per line or per invoice Built to match your country's tax rules How the client can pay Flexible ways to settle Clients paying in installments settle one invoice, stage by stage. In Manage Payments, allow partial payments or split the total across the dates you agreed, record each payment as it arrives, and the invoice keeps a running balance until the final payment lands. Deposits recorded against the invoice The total split across agreed dates Outstanding balance always visible Split and partial payments Accept payments your clients already trust Connect PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square and more, then choose which ones appear on each invoice. Clients pay with the method they prefer, and every payment is recorded against the invoice it settles. Only the payment options you switched on Offer more than one on the same invoice Payment recorded against the invoice it settles Supported gateways Write off what will not be collected When a balance is not going to be paid, Write Off Balance in Manage Payments closes it against an expense account such as Bad Debts, on the date you choose and with your reason on record. The invoice reads Written Off, the customer's statement shows the write-off, and Reverse Write-Off brings the balance back if the customer pays after all. Posted to the expense account you choose Written Off on the invoice and the statement Reverse Write-Off restores the balance Billing that keeps running Set the rule, then leave it Recurring invoices on a schedule Bill the work you deliver every month without starting from scratch. Set the invoice and its cycle once, and each one is raised on time, so no month goes unbilled. Recurring billing and retainers are included on paid plans. One setup, every cycle after that Retainers count logged hours against each invoice The same items, tax and template each time Recurring invoices Late fees and automatic reminders Switch on late fees and one fee is added the day after an unpaid invoice's due date, with a notice on the invoice beforehand. Reminder emails go out automatically before and after the due date, so every client is followed up on time. One flat or percentage fee after the due date Automatic reminders on your schedule Polite follow-ups, sent for you Late fees and reminders Also included Everything around the invoice From payment links to the ledger, the tools that make invoicing complete. Payment links Send a link for a fixed-price product or service and let the client pay without an invoice first. Copy Link Copied Email OTP 481205 New customer created Custom fields Add any extra detail an invoice needs, from a project code to a client reference number, above or below the items, or fill it in from the customer's record. PO number PO-7781 Project code HV-2026 Delivery date 10/14/2026 GST-enabled invoices Raise GST invoices at the rates you define and file from the report when the return is due. Subtotal ₹1,24,500.00 CGST 9% +₹11,205.00 in SGST 9% Total ₹1,46,910.00 bal Invoicing dashboard See invoiced, received, outstanding and overdue totals at a glance, with cash in against expenses, a revenue report and a Needs Attention list of what to do next. Received $18,420 Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct QuickBooks and Xero export Export up to 100 invoices as import-ready files for QuickBooks Online or Xero, with every total checked before you download. Destination Xero Mappings Saved Review ZIP ready Totals checked before download Status at a glance Hover a status to see who the invoice went to, whether the email was opened and what is still due, and void a sent invoice so its number stays. INV-2041 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Draft pri Sent info Viewed warn Paid ok Every step kept in the invoice history Download and delivery notes Download the PDF when a client wants a copy for their records, or a price-free Delivery Note to send with the goods. Preview Download PDF Share A copy for the client's records Your logo and colors Start from eight designs and change the fonts, colors, shapes, logo size and labels in the template builder. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans. Template 1 #4941e3 Template 2 #16a34a Template 3 #ef4b24 Template 4 #0ea5e9 Template 5 #ef3d10 Template 6 #16b980 Template 7 #9333ea Template 8 #2b2c40 Your logo on every one Share on WhatsApp Send a saved invoice's link on WhatsApp with a ready message in your customer's language, edited as you like before it goes. Message English WhatsApp Review, send The invoice link is included Straight into accounting Each invoice posts to the ledger as it is raised, so your books stay current. INV-2041 · posted 09/28 Dr Accounts Receivable Cr Sales Journal balanced Dr = Cr Duplicate an invoice Copy last month's invoice for a repeat job instead of typing the same lines again. INV-2034 August Duplicate INV-2042 Same lines, new dates Payment tracking See what is invoiced, received, outstanding and overdue across every client, and every payment in the Payments Received list. $38,420 14 invoices up Partial $6,400 1 invoice Overdue $5,720 bad live Questions Invoicing, answered Can I start invoicing for free? Yes. The free Basic plan lets you send invoices and accept PayPal payments. Paid plans add more customer and business profiles, templates and gateways, recurring billing and accounting. Can a client pay an invoice in installments? Yes. In Manage Payments, split the total into equal parts or a deposit and a balance on agreed dates, or allow partial payments with an optional minimum, and the invoice tracks what is still outstanding. It suits staged project work paid over time. Which payment gateways can I connect? PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack. You can offer more than one so a client picks the method they already use, and each payment is recorded against the invoice it settles without you marking it off. Can I set my own tax and discount rates? Yes. Create the rates your country's tax rules require, including GST, and save the discounts you offer regularly. Apply either to one line or to the whole invoice, and the totals recalculate as you go rather than at the end. What happens when an invoice goes overdue? If you switched on late fees, one fee is added the day after the due date, and reminder emails continue on the schedule you set. The invoice shows as Overdue in the list and in the Overdue total, so you always know what is outstanding. What does the Invoice Crowd dashboard show? The Dashboard shows four totals for the period you choose, Total, Received, Outstanding and Overdue, each linking to the matching list. Cash in vs Expenses compares payments received with recorded expenses as a Cash Margin, and the Revenue Report charts invoiced, received and expense amounts by period. Recent Transactions and Transactions by payment gateway show the latest payments, and Needs Attention lists what to do next, such as Invoices Not Sent, Proposals Not Sent and, with Worklog on paid plans, customers Ready to Invoice. Choose any period from This Month to a custom range, and Lock This Filter keeps your choice. Team members with the Accountant or Admin role and access to all customers see it too. What is the Needs Attention card on the dashboard? Needs Attention is the Invoice Crowd dashboard's short to-do list. Each row names one kind of work with a single action: Invoices Not Sent (Review Drafts), Proposals Not Sent (Open Proposals) and Expired Proposals (Follow Up), and with Worklog on paid plans, Ready to Invoice for each customer with unbilled time and project expenses (Create Invoice), Billing Decisions (Decide) and Final Retainer Hours (Review Hours). Collapse it to a row of counts, and it stays out of the way when there is nothing to do. How do I get set up to send my first invoice? Invoice Crowd's Get Paid Faster checklist on the Dashboard takes you there in five steps: Add Your Logo and Business Details, Add Your First Customer, Create Your First Invoice, Send It and Turn On Online Payments, each with a time estimate and the action in place. It starts after Set Up Your Business, one short screen for your business name, country, logo and What Do You Want to Do First?, and the account owner can reopen it any time from the ? icon beside the bell. Do invoices reach my accounts on their own? Yes. A raised invoice posts to the chart of accounts, so income and tax appear in the ledger and the reports without a second entry. Bank reconciliation and the profit and loss statement then work from the same figures. How do I cancel an invoice I already sent? Void it. Voiding keeps the invoice and its number, marks it VOID with a badge, a banner and a PDF stamp, and reverses it in your books, so your numbering stays intact. Delete is meant for invoices that were never sent: if you delete one you already issued, Invoice Crowd recommends Void and shows what deleting would change for your country before you confirm. Remove any payments or credits applied to it first. Can I write off an unpaid invoice as bad debt? Yes. Open Manage Payments on the invoice and choose Write Off Balance. Pick the adjustment date and an expense account such as Bad Debts, add a reason, and Record Write-Off closes the remaining balance without recording a payment. The invoice shows Written Off, the customer's statement of account lists the write-off, and Reverse Write-Off restores the balance if the customer pays later. It works on invoices recorded in your books, for the account owner and team members who can post accounting entries. Can I export my invoices to QuickBooks or Xero? Yes. Select up to 100 invoices on the Invoices list and choose Export to QuickBooks / Xero. Pick QuickBooks Online or Xero and your region, check the mappings, and download a ZIP of import files ready for that software. The account owner can save the mappings for each business, so the next export takes a few clicks. How do I record a payment made outside a gateway? Use Record Payment on the invoice: enter the amount received, the date, the payment method and the account it was received into, and optionally email the client a confirmation. A single payment that covers several invoices can be recorded once in Payments Received and applied to the oldest open invoices first, with anything left over kept as customer credit. Can I share an invoice on WhatsApp? Yes. Open a saved invoice and choose Share on WhatsApp in its actions. Invoice Crowd fills in your customer's phone number and a ready message with the invoice link, in any of eight languages, and you can change both before choosing Share, which opens WhatsApp for you to review and send it. The default message for each language is set with your business profile's email templates. Start invoicing for free Create an account, add your items and tax rates, and send your first invoice in minutes. Upgrade when you want more profiles, templates, gateways or recurring billing. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card to start --- ## Estimates URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/estimates/ Estimate software for small businesses: create detailed quotes with your tax and discount rates, get online approval and convert them to invoices. Estimates detailed enough for the client to say yes An Invoice Crowd estimate is a priced quote your client approves and signs online, or declines with an optional reason, before the expiry date you set. Use your own tax and discount rates, explain the scope, and let an approved estimate become an invoice, with a deposit if you ask for one. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Estimates On every plan, including Free Custom tax and discount rates Converts on approval pop What is inside What goes into an estimate before it goes out An estimate is the first document a client judges you on. These are the parts you shape: the lines, the rates, the wording around them, and what happens once approval comes back. Building the estimate Items, tax, discount Create or pick items as you type Add a line by choosing from the items you have already saved, or type a new one straight into the estimate and keep it for next time. Start quoting straight away and build your catalog as you go. Saved items and one-off lines on the same estimate A new item can be kept for reuse Products and services quoted side by side Set the tax rate that applies to this piece of work, and apply a discount as a rate or as an amount. Totals recalculate as the lines change, so the figure the client reads is the figure you meant to quote. Define your own rates once, then reuse them Discounts by percentage or by fixed amount Tax totals itself as lines are added Saying more than a price Detail and custom fields An extra section for the detail A line item rarely explains the scope on its own. The additional details section gives you room to set out what is included, what is not, and any conditions attached, so the client reads the terms in the document they are approving rather than in a covering email. Scope, exclusions and conditions in one place Right alongside the priced lines Tailored to every estimate Custom fields for what you track Add the fields your business works with, whether that is a project reference, a site address or a purchase order number, and they appear on the estimate next to the standard details. The references your client needs are right on the document. Fields you define yourself Visible to the client on the estimate Useful for references clients need on file Custom fields After you send it Approval, then billing Approval turns it into an invoice Once the client approves, the estimate can become an invoice without you rebuilding it, carrying the items, quantities and totals across. If you requested a deposit, the client can accept and pay it in one step, and the estimate is invoiced as they do. Convert by hand when you want a last look Or automatically, the moment approval lands Nothing retyped between the two documents How conversion works Every estimate keeps its history Each estimate holds its own record: what you sent, when it went out and where it ended up, and you get a notification if the client declines it. Open quotes stay visible instead of disappearing into a sent folder, Send Reminder nudges a client who has gone quiet, and an approved one can be pulled up months later when a client asks what was agreed. See which quotes are still waiting on a decision Approved estimates stay on file Filed against the customer they belong to Customer records Also included The rest of what estimating covers Estimates sit in the same account as your invoices, customers and reports, so everything stays in step. GST-enabled documents Add GST fields, units and tax classifications to your estimates wherever they apply. Subtotal ₹1,24,500.00 CGST 9% +₹11,205.00 in SGST 9% Total ₹1,46,910.00 bal Automatic tax totals Tax calculates against each line as you go, so every total is accurate. $11,200.00 Discount 10% −$1,120.00 cn Sales Tax 8.5% +$856.80 $10,936.80 Products and services Quote physical goods, billable time or a mix of the two on a single estimate. Brand Brand identity system · Service $4,800.00 Brand photography day · Service $1,200.00 Business cards · Non-inventory $180.00 Download and share Download the estimate as a PDF or share its link when a client wants a copy of the figures on file. Preview EST-01048 Download PDF Copy Link Share A copy for the client Client-removable line items Let the client keep or remove the extras before they approve the estimate. Brand identity system Website design $6,400.00 Photography day −$1,200.00 Client-set quantities Clients adjust how many of each item they need before they sign the estimate. Launch copy × 5 $1,250.00 Client set × 3 −$500.00 $7,150.00 Conversion on approval Turn an approved estimate into an invoice by hand or leave it to run automatically. Approved Auto Convert On INV-2041 Sent Or convert by hand Client portal Customers view, approve and download the estimates you have sent them from one signed-in place. HV #6366f1 KA #14b8a6 LA #eab308 Approved EST-01048 Signed Viewed EST-01047 Portal Downloaded EST-01046 Multiple currencies Quote in the client's currency while your own reporting stays in your base currency. Currency GBP Estimate total £6,900.00 Exchange Rate 1.3400 Your currency $9,246.00 Saved customers Pull a client's details onto an estimate rather than retyping an address each time. Harb Harbor & Vine Co. USD accounts@harborandvine.co 218 Pier Avenue, Seattle Proposals for bigger pitches When a quote needs a narrative, start from one of 70+ proposal templates with e-signature. Web Design SEO Agreement Branding & Identity Consulting Agreement #3b82f6 Digital Marketing #ec4899 Event Management #10b981 70+ proposal templates An estimate design of your own Choose an estimate design in Business Settings → Design or build one in the template builder. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans. Choose a design Invoice Templates Edit in Builder Fonts, colors, logo Estimate default Business Settings Used for every new estimate live Questions Estimates, answered How many estimates can I send? As many as you need. Estimates are included on every plan, including the free plan. Your plan sets how many customer and business profiles you can quote for and how many emails you can send a day. Can I add an item that is not in my list yet? Yes. Type the description, rate and quantity straight into the estimate and it prices like any other line. If it is something you expect to quote again, keep it as a saved item so the next estimate starts from it. Can I use a different tax or discount rate on one estimate? Yes. Tax and discount rates are yours to define, so a job with an unusual rate or an agreed reduction is quoted correctly. Totals recalculate as soon as the rate is applied to the lines. How do I explain the scope on an estimate? Use the additional details section. It gives you space beneath the priced lines for scope, exclusions and any conditions, so the client approves the terms and the figures together. What happens once a client approves an estimate? The approved estimate can convert into an invoice, either when you decide to convert it or automatically on approval. Items, quantities and totals move across, so the invoice bills exactly what the client agreed to. If you requested a deposit, the client is taken straight to pay it. Can I see what happened to an estimate I sent? Yes. Each estimate keeps its own status and history, so you can tell which quotes are still open, which were viewed and which were approved. The email you send carries the estimate as a PDF attachment, Send Later schedules it for a time you choose, and you can download a PDF or share the link whenever a client asks for a copy. Can a client decline an estimate, and can an estimate expire? Yes to both. The client can choose Decline on the estimate page and add an optional reason, and you get an Estimate declined notification in the app. Set an Expiry Date in the estimate editor and, once it passes, the page invites the client to request an updated estimate from you. How do I remind a client about an open estimate? Use Send Reminder. It opens the email window with reminder wording ready to send, and the estimates list shows when you last reminded the client. Can estimates use a different design from invoices? Yes. In Business Settings → Design, choose Choose by document type and pick a design for estimates, or build one in the template builder. Estimate headings follow the design's document language. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Send estimates clients approve Build an estimate from your own items, rates and fields, send it out for approval, and let it become the invoice when the client says yes. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Estimates on every plan --- ## Recurring Invoices URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/manage-recurring/ Bill clients automatically with recurring invoice schedules, weekly to yearly or custom. Pause, edit or end a schedule and track every invoice. Bill the same client on a schedule you set once Invoice Crowd recurring invoices bill a customer on a schedule you set once, from weekly to yearly or a custom interval. Each cycle creates its next invoice and can email it to the client. Recurring billing is included on paid plans. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Recurring invoices Weekly to yearly, or custom Pause or resume at any time Online payments recorded for you pop What is inside Set the cycle once and let it run A recurring invoice is a schedule attached to a customer. It decides what goes out, how often, and what happens when the payment arrives, and you can change or pause it at any point. Setting the schedule One setup, then it repeats Scheduled invoicing you set up once Pick the customer, build the invoice the way you normally would, and set how often it should repeat. Invoice Crowd sends it from then on. The schedule remembers which client is billed on which day, so you do not have to. Built the same way as a one-off invoice Sent on the frequency you choose One schedule per customer and agreement Weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly or custom A retainer might run monthly, hosting yearly, a maintenance agreement every six weeks. Standard cycles cover weekly, monthly, quarterly, half-yearly and yearly billing, and a custom recurrence in days, months or years handles any other interval. Change the cycle at any time without rebuilding the invoice. Weekly, monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or yearly Custom recurrence for unusual agreements Change the cycle without rebuilding the invoice While it runs Stay informed, hands-free Notifications at each step You are told when an invoice in a schedule is sent and when it is paid, so you always know each cycle ran and what came of it. Told when a scheduled invoice goes out Told when the payment arrives The same alerts as your manual invoices Payments recognized as they land When a client pays through a connected gateway, Invoice Crowd records the payment against the scheduled invoice for you, so you always know which invoices are paid and which are still open. Recorded once the payment is confirmed Works with the gateways you have connected No manual matching at month end Connected gateways Staying in control Change it whenever you need A report for every recurring setup Each schedule has its own report listing the invoices it has produced, with their numbers. When a client asks what they were billed in March, or you want to confirm a cycle is still running, the answer is in one list. Every invoice a schedule has generated Invoice numbers listed against the setup Useful when a client queries a period All reports Edit, pause or end a schedule A schedule can be changed after it starts. Adjust the amount, the line items or the frequency and the next invoice reflects it. If a client goes on hold, use Pause Schedule and resume it when they are ready. For a fixed-term agreement, set No. of Invoices and the schedule ends on its own; a card subscription can also be cancelled with its payment provider. Edit a running schedule at any time Pause when a client goes on hold End it after a set No. of Invoices Review upcoming invoices before you save When you change a running schedule, Review upcoming invoices sets the Current terms beside the Proposed terms, with the next invoice date, frequency, taxes, discounts and shipping. Invoices already generated keep their original terms, and the next one follows the new terms when it is due. You can also attach an approved proposal or estimate that matches the new lines and prices. Current terms beside Proposed terms Applies from the next invoice Link an approved proposal or estimate Also included Why regular billing is worth automating Save time and gain consistency, accuracy and flexibility by billing the same way every cycle. Predictable cash flow Fixed cycles mean you know what is billed and when, month after month. Recurring billed $26,800 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Less repeat admin The invoice you would have retyped twelve times a year is built once. Schedules 24 Active up Built once 1 invoice each Sent 288 a year Recurring line items Set one line to repeat, such as monthly hosting under a one-off setup fee. When the invoice is paid in full, that line starts its own schedule. Setup fee Once Paid in full INV-2041 Hosting Monthly Repeats Monthly After Payment Custom recurrence Set any interval in days, months or years for agreements with a rhythm of their own. Custom How Often Every 45 Days Next 11/15/2026 Days, Months or Years Foreign currency billing Bill an overseas retainer in their currency and still report totals in your own. Retainer £3,400.00 Exchange Rate 1.3400 In your books $4,556.00 Every month GBP bal Your templates Scheduled invoices carry the same branding and layout as everything else you send. Template 1 #6366f1 Template 2 #10b981 Template 3 #f97316 Template 4 #3b82f6 Template 5 #ec4899 Template 6 #14b8a6 Template 7 #8b5cf6 Template 8 #2b2c40 Same template every cycle Reminders and fees An unpaid scheduled invoice follows the same reminder and late fee rules as any other. Reminder Option On Due Date Late Fees 1.5% Payment Stub On Portal access Clients sign in to see the run of invoices rather than searching their inbox. HV INV-2031 Paid INV-2019 SUB-00128 Recurring Per-customer schedules Each schedule belongs to one customer, and the recurring list shows what each one bills and when it next sends. Harbor & Vine Co. SUB-00128 · Monthly $4,500.00 Kestrel Analytics SUB-00127 · Monthly $2,800.00 #eab308 Lumen Architects SUB-00126 · Monthly $3,200.00 Straight to the ledger Recurring income posts to the same accounts as the invoices you raise by hand. INV-2031 · posted 09/01 Dr Accounts Receivable Cr Sales Journal balanced Dr = Cr Multiple brands Run a separate set of schedules under each business profile, all from one login. Northwind Studio Northwind Digital Harbor Lane Consulting Pixel & Pine One login Settled in stages A scheduled invoice can still be paid in parts where the agreement allows it. INV-2036 $6,400.00 Split 1 −$3,200.00 cn Split 2 Due 10/12 Balance live Questions Recurring invoicing, answered How do I set up a recurring invoice? Choose the customer, build the invoice the way you would a one-off, and set how often it should repeat in the Make Recurring tab. Save it and the schedule takes over from there, sending the first invoice on the date you picked. Recurring invoices are included on paid plans. Can I change a recurring invoice after it has started? Yes. The amount, the line items and the frequency can all be edited on a running schedule: Review upcoming invoices shows the current and proposed terms before you save, and the change applies from the next invoice onward. Invoices already sent stay exactly as they were issued, so your records stay accurate. What if a client wants the recurring billing to pause or end? Pause a schedule whenever you need and resume it when the client comes back. A schedule set to a number of invoices ends after the last one, and a card subscription can be cancelled permanently with its payment provider. Clients with portal access can also stop a schedule themselves, and you get a notification when they do. Every invoice the schedule has already produced stays on record. What billing cycles are available? Weekly, monthly, quarterly, half-yearly and yearly are set up as standard options. For any other arrangement, a custom recurrence lets you define the interval in days, months or years. Can one line on an invoice repeat after the customer pays? Yes. Switch on Recurring Items in the invoice's Options, then click R on a line to choose how often it repeats, from weekly to yearly or a custom interval. The line is tagged with its cycle, such as Repeats Monthly After Payment. When the invoice is paid in full, Invoice Crowd starts a recurring schedule for those lines only, so a one-off setup fee is billed once and the monthly service carries on. Recurring lines work on invoices and estimates. How do I see which invoices came from one schedule? Each recurring setup has its own report listing the invoices it has generated, with their numbers. That is the quickest way to answer a client asking what they were billed over a period, or to confirm a schedule is still running. How is my invoicing data stored? Recurring schedules and the invoices they produce live in your business account alongside the rest of your billing history. Every invoice a schedule has issued stays on record, so pausing or ending a cycle keeps the history intact. What is the difference between a recurring invoice and a retainer? A recurring invoice repeats a fixed set of lines each cycle. A retainer is a monthly recurring invoice with a bank of hours: it counts the billable time logged on the projects you choose, carries unused hours over or lets them expire, and bills extra hours on the next invoice. Retainers sit under Invoicing next to Recurring and are included on paid plans, with Worklog for the time tracking. Set the schedule and stop retyping the invoice Regular billing is the part of the month that never changes. Hand it to a schedule and spend the time on the work the client is actually paying for. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card to start Pause or resume a schedule anytime --- ## Retainers URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/retainers/ Bill clients a monthly retainer with hours included. Invoice Crowd counts logged time, carries unused hours over and bills extra hours on the next invoice. Features Retainers that count the hours your clients pay for each month A retainer in Invoice Crowd is a monthly recurring invoice with a set number of hours included. Billable time your team logs on the client's chosen projects counts against those hours: unused hours carry over or expire, extra hours go on the next invoice, and the same hour is never billed twice. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Retainers Hours included each month Carry over or expire unused hours Extra hours on the next invoice pop What is inside One recurring invoice, plus an hour bank A retainer uses the recurring invoice you already know for the schedule and the sending. The Retainer option adds the hours: how many are included, what happens to unused and extra hours, and which projects' time counts. Setting it up Monthly, in its own editor Start a retainer in its own editor New Retainer starts a monthly recurring invoice, first created on the 1st of next month, and opens it in the Retainer editor with the Retainer option on. Set Hours Included Each Month; the Monthly Amount comes from the retainer line, with its price per hour beside it. Then choose whether unused hours carry over for a set number of months or expire, and whether extra hours are billed on the next invoice at an hourly rate or simply recorded. Runs on a monthly schedule Sent automatically, or created as a draft to review Paid like any other invoice Recurring invoices Choose whose time counts, then check each entry Under Time That Counts, tick the customer's projects whose billable time draws on the retainer. Time logged on those projects counts from the day the month's invoice is created. The retainer page lists the month's entries with a Counts switch, so you can leave one out and bill it like any other time. Billable time on the projects you choose Adjust what counts this month An entry left out is billed from the Timesheet as usual Timesheets The hour bank Used, left, carried and extra See every client's hours at a glance The Retainers list shows each retainer's hours this month as a bar, with its next invoice and status. Tiles count Active, Running Low (under 20% of hours left), Over Limit and Paused retainers, and filter the list when you click them. Open a retainer for This Month, Remaining, Carried Over and Unbilled Overage, with the month's usage bar. Active shows what retainers bill each month Over Limit shows the extra waiting to bill Paused retainers wait for you Carry unused hours over, bill extra hours next month When the next invoice is created, the month closes. Carried hours are used first, oldest first, then the month's own hours. Unused hours carry into the next month or expire, as you chose. Hours over what was available become an Extra Hours line on that invoice, at your rate and with the retainer line's taxes, and the retainer line notes the hours used. The Months table shows hours used, carried and expired Extra hours link to the invoice that billed them Retainer time is never billed again elsewhere Billed to the minute, closed with care Extra time is priced from the exact minutes logged, so one minute at $100.00 an hour bills $1.67, rounded once in the retainer's currency. A closed month keeps its hours, carry-over and billing as they were, and when you end a retainer with extra hours still to bill, Review final extra hours prepares an invoice draft for just those hours. Priced from the exact minutes Create Invoice Draft for final extra hours Export time CSV for any month Your client, your control Hours shared, rates private Clients see their hours, never your rates The project page shows the retainer's hours bar for the open month, and so does the same project in the customer portal. The client sees hours used, hours left and hours carried. Your rates and amounts stay private. Your view links to the retainer page The portal view is hours only The bar moves as your team logs time Customer portal Pause or end a retainer and keep its history Pause holds the invoices until you resume. End Retainer stops the schedule and closes the month on the day you end it, and every invoice, month and time entry stays on the retainer page. End Retainer asks you to confirm first Full history kept Start a new retainer to begin again Renew the terms from the next invoice Change the hours, carry-over, extra-hour rate or projects, and Invoice Crowd shows the current and proposed terms before you save: the change starts with the next invoice and the current month keeps its terms. The retainer page shows the Saved renewal with its date, and Copy Renewal Summary gives you the new terms to paste into an estimate or proposal for your client to approve. The current month keeps its terms Saved renewal with its start date Copy Renewal Summary for client approval Built in The details of a retainer How the hours are set, counted, carried and billed, and who can change them. Set the hours in quarter-hour steps. The monthly amount and the price per hour come from the retainer line on the invoice. Included 30 h each month Monthly $3,600 retainer line Per hour $120.00 from the line Carry over or expire Unused hours carry into the following months for as long as you set, then expire. Or let them expire at the end of each month. September unused 6 h Carried into October in Used first in October Left to expire 0 h bal Extra hours, next invoice Hours beyond what was available become one Extra Hours line on the next invoice, at the rate you set. August available 32 h August used 33.5 h Extra Hours 1.5 h $195.00 cn INV-2198 total $3,795.00 Or absorb extra hours Choose Don't Bill Extra Hours and the extra time is recorded on the month, off the invoice. #4941e3 Bill on Next Invoice $130.00 / h Off #28c76f Don't Bill Extra Hours Recorded only On #ff9f43 September extra Off the invoice 2 h Never billed twice Time logged Counts Month closes Stamped Wizard Left out Retainer time stays off other invoices Running Low and Over Limit Tiles count retainers under 20% of their hours and those over the limit, with the extra waiting to bill. Active $10,110 a month up Running Low under 20% bad Over Limit $420 to bill Pause and resume Pause stops the invoices until you resume, with Undo right in the notice, and the list shows the date the retainer was paused. Brand Support BH #00bad1 Bluefin Hospitality $1,440.00 ok Paused draft Invoices restart when you resume End Retainer Ending stops the schedule, expires unused hours and keeps every invoice and time entry on the retainer page. Confirm Today History Kept Unused hours expire Month by month The Months table lists each month's invoice and status, hours used, hours carried in and out, and any extra hours. October 2026 22.5 of 36 h September 2026 24 of 30 h August 2026 33.5 of 32 h July 2026 28 of 30 h Hours bar in the portal Clients see the month's hours used, left and carried on their project page, while your rates stay private. Used 22.5 h October Left 13.5 h 26 days left Carried from September Team permissions Team permissions decide who can view, pause, end or adjust a retainer. Invoices View Recurring Pause, End Worklog Paid plans Retainers are included on paid plans, with Worklog for time tracking. New retainers Time tracking live Questions Retainers, answered Does Invoice Crowd support client retainers? Yes. Invoice Crowd has Retainers: a monthly recurring invoice with a set number of hours included each month. Billable time your team logs on the client's chosen projects counts against those hours, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours are billed on the next invoice. Retainers are on paid plans and sit under Invoicing, next to Recurring. What happens to unused retainer hours? You choose for each retainer: Carry Over for up to a number of months, after which they expire, or Expire at the End of Each Month. Carried hours are used before the month's own hours, oldest first, and the retainer page shows how many hours were carried in, carried to the next month and expired each month. How are hours over the retainer billed? When a month closes, hours over what was available go on the next invoice as one Extra Hours line for that month, at the rate you set (by default the retainer's own price per hour) and with the same taxes as the retainer line. You can also choose Don't Bill Extra Hours to record the time without billing it. Can I change a retainer's hours for next month? Yes. Edit the retainer and change the hours, carry-over, extra-hour rate or projects. Invoice Crowd shows the current and proposed terms before you save, applies them from the next invoice and keeps the current month as it is. The retainer page then shows the Saved renewal, and Copy Renewal Summary gives you text to paste into an estimate or proposal when you want the client's approval. Is retainer time billed to the minute? Yes. Extra hours are priced from the exact time logged, so one minute at $100.00 an hour bills $1.67, rounded once in the retainer's currency, while hours on screen stay rounded for easy reading. When you end a retainer with extra hours still to bill, Review final extra hours creates an invoice draft for just those hours, without repeating the monthly fee. Which time counts toward a retainer? Billable time on the projects you tick under Time That Counts, all belonging to the retainer's customer, logged from the day the month's invoice is created. Time is logged in the Timesheet or with the header timer, which are part of Worklog on paid plans. On the retainer page, the Counts switch leaves an entry out for the current month, and that entry is then billed like any other time. How does Invoice Crowd keep hours from being billed twice? Can my client see how many retainer hours are left? Yes, in hours only. The project page in the customer portal shows the open month's hours bar: hours used, hours left and hours carried over. Your rates, the amounts and the retainer page stay private. How do retainers post to my accounting? Like any other invoice. Each monthly retainer invoice is an ordinary sales invoice, recorded when it is issued, and an Extra Hours line posts like any other invoice line. Put your monthly retainers on an hour bank Start a retainer from Invoicing, set the hours included each month, tick the projects whose time counts, and let the next invoice carry any extra hours. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Client-Removable Estimate Items URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/optional-items/ Let clients remove the estimate items they don't need before they approve and sign. Totals update as they go and your prices stay protected. Estimates and purchase orders Let clients remove estimate items before they approve Invoice Crowd's Remove Items option lets a client take out the lines they don't need before approving and signing, and the total recalculates as they go. It works on estimates and purchase orders. Try Invoice Crowd See all features Home Features Client-Removable Items One switch per document Totals update as they choose Saved with the signature pop How it works Quotes clients can shape themselves Send one estimate with every option on it. The client removes what they don't need, the total updates, and the version they sign is the one you bill. Before you send You decide Switch on Remove Items Turn on Remove Items in the Options panel of an estimate or purchase order, and your client can take out lines before they approve it online. The client picks the lines For estimates and purchase orders Your prices stay protected The client sees your items, rates, taxes and discounts exactly as you saved them. They choose what to keep, and the pricing stays yours. Your item names and details Your rates, as you set them Tax and discounts recalculated What the client sees Their choice, your terms Remove what they don't need The client removes the lines they don't want in a click. The remaining lines keep their order, and the total updates straight away. At least one line always kept Your lines, in your order Totals update as they go Pair it with adjustable quantities Switch on Customize Quantity as well, and the client can also set how many of each remaining line they need, up to 1,000,000. Set how many of each Up to 1,000,000 per line Removal and quantity in one visit At approval One signed version Sign exactly what they chose When the client approves, Invoice Crowd recalculates the total from your saved prices and records their signature on the version they chose, so everyone is clear on what was agreed. Priced from your saved rates Their selection becomes the estimate Signature and scope saved together Bill exactly what was approved Convert the approved estimate to an invoice as usual, and the lines the client kept carry straight across with the agreed total. The approved scope is the record Removed lines stay off the invoice Manual or automatic conversion Built in Flexibility for clients, control for you Every safeguard you need to offer choice with confidence. Offer line removal on the estimates and purchase orders your clients approve online. Estimates #6366f1 Purchase Orders #14b8a6 Approve & Sign #10b981 Remove Items #ec4899 Approved online by your client Packages and add-ons in proposals In a proposal pricing table, Client pricing choices let the client pick one package or tick the optional add-ons you offer. Growth package $4,800.00 Launch copy add-on +$900.00 in Total $5,700.00 bal Always a valid quote At least one priced line stays on every approved document. Lines saved Removed by client −2 cn Last line Always kept Lines kept Your lines only Clients choose from the lines you added, so the scope stays yours to define. Lines submitted Chosen from Your lines Accepted 3 of 3 Item details protected Each item's name and SKU stay exactly as you saved them. Item ID Must match Name SKU Your layout kept The remaining lines stay in the order you arranged them. Brand identity system 1st Website design 2nd Launch copy 3rd Your rates, protected Unit rates stay as you set them, whatever the client removes. Website design rate $6,400.00 Browser rate Ignored Saved rate used Rate Fixed Accurate totals Tax, discounts and totals recalculate from your saved prices with every change. Saved lines $13,650.00 Removed line −$1,200.00 Tax recalculated +$0.00 $12,450.00 Adjustable quantities Switch on Customize Quantity to let clients set how many of each line they need. On Customize Quantity Off Enable OTP Secure approval Every approval is verified against the latest version of the document before it is saved. Checking Approval verified Email OTP 481205 The client's choices are saved the moment they approve and sign. EST-01048 HV Harbor & Vine Co. $11,200.00 Sent pri Approved ok Lines saved with the signature One switch, whole document Remove Items applies to every line on the document, and the lines the client keeps become the saved scope. Whole document Lines offered Kept lines Saved scope live Questions Client-removable items, answered Which lines can a client remove? Any line on the estimate or purchase order, as long as at least one priced line remains. Remove Items is one switch for the whole document, so it suits quotes where every line is an option the client can take or leave. Do my prices stay the same when a client removes lines? Yes. Item names, rates, taxes and discounts always come from your saved estimate. The client chooses which lines to keep, and the total recalculates from your prices. Can the client change quantity too? Yes, when Customize Quantity is also switched on. The client can set any quantity up to 1,000,000 on the lines they keep, and the total recalculates before they approve. When are the changes saved? The moment the client approves. Their chosen lines, the recalculated total and their signature are saved together, so the approved document is a complete record of what was agreed. Can a proposal include optional add-ons or packages? Yes. In an Invoice Crowd proposal, open a pricing table's settings and set Client pricing choices to Choose a package, where the client picks one package and you can mark a Recommended package, or to Services and add-ons, where every line is required unless you tick Optional service or add-on, and an optional line can be Included by default. Only the selected items count toward the total, and the client's choices are saved when they approve. Give clients a choice, keep control of the quote Switch on Remove Items, send one estimate with every option on it, and bill the version your client signs. Your prices protected Signed and saved together --- ## Change Quantity URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/change-quantity/ Let clients set the quantity on each estimate line before they approve and sign. Totals recalculate instantly and the invoice uses their numbers. Let clients set the quantities before they sign Invoice Crowd's Customize Quantity option lets a client change the quantity on each line before approving and signing, and the total recalculates. It works on estimates and purchase orders, for quantities up to 1,000,000. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Change Quantity Estimates and purchase orders Up to 1,000,000 per line Saved with approval pop What is inside Let clients size the order themselves Clients often want more of one thing and less of another. Customizable quantity lets them set it on the estimate itself. Adjust with precision The client's edit Quantities move up or down The client opens the estimate and changes the number against a line: three licenses rather than five, two days of editing rather than one. The document totals itself again as they work, so the price they are agreeing to is the price of what they have actually asked for. Adjusted right on the estimate Any quantity up to 1,000,000 Totals recalculate as the numbers change Signed off once it fits When the quantities are right, the client signs the estimate as it now stands. The signature sits on the adjusted document, so both sides know exactly which numbers were agreed. One document, adjusted and signed in a single pass E-signature captured in the browser The signed version records the agreed figures The benefits on your side Fewer guesses, fewer rounds Requirements straight from the client Let the client set the quantity and skip the guesswork. What comes back is exactly what they intend to buy, so every estimate is a more reliable forecast of the work ahead and the revenue attached to it. Accurate requirements instead of an assumption Deliver the amount actually needed Open quotes forecast more realistically Less back and forth over a number The quantity changes on the document itself, so both sides read the same figures and the estimate always reflects what the client asked for. One shared set of figures Nothing to retype Clients get exactly what they asked for Once it is agreed What happens downstream Works alongside client-removable items Removable lines and adjustable quantities sit on the same estimate. A client can drop the extras they do not want, set how many of the ones they kept, and sign the result in one visit. Deselect an item, then size the rest Both choices recorded on the signed estimate Finalized in a single visit Client-removable line items The invoice uses the client's numbers Whatever the client settled on is what gets billed. Converting the approved estimate brings the adjusted quantities across, whether you do it by hand or leave it to run automatically, so the invoice always matches what was signed. Adjusted quantities reflected on conversion Works with manual and automatic conversion The invoice total is the signed total Converting to an invoice Also included Around an adjustable estimate Everything that takes an adjustable estimate from quote to payment. Generous quantity range Clients can enter any quantity up to 1,000,000 on each line, with the total updating as they go. Lowest quantity Above 0 Highest quantity 1,000,000 Total Updates live Rate Fixed bal Change notifications You are notified when the client approves, and the quantities they set are saved with that approval. EST-01046 LA #eab308 Lumen Architects $8,975.00 Sent pri Viewed warn Approved ok Quantities saved with approval Saved items Adjustable lines can come from your item catalog or be typed for one estimate. Design Design system licence $450.00 Website design $6,400.00 Design sprint (typed) $1,800.00 Tax and discounts Custom rates apply to the new quantity, so a bigger order still totals correctly. Licences × 3 $1,350.00 Discount 10% −$135.00 cn Sales Tax 8.5% +$103.28 in $1,318.28 Signed in the browser The adjusted estimate takes an e-signature online, with no printing or scanning involved. Customer portal Clients return to see the quantities they chose and the document they signed. Licences × 3 PDF Download Automatic conversion An approved estimate can raise its invoice on its own, adjusted figures included. Auto Convert On INV-2042 × 3 licences Adjusted figures included Deposits and balances Ask for a deposit on the estimate so the client pays part of the agreed total as they accept, and bill the rest when the work lands. Approved total Deposit 40% −$3,590.00 Deposit Due $3,590.00 Balance later $5,385.00 Multiple currencies Quantities and totals hold up in whichever currency the client is quoted in. Currency EUR €1,230.00 Onboarding €440.00 €1,670.00 Longer proposals A bigger pitch carries priced sections and an e-signature for the same kind of sign-off. Pricing Table Proposal Allow Qty Customization Signed Same idea in proposals Customer records The signed estimate is filed against the customer it belongs to, with its history. Customer Try it free Send an estimate with adjustable quantities during your 30-day free trial. Customize Quantity Remove Items Off Enable OTP live Questions Customizable quantity, answered How far can a client adjust a quantity? Up to 1,000,000 on each line. Invoice Crowd recalculates the document before approval, so the accepted scope and totals are always clear. Do I get notified when a client adjusts the quantity? Yes, when the client approves the estimate. The approved document stores the quantities they set, so from that point you are scheduling and billing against their figures. Can this be used together with client-removable items? Yes. A client can select or deselect the client-removable lines first, then set the quantities on whatever they have kept, and sign once at the end. Both decisions are recorded on the same signed estimate. Are the adjusted quantities used when the estimate becomes an invoice? Yes. The quantities the client set carry through automatically when the approved estimate is converted, so the invoice bills the amount that was signed for rather than a figure someone has to transfer by hand. Does the total update while the client is editing? Yes. Line amounts, tax and any discount recalculate as the quantity changes, so the client always sees the real cost of the version in front of them before they sign. Do my rates stay the same when a client changes a quantity? Yes. Customizable quantity covers how many, never how much each. Your rates, taxes and discounts stay exactly as you set them. Let the estimate match what they actually need Turn on customizable quantity, send the estimate once, and let the client size the job right on the document. Compare plans 30-day free trial Rates stay yours Signed figures reach the invoice --- ## Payment Links URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/payment-links/ Sell any offer from one shareable payment link. Every buyer pays through your gateways and gets their own numbered invoice, filed automatically. Features One payment link, an invoice for every buyer Build a priced offer once and share it anywhere as a link. Any number of customers can open it, confirm their email and pay through the gateways you choose, and each purchase becomes its own numbered invoice in your sales list. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Payment Links One link, many buyers Paid through your gateways Email-verified checkout pop What is inside Price the offer once, and let each sale raise its own invoice A Payment Link is a priced document open to any buyer. You build it in the invoice editor, tick the gateways it accepts and share the URL. Every buyer verifies their email, pays, and gets their own numbered invoice under their own customer record. Building the link One offer, one URL Price it once, then tick the gateways Create Payment Link opens the familiar invoice editor. Give the link a name so buyers know what they are purchasing, then add line items, discounts, taxes, shipping, notes and custom fields. Tick the gateways this link accepts, save, and copy the URL. Choose the gateways per link Preview opens the public page as a buyer sees it Copy Link gives you the URL to publish One link, any number of buyers An invoice is addressed to one customer. A Payment Link is open to anyone: share the same URL as widely as you like and every buyer can pay it. The list shows each link's name, its total and how many purchases it has produced. Copy, preview, duplicate or report Share it anywhere you sell Email confirmed at checkout How buyers pay Verified before anything is charged Email verified before anything is charged A buyer presses Pay and picks one of the gateways you attached. Invoice Crowd emails them a six-digit code to confirm their address, then collects a name, phone number and billing address before handing them to the gateway's secure checkout. Every buyer is verified, every time. No account needed to buy Disposable addresses filtered out Six-digit email code Let buyers set their own quantity Switch Customize Quantity on and buyers choose how many they need, with the total updating as they type. The charge is always calculated from your saved prices, discounts, taxes and shipping, so your pricing stays protected. Totals update as they type Charged at your saved prices Set a default, override per link After the payment One invoice per buyer Every purchase raises its own invoice Each purchase becomes a new invoice for that buyer, numbered in your normal invoice sequence and priced from the link you saved. It lands in your Invoices list, the link's Customers count goes up by one, and Report shows every invoice the link has raised. Next number in your sequence Split schedules carried across Filed under the buyer's record Confirmed, posted, and both of you emailed Once the gateway confirms the payment for the exact amount and currency, the invoice is marked paid, the income posts to your accounts, and confirmation emails go to the buyer and to you. Confirmed with the gateway Marked paid without you touching the invoice Both emails carry the payment receipt PDF Built in Everything a payment link handles A Payment Link turns one priced offer into a reusable, secure checkout, and every purchase joins the same sales and accounting workflow as the rest of your business. Your gateways, your choice Offer Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, GoCardless or the regional providers you already use. PayPal #3b82f6 Stripe #8b5cf6 Razorpay Square #2b2c40 GoCardless #eab308 Airwallex #f97316 PayTabs #14b8a6 M-Pesa #10b981 Configured for this profile Priced in your currency Price a link in the currency you sell in, and buyers see the gateways that accept it. Link currency KES Offered in Buyer sees Gateways for KES Price KES 4,500 bal Reusable for as long as you like A link has no expiry date and no purchase cap, so one URL can keep selling for as long as you offer it. Expires Never Purchase cap None Customers 126 so far up Every purchase creates an invoice Each sale raises its own invoice, and the Customers count shows how many purchases a link has made. Places sold 20 Next buyer Accepted Invoices raised 21 Watch Share it anywhere Add it to a website button, a social post, a message or your email signature. Copy Link Copied Link ready to publish Paste on a site, post or email Your pricing, protected Buyers can adjust quantities when you allow it, and every charge is calculated from the prices you saved. Qty set by buyer Saved rate $95.00 Priced from Your saved rate Charged $285.00 Pair it with recurring billing Use Payment Links for one-time offers, and recurring invoices or subscriptions for repeat billing, all in one account. Payment Link One-time offer Recurring SUB-00128 Subscription Automatic Repeat billing stays recurring Settled on the invoice Record payments and issue credit notes on the invoice each purchase creates, just like any other sale. Brand Starter Kit INV-2047 Manage Payments Credit Note On the invoice Managed like any other sale Quick, secure checkout Email codes are valid for 10 minutes, and each completed checkout step keeps the session fresh. Email code 10 min expires Checkout 15 min idle Each step Restarts window Returning buyers matched A buyer whose email already belongs to one of your customers is matched to that record rather than added a second time. priya@ Lumen Architects Existing Priya Nair Matched, not duplicated The options you know Units, late fees, the payment stub and the overdue notice are toggles in the same panel as the pricing, exactly as on an invoice. Unit Off Late Fees Payment Stub Your sales stay on record Delete a link whenever you are done with it; the invoices it raised stay in your Invoices list and your books. Delete link 18 invoices Kept Books Unchanged Invoices stay in your list live Questions Payment Links, answered What is payment link software? Payment link software creates a shareable web page for one priced offer that a customer can open and pay without an invoice being raised for them first. In Invoice Crowd the feature is called Payment Links: you price the offer once in the document editor, copy the URL, and every buyer who checks out gets their own numbered invoice raised from that link, filed under their own customer record. Can the same Payment Link be paid by more than one customer? Yes. A Payment Link in Invoice Crowd is reusable by design and open to any number of buyers. Everyone who pays gets a separate invoice under their own customer record, and the Payment Links list has a Customers column showing how many purchases each link has produced. Which payment gateways can a Payment Link use? A Payment Link can use any gateway configured for the business profile, including Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, GoCardless and regional providers. Choose which ones each link accepts in the editor's Payment Methods panel. Payment Links are included on paid plans. Do customers need an account to pay a Payment Link? Buyers don't need an account or a password. They open the link, choose a gateway, confirm their email with a six-digit code and enter a name, phone number and billing address. Invoice Crowd creates or matches the customer record, so a returning buyer using the same email address is recognized rather than duplicated. Does a Payment Link expire? Payment Links carry no expiry date and no usage cap, so a link keeps selling until you delete it. Deleting a link leaves the invoices it already raised untouched. Can customers choose how many they are buying? Yes, when Customize Quantity is switched on for that link. Each line's quantity becomes an editable field on the public page, the total updates as the buyer types, and the charge is always calculated from your saved rates, discounts and taxes. Share one URL and invoice every buyer Build the link in the same editor you use for invoices, tick the gateways it accepts, and copy the URL. Each buyer who checks out gets their own numbered invoice, filed under their own customer record. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Payment Gateways URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/payment-gateways/ Connect 15 payment gateways, including Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square and Paystack, and let customers pay invoices the way they prefer. Connect the payment gateways your customers already use Invoice Crowd works with 15 payment gateways, including PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, GoCardless and Paystack, each connected with your own merchant account. Enable the ones that suit your markets, and customers choose their favorite when they pay. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Payment Gateways 15 payment gateways Gateway fees per provider Breakdown by gateway pop What is inside One screen for every payment gateway Gateways are configured once at the account level. After that they apply to invoices, payment links and recurring billing alike, with their fees and their reporting handled in the same place. The gateways themselves Pick as many as you need 15 gateways, ready to connect PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack are all included on paid plans, with PayPal on every plan, and you can run as many at once as you like. Each one connects with your own merchant credentials, so the relationship and the rates stay between you and the processor. Connect as many as you need Enable or disable one at any time Billing clients in other countries Different markets favor different providers, so you can offer several. The gateways support a range of currencies, so an invoice raised in your client's currency can be paid in it, while your own reporting stays in your base currency. A processor for each market you sell into Multiple currencies supported Base-currency reporting stays intact Multi-currency invoicing Fees and choice Who pays what, and how they pay it Set a percentage fee against each gateway. When a customer settles through that gateway, the charge is applied to the invoice for you, so you recover processing costs without working them out by hand. A percentage fee per gateway Applied when that gateway is used Calculated for you The customer picks how to pay Whatever you have enabled is offered on the invoice, and the customer chooses between them at the point of paying. They pay with the provider they trust, which removes one more reason to delay. All enabled gateways shown side by side Chosen at the moment of payment The same options on invoices and payment links Watching the money Which gateway earns its keep A breakdown by gateway Received amounts are split out by the gateway that carried them, so you can see whether your clients reach for PayPal, a card or a local processor. Over a few months that tells you which connections are worth keeping and which are costing more than they return. Amounts received grouped per gateway Shows what your clients actually prefer Compare one connection against another Reporting on payments Transactions as they happen Each payment raises a notification as it comes in, whichever gateway processed it, and lands against the invoice at the same moment. A payment that needs a second look, or a refund made in the provider's dashboard, is held in Payments Needing Review for you to decide on. Your books stay current without end-of-day exports. A notification per transaction Applied to the invoice as it clears Nothing to import from the processor Reconciliation and the ledger Also included Everything your gateways connect to Gateways are built in. They sit under invoices, payment links and recurring billing, and they feed the same reports. Verified payments Every payment is confirmed with the provider before the invoice is marked paid. INV-2041 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Sent info Processing draft Paid ok Marked paid once Stripe confirms Currency flexibility Invoice an overseas client in their own currency and let the gateway settle it. Invoice currency EUR Amount Due €3,960.00 Paid via Stripe −€3,960.00 cn Balance €0.00 bal Enable and disable Turn a gateway on or off whenever your business or your client base changes. PayPal On Stripe Razorpay Fees on the invoice Gateway charges are added to the document rather than discovered at the end of the month. Subtotal Gateway Fees (2.9%) +$361.05 in Total $12,811.05 Payment links The same gateways serve a fixed-price offer sold from a shareable link, not just invoices. Copy Link Copied Pay Using Stripe Paid · Brand workshop Recurring charges A repeating invoice collects automatically through subscription-ready gateways such as Stripe, Square and GoCardless, cycle after cycle. August SUB-00128 $4,500.00 #14b8a6 September #f59e0b October Deposits and part payments Split an invoice or take a deposit; the gateway handles each amount separately. Deposit via Stripe −$4,980.00 Remaining $7,470.00 Security standards Card details are entered securely with the gateway and never stored in your account. Card entered At the gateway Verified By provider Result Invoice Crowd Card numbers are not held in your account Paid from the portal Clients can pay any open invoice from their portal with the options you offer. Portal Invoices Pay Now Same methods as the emailed invoice Several business profiles Each brand you run under one login can present its own set of payment options. NS ND #0ea5e9 BM Northwind Studio Stripe, PayPal Northwind Digital Brightpath Media Stripe, GBP Aged debt See what is still outstanding once gateway receipts have been applied to invoices. Age Debt $26,000 Current 1-30 31-60 61-90 91+ Posts to accounts Each confirmed payment is recorded against its invoice and posted to your books. INV-2041 · paid 10/02 Dr Bank Account Cr Accounts Receivable Journal balanced Dr = Cr live Questions Payment gateways, answered Can I enable or disable specific payment gateways? Yes. Each gateway is switched on or off independently, so you can run PayPal and Stripe today and add Razorpay when you start selling into a new market. Only the ones you have enabled appear to a customer at the point of payment. How does the gateway fee setting work? You set a percentage fee for each gateway in its payment settings. When a customer pays through that gateway, the fee is added to what they pay and shows on the invoice as Gateway Fees with its rate, so processing costs are not absorbed by you. How many gateways can I connect? As many as you like on paid plans. They can all run at the same time if that suits how you sell, and you can add one later without disturbing the gateways already in use. Customers see whichever of them you have enabled. How are the transactions kept secure? The payment itself takes place with the gateway, using the merchant account you connected. Card numbers are entered on the processor's side and are not stored in your invoicing account; what returns to Invoice Crowd is the record of the payment. Do I need my own account with each gateway? Yes. You connect your existing merchant accounts, which means the payout schedule and the processing rate remain whatever you agreed with that provider. The money goes straight to you, and Invoice Crowd records what came in and against which invoice. Can I tell which gateway my clients prefer? Yes. Amounts received are broken down by gateway, so you can compare what each one brought in over a period. That is usually enough to show whether a connection is earning its fees or whether your clients have quietly standardized on one. Which gateways can refund a payment from inside Invoice Crowd? Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless and Paystack. Choose Refund on the paid invoice and Invoice Crowd sends the refund through the provider, creating the credit note and recording the refund once the provider confirms it. For the other gateways, refund in the provider's own dashboard and record it in Invoice Crowd. What happens to my gateways if I move to the free plan? Your settings are kept safe. The free plan includes PayPal and Payment note, and your other gateways are set aside, ready to return the moment you upgrade. Customer subscriptions already running on a paid gateway keep collecting for 30 days and are then paused, never cancelled, while those on Braintree, Authorize.net and Telr keep running. Upgrading brings every gateway back and resumes paused subscriptions automatically. Can customers pay by bank QR code instead of a gateway? Yes, on paid plans. Bank QR puts a bank payment QR code for UPI, Pix, EPC QR (GiroCode), Swiss QR-bill, PayNow or PromptPay on the invoice and its PDF, with the amount due and the invoice number filled in. With no provider in between there are no gateway fees, and you mark the invoice paid when the money arrives or match it from your bank statement. Take the payment method the customer expects Connect the gateways that match the markets you sell into, set the fees against each one, and let the customer pick from there. Compare plans 30-day free trial Cancel anytime --- ## Customer Portal URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/customer-portal/ Give every client a secure login to view, approve, download and pay their estimates, invoices and proposals in your Invoice Crowd customer portal. Give every customer a login to their own records The Invoice Crowd customer portal gives each client their own sign-in to the estimates, invoices, recurring invoices, credit notes, proposals and projects you choose to share. They read the history themselves, approve or decline, pay what is due, and stop emailing you for copies. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Customer Portal Access set per customer A unique login each Revoke it at any time pop What is inside A dedicated space for every customer Each client gets a dashboard that reflects only their own dealings with your business: what you quoted them, what you billed them, and what is still running. What you open up Decided one customer at a time Selective access, customer by customer You decide what each customer is allowed to see. Grant access to estimates, invoices, recurring invoices, payment links they bought, credit notes, projects and proposals, in any combination the relationship warrants, so a long-standing client and a first job each get the right view. Seven kinds of document granted separately Set per customer, not across the account Change what is shared whenever you want Customer records Estimate and invoice access Where you grant it, the client can open both current and historic documents. The estimate they approved in March sits with the invoice that followed it, which gives them the whole financial thread with your business instead of whichever email they managed to keep. Past and present documents in one list Downloadable when they need a copy Self-serve, any time Estimates What the customer sees Their side of the ledger A complete transactional overview The portal lists the recurring invoices a customer is currently on alongside the transactions that have already been settled. Someone on a monthly retainer can check what is billing, when it bills and what they have paid so far, and see an hours bar on the project page, without opening a spreadsheet or asking your accounts team. Active recurring invoices shown in full History of what has already been paid One view of everything they owe Recurring invoices Kept current, not a monthly export The portal reads from the same records you work in, so a new invoice, a recorded payment or an approved estimate shows up on the customer's side as it happens. Everyone works from the same, up-to-date picture. Reflects the records as they stand New documents appear once you send them Payments show against the right invoice Statements of account Clients review and approve delivered work Share finished work from a project's Delivery Review tab and your client opens it in the portal, or through a private link, to Approve work or Request changes. Their dashboard leads with Needs your attention, grouping estimates and proposals to review, invoices to pay and work ready for review, so every decision has one place to happen. Approve work or Request changes Needs your attention on the dashboard Files and links shared with each revision Access and trust Open, but controlled Secure access with a unique login Every customer has their own credentials rather than a shared password or a public link that circulates by email. One client can never see another client's documents, and if a relationship comes to an end you withdraw access to that one portal without touching anybody else's. Individual credentials per customer Invited by you, not opened to the public Access can be removed at any point Transparency your clients can check When a customer can look up their own position, the back and forth over what was billed and when largely stops. The queries that do arrive are specific, because the person asking is reading the same document you are, which makes them faster to answer. Fewer requests for copies of old invoices Questions arrive with a document reference Full transparency on their account Also included What the portal is connected to The portal is a window onto the account you already run. It stays in sync automatically, with nothing extra to maintain. Per-customer access Decide for each client whether they see estimates, invoices, recurring invoices, credit notes, proposals, projects or payment links. Harbor & Vine Invoices Recurring Invoices Unique logins Each customer gets their own credentials, so one client never sees another client's documents. Create Now Invited Customer joined portal Email + password Recurring visibility Active schedules appear beside the invoices they have already generated and the payments made. SUB-00128 Monthly INV-2031 Paid INV-2019 Next Send 10/01/2026 bal Invoice history Past and current invoices sit in one list the customer can read without asking you. HV #6366f1 INV-2041 Not Paid Estimates on file Clients can reopen an estimate they were sent and check what they approved. EST-01048 Harbor & Vine Co. $12,450.00 Sent pri Approved ok Reopen and download any time Pay what is due A customer can settle an outstanding invoice through the gateway you have connected. Pay Now Stripe In the portal Through your connected gateway Customer profiles The portal draws on the same customer record you invoice from, not a separate list. Harb Portal Hannah Draper accounts@harborandvine.co Item choices respected Where an estimate allowed item removal, the approved estimate in the portal shows the lines the client kept. Brand identity system $4,800.00 Website design $6,400.00 Photography day Removed cn Approved total $11,200.00 Their billing currency Documents display in the currency the customer was billed in. Customer Currency GBP INV-2045 £6,900.00 Shown in Several brands Run more than one business profile and a customer sees only the brand they deal with. Northwind Studio Northwind Digital #3b82f6 Harbor Lane Consulting #14b8a6 Pixel & Pine #10b981 One brand per portal Approved to invoiced An approved estimate becomes an invoice that appears in the same portal shortly after. Created Both listed Same portal, shortly after Part payments Deposits and staged payments show against the invoice so the balance is never in doubt. Deposit Requested −$4,980.00 $4,980.00 Balance $7,470.00 live Questions The customer portal, answered Is the customer portal secure? Yes. Each customer signs in with their own email and password, with optional two-factor sign-in, so nobody sees anyone else's documents. Access is granted by you rather than opened to the public, and it can be withdrawn from a single client without affecting the rest. Can customers change anything in the portal? Only within what you allow. A customer can view and download the documents you have shared, approve or decline estimates and proposals, pay an invoice that is due, stop a recurring invoice or cancel a gateway subscription, approve or question a week of project hours, and approve delivered work or request changes. Your documents and data stay exactly as you sent them. How does a customer get access? You invite them from the Customer Portal screen. They receive an invitation email, choose Create Now and set up their login with their email address and a password. There is nothing for them to install and no subscription for them to buy. What if I no longer want a customer to have access? Withdraw it. Access is controlled by you for each customer individually, so you can remove a portal login at any time, for any reason, without disturbing the documents themselves or anyone else's access to theirs. What exactly can a customer see once they are in? Only what you granted. That can be their estimates, invoices, recurring invoices, credit notes, proposals, projects and the payment links they bought, in any combination, with status badges such as Paid, Overdue, Partially Paid, Accepted or Declined. Whatever you share, they see their own dealings with your business and nothing belonging to another client. Can a customer pay an invoice from the portal? Yes, where you have a payment gateway connected. The invoice they are looking at can be paid in the same place, which saves the separate email with a payment link and keeps the record of the payment on that invoice. Can customers download receipts or a statement? Yes. Each payment has a Download Receipt link on the portal dashboard and on the invoice page, and you can download an Activity or Outstanding Statement of Account for any customer from your Customers list to send them. Can clients approve the hours I bill them? Yes, for projects you share in the portal. On the project overview a client can approve or question each week's billable hours. They see hours only, never your rates, and you get a notification with their decision. Approved weeks show up when you build the invoice from your timesheets. Can clients approve finished work in the portal? Yes. Publish a delivery on the project's Delivery Review tab and share it, and the client reviews the files and links in the portal or through a private link, then chooses Approve work or Request changes. Each decision stays with the project, and revised work goes out as a new review. Delivery reviews are part of Worklog on paid plans. Which plans include the customer portal? The customer portal is part of the paid plans. Your customers don't pay anything and have nothing to install; you invite them from the Customer Portal screen. Let clients look it up themselves Open the portal for the customers who ask you the most questions, and see how many of them stop needing to ask. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Nothing for clients to install --- ## Customer Management URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/manage-customer/ Keep every customer's contact details, invoices, payments and files in one record, with search as you type, statements and CSV export. One record per customer, and every invoice one filter away An Invoice Crowd customer record keeps a client's contact details, extra email contacts, currency, tax number and billing and shipping addresses in one form, and View Customer shows the invoices raised for them and the payments they have made. Search finds a record as you type. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Customers Every detail in one form Search as you type Export the list anytime pop What is inside Everything about one client, on one screen The customer section is where contact details, invoice history and attachments meet. It exists so that a question about one client can be answered from one screen instead of four. The record itself Who they are and what they bought A single profile for each customer Open a customer and every detail your documents use is in one form: company and contact names, email and extra contacts, address, currency, tax number and shipping address. The same form has a switch to pause automatic reminders for that customer, so everything about them lives in one place. Contact, billing and shipping details in one form The billing address used on every document Entered once, reused on everything you raise Details corrected in place Contact details go stale: people change roles, companies move, an email starts bouncing. Update the record and the correction carries to whatever you send next, so you fix a detail once instead of on invoice after invoice. Edit any field on the record Corrections carry to the next document One record, always current What they have been sent Invoices and files, kept together Every invoice, paid and outstanding Open View Customer and the Invoices tab lists every invoice raised for them, showing what has been settled and what is still open, with their payments on the Payments tab. You can also filter the invoice list by customer. Before a conversation about money, that list answers how much they owe and how long it has been sitting there. Sent, paid and pending in one list The outstanding balance for that customer Open any invoice straight from the list Raising the invoice Attachments kept with the documents Files travel with the documents you send the customer rather than with a mail thread. A signed agreement or a specification attached to an invoice stays there, under View Attachments, for the client and for you, for as long as the document exists. Attachments held on each document Opened from the document, not the inbox Available for as long as the record exists Getting to the right person Find them, or take the list elsewhere Search that narrows as you type Type part of a name, a company or an email address and the list narrows to the matching customers. It is built for the moment a client calls and you want their record open before the conversation gets going. Match on name, company or email Results narrow with each character Searches the whole customer list Export the list or pipe it out A customer list is yours to move. Export it for a mailing tool, a spreadsheet or an accountant, set the Customer created webhook on the Integrations page, or connect through Zapier or Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. Your data is always yours to take. Export the customer list in full Webhooks to a URL you control Zapier and Pabbly Connect Outbound webhooks Also included What else reads from the customer record A customer record is the hub of your billing. Invoicing, reporting and portal access all point back to it. Their own portal login Customers sign in to view, approve, download and pay what you have sent them. Invite Customer Portal Create Now Email + password Approve, pay Download Recurring agreements See which customers are on a schedule and what each cycle bills them. #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. SUB-00128 · Monthly $4,500.00 #14b8a6 Kestrel Analytics SUB-00127 · Monthly $2,800.00 #ec4899 Oakridge Dental Group SUB-00125 · Monthly $1,950.00 Per-client late fees Set late fees per invoice, so a long-standing client can have different terms from the ones a new client gets. Late Fees · INV-2041 Off Late Fees · INV-2034 1.5% Late Fees · INV-2027 Flat $46 Buyers become customers Someone who pays through a payment link is added as a customer record. Brand Starter Kit Payment Link Customer Details Buyer Customer Created Added after email verification Currency per customer Bill an overseas client in their currency while your reporting stays in yours. Customer Currency GBP INV-2045 £6,900.00 Exchange Rate 1.3400 Your reports $9,246.00 bal Estimates and proposals Estimates and proposals are raised against the same customer record, and accepted ones convert into invoices for it. HV Brand Identity Refresh Proposal EST-01048 Estimate INV-2041 Invoice Business profile assignment Assign a customer to one or more business profiles and filter the list by business, all from one login. Northwind Studio Northwind Digital #3b82f6 Harbor Lane Consulting Pixel & Pine #10b981 Assigned per customer Notify your own systems the moment a customer is created or updated. Customer created #ff4f00 Your CRM Mailing list Spreadsheet Custom fields Put the reference number or account code a client insists on onto their invoices, or fill it in from their record. Account code HV-4410 PO number PO-7781 Cost centre Marketing Aged debt report See which customers are behind and by how long, across the whole list. Age Debt $13,174 Current 1-30 31-60 61-90 91+ Statement of Account Download an Activity or Outstanding statement PDF for any customer, per currency, straight from the customer list. Opening Balance $2,400.00 +$4,800.00 Payment -$3,000.00 Amount Due $4,200.00 Team access Team members with the right role can work from the same customer records. AM SB JC #eab308 Alex Morgan Owner Sofia Bennett James Carter Invoices live Questions Customer records, answered How many customers can I add? Your plan sets the number: the free Basic plan holds 5 customer profiles, and paid plans hold more, up to unlimited on Business. Can I export my customer list? Yes. The list can be exported for use outside Invoice Crowd, whether that is a mailing tool, a spreadsheet, or handing contact details to an accountant. Your customer data is always yours. Can I connect customer records to my CRM? Yes, through Zapier or Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in: pass new customers to other apps, or create them from other apps. You can also export the list, or set the outbound Customer created webhook to notify a URL you control. What is kept on a customer record? Contact and billing details, extra email contacts with CC or BCC, the customer's currency, business profile, tax number, notes, a shipping address and a switch that stops automatic reminders to them. Open View Customer to see their invoices, payments and files in one panel. Can customers see their own invoice history? Yes, through the customer portal. They sign in to view what has been sent, approve estimates, download documents and pay outstanding invoices, which cuts down the emails asking you to resend something they already have. Who can see my customer records? You and the team members you invite, with the access their role allows. Members can be limited to selected customers, and each customer sees only their own documents in the portal. Can I stop automatic reminders for one customer? Yes. Open the customer, go to the Additional tab and switch on Don't send automatic reminders to this customer. Scheduled reminders for their invoices, estimates and proposals are then skipped, while you can still send one yourself with Send Reminder. Can I give a customer a statement of account? Yes. Choose Statement of Account on the customer in your Customers list, pick Activity for a period or Outstanding for unpaid invoices on a date, choose the currency and select Download PDF. Then attach the PDF to your own message. Put every customer on a record worth opening Contact details, invoice history and attachments in one place, and a search that gets you there before the client has finished saying their name. Compare plans 30-day free trial No card details asked for Export your list whenever you want --- ## Customer Statements URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/customer-statements/ Download an Activity or Outstanding statement of account for any customer: opening balance, every invoice and payment, ageing and the amount due. Features A statement of account for any customer, in two clicks Invoice Crowd builds a customer's Statement of Account straight from your invoices, payments and credits. Choose Activity for everything that happened in a period, or Outstanding for what is still unpaid on a date, and download a PDF with the amount due in each currency the customer is billed in. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Customer Statements Activity and Outstanding statements Amount due per currency Included on every plan pop What is inside From the customer list to a statement they can check A statement reads from the same invoices, payments and credit notes you already record, so there is nothing to compile by hand and nothing to keep in step. Choosing the statement From the customer list Start from the customer Every customer card and row in the Customers list has a Statement of Account action. It opens a short dialog with the customer's name, the statement type, the dates and the currency, and the dates start on this month, or today for an Outstanding statement, so most statements need one click to confirm. Statement of Account on every customer Dates filled in for you One currency or All Currencies Customer records Activity or Outstanding Activity covers a period, From and To: the opening balance, every invoice, payment and credit in between, and the balance due at the end. Outstanding is a snapshot As Of one date: the invoices still unpaid, any unused credit and how far overdue each invoice is. Activity: a period, start to finish Outstanding: unpaid invoices on a date Choose the one the conversation needs What the PDF shows Line by line Every movement, opening to closing An Activity statement starts from the Opening Balance and lists each Invoice, Payment Received, Credit Note, Credit Applied, Advance Applied, Refund and Written Off line in date order, with a running balance, so the customer can follow how the amount due was reached. Opening Balance on the start date Running balance on every line Amount Due at the close Payments Received Unpaid invoices and how old they are An Outstanding statement lists each open invoice with its due date and balance, shows Unused Credits separately, and adds an ageing strip in the same buckets as the Age Debt report: Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days, with the Total Due. Open invoices with due dates Unused credits shown, not hidden Ageing from Current to 91+ days Age Debt report Numbers you can send Checked before you send Agrees with your Age Debt report Opening and closing balances are checked against the Age Debt figures for the same customer. Balances that changed without a dated record still appear, as Settled at Issue or Balance Adjustment, rather than being left out, and if a statement ever disagrees with Age Debt, the PDF says so before you send it. Reconciled to Age Debt Every balance change explained A clear warning if something disagrees Per currency, in your language A customer billed in more than one currency gets one section and one Amount Due box per currency, so every figure matches what they were billed. The PDF uses the shared report layout with your letterhead and a Statement To block, is produced in the language of the person downloading it, and is named after the business, the customer and the period. One Amount Due per currency Your letterhead and the customer's details Available in all eight interface languages Multi-currency Built in The details behind every statement Statements follow the same records, permissions and currencies as the rest of the account. Statement To The customer's name and address sit under your letterhead, with the Statement Date and the period or date covered. Statement HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $13,400.00 Activity info 10/01–10/31 draft Statement Date 10/31/2026 Credits and advances Credit notes and overpayments applied to invoices appear as lines; advance payments held are noted separately from the amount due. Credit Note CN-00009 −$450.00 cn Advances held (noted) $500.00 Amount Due bal Credit Balance when they are ahead If the customer has paid more than they owe, the box reads Credit Balance instead of Amount Due. Invoiced $4,850.00 Payments and Credits −$5,300.00 Credit Balance $450.00 Team access The owner and team members with the Customers or Reports module can download statements; members limited to selected customers see only theirs. AM PN #14b8a6 TW #f59e0b Owner All Customers module Selected customers Theirs On every plan Statements are part of every Invoice Crowd plan, the free plan included, with no limit on how many you download. Free plan Included up Paid plans Downloads No limit Download, then send Download a polished PDF and attach it to your own message, ready to send. Download PDF Attach Your email Send To the customer A polished PDF, ready to send Per business profile A statement covers the customer's documents in the business profile you are working in, under that business's letterhead. NS BM Northwind Studio Letterhead Brightpath Media Customer portal alongside Customers with a portal login can open and download each invoice and payment receipt between statements. INV-2041 Download $12,450.00 Receipt RCT-P $6,000.00 INV-2047 $2,600.00 Built from your documents Invoices, payments, credit notes and refunds you already record are the statement's only source, so it never needs rekeying. Invoices Payments Credit notes Refunds PDF Nothing to rekey live Questions Customer statements, answered What is the difference between an Activity and an Outstanding statement? An Activity statement covers a period you choose, From and To: it starts at the opening balance, lists every invoice, payment and credit in date order with a running balance, and ends with the amount due. An Outstanding statement is a snapshot As Of one date: it lists only the invoices still unpaid, with their due dates, any unused credit and an ageing summary from Current to 91+ days. Do write-offs appear on a customer statement? Yes. When you write off an invoice's unpaid balance, the Activity statement lists it as Written Off on its date, and a later Reverse Write-Off appears as Write-Off Reversed, so the running balance and the amount due account for every change. How do I create a statement of account? Open Customers, choose Statement of Account on the customer, pick Activity or Outstanding, check the dates and the currency, then select Download PDF. The statement is prepared in the background and downloads when it is ready. What if a customer is billed in more than one currency? Each currency gets its own section and its own Amount Due, so nothing is converted into a single figure. Choose one currency in the dialog, or All Currencies to include every currency the customer has documents in. Does the statement match my Age Debt report? Yes. Opening and closing balances are checked against the Age Debt figures for the same customer, and the ageing buckets are the same: Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days. If a statement ever disagrees with Age Debt, the PDF shows a notice asking you to check the customer's documents before sending it. Which plans include customer statements? Every plan, including the free plan. Team members can download statements when their role includes the Customers or Reports module, and members limited to selected customers can only download statements for those customers. Answer "what do we owe you?" with one PDF Record invoices and payments as you already do, and the statement of account for any customer is ready whenever they ask. Compare plans Statements on every plan No card required to start 30-day free trial --- ## Bank QR Payments URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/bank-qr-payments/ Put a UPI, Pix, GiroCode, Swiss QR-bill, PayNow or PromptPay code on every invoice and PDF. Customers scan and pay by bank transfer, with no gateway fee. Features A bank payment QR code on every invoice Bank QR puts a payment QR code on your invoices and their PDFs. Your customer scans it with their banking app, and the amount due and the invoice number are filled in. It works with UPI, Pix, EPC QR (GiroCode), Swiss QR-bill, PayNow and PromptPay, with no gateway and no fees. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Bank QR Payments Six bank QR standards No gateway, no fees On paid plans pop What is inside From your bank details to a paid invoice Bank QR is a direct bank payment method. Invoice Crowd draws the code from your own account details, so the money goes straight from your customer's bank to yours. Setting it up Once, under Payment Methods Pick the QR standard your customers' banks read In Payment Methods, open Bank QR, choose a QR Standard and enter your details. Each standard takes what its banks need: a UPI ID and Payee Name for UPI, a Pix Key with Merchant Name and Merchant City for Pix, an IBAN and Beneficiary Name for EPC QR, an IBAN or QR-IBAN and your address for the Swiss QR-bill, a Mobile Number or UEN for PayNow, and a mobile number or national or tax ID for PromptPay. The details are checked as you save. UPI (India), INR Pix (Brazil), BRL EPC QR / GiroCode (SEPA), EUR One code per currency Each standard belongs to a currency, and the code appears on invoices in that currency. Swiss QR-bill works with CHF and EUR, PayNow with SGD and PromptPay with THB, and the editor warns you if an invoice's currency doesn't match. Swiss QR-bill, CHF or EUR PayNow (Singapore), SGD PromptPay (Thailand), THB What your customer sees On screen and on paper On the invoice page and the PDF Once the invoice is sent, the code shows on the invoice page under Scan to Pay with Your Banking App, in the phone layout's payment information, and on the PDF of every invoice template. UPI codes add Open in UPI App on a phone, and Pix codes add Copy Pix Code. The Swiss QR-bill prints its payment part on the PDF. Invoice page, phone layout and PDF Open in UPI App and Copy Pix Code Swiss QR-bill payment part Always the amount still due The code carries the current balance due, so after a part payment it asks for the rest, and the invoice number travels as the payment reference. When the invoice is paid or voided, the code disappears. Balance due filled in Invoice number as the reference Gone once the invoice is paid When the money arrives You confirm it Confirm payment in one step When the money reaches your account, choose Bank Transfer in Record Payment and the payment lands in your Bank QR account's own ledger account. You stay in full control of what is marked paid. Record Payment when it arrives Bank Transfer into the Bank QR account You confirm every payment Payments Received Matched from your bank statement Because the invoice number is the payment reference, it appears next to the payment on your bank statement and in the statement lines you import into Bank Reconciliation, which makes the match quick to find. Invoice number on the statement line Open Bank Reconciliation from the settings Matched by invoice number Bank reconciliation Built in The rules behind every code Bank QR follows each standard's published format and only shows where it can be paid. No gateway fee There is no provider in between, so Invoice Crowd adds no gateway fee to a Bank QR payment. Amount Due ₹84,960.00 Gateway Fees ₹0.00 You receive bal Ready when you send The code appears on an invoice as soon as it is sent, ready for your customer to scan. INV-2051 KA #14b8a6 Kestrel Analytics Draft draft Sent info QR shown ok Code appears once it is sent Built for one-off invoices Use Bank QR on invoices, and a subscription-ready gateway for recurring charges. Invoice One-off Bank QR Scan to pay Banking app Customer pays Pair a gateway for subscriptions Part payments After a part payment, the code asks for the remaining balance rather than the original total. Total Paid on 10/08 −₹33,984.00 cn QR asks for ₹50,976.00 Checked as you save IBANs, Pix keys, UPI IDs and phone numbers are validated in the format each standard requires. UPI ID Valid IBAN Pix Key Switched on per invoice Turn Bank QR on in the invoice editor's payment methods, like any other payment method. Razorpay On Stripe Use a merchant UPI ID For UPI, use a business (merchant) UPI ID to receive business payments. #4941e3 Merchant UPI ID Recommended Business #94a3b8 Personal UPI ID Can be limited Personal Payee Name On the code Required Alongside your gateways Offer Bank QR next to card gateways on the same invoice, and let the customer choose how to pay. #0c2451 #635bff PayPal #003087 Payment Note #64748b The customer chooses Paid plans Bank QR is included on every paid plan. Solo, Pro Included up Team, Business Standards live Questions Bank QR payments, answered Which bank QR codes does Invoice Crowd support? Six standards: UPI (India) for INR, Pix (Brazil) for BRL, EPC QR / GiroCode (SEPA) for EUR, Swiss QR-bill for CHF or EUR, PayNow (Singapore) for SGD and PromptPay (Thailand) for THB. How is Bank QR different from a payment gateway? Bank QR draws a code from your own bank or payment details, and the customer pays by bank transfer from their banking app. With no provider or checkout in between, there are no gateway fees. How do I mark a Bank QR payment as paid? Record the payment with Bank Transfer when the money arrives, or match it from your bank statement in Bank Reconciliation, where the invoice number appears as the payment reference. Where does the QR code appear? On the invoice page your customer opens, in its phone layout and on the invoice PDF, for every invoice template. It appears once the invoice is sent and disappears when it is paid. Can I put a UPI QR code on my invoices? Yes. Choose UPI (India) as the QR Standard and enter your UPI ID and Payee Name. The code shows on INR invoices, and customers on a phone can tap Open in UPI App. Which plans include Bank QR? Every paid plan. If you move to the free plan, your Bank QR details are kept and the code returns as soon as you upgrade. Let customers pay straight from their bank Add your bank details once, switch Bank QR on for an invoice, and the code follows it to the invoice page and the PDF. Compare plans No card required to start 30-day free trial Cancel anytime --- ## Payments URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/payments/ Let clients pay invoices online through 15 payment gateways, from PayPal and Stripe to Razorpay, with every payment recorded on its invoice. Accept payments online, directly from the invoice Invoice Crowd lets a client pay an invoice online the moment they open it, through the gateways you connect with your own merchant account. Each payment is recorded against the invoice once the provider confirms it. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Payments Pay from the invoice itself Set up in three steps Every payment on record pop What is inside Set it up once, get paid on every invoice Online payment is a setting on your account rather than a separate service. Choose what you accept, connect it once, and the option appears on every invoice you send. Three steps to getting paid Choose, connect, collect Choose the payment options you offer Start by deciding how you want to be paid. PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay and Airwallex are all available, and you can offer one of them or several. Whatever you switch on is what a client sees when they open an invoice, so the choice stays yours rather than the processor's. PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay and Airwallex Offer one option or all of them The same options across every invoice The full gateway list Connect your own merchant account Connecting a processor is a matter of adding your own account details in settings. From then on the money moves between your client and your merchant account; Invoice Crowd records the payment and marks the invoice as settled. Funds reach your bank on the processor's usual payout schedule. Your own merchant account, your own rates The invoice updates the moment it is paid Deposits land on the processor's schedule Paying from inside the invoice Nothing for the client to install Payment built into the document The invoice the client receives carries its payment options on the page, so reading the bill and starting the payment happen in one place. On a phone the Pay Invoice button stays pinned to the bottom of the screen. Pay opens the processor's own secure checkout, so card details go to the processor, not to you, and never sit in your invoicing account. A Pay button on the invoice itself Card details handled by the processor Works from the emailed invoice or the portal The client portal Card brands your clients already carry Behind the processors sit the cards people actually use, Visa and Mastercard among them. Invoice Crowd adds nothing on top of what your processor charges, so the fee you pay is the one you agreed with them and the amount on the invoice is the amount your client owes. Visa and Mastercard through the processors No charge added by Invoice Crowd Multi-currency invoices for overseas clients Once it is running The chasing happens without you Put the follow-up on autopilot Reminders go out on a schedule you set, before the due date and after it, and if you switch on late fees, one fee is added automatically the day after an unpaid invoice's due date. Recurring invoices raise and send themselves. You choose how much of this runs on its own and how much you do by hand. Reminders before and after the due date One late fee the day after the due date Recurring invoices sent on a schedule Reminders and late fees A clear record of every payment Each payment is written against the invoice it settles and listed in Payments Received, so the history of what was paid, when and through which processor is there months later. Any online payment that needs a second look is held for your review. The same entries feed your income reports and your ledger. Amount, date and method against each invoice Feeds the income and aged debt reports No re-keying into the accounts Payments Received Also included The rest of what comes with online payment Everything here is included, in the same account as your invoices, clients and books. Payment scheduling Set when each amount falls due so a long job is billed in stages rather than one lump. Split 1 · 10/30/2026 $900.00 Split 2 · 11/20/2026 $1,200.00 Split 3 · 12/15/2026 Total $3,000.00 bal Bank deposits Money collected through your processor settles into your bank account on its normal payout cycle. Client pays INV-2041 Stripe Your account Your bank Payout Funds never pass through Invoice Crowd Visa and Mastercard The major card brands are accepted through the processors you connect to your account. Visa #1a1f71 Mastercard #eb001b American Express #1d6fb8 Discover #e67e22 #635bff Square #111111 Braintree #2b2c40 Authorize.net #1c5a9c Card brands via your processor 15 payment gateways Connect the processors you prefer, from PayPal and Stripe to Payoneer and Braintree. PayPal #003087 Razorpay #0c2451 Payoneer #ff4800 PayFast #e02a2a GoCardless #1c1b18 Airwallex #ff4f42 PayTabs #0a6ebd Telr #0a7d52 M-Pesa #3aa935 15 gateways, your own accounts Recurring billing Invoices that repeat on a cycle collect payment the same way a one-off invoice does. #6366f1 SUB-00128 $4,500.00 #14b8a6 REC-00041 #f59e0b SUB-00131 $980.00 Automatic reminders Nudges go to the client before a due date and again once an invoice is overdue. Before Due Date Sent On Due Date INV-2039 #ea5455 After Due Date INV-2034 Multiple currencies Bill a client in their currency while your own reporting stays in your base currency. INV-2044 · EUR €3,960.00 Exchange rate 1.0842 In your books (USD) $4,293.43 Client portal Clients sign in to see what they owe, what they paid and download their invoices. Total Invoiced $68,900 14 invoices Paid $56,450 13 paid up Outstanding $12,450 1 invoice bad Payment links Sell a product from a shareable link when there is no invoice to attach it to. Copy Link Copied Email OTP 481205 Payer added as a customer Income reporting Payments received feed the income and aged debt reports without any re-keying. Income · Sep 2026 $46,800 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Handled by the processor Card data goes to the payment processor; your invoicing account never stores it. Card details At Stripe Verified By provider No card numbers stored in your account Invoice history Every invoice keeps the payments made against it, so the balance is never in doubt. INV-2036 JS #8b5cf6 Juniper & Sage $6,400.00 info Partial warn ok Each payment kept on the invoice live Questions Online payments, answered How do my clients pay an invoice online? They open the invoice you sent and press Pay. The payment options you switched on are listed on the invoice itself, they pick one in the Select a Payment Method window, and they can pay without creating an account. Which payment methods can I accept? PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay and Airwallex are the ones most accounts start with, and Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack are supported too. With Offer All Payment Methods Enabled in My Stripe Account switched on, Stripe Checkout also shows the methods turned on in your Stripe Dashboard, such as iDEAL, SEPA Direct Debit or Klarna. Between them they cover the major card brands, including Visa and Mastercard. You decide which of them appear on an invoice. The free plan includes PayPal and Payment note, and paid plans add every other gateway. Does Invoice Crowd take a cut of the payment? No. You connect your own merchant account, so you pay only the processing fees agreed with your provider, and Invoice Crowd adds nothing on top. What happens to the invoice once a client pays? The payment is recorded against that invoice straight away and the outstanding balance drops by the amount received. You are notified, the client gets a confirmation with the payment receipt PDF attached, and the entry carries through to your income reports and ledger without being typed again. Can I automate the chasing? Yes. Reminders can be scheduled before and after the due date, one late fee (flat, or a percentage of the amount still owed) can be added the day after the due date, and recurring invoices go out on their own cycle. Turn on as much or as little of it as suits you. How safe is paying an invoice this way? The transaction is handled by the processor you connected, not by Invoice Crowd, so card numbers are entered on their side and are never stored in your invoicing account. What comes back is the record of the payment: amount, date and method. Can I refund a client's online payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes, for Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless and Paystack. Choose Refund on the paid invoice: Invoice Crowd creates the credit note, sends the refund through the provider, and records it only once the provider confirms. For the other gateways, refund in the provider's dashboard and record it in Invoice Crowd. Give every invoice a way to be paid Connect a processor once and the option travels with every invoice you send, along with the reminders, the payment confirmations and the record in your books. Compare plans 30-day free trial No card needed to try it Your own merchant account --- ## Payments Received URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/payments-received/ Payments Received in Invoice Crowd lists invoice payments, advances and overpayments together. Apply one receipt to several invoices; track unused credit. Features Every payment your customers make, in one list Payments Received is the Invoice Crowd list of money your customers have paid you: invoice payments, advance payments taken before an invoice exists, and overpayments kept as credit. Record one receipt against several open invoices at once, see what is still unused, and review any online payment that needs a second look. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Payments Received One receipt, several invoices Advance payments with a receipt Unused credit at a glance pop What is inside Money in, from the receipt to the invoice it pays Payments Received sits under Invoicing, between Payment Links and Credit Notes. It is the money-in side of the app: every receipt, what it paid, and what is still waiting to be used or refunded. One list for money in Payments, advances, overpayments Every receipt in one list Each row is one receipt: an invoice payment tagged Payment, an ADV- advance or an OP- overpayment credit. You see the customer, the invoices it paid, the method, the date, the amount and what is still unused. Search, filter by customer, type, status or date range, and sort by date, amount or the Unused column. Payment, Advance and Overpayment tags Method shows the provider or how it was paid Unused column for money not yet applied How invoices get paid Tiles that filter the list Above the list, tiles show what was Received this month and the Unused Advances and Unused Overpayments you are holding. Click one to filter the list to those receipts; the filter shows as a chip you can remove. A Needs Review tile counts gateway payments to check and opens Payments Needing Review in one click. Received, for this month Unused Advances and Unused Overpayments Needs Review opens the review page Applied oldest first One payment across several invoices A customer sends one bank transfer for two invoices. Click + Record Payment, choose Record Invoice Payment and pick the customer: their open invoices in that currency are listed under Apply to Open Invoices and filled oldest due first. Change any line before you save, or press Fill Oldest First to start over. Every invoice is paid in the same save, and an invoice on instalments takes exactly its next instalment. Open invoices in the payment's currency Fill Oldest First, or edit each line Deposited To, Payment Method and Reference Split and partial payments Overpayments kept as credit When the money is more than the open invoices, the drawer shows the extra as Kept as Credit before you save. It becomes an overpayment credit with its own OP- number, held for that customer instead of being booked as sales. When their next invoice is due, Use Credit in Manage Payments, on the Record Payment tab, applies their advances, overpayments and credit notes to it. OP- numbered customer credit No sales or tax booked on the extra Use Credit applies it to a later invoice Credit notes and customer credit Before and around the invoice Advances and review Advance payments with their own receipt Money that arrives before you have invoiced, such as a deposit to book a project, goes in with Record Advance Payment. It gets an ADV- number and a receipt PDF from Download Receipt; the receipt's title follows your country, for example Receipt Voucher in India. The advance is held under Customer Advances, a liability, until you Apply to an Invoice, Refund it or Void it. ADV- numbered receipt PDF Held under Customer Advances Apply to an Invoice when you bill Payments Needing Review When a gateway collects money that can't be applied to its invoice automatically, it waits on Payments Needing Review for you to decide. For each one, choose Apply to Invoice, keep it as customer credit, or Mark as Refunded once you have handled it at the provider. Refunds made in the Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square or Paystack dashboard land here too, with Record This Refund. Reached from the tile, the Invoices list or the bell Nothing is recorded until you decide Record This Refund for dashboard refunds Refunds Built in The details that keep money in straight Payments Received works with Manage Payments, credit notes and the invoice editor, so a receipt recorded once shows up on the invoice, the customer's credit and the books. Search and filter Search Payments..., then filter by customer, type, status or date range. The filters stay in the page address, so a view can be bookmarked. Harbor ADV-00014 · Advance $2,000.00 OP-00006 · Overpayment $500.00 INV-2029 · Payment $3,600.00 Status on every credit Advances and overpayments show Open, Partly Applied, Applied, Partly Refunded, Refunded or Void, so you see what became of the money. ADV-00003 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $1,500.00 Open info Partly Applied warn Applied ok Used on INV-2044 + INV-2046 This month at a glance Received counts this month's receipts on your business clock; the Unused tiles total the open credit you hold, with a count. Received $24,030.00 This Month up Unused Advances $2,900.00 2 advance payments Unused Overpayments 1 overpayment Use Credit on the next invoice When a customer has credit, Manage Payments says so. Use Credit applies it oldest first, up to the invoice's balance. INV-2047 balance $3,200.00 ADV-00005 −$1,000.00 cn OP-00004 −$80.00 Still due $2,120.00 bal Treat as Advance for Future Work An unused overpayment can become an advance from a date you choose, held under Customer Advances until the work is billed. OP-00002 $120.00 Treat as Advance From 10/01 Customer Advances Held until the work is billed Apply an advance to several invoices Apply to an Invoice lists the customer's open invoices in the advance's currency, oldest due first, and settles several at once. INV-2044 −$900.00 INV-2046 −$600.00 Unused $0.00 Less Advance Received The final invoice shows each advance it used under Less Advance Received, with the date the advance came in. INV-2044 total $2,400.00 Amount Due Refund an unused advance Refund pays an unused advance back from Cash, a payment account or the bank account it went into. ADV-00006 $800.00 Refund From Bank Status Refunded Lumen Architects Kept as Credit, shown first When a receipt is more than the open invoices, the drawer says how much will be kept as credit before anything is saved. Amount Received $5,000.00 Applied to Invoices $4,850.00 in Kept as Credit $150.00 No open invoice? Record an advance If a customer has no open invoices in that currency, one click moves you to the Advance Payment tab with the amount carried over. Invoice Payment Nothing open Record as an Advance 1 click ADV-00007 $1,200.00 Amount carried over A bell when a payment needs review You're alerted in the bell whenever a gateway payment needs your review. KA #14b8a6 LA #f59e0b SF #f97316 INV-2049 · Kestrel $640.00 INV-2050 · Lumen $1,250.00 INV-2052 · Summit Fitness $310.00 Copy Link and Preview Every row has Copy Link and Preview next to its edit icon, so the document behind a payment is one click away. Copy Link Copied Link copied live Questions Payments Received, answered Does Invoice Crowd have a list of payments received? Yes. Invoice Crowd lists every payment your customers make on Payments Received, under Invoicing in the sidebar. Invoice payments, advance payments and overpayment credits sit in one list with the customer, the invoices paid, the method, the amount and what is still unused, and tiles show what was received this month and the unused credit you hold. Can one customer payment cover several invoices? Yes. Use + Record Payment, then Record Invoice Payment, and pick the customer. Their open invoices in the payment's currency are listed under Apply to Open Invoices and filled oldest due first; you can change any line, or press Fill Oldest First to reset. Each invoice is paid in the same save, and an invoice on instalments takes exactly its next instalment. What happens when a customer pays too much? The invoice is paid in full and the extra becomes an overpayment credit for that customer, with its own OP- number. No sales or tax are booked on it. You can apply it to a later invoice with Use Credit, refund it from the invoice's Refund window by choosing The customer paid too much, or use Treat as Advance for Future Work. How do I record a deposit before I've sent an invoice? Choose Record Advance Payment. The advance gets an ADV- number and a receipt PDF you can download, titled to suit your country (for example Receipt Voucher in India), and is held under Customer Advances until you apply it to an invoice, refund it or void it. Whether tax is due on the advance follows your country's rule; the final invoice shows it under Less Advance Received. Do invoice payments get their own receipt PDF? Yes. Every payment recorded on an invoice gets a Payment Receipt PDF with its own RCT- number: one for a part payment, an instalment or deposit, or a payment in full. Use Download Receipt in the row menu here or on the History tab of Manage Payments. The payment confirmation email attaches the receipt, and your customer can download it from the invoice page and the customer portal. Advance payments keep their own ADV- receipt. What is Payments Needing Review? It is where online money waits when it can't be applied to its invoice automatically. For each payment you choose Apply to Invoice, keep it as customer credit, or Mark as Refunded once you've handled it at the provider. Refunds made directly in the Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square or Paystack dashboard also appear there with Record This Refund. Open it from the Needs Review tile, the Invoices list button that appears while payments are waiting, or the bell. Which plans include Payments Received? Every plan, including the free Basic plan. Basic includes PayPal for online payments, and paid plans add every other gateway. Team members need Invoicing access to see the list and accounting post permission to record payments. See every payment, and what is still unused Record one receipt against several invoices, take advances with a numbered receipt, and keep overpayments as customer credit, all from one list. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Refunds URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/refunds/ Refund an invoice in Invoice Crowd: credit note, cleared balance and refund in one step, sent through Stripe, PayPal and 7 more gateways when paid online. Features Refund an invoice, with the credit note and the books in one step A refund in Invoice Crowd is a guided step on the invoice: tell the Refund window what happened, and it raises the credit note, clears any unpaid balance and records the money going back, all at once. For payments taken online through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless or Paystack, it can send the refund through the provider too, and books it only once the provider confirms. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Refunds Credit note and refund in one step 9 gateways refund through their API Booked when the provider confirms pop What is inside From what happened to what your books show Refunds start from the invoice that was paid, so the credit note, the invoice's balance, the money going back and the ledger all change together instead of in three separate steps. Starting a refund From the invoice Start from the invoice Refunds begin where the payment is: Refund in the Invoices list row menu, Refund in the editor's Actions tab, or Refund next to a received payment in Manage Payments, on the History tab. Starting from History also sets that payment's account as the one to pay back from. All three open the same Refund window, titled Refund and the invoice number, on customer invoices that have money received. Invoices list row menu → Refund Editor Actions tab → Refund Manage Payments → History → Refund Manage Payments Tell it what happened The first step, What Happened, has two answers. If the customer cancelled all or part of the order, pick Everything, An Amount (tax included) or Some Lines with quantities, then choose what happens to the money already paid: Refund It, Keep It as a Cancellation Fee, or Refund Part. If the customer paid too much, the invoice's open overpayment credit is listed and the refund is capped at what is open. Everything, An Amount or Some Lines Refund It, keep a fee, or Refund Part Paid too much refunds the overpayment credit Back through the provider 9 gateways Refund it to the customer's card or account When the invoice was paid online on the invoice page through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless or Paystack, the window asks How does the money go back? Choose Refund it to the customer via Stripe, or whichever provider took the payment, enter the Amount to Refund and confirm. The money goes back to the card or account the customer paid with, through that provider's own refund API. Amount to Refund, up to what was paid The same credit note and the same books Payment gateways Booked only when the provider confirms Nothing is written to your books until the provider says the refund went through. If it is still pending, the window says so and offers Check Again, and the provider's notification or a check every 15 minutes settles it. If the provider declines, no money moves, the refund books nothing, the credit stays open for the customer, and Try Again sends a fresh request. Pending refunds show Check Again A 15-minute check settles the rest Declined: nothing booked, then Try Again Recorded and reconciled Every other way Refunds you make yourself Record refunds for bank transfers, cash and payments through PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, Payoneer or M-Pesa in the same window. Choose I'll refund it myself where a provider option is offered, then set the date, the account in Paid Back From and an optional note. For online payments, the window links to the provider's dashboard where one is available. Paid Back From: Cash or a payment account A link to the provider's dashboard Dated and noted for your records Credit note, books and status in one step Before you confirm, the Review step shows the figures in plain words: Credit Note, Unpaid Balance Cleared, Refunded and Customer Owes, with In Your Books listing the sales, tax owed, receivables and bank account it reduces. Confirm, and the credit note is created, applied and refunded together. The invoice's list badge then reads Refunded, Partly Refunded or Cancelled. Review shows Credit Note, Refunded, Customer Owes Badge: Refunded, Partly Refunded or Cancelled Shown in plain words Credit notes Built in The rules behind every refund The Refund window works out every amount before anything is saved, follows your locked periods and exchange rates, and can be undone if a refund was recorded by mistake. Refunds made in the dashboard Refunds made in the Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square or Paystack dashboard reach Payments Needing Review, with Record This Refund. Stripe dashboard $250.00 Needs Review Refund Record This Refund Prefilled Booked when you confirm Keep a cancellation fee Cancelled, but keeping part as a fee? Refund Part pays back what you enter; the rest stays as sales and tax. Paid for the cancelled part $1,200.00 Refunded −$900.00 cn Kept as a Cancellation Fee $300.00 bal Some Lines, by quantity Credit only the items that were cancelled: pick the lines and how many of each, and the credit note follows them. Brand workshop · 1 of 1 Photo retouching · 4 of 10 $320.00 Credit Note $1,520.00 Tax reversed in proportion An Amount is tax included, and tax comes off in the same proportions as on the invoice, so mixed rates stay right. Amount Cancelled $540.00 Sales reduced −$500.00 Tax owed reduced −$40.00 9 gateways, refunded in place Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless and Paystack refunds go through each provider's API. Stripe #635bff PayPal #003087 Razorpay #0c2451 Square #2b2c40 Braintree #1a1a1a Authorize.net #1c3f94 Airwallex #612fff GoCardless #1c1b18 Refunded from Invoice Crowd Every other gateway, recorded Refund PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, Payoneer and M-Pesa payments in their own dashboards, then record them here. PayFast #e8412c PayTabs #1f64c1 Telr #0f9d58 Payoneer #ff4800 M-Pesa #43b02a Refund there, record here Pending until confirmed A pending refund shows Check Again. The provider's notification, or a check every 15 minutes, books it once confirmed. INV-2048 LA #f59e0b Lumen Architects $1,250.00 Refund asked info Pending warn ok Check Again or 15-min check Declines handled cleanly If the provider declines, no money moves and nothing is booked. The credit stays open, and Try Again sends a new request. Refund sent $480.00 Declined Not booked Try Again New request The credit stays open Locked periods stay locked A refund dated in a locked period is refused with a link to Lock Transactions, so closed books stay closed. Refund date 09/30/2026 Period Locked Lock Transactions Change date Closed books stay closed Foreign-currency invoices The refund uses its date's exchange rate; any difference to the invoice rate is booked as realized gain or loss. €1,000.00 Rate on refund date 1.0850 In USD $1,085.00 Undo a recorded refund On the credit note, Undo Refund or Application lists each refund and application, with Reverse Refund and Remove from Invoice. CN-00008 $900.00 Reverse Refund Undone Remove from Invoice Due again Then delete the empty credit note What the customer sees The customer portal shows the invoice as Refunded or Cancelled, and the public invoice page shows no amount due. INV-2045 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $2,400.00 Paid No amount due on the page live Questions Refunds, answered Can Invoice Crowd refund a customer's card payment? Yes. Invoice Crowd can send a refund through the provider's API for invoices paid online through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless or Paystack. Open the invoice's Refund window, choose Refund it to the customer via that provider, and the money goes back to the card or account the customer paid with. The refund is booked only after the provider confirms it. How do I refund payments made another way? Refund PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, Payoneer and M-Pesa payments in the provider's dashboard, along with bank transfers and cash, then record them with I'll refund it myself and the account in Paid Back From. The provider option appears for online payments made on the invoice page through the nine gateways that refund in place. What happens if the provider delays or declines the refund? A pending refund is not booked yet. The window shows Check Again, and the provider's notification or a check every 15 minutes settles it. If the provider declines, no money is paid out and nothing is booked; the credit stays open for the customer and Try Again sends a new request. Does a refund create a credit note? Yes. Confirming the Refund window creates the credit note, applies it to clear any unpaid balance, and records the refund, in one step. A credit note's own Refund action records a refund you have already made. How are late fees and gateway fees handled in a refund? They stay on the invoice. Everything means the invoice total less late fees, settlement gateway fees and any earlier credit notes. If a credit clears the invoice and only its unpaid late fee is left, you choose Waive Late Fee or Keep Fee. I refunded a customer in my Stripe dashboard. How does Invoice Crowd find out? Refunds made in the Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square or Paystack dashboard reach Invoice Crowd through the provider's signed notifications and wait on Payments Needing Review. Record This Refund opens the Refund window for that invoice with the provider's amount and date filled in. Nothing is booked until you confirm it. Who can refund, and on which plans? The owner, and team members with Invoices edit access plus the accounting post and reverse permissions. Refunds work on every plan: the free Basic plan refunds through PayPal, and paid plans add the other gateways that refund in place. Refund the invoice, not just the money Tell Invoice Crowd what happened, and the credit note, the cleared balance, the refund and the books follow in one step. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Split and Partial Payments URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/split-partial-payment/ Split an invoice into agreed instalments or accept partial payments above a minimum, and track the remaining balance on the same invoice. Split and partial invoice payments Invoice Crowd lets a client pay one invoice in parts: split it into agreed amounts and dates, or allow partial payments above a minimum you set. The amount received and the remaining balance stay on the same invoice. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Split and Partial Payment Amounts and due dates Partial payment minimums Paid and outstanding balances pop What is inside Fixed instalments or flexible part payments Both live in the Manage Payments window on the invoice. Choose Split when you agree the amounts and dates in advance. Choose Partial when the client decides how much to pay, above a minimum you set. Split payments You set the schedule Plan a $3,000 project in three payments For example, agree 900 before work starts, 1,200 at a milestone and 900 on completion. In Split Payments, start from equal splits or a deposit row, then enter the amounts and dates that match the agreement. The schedule totals 3,000, and the client sees it as a Payment Schedule with each instalment's due date. Clear due dates for every instalment Each instalment carries the date you agreed, and the client sees exactly what is due and when. Pair the schedule with reminders to keep each payment on track. How reminders work Partial payments The client sets the amount Set a minimum partial payment Choose Partial in Payment Options and switch on Require a Minimum Amount to set the smallest amount the client can pay. The client can then pay any amount above it, and the rest of the balance stays open on the invoice. Let the client pay above the minimum For example, a client may pay 800 toward a 2,000 invoice when the minimum is 500. Their payment window shows the Minimum Payment, the Amount to Pay and the Balance After This Payment, and after the payment is recorded, 1,200 remains due. While it is being paid The invoice does the bookkeeping See what is still owed Every payment reduces the invoice balance as it is recorded, and the invoices list shows the invoice as Partial until it is paid in full. Each payment also gets its own receipt PDF. A clear payment page for clients Clients see a button for the next instalment, or the minimum and remaining balance for a partial payment, on desktop and phone. Preview it before you send, and let reminders follow up on what is outstanding. What the client sees Also included Keep the payment plan connected to the invoice Use the invoice, customer record and payment history together when following up or checking a balance. One invoice record Keep the original amount, recorded payments and remaining balance together. INV-2046 total $2,000.00 Partial payment · Stripe −$800.00 cn Remaining $1,200.00 bal Pay online, in parts Clients can pay each instalment or part payment online, right from the invoice. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Square #111111 Razorpay #0c2451 GoCardless #1c1b18 Braintree #2b2c40 Airwallex #ff4f42 Check each provider's support Customer visibility Clients review their invoices and pay what is due from the customer portal. Total Invoiced $5,250 2 invoices Paid $4,050 1 paid up Outstanding $1,200 INV-2046 bad Start from an estimate Convert an approved estimate into an invoice, then set the payment terms. EST-01052 Approved Convert to Invoice INV-2045 Split in 3 Then set the split in Manage Payments Check outstanding amounts Review invoices and payment history when reconciling what is paid and what remains due. OD #ec4899 Oakridge Dental Group Sent info Partial warn ok Balance falls with each payment Choose the right payment request Compare a reusable payment link with the payment route on an existing invoice. #6366f1 Payment Link Any payer $950.00 #14b8a6 Invoice One client #f59e0b Split Payment Agreed dates $3,000.00 live Questions Split and partial payments, answered What is the difference between split and partial payments? Split payments use amounts and dates you agree in advance, shown to the client as a payment schedule. Partial payments let the client choose an amount toward the balance, above the minimum you set. You pick one in the invoice's Manage Payments window. Can I use this for a project deposit? Yes. Use Request Deposit on the invoice, or a deposit row in Split Payments, and the client sees Deposit Due Now with a Pay Deposit button. An estimate can also ask for a deposit that the client pays as they accept it. Agree what the deposit covers and how the rest will be paid, then preview the invoice before sending it. What happens when a client pays part of an invoice? Once the payment is recorded against the invoice, its outstanding balance is reduced by that amount, and the payment gets its own receipt PDF. How are instalments different from recurring invoices? Instalments settle one existing invoice over time, while recurring invoices create a new invoice on a repeating schedule. Choose the one that matches your agreement with the client. Make the payment terms clear from the start Create the invoice, set the instalments or the minimum, and send it with confidence. Compare plans Clear payment terms One running balance Pay online in parts --- ## Late Fees URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/late-fees/ Add a flat or percentage late fee to overdue invoices automatically, shown as its own line, with advance notice to clients and a waive option. Charge a late fee the day an invoice turns overdue Invoice Crowd adds one late fee, flat or a percentage of the amount still owed, the day after an unpaid invoice's due date. The invoice warns the client in advance, the fee appears as its own line, and you can waive it on any invoice. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Late fees Flat rate or percentage One fee, the day after the due date Itemized on the invoice pop What is inside From the rule to the line on the invoice Late fees in Invoice Crowd are a rule you switch on once. The software watches the due date, shows the client a notice in advance, adds one charge, and records it in your books. Setting the rule Set once as your default Automated late fee calculation Switch on Late Fees as your business default, or on a single invoice, and decide what an overdue invoice should cost. A daily check adds the fee the day after the due date to any sent invoice that is still unpaid. Each invoice gets one fee, so the charge stays fair and predictable. A business default you can change per invoice The fee is added without reopening the invoice Percentages work on the amount still owed A flat rate or a percentage A late fee can be a fixed amount or a percentage of the amount still owed when the fee is added. Pick whichever suits the work you bill for: a flat charge reads clearly on a small invoice, while a percentage stays proportionate on a large one. Fixed amount or a percentage of what is owed Different structures for different services Charged in the currency the invoice was raised in When it applies You set the due date Late charges tied to the due date The fee starts the day after the due date, so the due date you set is the date that matters. Give a client more room by setting a later due date or longer payment terms on their invoice; an invoice paid on or before its due date never carries the fee. Applies the day after the due date Longer terms give a client more room Different dates on different invoices Added right on the invoice The fee lands on the overdue invoice itself, itemized on its own line beneath the original amount. The client can see what they were billed and what the delay added, and the invoice total is the figure you are owed. Shown as a separate line on the invoice The original amount stays visible Waive the unpaid fee on any single invoice How invoices are built After it is applied The client hears about it, and so do your reports Clients are reminded after the due date Before any fee, the invoice and its PDF say that a late fee applies after the due date. Add a reminder for after the due date and the client receives an Overdue Payment Notice with the amount now outstanding, late fee included, so a larger total never arrives unannounced. Overdue notice on the schedule you set The notice shows the amount outstanding Fewer disputes over a total that changed Payment reminders Overdue tracking in the list and Age Debt Filter the invoice list to Overdue to see every invoice carrying a fee, with totals that include it, and open the Age Debt report to see how long each customer has been behind. Late payment becomes a number you can plan around. Every invoice carrying a fee Age Debt buckets: 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days Sits with the rest of your financial reports Reports and exports Also included The rest of what late fee handling covers Late fees use the same invoices, customers, currencies and gateways as everything else you bill. Per-invoice rules Set the late fee on each invoice, so a client whose contract calls for different terms gets them. Late Fees · INV-2044 On Percentage (%) 1.5 Reminder Option Multi-currency fees A fee is charged in the currency of the invoice, so overseas billing stays consistent. Invoice total £3,400.00 Late Fees 2% +£68.00 in Currency GBP Amount Due £3,468.00 bal Overdue at a glance Filter the invoice list to Overdue to see every invoice carrying a fee and what it now totals. INV-2034 +$85.80 INV-2032 +$28.50 INV-2027 +$46.00 Fees on overdue $160.30 Fees on part payments A percentage fee is worked out on what is still owed, so a part payment already made lowers the fee as well as the balance. $5,720.00 Paid −$2,000.00 cn Late Fees 1.5% of $3,720 +$55.80 $3,775.80 The invoice states the fee in advance and reminders go out before the date, so a fee is never the first thing a client hears. 7 Days Before Due Date On Due Date 7 Days After Due Date Scheduled invoices too Recurring invoices follow the same overdue rules as the ones you raise by hand. SUB-00121 SF #f97316 Summit Fitness Co. $1,600.00 Sent pri Overdue bad ok Same late fee rules Visible when they pay Clients see the revised invoice and the fee line when they open it to pay. Subtotal Late Fees Total $5,805.80 Waive at any point Waive the unpaid fee on one invoice without changing the rule for everybody else. The waiver is booked that day and the fee stays on record. INV-2044 · Late Fees $85.80 Waive Late Fee −$85.80 Posts to your accounts Fee income lands in the ledger with the invoice it came from, ready to reconcile. INV-2044 · late fee Dr Accounts Receivable Cr Late Fee Income Journal balanced Dr = Cr Paid online The revised total is settled through whichever gateway the client already uses. PayPal #3b82f6 Stripe #8b5cf6 Razorpay Square #2b2c40 Braintree #14b8a6 Authorize.net #6366f1 GoCardless #eab308 Airwallex Pays the updated total Itemized every time Each fee appears on its own line, so the amount originally agreed stays clear. Brand photography $1,200.00 Class booking app $3,800.00 Room through terms The fee starts after the due date, so longer payment terms give a particular client more room before it applies. Due Date 10/08/2026 Payment Terms Net 30 On 10/09 Set by the due date live Questions Late fees, answered Can I waive a late fee for a particular client? Yes. Before the due date, switch Late Fees off or change the amount on that invoice. Once a fee has been added, choose Waive Late Fee on the invoice: your customer no longer owes the unpaid fee, the waiver is recorded in your books that day, and the fee itself stays on record. Your other invoices keep the default. How does the late fee appear on the invoice? It is added to the overdue invoice as its own line, below the original amount. The client sees what they were first billed and what the delay added, and the invoice total is updated to the sum of the two. Do late fees apply if a client has paid part of the invoice? Yes, on what is still owed. A percentage fee is worked out on the balance due on the day the fee is added, never on what was already paid or credited. Later payments settle the invoice amount first and the fee last. Can different services carry different late fee rules? Yes. Late fees are set per invoice, as a flat amount or a percentage, with defaults for invoices in your business profile settings, so a small quick job and a long project can each carry the structure that suits it. When exactly does the fee get charged? The day after the due date, if the invoice has been sent and is still unpaid. The fee is tied to the due date you set on the invoice, so a later due date or longer payment terms give a client more room, and an invoice paid on or before its due date never carries the fee. Does the client know a fee has been added? Yes. Before the due date, the invoice and its PDF show a notice that a late fee applies after the due date. Once the fee is added it appears as its own line, and a reminder you set for after the due date sends an Overdue Payment Notice with the amount now outstanding. How often is a late fee charged? Once. Each invoice gets one fee, added the day after its due date, and the amount stays fixed. To give a client more time, set a later due date or longer payment terms. Switch late fees on in your business profile or on any single invoice. Is GST or VAT charged on a late fee? For businesses in India, yes: GST is charged on the fee at the rate of the invoice's own supply and shows as a GST on Late Fees line, and the notice on the invoice says plus GST. Everywhere else the fee is added without tax. What if a credit note clears the invoice but not the late fee? A credit note applies to the invoice's own lines. When that leaves only the late fee owing, Invoice Crowd lets you choose: Waive Late Fee to close the invoice, or Keep Fee to keep collecting it. Stop absorbing the cost of being paid late Write the rule, pick the date, and let overdue invoices carry their own penalty. Chasing becomes a report you read rather than a task you do. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Works on the invoices you already send --- ## Payment Reminders URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/payment-reminders/ Schedule up to five payment reminders per invoice in Invoice Crowd, before, on or after the due date. Send one now and see who was reminded, and how often. Features Automatic payment reminders on the days you choose Payment reminders are emails Invoice Crowd sends your customer about an unpaid invoice, on the days you choose before, on or after the due date. Pick up to five per invoice, write the wording once for your business, send a reminder by hand from the list or the editor, and see who has been reminded and how often. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Payment Reminders Up to 5 reminders per invoice Send Reminder from the list or editor Per-customer control pop What is inside Reminders that run on their own, and one you can send now Scheduled reminders follow the days you tick on each invoice. Manual reminders use the same send window as your invoices. Both are logged, counted and shown on your lists. Scheduled reminders Set on each invoice Pick the days, up to five Switch on Reminder Option in the invoice editor's Options tab and tick the reminders you want. The standard list has On Due Date, 7 Days Before Due Date and 15 Days Before Due Date among its choices, and any you add yourself, such as 7 Days After Due Date, appear beside them. Each reminder goes out on its exact day while the invoice still has a balance. Up to five reminders per invoice Sent on the exact day They stop once the invoice is paid Late fees Business-wide reminder settings Your reminder list lives in Business Profile, under Email → Reminders, and the pencil icon beside Reminder Option in the editor opens it. Add a reminder as a number of days before or after the due date, switch it on or off, and choose whether to Attach the PDF; every reminder links to the invoice either way. Write each reminder's subject and message per language, with a preview that updates as you type. Days before or after the due date Attach the PDF, or send the link only Your own subject and message Send one now Invoices, estimates, proposals Send Reminder from the list or the editor For a one-off nudge, choose Send Reminder in the row menu of the Invoices or Estimates list, or in the editor's Actions tab; proposals have it in their list menu and editor too. It is ready whenever a sent document is still waiting: an invoice with a balance, an open estimate or a proposal awaiting a decision. The document's status stays as it was. Invoices, estimates and proposals Ready on every open document Status and sent date stay as they were The send window, in reminder mode Send Reminder opens the same window you send invoices from, titled Send Reminder and filled with your reminder wording. Edit the recipients, subject and message, attach files, tick Send Me a Copy, or switch the email language. A note at the top says when the document was last reminded and how many reminders have gone so far. A reminder sends straight away. Prefilled with your reminder wording Last reminded date and count shown Sent the moment you click Keeping track and keeping it polite History and preferences See who was reminded, and how often On the Invoices and Estimates lists, a small bell beside the Last Sent date marks a document that has been reminded; its tooltip gives the last reminder's date and how many have gone so far, counting scheduled and manual ones together. Proposals show the bell beside their expiry date, the editor's Send Reminder action shows Reminded with the date and count, and the document's History tab logs every reminder. A bell on list rows, with date and count Scheduled and manual reminders both count Logged in the History tab Choose who gets automatic reminders For a customer who prefers a personal touch, switch on Don't send automatic reminders to this customer under Additional → Reminders on their record. Scheduled reminders then skip them, the editor and send window show a note so you know, and you can send a reminder yourself whenever it suits. Set by you, per customer Scheduled reminders skip them Send Reminder always available Built in Polite, persistent follow-up Reminders arrive by email on the day you chose and stop the moment there is nothing left to chase. Stops when paid Reminders go to sent invoices with a balance and stop as soon as the invoice is paid. INV-2043 KA #14b8a6 Kestrel Analytics $3,600.00 Reminded info Paid ok Reminders stop draft On Due Date reminder skipped Instalments reminded on their dates With Reminder Option on, each unpaid split or deposit on a split invoice gets a reminder on its own due date. Deposit · Oct 1, 2026 in Split 2 · Oct 31, 2026 $1,200.00 Split 3 · Nov 30, 2026 Next reminder Oct 31 bal Right on time Each reminder goes out on the exact day you chose, so the timing always matches your terms. 15 Days Before Sent 7 Days Before On Due Date Scheduled Every reminder on the day you chose Every reminder in History The History tab logs each one: a reminder you sent by hand, or an automatic reminder Invoice Crowd sent, and to whom. AM #4941e3 NS Reminder sent · Oct 14 Manual Automatic reminder · Oct 13 Invoice sent · Sep 29 INV-2040 Up to five per document Tick up to five reminders on each invoice, from the standard list or your own. 15 Days Before Due Date On 7 Days Before Due Date Before or after the due date Add your own reminders as days before or after the due date, for example 7 days after for an overdue nudge. 3 Days After Due Date 7 Days After Due Date 14 Days After Due Date PDF or link Each reminder can attach the PDF or send only the link; every reminder links to the document either way. Send 7 days after Attach the PDF Link to the invoice Always Your wording, with variables Edit each reminder's subject and message, insert variables such as the amount outstanding, and preview it as you type. Subject Payment due [Amount_Outstanding] $2,150.00 Preview Updates live Manual reminders count too A reminder you send by hand is logged and counted with the scheduled ones, without changing the invoice's status. INV-2039 JS #10b981 Juniper & Sage $1,850.00 Viewed warn Reminded (2) pri Status stays Viewed Customer preferences Switch off automatic reminders for any customer and send them a personal reminder whenever you choose. Summit Fitness Co. Opted out Scheduled reminder Skipped Send Reminder Still works Set on the customer record On every plan Reminders are included on every plan, from the free Basic plan up. If a paid plan lapses, they resume as soon as you renew. Basic Included Solo to Business Renewed plan Resumes Included from the free Basic plan up Late fees, set separately Late fees are their own option: one fee line the day after the due date, while reminders keep to their own days. Invoice total $2,400.00 Late Fees +$48.00 Amount Due $2,448.00 live Questions Payment reminders, answered Does Invoice Crowd send automatic payment reminders? Yes. Invoice Crowd emails your customer about an unpaid invoice on the days you choose, before, on or after the due date, with up to five reminders per invoice. Switch on Reminder Option in the invoice's Options tab and tick the reminders you want; they stop once the invoice is paid. Which reminder timings can I choose? The standard list offers On Due Date and 1, 7 and 15 days before the due date. In Business Profile, under Email → Reminders, you can add your own as a number of days before or after the due date, for example 7 days after. Each reminder has its own subject, message and PDF choice. Can I send a reminder right now? Yes. Send Reminder is in the row menu of the Invoices and Estimates lists, in the proposals list, and in the editor's Actions tab. It opens the send window with your reminder wording so you can edit it first. It sends immediately. Do estimates and proposals get reminders? Yes. Send a reminder by hand for any sent estimate or proposal that is still waiting, and proposals can also carry scheduled reminders before their expiry date. Can I stop automatic reminders for one customer? Yes. Switch on Don't send automatic reminders to this customer on their record, under Additional → Reminders. Scheduled reminders then skip that customer, and you can still send one by hand. Which plans include payment reminders? Every plan, including the free Basic plan. Will I know when an invoice becomes overdue? Yes. Invoice Crowd raises an Invoice overdue notification in the bell, and you can switch on an email version in Notification Settings. Let the reminders do the chasing Tick the days once on each invoice, keep the wording in one place, and send a reminder by hand when a customer needs a nudge today. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Purchases URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/purchases/ Connect vendors, purchase orders, bills, vendor credits, payments made and the read-only vendor portal in one purchase-side workflow. Purchases Purchasing, from vendor to bill to payment Manage vendors, purchase orders, bills, vendor credits and payments made in one connected workflow, and give suppliers a read-only portal to their own records. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Vendors, POs and bills connected Credits and payments tracked Read-only vendor portal pop How it works Every purchase, clearly documented Start with the supplier, approve the order, record the bill and settle it with a payment or a vendor credit. Each step has its own clear document. Before the bill Supplier identity and the purchase commitment. Keep one vendor record for the relationship Store the supplier's contact and tax details, use it across purchase documents and control whether that vendor receives a portal invite. Supplier contact and tax id CSV export Portal invite controls Raise and approve a purchase order Create a PO in the document editor, send it or mark it approved, then convert the approved order into a draft bill. Document templates and line items Approval built in Convert to draft bill Record what is owed Due dates, balances and accounting in one place. Enter the vendor bill and its due date Bills keep the vendor, lines, taxes, date, due date, status and balance together. A converted PO becomes a draft bill, ready for you to review. Vendor and line items Due date and balance Linked back to its PO Settle with payments or credits Payments Made records the money you sent, and a vendor credit records value the supplier owes you back. Apply either to a bill and both stay clearly on record. Vendor credit application Vendor payment allocation Unused payment value visible Share and review Share with suppliers, reconcile with the bank. Give the supplier a read-only portal Choose which bills, purchase orders, credits and payments made each vendor can see. Suppliers preview, download and approve purchase orders, while editing stays with you. Per-vendor portal menu Preview and PDF download Editing stays with you Reconcile payments with the bank Recorded vendor payments feed your accounting reports, and Bank Reconciliation matches them to your bank statement so every payment is confirmed. Payment record Statement matching Close at zero Built in The purchase-side toolkit Every purchasing tool, connected in one place. One record per vendor Contact and tax details, used across every purchase document. Tide Tidewater Paper Mill Vendor Tax ID 71-6623058 Portal Accepted Purchase orders with approval Raise, approve and convert orders into draft bills. PO-1019 BP #f59e0b Brightwave Print Co. $3,860.00 Draft draft Sent info Viewed warn Approved ok Convert to Bill once approved Bills with due dates Vendor, lines, taxes, due date and balance together. BILL-1050 · Brightwave Bill date 09/29/2026 Due Date 10/29/2026 Balance bal Payments and credits Settle bills with a payment or a vendor credit. BILL-1049 $1,720.00 VCN-1006 applied −$240.00 cn Payment recorded −$1,480.00 $0.00 A read-only vendor portal Suppliers see the records you choose to share. Bills On Purchase Orders Payments Made Reconciled with the bank Match vendor payments to your bank statement. PMT-0318 Recorded Statement Uploaded Matched Difference 0 Recording and reconciling stay separate Vendors The supplier record used across purchase documents. Total Vendors 14 All active Portal Users up Tax IDs 11 Configured Approve orders and convert them into bills. Convert to Bill BILL-1050 Lines and totals copied Record what is owed and when it is due. BILL-1047 QL #10b981 Quarry Lane Studios $2,400.00 Partial Paid $1,200.00 due 10/22/2026 Vendor Credits Apply or refund supplier credits. VCN-1006 total $240.00 Applied to BILL-1049 Record and allocate outgoing vendor payments. BILL-1047 · Bank Transfer $1,200.00 #14b8a6 Cobalt Cloud Hosting BILL-1046 · Online $189.00 #22c55e Alder & Finch BILL-1044 · Bank Transfer $6,500.00 Vendor Portal Give the supplier a read-only view. Invite Email Accept Invitation Read-only Preview and Download PDF live Questions Purchases, answered What purchase workflows are included in Invoice Crowd? Invoice Crowd's Purchases menu covers vendors, expenses, bills, purchase orders, payments made and vendor credits, plus a read-only vendor portal. Vendor records are included on every plan, and the purchase documents are included on paid plans. How do I pay a vendor for a purchase order? Convert the approved order into a bill, then record the payment against it in Payments Made or apply a vendor credit. The order, the bill and the payment each stay on record. What is the difference between a vendor credit and Payments Made? A vendor credit represents value the supplier owes back to the business. Payments Made records money the business sent to a vendor and how much of it was allocated to a bill. Can I use bills without first creating a purchase order? Yes. Invoice Crowd can create a vendor bill directly or from an approved purchase order, and a converted bill links back to the order it came from. Can I stop changes to purchases after closing a period? Yes. In Lock Transactions the account owner can lock the Purchases area, which covers expenses, bills, purchase orders, payments made, vendor credits and inventory, up to a date. Records dated on or before it can't be created, edited or deleted until the owner unlocks those dates, and every lock and unlock is logged with a reason. Bring the whole supplier-side workflow into one account Move from vendor to purchase order, bill, credit and payment, with every decision clearly on record. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Bills and Accounts Payable URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/bills/ Enter vendor bills with due dates, convert approved purchase orders, and post the total to Accounts Payable and the expense category you choose. Features Vendor bills that post straight to Accounts Payable Record what your vendors charge in the same editor you use for invoices. Add the vendor's invoice number and a due date, and the total posts to Accounts Payable and the expense category you choose. Convert an approved purchase order and the vendor, lines and totals come with it. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Bills & Accounts Payable Posts to Accounts Payable Converts approved purchase orders Vendor payments, credits and portal pop What is inside Enter the bill once, and the rest of the account keeps up Bills run the purchase side from end to end: entering what a vendor charged you, posting it to Accounts Payable and the expense category you picked, recording what you paid against it, and showing the vendor their own read-only copy. Entering it From scratch or from a PO The purchase side of the same editor A bill is the mirror of an invoice, built in the same document editor with the same line items, taxes and discounts. Where the Customer picker sits on an invoice, a bill has a Vendor picker, and the document prints BILL and Bill Total. Bill numbers run on their own BILL- series. The vendor's own number goes in Vendor's Invoice #, with a warning if that vendor already has a bill with the same number, and you can save a bill before you have picked a vendor. A supplier's Peppol UBL file can also be brought in with Import UBL, which creates a draft bill for you to review. A Vendor picker where the Customer sits The document prints BILL and Bill Total Import UBL for supplier e-invoices Convert an approved purchase order Mark a purchase order Approved and you can convert it into a bill. The vendor, the line items and the totals come across, and the new bill gets a fresh BILL- number, today's bill date, a due date from your default payment terms and a balance equal to the total. Each order converts once, and running Convert to Bill again simply opens its bill. Converts from Approved orders A link back to the order under the bill number The order stays Approved Posting it One save, both sides Accounts Payable and the category you pick Saving a bill posts its total to the chart of accounts and the general ledger, with no export step. Accounting is a switch on the bill's Accounting tab, carried over from your business profile. With it on, the bill reaches Accounts Payable under Current Liabilities and the account named in the Expense Category field, or Cost of Goods Sold by default. Accounts Payable under Current Liabilities Expense Category chosen per bill Cost of Goods Sold by default Correct a bill, and the ledger follows Edit a saved bill and its ledger entries update in place, so a correction always leaves one clean set of figures. From there they flow into the general ledger, the profit and loss statement and the reports you run at period end. Entries updated in place Visible in the general ledger Reads into the profit and loss statement Settling it Every payment on record Record the payment against the bill Record a vendor payment with Record Payment on the bill's row, or on the Payments Made screen: pick the vendor, pick one of that vendor's open bills, and the amount pre-fills from what is still owed. Each payment carries a method, a date, a reference number and notes. Saving reduces the balance and moves the bill to Partial or Paid, and each payment is recorded exactly once, even on a double-click. A reference number and notes on every payment Undo from the bill when needed Or use Record Payment straight from the list row A portal for your vendors Invite a vendor and they get a read-only portal with up to four lists: bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and the payments you have made. You choose per vendor which lists appear, every saved bill shows there, and every row opens or downloads as a PDF. Read-only for vendors Per-vendor control of the four lists Filter the Bills list by vendor to see what you owe Built in The rest of the purchase side Bills sit next to purchase orders, vendor credits, vendors and payments made, so a cost you enter once carries through to the ledger, your stock on hand and the reports you run at period end. Payment recorded, payable cleared Each payment clears the payable against Cash & Bank, or against the account linked to the gateway named on the payment. BILL-1046 payment recorded $189.00 Dr Accounts Payable Cr Cash · Cash & Bank in Payable left $0.00 bal Overpayments handled Anything paid beyond the balance is held in Prepaid Expenses and shows in the list as Unused Amount. BILL-1044 owes $6,480.00 PMT-0316 $6,500.00 Applied to the bill Unused Amount $20.00 Vendor credits Raise a credit from the bill and apply it against that bill or record it as a cash refund. BILL-1049 $1,720.00 VCN-1006 $240.00 Apply to Bill or Refund Balance rechecked as it applies Status updates itself Badges update automatically: a sent bill turns Overdue on its own once its due date passes. BILL-1045 MF #3b82f6 Meridian Freight $1,275.00 Sent info Due 09/26 warn Overdue bad Overdue once the due date passes Stock in on save With inventory tracking on, saving a bill raises stock on hand for tracked items. Goods that arrive before the bill can be received against the purchase order on the Inventory screen, and the bill then clears that receipt. PO-1019 On order BILL-1050 Saved A2 art print +120 on hand Stock rises with the bill Terms or a date Set the due date on the bill directly, or pick a payment term and let the due date recalculate from it. Bill date 09/29/2026 Payment Terms Net 30 Due Date 10/29/2026 Your saved items The same line editor as your invoices: item, quantity, rate, tax and discount per line, drawn from your saved items. Print A2 art print · Harbor series $9.75 Risograph zine · print run $4.50 Exhibition poster · A1 $12.00 Send from the list Send a bill to the vendor from the Bills list or the editor's Actions tab once it's out of draft. TP #f97316 Tidewater Paper Mill Draft draft Viewed Send once it's out of draft Paid in another currency When you pay in another currency, the converted amount is calculated from the exchange rate automatically. Payment €1,100.00 Exchange Rate 1.0850 Converted amount $1,193.50 Clean payment history Unpaid bills can be deleted; once paid, a bill keeps its ledger entries and payment history intact. Unpaid · Delete PMT-0318 Recorded BILL-1047 Paid · Kept Paid history stays intact Payment methods on record Label each vendor payment with the method you used, so your records show exactly how every bill was settled. Payment Method Transfer Bill BILL-1052 Vendor Quarry Lane Recurring costs made easy For a fee that arrives on the same date every month, a recurring expense records it for you automatically. #0ea5e9 Figma Professional Monthly · 28th $45.00 AWS hosting Monthly · 1st $212.18 #10b981 Studio rent $2,400.00 live Questions Bills & Accounts Payable, answered Does Invoice Crowd do accounts payable? Yes. Invoice Crowd handles accounts payable through Bills, the purchase-side mirror of an invoice. A bill records what a vendor has charged you, with line items, taxes, a bill date and a due date, and posts the total to Accounts Payable under Current Liabilities. Purchase orders, vendor credits, vendors and vendor payments sit alongside bills on the purchase side of the app. How do I turn a purchase order into a bill? Mark the purchase order Approved, then use Convert to Bill. Conversion copies the order into a new draft bill with a fresh BILL- number, today's bill date, a due date from your default payment terms and a balance equal to the total, and links the bill back to the order it came from. Converting the same order again opens the existing bill, so each order has exactly one. Which accounts does a vendor bill post to? With accounting switched on for the bill, saving it puts the total on Accounts Payable, under Current Liabilities, and the same amount on the account named in the Expense Category field on the bill's Accounting tab. When no account is chosen there, bills default to Cost of Goods Sold. Recording a payment on the bill posts a settlement pair that clears the payable against Cash, under Cash & Bank, or against the account attached to the gateway named on the payment. How do I correct a bill that's already been paid? Raise a vendor credit against it. A paid bill keeps its ledger entries and payment history intact, while a bill that's still unpaid can simply be deleted from its row. Can a vendor see the bills I have entered for them? Yes, when you invite that vendor into the vendor portal. The portal shows up to four lists (bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and the payments you have made) and you decide per vendor which of the four appear. Every saved bill shows there, since a saved bill is money you owe, and each one can be opened or downloaded as a PDF. The portal is read-only, so your records stay exactly as you entered them. Which Invoice Crowd plans include bills? Bills are included on paid plans, together with purchase orders, vendor credits and payments made. See the pricing page for plan details and the 30-day free trial. Do bills handle GST input tax credit in India? Yes, for businesses in India. A bill records the vendor's GSTIN, the place of supply, whether the input tax credit is eligible and whether reverse charge applies, and those figures feed GSTR-3B Table 4 in the GST Filing report, ready for you to file on the GST portal. Put your vendor bills where the ledger can see them Enter what a vendor has billed you, or convert the purchase order behind it, and the total lands on Accounts Payable and the expense category you chose in the same save. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Purchase Orders URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/purchase-orders/ Raise a purchase order to a vendor, send it, mark it approved, then convert it into a draft bill. Purchase orders, bills and your ledger in one app. Features Purchase orders, approved and turned into bills A purchase order in Invoice Crowd is addressed to a vendor, numbered with a PO prefix and built in the same editor you use for invoices. Approve it when the supplier agrees, and one action turns it into a draft bill with its accounting entries ready. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Purchase Orders Built in the invoice editor Approve, then convert in one click Ordered quantities tracked pop What is inside A commitment on paper, then a bill in the books A purchase order is the purchasing-side counterpart of an estimate: an estimate quotes a customer, a purchase order commits you to a supplier. Once approved, it becomes the bill that posts to your ledger. Raising it The invoice editor, vendor side The same editor, with a vendor picker A new purchase order starts from one of your document templates, so the layout, logo and labels match the invoices you already send. It is numbered automatically with a PO prefix and opens in the same editor as an invoice, with the customer picker swapped for a vendor picker. Add line items with quantities, rates, taxes and discounts, write your terms into the notes and signature block, and save. Numbered automatically with a PO prefix Starts from your own document templates Your logo, layout and labels Send it, or share the link Sending opens a composer with the message pre-filled and addressed to the vendor on the order, and the list records the date it last went out. Suppliers can read it without a login: every purchase order has a public preview link you can copy to the clipboard, and a PDF you can download and attach elsewhere. The To field and message are pre-filled Copy a public preview link to the clipboard The status moves to Sent, then Viewed Getting it agreed One click to approve Approve in one click A team member with edit rights opens the order, chooses Mark as Approved and confirms, or the vendor approves and signs from the shared link. Once approved, the order stays editable and is protected from deletion, so an agreed order is always kept. Draft, Sent, Viewed and Approved Viewed means the public copy has been opened Convert to Bill once approved Ordered and received, tracked separately Saving a purchase order records what you've ordered. For tracked items, each line keeps an ordered and a remaining quantity, and stock on hand rises when the goods arrive: receive them against the order on the Inventory screen, or save the bill. Your stock count always reflects what is really on the shelf. Ordered and remaining quantities per tracked line Re-saving rebuilds them from the current lines Deleting an order removes the quantities it wrote Billing from it Where the money starts counting Convert an approved order into a bill Converting is one action on an approved order, and it produces a new draft bill while the order stays as it is. Line items, taxes and totals copy across unchanged. The bill gets its own BILL- number, a bill date set to the day you converted, a due date from your default payment terms, a due amount equal to the order total, and a link back to the order it came from. Available on Approved orders The order stays Approved Bill accounting is generated as the bill is created From commitment to recorded spend The bill carries the amount owed. It posts to the chart of accounts and the general ledger with no second entry, and committed spend becomes recorded spend on the profit and loss statement. Purchase orders are included on paid plans. The amount owed lives on the bill One bill per order See the current plans and pricing Built in The rest of the purchase order screen The list you work from and the settings behind it. Five columns, sortable PO number, status, vendor, total and PO date, with actions on each row. Sort by number, total or date, and search by PO number. PO-102 PO-1022 · Draft $4,150.00 PO-1021 · Sent $945.00 PO-1020 · Viewed $2,280.00 Filters that stick Filter by status, by one or more vendors, and by a date range, then lock the filters you use daily so they survive the next visit. Status Approved Vendor Brightwave Date This Month Actions on the row Each row offers edit, send, preview, PDF download, copy public link, convert, mark approved, duplicate and delete. Select several rows and delete them together. Edit #4941e3 Send #0ea5e9 Preview #16a34a Download #f59e0b Copy Link #9333ea Convert to Bill #ef4b24 Mark as Approved #16b980 Duplicate #2b2c40 On every row Duplicate a repeat order Duplicating produces a new Draft copy, which is how a repeat order to the same supplier gets raised without retyping the lines. PO-1017 PO-1023 Draft Same vendor, same lines Convert on approval Switch on auto-convert to bill in business settings and approving an order raises the bill in the same step instead of a second action. Auto Convert to Bill On PO-1019 BILL-1050 Created Converting an order that already has a bill opens that bill instead of creating a second one. Again Same bill Opened One bill per order, every time Numbering per business Every purchase order belongs to the business profile you are working in, so a second business keeps its own numbering, vendors and orders under one login. Northwind Studio PO-1022 Northwind Print Shop PO-0041 Vendors and orders Per profile bal Settings shape the editor Business settings decide what the purchase order editor offers: units on line items, custom fields, and whether lines can be removed. Unit pcs Custom Fields Delivery by Remove Items Off Inventory start date Orders with tracked items are dated on or after your inventory start date, keeping your stock history clean. 07/01/2026 Earliest PO date PO dated 09/21/2026 Saved in Roles per action Create, edit and delete are separate permissions on the purchase orders screen, so a buyer can raise orders while removal stays with you. Create Allowed Delete What the vendor sees Invited vendors see their orders read-only: PO number, status, total and order date, with preview and PDF download. Their one action is Approve & Sign. PO-1024 View · PDF Approve & Sign Nothing else to change Clean deletion Deleting an order that isn't yet approved removes it along with the ordered quantities it recorded. AF #22c55e Alder & Finch Furniture draft Deleted bad Removed with its ordered quantities live Questions Purchase Orders, answered Does Invoice Crowd have purchase order software? Yes. Invoice Crowd includes purchase orders as part of its purchasing side, alongside expenses, vendors and bills. You raise a purchase order against a vendor, send it by email or share the public link, mark it approved when the supplier agrees, and convert the approved order into a draft bill. Purchase orders are included on paid plans. How do you convert a purchase order into a bill in Invoice Crowd? Approve the order, then choose Convert to Bill. One click copies the order into a new draft bill with its own BILL- number, the due amount set to the purchase order total, a due date from your default payment terms, and a link back to the originating order. The bill's accounting entries are generated at the same time, and converting the same order again opens that bill, so each order has exactly one. Do purchase orders update stock levels? Yes, in two steps. Saving a purchase order records an ordered and a remaining quantity against tracked items, and stock on hand increases when you receive the goods with Receive Purchase Order on the Inventory screen, or when the resulting bill is saved; a bill for goods already received clears that receipt, so nothing is counted twice. Re-saving an order rebuilds its quantities from the lines on the document. With inventory tracking on, the Inventory screen's Reorder tab can also create a draft purchase order for each preferred vendor from the items at or below their reorder point. Which Invoice Crowd plans include purchase orders? Purchase orders are included on paid plans, alongside bills, vendor credits and payments made. See the pricing page for plan details. Can a vendor see the purchase orders you send them? Vendors invited to the Invoice Crowd vendor portal get a read-only list of the purchase orders raised to them, showing PO number, status, total and order date, with preview and PDF download, and they can Approve & Sign an order from its shared link. Which sections a vendor sees is set per vendor and covers bills, purchase orders, payments made and vendor credits. A supplier without a portal login can still open the public link you send. Can a purchase order be edited or deleted after it is approved? An approved purchase order can still be edited, and it's protected from deletion so an agreed order is always kept. Orders that aren't yet approved can be deleted, along with the ordered quantities recorded against them. Commit to a supplier, then bill from what you agreed Raise the order in the editor you already know, mark it approved when the vendor agrees, and one action turns it into the draft bill that posts to your ledger. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Vendor Management URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/vendors/ Vendor management software in Invoice Crowd: one supplier record with tax ID, CSV export, and a read-only vendor portal for bills, POs and payments made. Features Vendor management software with a vendor portal built in Keep one record per supplier with contact details, address, tax ID and business profile. Give any vendor a read-only login to see the bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and payments you have recorded against them. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Vendor Management One record per supplier Read-only portal, by invitation Feeds bills, POs and payments pop What is inside One supplier record, and a window your vendor can look through A vendor record is the picker behind every bill, purchase order, vendor credit and payment made. If you switch it on, it is also a read-only login that lets the supplier check those same documents without emailing you for a copy. Setting them up Only the name is required A vendor record holds contact details, an address, a tax ID and the business profiles the supplier belongs to. Only the name is required, plus an email when you give the supplier portal access. Adding and editing happen in a quick slide-in panel, opened straight from the supplier's name. Business profile is a multi-select, defaulting to your current one Address, city, state, country and zip, all optional Tax ID gets its own column on the vendor list The vendor list is where you work Search it, filter by business profile, sort on the Name and Email columns, and switch between list and grid. Invoice Crowd remembers that choice for your next visit. The toolbar adds a supplier, opens the import tool for CSV, XLS and XLSX files, and exports your vendors to a file. Each row carries its own edit and delete actions. Sorted by name, in list or grid Four stat cards sit above the table Columns for address, email, profile, tax ID and portal status Using them on purchases One record, every document The same supplier on every purchase document One vendor record feeds every purchase document. Record a bill against a vendor, raise a purchase order or issue a vendor credit and the picker lists your active suppliers for the current business profile, so a supplier you deleted stops appearing on new documents. The same list drives the vendor filter on those screens, and Payments Made records a payment against a chosen vendor's bills. Bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and payments made An item in your catalogue can store a preferred vendor Deleted suppliers drop out of every picker and filter Remove a supplier, keep the history Deleting a supplier removes it from the vendor list, pickers and filters, while every bill, purchase order, vendor credit and payment keeps the supplier's name exactly as filed. If the supplier still has unpaid bills or unapplied credits, Invoice Crowd lists them so you can settle them first. Old documents keep the supplier's name on them Open balances settled first Exports stay current Handing them a login Read-only, by invitation Switch the portal on as you add the supplier Pick at least one portal business profile and turn on one or more of four permissions: Bills, Purchase Orders, Payments Made and Vendor Credits. Invoice Crowd emails the supplier an Accept Invitation link that stays valid for one year. You can also switch the portal on later for a supplier you saved earlier, and the invitation goes out when you save; a pending invitation can be sent again with Resend Invitation. The Portal column reads Not Invited, Pending or Accepted Each switch controls one tab Vendors see only what you allow A dashboard, and only what you allowed Every vendor gets a Dashboard, and each switch you turn on adds exactly one menu item beside it. The dashboard shows a card for each area you allowed (bills, outstanding balance, purchase orders shared, payments recorded and vendor credit balance) and a list of recent documents to preview or download. Read-only: view a document and download its PDF Every saved bill shows; orders and credits once sent Periods run from this month to a custom date range Built in The rest of the vendor screen What each permission switch puts in front of your supplier, what the export contains, and the details that make the portal easy to run. Bills tab Switch Bills on and your supplier sees bill number, status, total and bill date, with View and Download PDF on each row. BILL-1039 · Viewed $1,480.00 BILL-1036 · Paid $2,150.00 BILL-1029 · Paid $1,640.00 View · Download PDF Each row bal Purchase orders tab PO number, status, total and order date, with Preview and Download on each row, and Approve & Sign on the order's link. PO-1024 · Sent $2,960.00 PO-1011 · Viewed PO-1004 · Viewed Payments made tab Payment number, reference, bill number, mode, date, amount and unused amount, as a clear payment history. #f97316 PMT-0312 WIRE-8790 · Bank Transfer $500.00 #10b981 PMT-0298 BILL-1036 · Bank Transfer #3b82f6 PMT-0271 BILL-1029 · Cheque Vendor credits tab The Vendor Credits switch adds a Vendor Credits list showing credit number, status, total and credit date, with Preview and Download on each row. VCN-0998 · Sent $120.00 Credit Date 08/30/2026 Invitations bind to email The invitation attaches to the address your vendor signs in with, so only the right person can accept it. Invitation Emailed Accept Same email Portal Signed in Only the invited email can accept Focused on one business Each vendor login opens on the first portal business profile you selected, showing only that business's records. Northwind Studio Profile Brightwave Vendor One portal Focused Fixed to one business profile Period filter on payments The Payments Made tab opens on the financial year set on your business profile, and the vendor can switch it to the previous financial year or to all time. Financial year Apr – Mar PMT-0312 · 07/30/2026 PMT-0271 · 06/22/2026 Export to CSV The toolbar downloads vendors-collection.csv with every active vendor in the business profile you are working in, whatever the search on screen. Vendors vendors-collection .csv Every vendor in the profile Simple controls Vendors sort lists, set the page size, filter payments by period, and preview or download any document. Sort and page size Every list in Payments period Filter Approve & Sign Purchase orders Preview · Download Payment history at a glance Vendors see the payments you've recorded to them, without emailing you for remittance details. Payment number Listed Reference and mode Payments Made Read-only Possible-duplicate warning A vendor that shares a name, email or tax ID with another active vendor still saves, then shows a possible-duplicate warning so you can check the list. Save Tidewater Save again Two records Check first Search the list before saving Phone and account number The vendor form keeps phone and account number fields, and each supplier shows with clear initials. Phone 707 555 0142 Account Number TPM-2291 Peppol ID Optional Tax ID 71-6623058 live Questions Vendor Management, answered Is vendor management free in Invoice Crowd? Yes, vendor records are included on every Invoice Crowd plan, including the free plan. The bills, purchase orders, expenses, payments made and vendor credits that use them are included on paid plans, and the vendor portal is switched on from the same vendor form at no extra cost. How do you invite a supplier to the Invoice Crowd vendor portal? Open the vendor form, select at least one portal business profile, and switch on the permissions you want that supplier to have: Bills, Purchase Orders, Payments Made or Vendor Credits. Saving a new vendor with permissions granted emails them an Accept Invitation link valid for one year, and their Portal status changes to Pending, then to Accepted once they create their login. You can do the same later for a supplier you saved earlier: the invitation is sent when you save, and a pending one can be sent again with Resend Invitation. What happens to past documents when I delete a vendor? They stay exactly as filed. Bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and payments keep the supplier's name and remain readable and printable, while the supplier leaves the vendor list, pickers and filters. If the vendor still has unpaid bills or unapplied credits, Invoice Crowd lists them so you can pay, apply or close them first. Can I export my vendor list from Invoice Crowd? Yes. The Export to CSV action on the vendors toolbar downloads a file named vendors-collection.csv. It contains the active vendors of the business profile you are working in; deleted suppliers are left out. For bringing suppliers in, the vendors toolbar opens Invoice Crowd's import tool, which accepts CSV, XLS and XLSX files. Give your suppliers a portal of their own Add a supplier with a name and an email, switch on the tabs you want them to see, and they get a login showing the bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and payments you have recorded against them. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Vendor Credits URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/vendor-credits/ Record vendor credits from suppliers, apply them to open bills or record a cash refund, with balances that update automatically. Purchases Vendor credits, applied to bills or refunded Record what a supplier owes you back, keep its remaining balance in view, and apply it to a bill or record the refund you receive, with the vendor, business and currency checked every time. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Vendor Credits Apply to the vendor's open bills Record a cash refund Balances always accurate pop How it works Supplier credits, kept clear and accurate Create the credit from a template or a bill, keep its balance open, and use it with Apply to Bill or Refund. Every balance is checked as you go, so a credit is never spent twice. Create and review A purchase-side document with its own VCN- number and balance. Start blank or create from a bill or purchase order Choose a document template for a blank credit, or create one from a bill or purchase order. The new credit links back to its source and gets its own number and today's date. Blank vendor-credit draft Create from bill or PO Independent VCN- numbering Keep the open balance on the document The list shows the vendor, linked source, total and remaining balance. Open credits stay editable, and fully used or refunded credits close automatically. The PDF shows Credit Remaining and is stamped Applied or Refunded. Total and balance columns Open and closed states PDF, preview and duplicate actions Apply or refund Use the balance exactly as it stands. Apply the credit to a bill Pick an open bill from the same vendor, in the same currency, and enter an amount up to the smaller of the two balances. Both balances update together, and a repeated click never applies the credit twice. Same vendor and currency Amount capped by both balances Retrying never applies a credit twice Record a cash refund against the credit A refund records the money you received from the vendor and reduces the remaining credit in one step. Positive amount and date required Balance updated instantly Refund date and notes kept Accounting built in Posted to the right accounts automatically. Keep the credit on the purchase side Issuing a vendor credit reduces Accounts Payable and your purchase expense, and a recorded refund debits Cash and credits Accounts Payable. The ledger stays right without a manual journal. Accounts Payable, not Receivable Purchase expense reduction Refunds posted to Cash Send, share and track Each credit has its own Actions tab: send it to the vendor, preview it, download the PDF or copy its link, then apply or refund it. Send or Send Later Copy Link to share Send, Preview or Download Built in The vendor-credit lifecycle Create, apply, refund and post every supplier credit with confidence. Create from a bill or PO Start blank or create a credit from a bill or purchase order, linked to its source. BILL-1049 Tidewater Create Vendor Credit VCN-1006 Linked Own number, today's date Open balance on the document Total and remaining balance on every credit, closed automatically once used. VCN-1006 · Open $240.00 VCN-1005 · Open $680.00 VCN-1004 · Closed $0.00 Open balance $920.00 bal Apply to a bill Same vendor, same currency, up to the available balance. VCN-1006 balance BILL-1049 due $1,720.00 Applied in Same vendor, currency Checked Record a refund Log the cash a vendor returns and reduce the credit in one step. VCN-1005 balance Refund recorded −$680.00 cn Refund date 09/26/2026 Balance Posted on the purchase side Accounts Payable and purchase expense adjust automatically. Issued: Dr Payable Cr Cost of Goods Sold Refund: Dr Cash Cr Accounts Payable Apply from the credit Apply or refund each credit from its own Actions tab, then send, preview or download it. One credit Apply to Bill Settled Applied from its Actions tab Remaining balance See how much credit is still available. Open credits Tidewater, Alder $920 Available up Closed Used up Apply to bill Use credit against an open bill from the same vendor. $1,480 due Open bill of the same vendor Record refund Record cash returned by the vendor. Amount Refund Date 09/30/2026 Refund Notes Chairs back Never applied twice A repeated request returns the first result instead of a second application. Apply First try Retry Same request Applied once Same result Applied exactly once Bills Review the supplier bills a credit can settle. TP #f97316 Tidewater Paper Mill Sent info Partial warn VCN-1006 applied · $1,480 due Vendor Portal Let suppliers view their bills, orders, credits and payments. VCN-0998 · Sent $120.00 Credit Date 08/30/2026 View · Download PDF Each row live Questions Vendor Credits, answered What is a vendor credit in Invoice Crowd? A vendor credit records money or value a supplier owes back to your business, such as an over-billing or returned purchase. Its remaining balance can be applied to a bill or recorded as a cash refund. With inventory tracking on, Return Inventory to Vendor takes returned items back out of stock. Can I create a vendor credit from a bill? Yes. Create a vendor-credit draft from a bill or purchase order; it gets its own VCN- number and links back to the source. What must match before I apply a vendor credit to a bill? The credit and the bill need the same vendor, business and currency, and the amount can be up to the available balance on both. Can a credit be applied twice by mistake? No. Invoice Crowd checks both balances each time and recognizes a repeated request, returning the first result instead of applying the credit again. Does Invoice Crowd email a vendor credit to the supplier? Yes. The vendor-credit editor has Send and Send Later in its Actions tab, alongside Preview, Download and Copy Link. Keep every supplier credit in your books Record the credit, see its remaining balance, and apply or refund it right where your bills live. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Payments Made URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/payments-made/ Record payments made to vendors against their bills, see exactly what each bill used, and keep references, notes and currency on every payment. Purchases Payments made to vendors, matched to every bill Record each payment you send a vendor and apply part or all of it to an open bill. The payment number, method, date, reference, notes and currency stay together on one record. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Payments Made Exact bill allocation and unused amount Reference and notes on every payment Every payment recorded once pop How it works One record for every vendor payment Select a vendor and bill, enter the amount and date, and Invoice Crowd works out how much the bill uses. Any overpayment stays visible as an unused amount. Record the payment Vendor, bill, method and reference together. Capture the payment details in one side panel Choose the accounting category, vendor and optional bill, then enter the payment number, method, amount, currency, date, notes and reference. The reference number and notes keep every detail with the payment. Payment and reference numbers Method label and date Notes on the record Record how you paid Pick the method you used to send the money, so your records show exactly how each bill was settled and every payment is ready to match in Bank Reconciliation. Method on every payment Clear payment history Ready for reconciliation Allocate to a bill Bills settle to the exact amount owed. Apply exactly what the bill owes Invoice Crowd applies the smaller of the bill's balance and the payment amount. The bill moves to Partial or Paid, and any excess stays on the payment as an unused amount. Current balance used Partial or paid result Unused value remains visible Edit with confidence Change a payment and its earlier allocation is reversed before the new amount is applied, so the bill's balance is always right. Saved as one change Old allocation reversed first Bill balance always right Reliable, in any currency Accurate totals, every time. Recorded once, even on a retry If a save is interrupted and you try again, Invoice Crowd recognizes the payment and returns the one already recorded, so nothing is entered twice. Duplicate-safe saving Right business, every time Original payment returned Pay in any currency A payment keeps its payment currency, accounting currency, exchange rate, converted amount and any adjustment. Converted totals are calculated for you, so the figures always agree. Payment and accounting currencies Exchange rate on record Automatic conversion Built in Everything a vendor payment keeps together Bill allocation, currency, references and a clean history for every payment. Payment details in one panel Vendor, bill, method, amount, currency, date, notes and reference. Vendor Quarry Lane Bill BILL-1047 Reference No ACH-55120 Amount $1,200.00 bal The method you used, kept with every payment. Payment Method Cheque Recorded PMT-0315 Exact bill allocation Bills use what they owe; any extra shows as unused. BILL-1044 due $6,480.00 PMT-0316 $6,500.00 Used in Unused $20.00 Changes reverse and reapply the allocation cleanly. Reverse −$1,200 Apply +$1,150 $1,250 due The bill balance stays right Recorded once A repeated save returns the payment already recorded. Save First save Retry Same payment PMT-0318 Returned Recorded exactly once Any currency Rates and converted amounts stored with the payment. Payment currency EUR Accounting currency USD Rate 1.0850 Converted $1,193.50 Used amount The portion allocated to the selected bill. Payment $6,500 $6,480 BILL-1044 up $20 Kept Unused amount Any payment value not consumed by that bill. PMT-0312 · Brightwave $500.00 None yet Keep the bank or check reference on the payment. Notes Final images Payment Date 09/24/2026 Safe removal Deleting a payment reverses its allocation and keeps the history. PMT-0312 Delete Allocation Reversed Record Evidence stays for audit Bills Record and manage the bills being paid. QL #10b981 Quarry Lane Studios $2,400.00 Sent info Partial warn Paid ok PMT-0318 applied · $1,200 due Vendor Credits Apply supplier credits separately from cash payments. VCN-1006 $240.00 Apply to Bill BILL-1049 Kept apart from cash Credit live Questions Payments Made, answered How much of a payment is applied to a bill? Invoice Crowd applies the smaller of the bill's balance and the payment amount. The remainder stays visible as an unused amount on the payment. What happens when the payment is smaller than the bill? The bill becomes partially paid, its balance drops by the amount applied, and the payment stays linked to it. Can I keep the payment reference with a vendor payment? Yes. A vendor payment carries a payment number, reference number, notes, date and currency, so the bank or check reference stays with the record. What if I save the same payment twice by accident? It's recorded once. If a save is repeated, Invoice Crowd returns the payment already recorded for that business instead of adding a second one. Can I edit a bill-linked payment from the list? A payment recorded with Record Payment on the bill shows Undo from the Bill in this list and is changed from the bill. A payment entered here and applied to a bill can be edited or deleted when your permissions allow, which reopens the bill balance. Payments matched in a closed bank reconciliation stay protected until that statement is reopened. Every vendor payment, clearly on record Record what you paid, see what each bill used and keep any unused amount in view. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Vendor Portal URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/vendor-portal/ Give an invited supplier read-only access to selected bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and payments made for the active business profile. Purchases A vendor portal that keeps suppliers in the loop Invite a supplier to sign in and see the bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and payments made you choose to share. They view and download their documents, and your books stay in your hands. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Vendor Portal Read-only supplier experience Per-vendor portal menu Only their own documents pop How it works Self-service for suppliers, control for you Once a vendor accepts your invitation, every list shows only their own documents for your business, ready to preview and download. Invite and share One login per supplier, for your business. Invite a vendor and choose the portal areas Choose which areas the supplier can see on their vendor record and send the invitation. Once they accept, they sign straight into their own portal for your business. Invitation by email You choose the areas Opens on your business Every bill, purchase order, credit and payment in the portal belongs to that supplier and your business. Access is limited to active vendors who have accepted their invitation. Their documents only Your business only Active vendors only Dashboard and documents Totals, recent payments and documents at a glance. See bills, outstanding balance, orders, payments and credits The dashboard shows one card per enabled area (bills and their outstanding balance, shared purchase orders, recorded payments and the vendor-credit balance) and a list of recent documents to preview or download. Four bill summary cards Recent documents Remaining vendor-credit balance View bills, purchase orders, credits and payments made Each area you enable opens its own list. Every saved bill is listed, and purchase orders and vendor credits appear once sent, each with preview and PDF download; payments show the amount and unused amount, with a Period filter for this financial year, the previous one or all time. Bills Purchase orders and vendor credits Payments made Read-only by design Suppliers see your records; you keep control of them. Your books stay in your hands Suppliers can filter, sort, preview and download, and approve a purchase order from its link. Every bill, posting and payment stays under your control. View and download Approve & Sign on orders Your records protected Always up to date Record a payment or update a bill and your supplier sees the latest status the next time they open or refresh the page. Latest status shown One set of records Managed from your account Built in What a vendor can see Dashboard totals, document lists, downloads and the menu you control. Invite and choose areas Pick the areas a supplier can see and send the invitation from the vendor record. On Purchase Orders Payments Made Every list shows that supplier's records for your business. Vendor Brightwave Business Northwind Access Invited vendors bal See what is billed and outstanding Cards for bills, outstanding balance, purchase orders, payments made and vendor credits, with recent documents below. $5,270 3 bill(s) Outstanding $1,480 Open balance bad Recorded up Bills, orders, credits and payments Read-only lists with preview and PDF download, plus a Period filter for payments. BILL-1039 · Viewed $1,480.00 PO-1024 · Sent $2,960.00 PMT-0312 · Unused $500.00 Preview · Download PDF Each row Suppliers view, download and approve orders; everything else stays with you. Allowed in Your records Protected Approve & Sign a PO Suppliers see the latest status each time they open the page. BILL-1036 Viewed Payment Next load Paid Same records, always current Portal menu Enable only the supplier areas you want visible. Vendor Credits Off Vendor dashboard Totals and recent payments at a glance. Shared $120 1 credit PDF access Preview and download bills, orders and credits. Download PDF BILL-1036.pdf Saved Preview opens the document Read only Suppliers view; you stay in control. BILL-1039 NS #6366f1 Northwind Studio Sent info warn Read-only for the vendor Vendor Management Create the supplier record and control its invite. Bright Brightwave Print Co. Accepted Portal permissions 4 of 4 Allowed profile Record the payments your supplier sees. #10b981 Quarry Lane Studios PMT-0318 $1,200.00 #14b8a6 Cobalt Cloud Hosting PMT-0317 $189.00 #f59e0b PMT-0312 live Questions Vendor Portal, answered What can a supplier see in the Invoice Crowd Vendor Portal? The business can enable Bills, Purchase Orders, Vendor Credits and Payments Made. Every saved bill is listed, while purchase orders and vendor credits appear once they have been sent. The dashboard shows a card for each enabled area and the most recent documents, and a vendor can Approve & Sign a purchase order from its link. Can a vendor change anything in my books? No. The portal is read-only: vendors view and download their documents and can approve a purchase order, while your records stay exactly as you keep them. How is a vendor kept inside the right business? Every list is limited to that vendor's own records for your business, and only active vendors who have accepted their invitation can sign in. Can I choose which portal tabs a vendor gets? Yes. On the vendor record, choose whether Bills, Purchase Orders, Payments Made and Vendor Credits appear in the supplier's menu. Can a vendor download purchase documents? Yes. Bills, purchase orders and vendor credits each offer preview and PDF download. Payments Made shows as a table with a Period filter for this financial year, the previous one or all time. Give suppliers clarity, keep control of your books Invite the vendor, choose the tabs and let them view the documents and payments that already belong to them. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Accounting URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/accounting/ Connect your chart of accounts, balanced manual journals, bank reconciliation, account-level ledgers and financial reports in one small-business workspace. Accounting Accounting that connects every record to your reports One double-entry ledger for your small business. Classify activity, post journals, reconcile bank statements, lock closed periods and read financial reports with every figure traceable to its source. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Chart, journals and reconciliation Ledger and statement reports Closed periods stay locked pop How it works From source records to financial reports Invoices, bills, expenses, payments, journals and reconciliations live in one business, so you and your accountant can see the records behind every balance. Classify and adjust Organize your accounts and post adjustments. Shape the Chart of Accounts Organize accounts across Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense, add your own sub-accounts and hide or restore shared defaults. Five account families Custom sub-accounts Recoverable hidden defaults Post balanced Manual Journals Enter two or more lines with equal debit and credit totals. Invoice Crowd checks the accounts, the business and any locked period before saving the entry. Balanced entries required Saved as one entry Respects locked periods Write off a bad debt When an invoice will not be collected, Write Off Balance in Manage Payments closes its remaining balance against an expense account such as Bad Debts, on the date you choose. No payment is recorded, the receivable clears, the reason stays on record, and cash-basis reports treat it as the noncash adjustment it is. Expense account you choose Reason and date on record Reverse Write-Off if they pay Reconcile your bank Upload a statement and close it with confidence. Import a bank statement Upload the statement file your bank exports, check the detected columns in the import wizard, then review the transactions for one account and period. CSV, Excel, OFX, QIF, CAMT.053, MT940, BAI2 Column mapping remembered per account Rows previewed before import Match entries and close the reconciliation Compare statement lines with recorded expenses, bills, income and other account activity. Add anything missing from a prefilled form, tick what matches and close the statement. Matched and unmatched rows Prefilled missing-entry form Closed statement summary Match one bank line to several entries Match transactions on a statement line opens a drawer where one deposit or withdrawal clears several recorded entries, such as a $970.00 payout that settles a $1,000.00 invoice payment and a $30.00 fee. Record Transfer moves money between bank, cash and payment-clearing accounts, with any fee the processor withheld, so payouts reconcile to the cent. One line, several entries, zero difference Record Transfer for payouts and fees Matches kept with the statement Inspect and report Drill from totals to the transactions behind them. Move from Trial Balance to General Ledger Spot an account worth a closer look in the Trial Balance, open its General Ledger and follow each entry back to the document that created it. Account-level totals Transaction-level detail Links back to source documents Review statements with full context Read each statement for the period you choose alongside the General Ledger and Trial Balance. If a figure is out, the difference is shown so you can trace it to its source. Differences always shown Source-first review Clear review notices Cash or accrual, period against period Choose Accounting Basis, Accrual or Cash, on the Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Trial Balance and General Ledger. Cash recognizes income and expenses when they are paid, including part payments, while your original transactions stay unchanged. Compare sets a statement beside the Previous period, the Same period last year or the Last 12 months, with Change and Change % columns and a PDF or Excel download. Accrual or Cash on four statements Up to three earlier periods Comparisons in PDF or Excel Built in Everything you need to keep the books Organize accounts, post adjustments, reconcile the bank and read your statements, all from one ledger. Keep a fixed asset register Record the equipment, vehicles and property you own, post straight-line depreciation to the ledger every month, and record a sale or write-off with its gain or loss. Laptops · Cost $3,600.00 Monthly depreciation −$100.00 cn Accumulated · 6 months −$600.00 Remaining $3,000.00 bal Record adjustments with equal debits and credits, saved together as one entry. Dr Business Insurance $650.00 Cr Prepaid Expenses Journal balanced Dr = Cr Export to QuickBooks or Xero Select up to 100 invoices and download import files for QuickBooks Online or Xero, with mappings saved for each business. Select invoices Up to 100 Map accounts QuickBooks or Xero Download ZIP Import files Mappings saved for next time Reconcile to zero Tick the lines that match, add what's missing and close when the difference reaches zero. Statement ending $148,920.00 Cleared balance Difference $0.00 Compare periods Set a statement beside the previous period, the same period last year or the last 12 months, with the change in amount and percent. Net Profit $47,649.50 Q4 25 Q1 26 Q2 26 Q3 26 Cash or accrual basis Read the Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Trial Balance and General Ledger on an Accrual or a Cash basis. Accounting Basis Cash Net Profit · Cash $41,280.00 in Net Profit · Accrual Chart of Accounts Organize every account your business uses. Chec Business Checking 1201-2 Petty Cash 1201-1 1201 Manual Journals Record balanced adjustments. #4941e3 Reverse journal Lines swapped $1,800.00 #28c76f Save as template 2 lines #ff9f43 Recurring Monthly Bank Reconciliation Match recorded activity to a statement. Payment INV-2033 Matched $9,860.00 Figma team plan $540.00 Monthly account fee Create entry $28.00 General Ledger See every transaction, account by account. AWS hosting $318.60 Net movement $858.60 Trial Balance Check debit and credit totals by account. Total Debit $537,835.00 Total Credit Accounts 21 Cash Flow See where your cash came from and went. $151,400 Begin Operating Investing Financing Ending live Questions Accounting, answered Does Invoice Crowd use double-entry accounting? Yes. Invoice Crowd keeps a double-entry ledger that refuses unbalanced entries, and the Profit and Loss, Balance Sheet, Trial Balance, General Ledger and Cash Flow Statement all come from that same ledger. If older data leaves a difference on a statement, it stays visible so you can review it. What accounting tools are included? Invoice Crowd includes Chart of Accounts, Manual Journals, Opening Balances, Bank Reconciliation from an imported statement, Fixed Assets, Budget vs Actuals, General Ledger, Trial Balance, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow Statement, Profit and Loss and Lock Transactions. Report Pack puts the five statements in one PDF behind an At a Glance cover, and every statement downloads on your letterhead with page numbers. Statements run on an accrual or a cash basis and compare with earlier periods. Accounting is included on paid plans. Where do I find the Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet? On the Reports page. Choose Reports in the sidebar, and the Financial Statements group lists the Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow Statement, Trial Balance, General Ledger and Budget vs Actuals next to every other report, with search and Favourites. The Accounting menu keeps the bookkeeping tasks: Chart of Accounts, Manual Journals, Bank Reconciliation, Opening Balances, Fixed Assets and Lock Transactions. Can Invoice Crowd show my reports on a cash basis? Yes. The Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Trial Balance and General Ledger have an Accounting Basis filter with Accrual and Cash. Cash recognizes income and expenses when they are paid, including part payments, and Accrual recognizes them when invoiced or billed. Your original transactions stay unchanged, the PDF prints Cash Basis or Accrual Basis, and Report Pack follows the basis you choose. Accounting is included on paid plans. Can I compare financial statements across periods? Yes. On the Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Trial Balance and Cash Flow Statement, Compare offers Previous period, Same period last year and Last 12 months, and Earlier Periods adds up to three columns. Every line shows its Change and Change %, and the comparison downloads as a PDF or an Excel file. Can Invoice Crowd track fixed assets and depreciation? Yes. Fixed Assets, under Accounting, is a register of the equipment, vehicles and property your business owns. Add Asset records the cost, salvage value, useful life in months, purchase and service dates, the asset, accumulated depreciation and depreciation expense accounts, and how the asset was paid for: from a bank, cash or card account, as an opening balance for something you owned before your books started, or already recorded by a bill or expense. Depreciation is straight-line. Each finished month posts automatically as a journal, Post All posts whatever is due through a date you choose, and the register shows the monthly amount, accumulated depreciation and remaining value. Dispose (Sell or Write Off) records a sale or write-off with its gain or loss. Fixed Assets is included on paid plans. Does Invoice Crowd check that journals balance? Yes. Every manual journal needs at least two lines with equal debit and credit totals before it saves. The entry is saved as a whole and respects your selected business and any locked period. Can I reconcile from a spreadsheet? Yes. Upload a CSV, XLS or XLSX statement and the import wizard detects the columns, then stages the rows in Bank Reconciliation for matching. OFX, QIF, CAMT.053, MT940 and BAI2 files work too. What should I do when a statement report shows a difference? Trace it to its source. The statement shows how far out of balance it is and offers Review and Fix; use the Trial Balance and General Ledger to find the affected account, then correct the original record. Does opening an accounting report change the books? No. Reports are read-only. Opening, filtering or exporting a statement or ledger leaves your documents and journals exactly as they are. Can I lock a period after I close the books? Yes. Lock Transactions, the last item under Accounting, locks invoicing, purchases, accounting or all transactions dated on or before a date you choose, so nobody can create, edit or delete them. The account owner can unlock a few dates to fix one entry and lock them again, and every change is recorded with who, when and why. Creating or changing a lock is included on paid plans. Keep every record connected, from invoice to report Classify, adjust, reconcile and review in one workspace, with every figure traceable to its source. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Chart of Accounts URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/chart-of-accounts/ Organize Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense accounts in a tabbed tree, create sub-accounts, and hide defaults you do not use. Accounting A chart of accounts shaped around your business Organize accounts as a tree across Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense. Add your own accounts and sub-accounts, and hide any default you don't use, ready to restore whenever you need it. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Chart of Accounts Five account families in one tree Custom accounts and sub-accounts Hide and restore defaults pop How it works Start with smart defaults, make them your own Invoices, expenses, payments and reports all use this chart. Manage your own accounts freely, and hide the defaults you don't need, ready to bring back anytime. Organize the chart Five families, with a tree underneath each one. Browse accounts by financial family Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense each have their own tab, while All Accounts shows the whole tree. Parent and child rows make the chart quick to scan. Tabbed account-family views Parent and child rows Hidden Accounts has its own view Add an account where the business needs one Choose the account type, subtype, parent or sub-account position, account number, name and description. On an expense account, the Profit & Loss section field decides whether it reports under Cost of Goods Sold (Direct Cost) or Operating Expenses. Once saved, it's ready to use across your business. Account number and description Parent or sub-account choice Ready to use once saved Adapt the defaults Personalize the chart and keep every default recoverable. Hide defaults you don't use Hide a default account to keep your chart focused. It moves to the Hidden Accounts tab, ready to restore with Show Account whenever you need it. Defaults kept safe Restore from Hidden Accounts Custom accounts remain editable Tidy up with confidence Delete a custom account you no longer need. If it has already classified transactions, check its General Ledger first and move anything that belongs elsewhere. Delete custom accounts Check the ledger first Keep history accurate One chart, every screen The accounts behind every document, journal and report. One list of accounts The accounts you see here are the same ones every document, journal and report uses, so there's only one list to maintain. One source for every screen Default and your own accounts coexist Reports read the same classifications Reorganize without rewriting history Rename or move an account and your earlier documents and ledger rows keep their original dates and amounts. Your history stays exactly as it was recorded. Original amounts kept Original dates kept History stays intact Built in Everything you control in the chart Account structure, custom accounts and defaults, organized your way. Browse by account family Tabs for Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense, plus the full tree. All Accounts #4941e3 Assets #00cfe8 Liability #ff9f43 Equity #7367f0 Income #28c76f Expense #ea5455 Hidden Accounts #8a8d93 Add accounts and numbers Set the type, subtype, parent, number and description, and choose Cost of Goods Sold or Operating Expenses for expense accounts. Sub Account Under Cash Account Name Checking Account Number 1201-2 Hide unused defaults Keep your chart focused and restore any default from Hidden Accounts. Vehicles Hidden 7204 Machinery 7202 Plant & Machinery 1052 Delete custom accounts you no longer need, after a quick ledger check. Business Checking Rows already posted 14 cn Review before delete First bal Every document, journal and report uses the same chart. Chart Software Category P&L Line One list of accounts, used everywhere Rename or move accounts while earlier entries keep their original amounts. Renamed Operating Checking INV-2033 on 09/02 $9,860.00 Earlier rows Unchanged Account types Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense are the five top-level families. 19 accounts 12 103 Custom sub-accounts Group an account you created under an appropriate parent. Cash 1201 Petty Cash 1201-1 Hidden defaults Hide a default and restore it anytime. Show account Gas 5602 Manual journals Post balanced adjustments to any account. Dr Business Insurance $650.00 Cr Prepaid Expenses Balanced Dr = Cr General ledger See every transaction for an account and period. $38,015.00 in Withdrawals $7,086.60 Net movement $30,928.40 Accounting hub See how every accounting tool fits together. Accounts Journals Adjust Reports Review The accounting surfaces together live Questions Chart of Accounts, answered What is the chart of accounts in Invoice Crowd? Invoice Crowd's chart of accounts is the tree used to classify your financial activity. It groups accounts under Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income and Expense, and you can add your own parent accounts and sub-accounts. Can I add my own accounts and account numbers? Yes. Choose the account family and subtype, decide whether it's a parent or sub-account, and enter an account name, number and description. Expense accounts also choose a Profit & Loss section, so direct costs appear under Cost of Goods Sold, marked with a Cost of Sales badge in the chart. Can I remove a default account? You can hide it. Hidden defaults move to the Hidden Accounts tab, where you can restore them at any time. Can I rename or move an account later? Yes. Edit a custom account's name, number, parent or description at any time. Earlier documents and ledger rows keep their original dates and amounts, and reports show the account under its new name. Is the Chart of Accounts available to every team member? Access follows each team member's role. Members with accounting access to a business can use its chart, and the account owner decides who that is. Give every business record a clear place to land Set up the accounts you use, keep unused defaults out of sight and move into journals and reports with a chart your team understands. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Manual Journals URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/manual-journals/ Post balanced manual journals, save them as templates, schedule recurring journals and reverse entries, with period-lock checks, receipts and CSV export. Accounting Manual journals, balanced and checked before they save Record the adjustments that don't start as an invoice, expense or payment. Every journal needs at least two lines, one debit or credit per line and equal totals, and you can reuse it as a template, schedule it or reverse it in a click. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Manual Journals Equal debits and credits required Two or more valid lines Respects locked periods pop How it works Adjustments made clear and controlled Each journal is saved as one entry of account lines, checked against your business and any locked period, so a closed month stays closed. Build the entry Title, date, currency, evidence and account lines. Enter debit and credit lines together Choose an account for each line and enter a value on one side. Invoice Crowd checks that every journal has at least two lines and balances before it saves. At least two valid lines One side per line Equal totals required Keep the supporting context with the batch A journal carries a title, description, currency, date and optional receipt, and its lines are saved and managed together as one entry. Optional receipt attachment Currency and exchange context One entry, many lines Protect the period Closed periods stay closed. Locked periods stay protected When accounting is locked through the journal's date in Lock Transactions, the journal stays exactly as it is. Edits check both the original and the new date, so a closed period stays closed. Original and new dates checked Protected in locked periods Saved completely or not at all Always posted to the right business Every journal is checked against the business you have selected, and its lines use accounts from your chart. Entries created by invoices, expenses and payments are managed from those documents. Right business, every time Accounts from your chart Document entries stay separate Correct and review Change journals cleanly, as a whole. Edit or delete the journal as one Edit a journal and its lines update together; delete it and every line goes with it, leaving all other entries untouched. Edits apply to the whole journal Saved as one entry Deletion respects the period lock Clear review for older data If imported or older data contains a journal that needs attention, Invoice Crowd flags it with a review notice, while new entries carry on as normal. Every new journal validated Older items flagged for review You confirm every correction Built in Everything around each journal The form, balancing rules, templates and controls that make adjustments simple. Debit and credit lines together Two or more lines, one side each, with equal totals. Dr Business Insurance $650.00 Cr Prepaid Expenses Totals equal Dr = Cr bal Supporting context Title, description, currency, date and an optional receipt, saved together. Currency USD Date 09/30/2026 Receipt Attached Locked periods protected Journals in a closed period stay exactly as they are. Journal date 06/20/2026 Accounting locked to 06/30/2026 cn Closed period Protected Each journal is checked against your selected business and chart. Business Northwind Accounts Your chart Linked rows Excluded Edit or delete as one Every line of a journal changes together. #4941e3 Business Insurance Debit Prepaid Expenses Credit #28c76f Same batch Edited together 2 lines Older or imported items that need attention are flagged for review. Journal review AR #ff9f43 Historical accounting review 1 item Flagged warn Reviewed info Confirmed ok New entries carry on normally Reverse Journal One action creates a new journal with every debit and credit swapped. Original: Dr Rent $2,000.00 Reversal: Cr Rent Net effect $0.00 Templates and recurring journals Save a journal as a template, create a journal from it, or schedule it Monthly, Weekly, Quarterly or Yearly. Save as Template Accrual Schedule Monthly Posted On schedule Stop Schedule at any time Period locks Locked through Journals to 06/30 Journals from 07/01 Open in CSV export Export every journal for the business to CSV. Export to CSV Downloaded manual-journals.csv Chart of Accounts Journal lines use accounts from the active chart. Cont Contractors 8203 Accounts Payable 2103 Accruals 2104 Trial Balance See how the period's account movements add up. Total Debit $537,835.00 Total Credit Ties live Questions Manual Journals, answered What is a manual journal in Invoice Crowd? A manual journal is an adjustment entered directly as two or more account lines rather than created from an invoice, expense, income or payment. Its lines are saved together as one entry. Does Invoice Crowd check that a journal balances? Yes. Every manual journal needs equal debit and credit totals, at least two valid lines and one side per line, and it's checked before anything is saved. How do period locks affect journals? Journals dated in a locked period stay exactly as they are. Invoice Crowd checks the journal date against the dates locked in Lock Transactions, and an edit checks both the original and the new date. To fix one entry, the owner can partially unlock a few dates and lock them again. Can I attach a receipt to a manual journal? Yes. The journal form supports an optional receipt attachment alongside its title, description, date, currency and account lines. Can I reuse, repeat or reverse a journal? Yes. Save as Template keeps a journal's lines for reuse, and Journal Templates lets you create a journal from a template or schedule it as a recurring journal (Monthly, Weekly, Quarterly or Yearly) until you choose Stop Schedule. Reverse Journal creates a new journal with every debit and credit line swapped. What happens when I delete a journal? The whole journal is deleted together, every line at once. Entries created from invoices, expenses, income and payments stay exactly as they are. Make every adjustment balanced and clear Use a manual journal whenever an adjustment doesn't start from a document, with the accounts, receipt and period kept together. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Bank Reconciliation URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/bank-reconciliation/ Bank reconciliation made simple: import statements, match them to your recorded income and expenses, and close each month at exactly zero. Accounting Bank reconciliation that closes at exactly zero Match your uploaded bank statement against the income, expenses, bills and payments you've recorded, and close when the difference is zero. Each new statement opens at the last closed balance, so every month picks up where the last one ended. Try Invoice Crowd See supported features Home Features Bank Reconciliation Statement import in many formats Closes at zero difference Reopen with a reason pop How it works From statement file to closed month Upload, review, match and close in clear steps. Nothing reaches your books until you choose to record it. Upload and preview Check before you import Use the file your bank provides Upload CSV, TXT, XLS, XLSX, OFX, QFX, QBO, QIF, CAMT XML, MT940 or BAI2 files up to 10 MB. Invoice Crowd finds the header row and reads the columns for you. Up to 100,000 rows Header row found for you Files up to 10 MB A preview you can trust Invoice Crowd keeps a private copy of your file, recognizes it if it's uploaded again and builds the preview itself. Change the account, period or closing balance and the file is read again to match. Duplicate files recognized Settings fixed at import Private file handling Stage and match You decide what's recorded Review every statement line Each line is checked against the statement period and the account's currency, and running balances are verified whenever your bank includes them. Within the statement period Matching currency Running balance verified Add missing entries in a click An unmatched line can open a prefilled Income or Expense form, and Bank Rules you create suggest its category. Review it, save it, and it's ready to match. Prefilled forms Bank Rules suggest categories You review before saving Match one line to several entries Match transactions on a statement line opens a drawer where one deposit or withdrawal clears several recorded entries at once, such as a $970.00 payout that settles a $1,000.00 invoice payment and a $30.00 fee. Save match keeps the group with the line until you close, and Clear Match starts it again. Up to 1,000 entries on one line The group nets to the line exactly Save match or Clear Match before you close Close and reopen A clear record of every close Close at exactly zero Invoice Crowd recalculates every amount and closes the statement when your matched withdrawals and deposits cover it exactly. Matched entries then stay protected until the statement is reopened. Difference calculated for you Every line accounted for Matched entries protected Reopen with permission and a reason Team members with the Reverse Accounting Entries permission can reopen a closed statement with a short reason. The original statement and matches are kept, along with who reopened it, when and why. Original statement kept Matches released for review Who, when and why recorded Reconciliation controls Controls built into every reconciliation Each business's data stays separate, and your records, currencies and history are protected at every step. Your statement file is stored privately and removed once the import is complete. Upload Private copy Import Rows saved File Removed Your file is removed after import The same statement file is recognized if it's uploaded again to the same account. checking-sep-2026.csv Analyzed Same file again Recognized Same account Business Checking bal Overlap protection Lines already imported are skipped, while genuine repeat transactions are kept. Rows in statement 14 Already imported cn Imported again Mapping profiles Your column mapping is remembered for each bank account. Date Column 1 Withdrawal Column 5 Deposit Column 6 Secure file reading Spreadsheet formulas and external references are ignored, so files are read as data only. Statement file CSV #28c76f 14 rows Read info Checked Previewed ok Read as data only Each statement matches your accounting currency, so every amount is exact. Statement currency USD Accounting currency Match Yes Invoice Crowd works out the difference itself, so a close always reflects your real figures. Statement ending $148,920.00 Cleared balance $148,948.00 Difference −$28.00 The right entries, every time Only unreconciled entries for this business, account and period are offered for matching. Checking Sep 2026 Unreconciled rows Business Northwind Matches kept on record Every match links the statement line to the entry it cleared. Payment INV-2033 Matched $9,860.00 Studio rent $2,000.00 Figma team plan $540.00 Record Transfer Move money between bank, cash and payment-clearing accounts, with any fee a processor withheld. Payout to Business Checking $970.00 in Fee withheld $30.00 From clearing account $1,000.00 Role-based permissions Import and close need Post Accounting Entries; reopening needs Reverse Accounting Entries. #4941e3 Close Reopen #ff9f43 Separate permissions History kept on reopen The original statement and matches are kept, with who reopened it, when and why. August 2026 BC #6366f1 $117,991.60 Closed Reopened warn Reason: missed a bank fee on 08/31 live Questions Bank Reconciliation, answered What files can I import? CSV, TXT, XLS, XLSX, OFX, QFX, QBO, QIF, XML/CAMT, STA/MT940 and BAI/BAI2 files, up to 10 MB and 100,000 rows. What happens to a line that doesn't match? Open it as a prefilled Income or Expense form, review the details and save. Uploading a statement only stages its lines, so nothing is recorded until you approve it. When can I close a reconciliation? When the difference is zero. Invoice Crowd calculates it from the entries you've matched, so a closed statement always agrees with the bank. Can a closed reconciliation be reopened? Yes. A team member with the Reverse Accounting Entries permission can reopen it with a reason of 5 to 500 characters. The original statement and matches are kept, and who reopened it and when is recorded. Do uncleared items carry over to the next statement? Yes. Once a statement is closed, the next one opens at that statement's closing bank balance, and recorded entries that had not cleared yet are offered again. A check written on January 30 and cleared on February 2 can be reconciled on the February statement. Does Invoice Crowd suggest matches or categories? Yes. It pairs each bank line with a recorded entry of the same direction and amount dated within three days, and you confirm the matches before closing. Match transactions lets one line clear several entries, such as a payout net of its fee. Bank Rules you create (New Rule: When, Contains, Category, Priority) suggest the income or expense category when you add an entry from an unmatched line. How do I reconcile a payout that has a fee taken out? Open Match transactions on the bank line and match it to the invoice payments and the fee it covers, or use Record Transfer to move the payout from your payment-clearing account to the bank with the Fee withheld and its Fee expense account. Either way the line clears to an exact zero difference. Which plans include Bank Reconciliation? Bank Reconciliation is included on paid plans, along with the rest of the accounting module. Close every month with confidence Import the statement, review each line, add anything missing and close when the difference is zero. Review all features You approve every entry Closes at exact zero Reopen with full history --- ## Bank Statement Import URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/bank-feeds/ Import bank statements in CSV, Excel, OFX, QIF and more, preview every row and reconcile to zero without sharing your banking login. Bank statement import Import bank statements and reconcile with confidence Download a statement from your online banking, upload it and review every transaction before you reconcile. Your banking login stays with your bank. Try Invoice Crowd Open Bank Reconciliation Home Features Bank Statement Import Works with your bank's export Banking login stays private Review before you reconcile pop How it works Bring bank activity in on your terms Import a statement, check every row, then reconcile it against your books. Nothing is recorded until you approve it. Upload a structured statement Private and secure Use the file your bank exports Upload CSV, TXT, XLS, XLSX, OFX, QFX, QBO, QIF, CAMT XML, MT940 or BAI2 files up to 10 MB, straight from your bank's download page. CSV, Excel, OFX and more Files up to 10 MB One workflow for every bank Columns detected for you Invoice Crowd reads the dates, amounts, debit and credit direction, currency and running balance, whatever your bank's layout. Every file is checked securely before anything is imported. Automatic column detection Local date and amount formats Secure file handling Review before import You stay in control Check the mapping, preview every row Adjust any column before you import and preview each transaction. Your mapping is remembered for that account, so the next statement is quicker. Header row found for you Locale-aware amount and date handling Mapping saved per account Duplicates caught automatically Upload the same file again and Invoice Crowd recognizes it. Rows that overlap an earlier import are skipped, while genuine repeat transactions are kept. Duplicate files caught Overlapping rows skipped Genuine repeats kept Reconcile with confidence Match, review, close Match against recorded activity Imported lines open in Bank Reconciliation, ready to match. A line with no match can prefill an Income or Expense form, so you can review and save what's missing in moments. Likely matches pre-ticked Prefilled Income and Expense forms You approve every entry Close at zero, with a clear record A statement closes when your matched entries cover it exactly and the difference is zero. If it ever needs reopening, the person, time and reason are recorded. Closes at zero difference Matches kept on record Reopen with a reason Reconciliation workflow Import, review and reconcile bank statements Use the statement file your bank already provides, in CSV, Excel, OFX, QFX, QBO, QIF, CAMT.053, MT940 or BAI2, and reconcile it against your books. Your login stays private Upload a statement export without ever entering your online banking credentials in Invoice Crowd. Bank website Export Invoice Crowd Upload Preview 14 rows Credentials stay with you Works with your bank If your bank exports a supported statement file, the same simple workflow handles it. Any bank #4941e3 Credit union #28c76f Online bank #ff9f43 One statement workflow Columns mapped for you Dates, amounts and debit or credit direction are detected and remembered for each account. Dates Detected Amounts and direction in Column mapping Remembered bal Review before reconciliation Preview every transaction before it enters the reconciliation. Statement Download Reconcile Match Starts with a file from your bank Wide format support CSV, TXT, XLS, XLSX, OFX, QFX, QBO, QIF, CAMT XML, MT940 and BAI2. CSV Excel #1d7a47 OFX QFX QBO QIF CAMT.053 #7367f0 MT940 #ea5455 BAI2 #00cfe8 Up to 10 MB Your bank's own figures Statement files carry your bank's exact amounts and dates, ready to match. CSV or Excel export Read OFX / CAMT / MT940 QIF / QBO / BAI2 Duplicate protection Repeat files and overlapping rows are caught automatically for each account. Same file again Caught Rows already in Skipped New rows Imported Organized by business Each import belongs to one business, bank account, currency and period. Business Northwind Account Checking Period Sep 2026 Review before creating records Imported lines stay separate from your books until you match or record them. Payment INV-2033 Matched $9,860.00 Figma team plan $540.00 Monthly account fee Create entry $28.00 Matching currency Each statement uses the same currency as the bank account it belongs to. Statement currency USD Account currency Yes Close at zero Invoice Crowd calculates the difference itself, so a statement closes only when it truly balances. Statement ending $148,920.00 Cleared balance Difference $0.00 Reopen with a record Reopening keeps the original statement, its match history and the reason given. August 2026 BC #6366f1 Business Checking $117,991.60 Closed ok Reopened warn Original matches are kept live Questions Bank statement import, answered How do I get my bank transactions into Invoice Crowd? Download a statement from your online banking and upload it in Bank Reconciliation. Invoice Crowd detects the columns, shows a preview and stages the transactions for matching, while your banking login stays with your bank. Which statement files can I upload? CSV, TXT, XLS, XLSX, OFX, QFX, QBO, QIF, CAMT XML, STA/MT940 and BAI/BAI2 files up to 10 MB. What happens after I import a statement? The transactions are ready to match in Bank Reconciliation. Likely matches are pre-ticked, and any line without a match can prefill an Income or Expense form for you to review and save. When can I close a reconciliation? As soon as the difference is zero. Invoice Crowd calculates it from the entries you've matched, so a closed statement agrees with your books. Reconcile your bank with confidence Download a statement, preview and import it, then match it against the records already in your books. Review all features Every close on record --- ## Multi-Currency URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/multi-currency/ Bill in a customer's currency and keep one accounting currency. Invoice Crowd stores the conversion rate, its date and the original amount. Features Bill in the customer's currency and keep the books in yours Invoice Crowd bills customers in their own currency and keeps your books in one accounting currency. Every invoice, expense and income records both amounts and the exchange rate used, so each entry still makes sense a year from now. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Multi-Currency Exchange rate saved with each entry Correct decimals for every currency One accounting currency per profile pop What is inside Bill globally, report in one currency Every record keeps the amount as it was billed or paid, the rate that converted it, and the single currency your ledger and reports are read in. Recording it Two currencies, one record Two currencies on every money record Every invoice, expense and income carries two currencies: the one the money moved in, and the one your books are kept in. The transaction currency holds the line amounts, totals, amount due and amount paid. The accounting currency belongs to the business profile rather than to any one document, so two companies under one login can keep one set of books in euros and another in dollars. Amounts, totals and payments in the transaction currency One accounting currency per business profile The converted amount is what reaches the ledger Decimal places that follow the currency Each currency uses its proper number of decimal places, following the ISO 4217 standard. Yen is entered in whole units, Kuwaiti dinar keeps its third decimal and most currencies use two, so every amount looks right to the customer who pays it. Whole units for JPY and KRW Three decimals for KWD and BHD Amounts entered at the right unit Fixing the rate Locked in when you save Converted once, saved for good When the transaction currency differs from your accounting currency, Invoice Crowd converts once, at save time, and stores the result. Expenses and incomes also keep the rate date and whether the rate came from the provider or was entered by you, so the figures hold steady however the market moves. The saved rate stays with the transaction The rate date and its origin are stored with it Document and ledger always agree A backdated entry uses the rate of its own date An expense, income or invoice dated in the past is converted at the verified rate for its own date, so backdated entries stay accurate. Where a rate for that date is needed, Invoice Crowd asks you to enter it. An entry dated in the future uses today's rate, marked as provisional. The rate of the transaction date Transaction date and rate date stay separate Enter a rate whenever needed Reading the books One currency, consistent history The ledger and the reports read one currency Converted amounts reach the ledger in your accounting currency, and the general ledger, profit and loss statement, balance sheet and trial balance are all read in it. The transaction currency stays on the record, so you never lose sight of what was actually billed or paid. A Show Amounts In choice, in the business switcher and in list filters, switches the dashboard, the summary tiles and list amounts between your business currency, your accounting currency or all currencies. General ledger, profit and loss, balance sheet, trial balance Each row at its saved rate Switch views between currencies Accurate by design Invoice Crowd converts, records and shows which rate it used. Every conversion works from a verified rate or one you enter, and once your books hold entries the accounting currency stays fixed, so every posted entry reads in the right currency. Verified or entered rates only A second base currency, a second profile Posted entries stay consistent Built in The rest of the currency handling The details that keep every converted figure trustworthy, a year later and beyond. Same-currency records When a record is already in your accounting currency, it posts at a rate of 1 straight away. INV-2040 · USD $4,800.00 Exchange rate Posted Straight away bal Today's verified rate An entry dated today takes the provider's current verified rate, and that figure is the one frozen onto the record. EUR → USD Today Verified 1.0842 Frozen On save Stored on the record Backdated or future-dated A past date uses the verified rate of that date. A future date uses today's rate, marked as provisional. Transaction date 08/14/2026 Rate date Rate used Rate of that date A rate you type Enter your own rate and it is recorded as a custom rate. If it looks unusual, such as more than 10% from the verified rate, Invoice Crowd asks you to confirm it before saving. Exchange Rate (typed) 1.09000000 Source Custom rate €540.00 in USD $588.60 Rate history kept A typed rate that matches the stored rate for that date keeps its original source, and older records keep the rate they were saved with. Stored rate Typed again Evidence Kept The original source stays on the record Checked before it saves Every conversion is checked for valid currencies, date and rate before it is saved. #28c76f Currency codes EUR · USD OK 09/28/2026 Rate 1.0842 > 0 Clear currency codes The conversion panel names your accounting currency by its ISO code, such as USD or EUR, so currencies that share a symbol are always clear. USD #3b82f6 EUR #6366f1 GBP #14b8a6 JPY #f59e0b BHD #ec4899 CAD #ef4444 AUD #10b981 INR #8b5cf6 Accounting currency: USD Correct minor units A JPY charge goes to the payment provider in whole yen and a KWD charge in thousandths, exactly right for each currency. ¥480,000 · JPY 480000 €3,960.00 · EUR 396000 BHD 1,250.500 1250500 Precise totals Validation, rounding and charging follow each currency's ISO precision. 3 × €1,120.00 €3,360.00 1 × €600.00 €600.00 Total €3,960.00 Consistent reports Every posted row in your reports uses its own stored rate, so historic figures stay consistent. Expenses in USD $3,348.86 Figma Rent Print AWS Rail Lunch Stock Exact-amount reconciliation Bank reconciliation matches exact amounts, so converted lines are reviewed in the Uncategorized Transactions tab. Bank line $4,301.10 INV-2044 $4,293.43 Uncategorized To review Reconciliation matches exact amounts Compare plans See which plans include expenses, incomes and full accounting on the pricing page. Free plan Expenses Billing Paid plan Full access See pricing for each plan live Questions Multi-Currency, answered Does Invoice Crowd do multi-currency invoicing? Yes. An invoice can be billed in the customer's currency while the business's books stay in a single accounting currency, set once per business profile. Expenses and incomes work the same way: you record what you actually paid, and the converted amount is what reaches the ledger. Both currencies stay on the record, so the original figure is never lost. What exchange rate does Invoice Crowd use? Invoice Crowd converts at save time using the verified rate for the record's date (today's rate for an entry dated today), then stores that rate on the record. On expenses and incomes it also stores the rate date and whether the figure came from the provider or was entered manually. Can I enter my own exchange rate in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Click Edit Exchange Rate on an expense or income and type the rate you want to use. It is recorded as a custom rate, so anyone reading the entry later can see where the figure came from. What rate is used for an expense dated last month? The verified rate for that date. Where a rate for the date is needed, Invoice Crowd asks you to enter it before saving. The entry keeps the rate, its date and whether it came from the provider or was entered by you. What happens to old entries when exchange rates change? They stay exactly as recorded. Each expense, income and invoice keeps the accounting currency, exchange rate and converted amount saved with it, whatever the market does later, and re-opening an entry shows the recorded rate until you choose to replace it. How does Invoice Crowd handle currencies with no decimal places, like JPY? Precision follows the ISO 4217 standard for each currency. Sixteen currencies including JPY, KRW, VND, ISK and CLP are handled with no decimal places, seven including KWD, BHD and OMR with three, and CLF and UYW with four. Amount fields step at the right unit, converted figures are formatted at the target currency's precision, and payment providers are charged in the correct minor units. Can I change my accounting currency later? Yes, before your books hold entries. Set it at Business Profile > Currency and Formats > Accounting Currency. Once entries are posted, the accounting currency stays fixed so your books read consistently, and changing the billing currency later keeps the books in the original accounting currency. To keep separate books in a second base currency, add a second business profile. Bill in their currency, keep the books in yours Set your accounting currency once, record what you actually paid, and let Invoice Crowd freeze the rate it used so the entry still explains itself a year from now. No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Lock Transactions URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/lock-transactions/ Lock past periods in Invoice Crowd so closed books stay closed: lock invoicing, purchases and accounting by date, unlock a few days with a reason. Accounting Lock past periods so closed books stay closed Lock Transactions is the Invoice Crowd setting that stops anyone from creating, editing or deleting transactions dated on or before a date you choose. Lock Invoicing, Purchases and Accounting each up to its own date, or lock all transactions at once, and every lock, edit and unlock is recorded with who, when and why. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Lock Transactions Lock each area or all at once Unlock a few dates with a reason Owner only, on paid plans pop How it works Close a period once, then change it only on purpose Lock Transactions sits under Accounting in the sidebar. A lock covers everything dated on or before its date in the area it protects, until the account owner edits or removes it. Choose what to lock One date per area, or one date for everything Lock each area up to its own date The Transaction Locking card lists three areas. Invoicing covers invoices, recurring invoices, payment links, credit notes, incomes and customer payments. Purchases covers expenses, bills, purchase orders, payments made, vendor credits and inventory. Accounting covers manual journals, opening balances and fixed asset depreciation. Lock each one through the date its numbers are final. Invoicing, Purchases and Accounting Locked Through date on each card Lock through any past date Lock all transactions with one date Lock All puts a single date across invoicing, purchases and accounting. It replaces the separate area locks, and each area then reads Covered by the lock on all transactions. To go back to separate dates, unlock all transactions first. Lock Transactions Up To one date A reason is required Replaces the area locks Fix one thing safely Open only what you need, then close it again Partially unlock a few dates Need to correct one bill? Partially Unlock opens a From and To range inside a lock, with a reason. Transactions in those dates can be changed until you choose Lock the Unlocked Dates Again. Everything else stays locked. A refused save also offers Open Period Lock, which takes you straight to the lock that refused it. From and To inside the lock Lock the Unlocked Dates Again Open Period Lock from a refused save Manual journals Edit or unlock with a reason Edit moves a lock date earlier or later; the old lock is kept in the history as Edited. Unlock removes the lock completely so older transactions can be changed again, and asks for a Reason for Unlocking. The lock stays in the history either way. Edit keeps the old row Reason for Unlocking Locks are never deleted Audit and access Who changed what, and who may Lock History: who, when and why Lock History lists every lock with the area it applies to, the Locked Through date, the reason, who locked it and when, its status (Active, Edited or Unlocked) and, for unlocks, who unlocked it, when and why. Partially unlocked dates have their own table, shown as Open Now or Locked Again. Applies To, Locked Through, Reason Locked By with date and time Active, Edited or Unlocked Owner-only changes, on paid plans Only the account owner can lock, edit or unlock. Team members with accounting access can see the locks and their history. Creating or editing a lock is included on paid plans, and a lock can always be viewed and released. Account owner changes locks Accounting users can view New locks on paid plans Team roles Built in How locks protect your books The rules shown on the Lock Transactions page, plus how locks meet payments, reports, inventory and India GST returns. Separate lock dates Invoicing, Purchases and Accounting each show Locked Through or Not Locked. Invoicing Sep 30, 2026 Purchases Jun 30, 2026 All Transactions Not Locked bal Lock All One date for invoicing, purchases and accounting, in place of the area locks. 06/30/2026 Reason Q2 closed 3 areas Covered Protected entries A save in a locked period is stopped, with the lock date and an Open Period Lock link. Manual journal MJ #ea5455 Dated 06/20/2026 $2,000.00 Protected warn Open Period Lock info Accounting locked to Jun 30 Partial unlock Open a date range inside a lock with a reason, then lock it again. Unlock Dates 09/12 Fix the bill Reason kept Lock Again Same date Everything else stays locked Edit a lock date Move a lock earlier or later; the previous lock stays in the history as Edited. Previous lock cn New lock in Previous row Edited Payments still settle Payments recorded in open months can still settle older invoices and bills; the locked entries stay as they are. INV-2018 June, locked Payment October Settled Lock intact Locked entries stay as they are Reports keep their numbers Reports for a locked period keep the numbers you closed with. Q3 revenue $137,340 closed Q3 net profit $47,650 up Locked to Sep 30 Lock History Every lock, edit and unlock with who, when and why. AM #6366f1 Locked Purchases Edited Invoicing Jun 30 Unlocked Purchases Mar 31 Owner only The account owner locks and unlocks; accounting users can view. Account owner Lock, Unlock Accounting users View History Who, when, why Plans Creating or editing a lock is included on paid plans. Viewing and unlocking are always available. Create a lock Paid plans Edit a lock Unlock Always Inventory tracking With inventory tracking on, Purchases must stay locked at least as far as Invoicing. On Invoicing locked to Purchases at least India GST returns Marking a GSTR-1, GSTR-3B or GSTR-9 return Filed locks the period it covers. GSTR-3B Mark Filed Locked Through the return's last day live Questions Lock Transactions, answered Can I lock a past accounting period in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Invoice Crowd lets the account owner lock transactions dated on or before a chosen date under Accounting, Lock Transactions. You can lock Invoicing, Purchases and Accounting separately, each to its own date, or use Lock All for one date across everything. Every lock needs a reason, and creating or editing a lock is included on paid plans. What exactly is blocked once a period is locked? No one can create, edit or delete the locked area's transactions dated on or before its lock date. Invoicing covers invoices, recurring invoices, payment links, credit notes, incomes and customer payments; Purchases covers expenses, bills, purchase orders, payments made, vendor credits and inventory; Accounting covers manual journals, opening balances and fixed asset depreciation. Payments recorded in open months can still settle older invoices and bills. How do I fix one entry in a locked month? Use Partially Unlock on that area. Choose a From and To date inside the lock and give a reason; only those dates open. Make the change, then choose Lock the Unlocked Dates Again. If a save is refused, the message's Open Period Lock link takes you straight to the lock that refused it. Who can lock or unlock a period? The account owner. Team members with accounting access can view the Lock Transactions page and its history. Every lock, edit and unlock is recorded in Lock History with who did it, when and why. Which plans include Lock Transactions? Creating or editing a lock is included on paid plans. Viewing and unlocking locks are available on every plan, so the owner can always release a lock. What happens when I file a GST return in India? For India business profiles, marking a return Filed on the GST Filing page locks its period: GSTR-1 locks Invoicing, and GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 lock Invoicing and Purchases (both whenever inventory tracking is on), through the return's last day. A change that hits that lock explains that the return was filed. The owner can still unlock with a reason, and corrections go in a later return. Does unlocking delete the old lock or change my reports? No. Locks are never deleted: an edited lock stays in the history as Edited and a removed one as Unlocked, with its reason. Reports for a locked period keep the numbers you closed with until someone unlocks it and changes a transaction. Close the month and keep it closed Lock each area when its numbers are final, open a single date when you must fix something, and keep a record of every change. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## GST Invoicing for India URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/gst-invoicing-software-india/ GST invoices with GSTIN and place of supply, GSTR-1 JSON and GSTR-3B workpapers, ITC on bills and expenses, and GSTR-2B matching in Invoice Crowd. India GST GST invoicing and return prep for Indian businesses Invoice Crowd is invoicing and accounting software that handles GST for India business profiles: each invoice records the customer's GSTIN, the GST treatment and the place of supply, and the GST Filing page turns your books into a GSTR-1 JSON for the GST offline tool and GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 workpapers, ready for you or your accountant to upload or enter on the GST portal. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home GST Invoicing for India CGST, SGST or IGST checked against place of supply GSTR-1 JSON, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 workpapers Input tax credit from bills and expenses pop How it works From a GST invoice to a return you can review GST features appear for India business profiles registered for GST. Your GST Registration Type and GSTIN are entered once, under Business Profile, Taxes, and every invoice, bill and expense feeds the GST Filing page in Reports. Bill with GST Tax heads checked on every invoice GST treatment and place of supply on every invoice Each invoice has an India GST card with Place of Supply and Type of Supply, which follows your items unless you choose a domestic taxable supply, an export with or without IGST, SEZ, deemed export, nil-rated, exempt, non-GST, reverse charge or a marketplace supply. You charge CGST and SGST for a supply inside your State or IGST for another State, and Invoice Crowd checks your choice against the place of supply (the customer's GSTIN State unless you set a different one) and warns you if they don't match. Your GSTIN and the customer's GSTIN Place of Supply by State code HSN/SAC on each line Invoicing GSTINs checked before you file A GSTIN's last character is a check digit worked out from the first 14. Invoice Crowd checks it, and the GST Filing page lists anything that needs fixing under Review Before Filing, such as Customer GSTIN is invalid or HSN/SAC is missing on one or more GST line items, each with a link to the customer or document to correct. Check digit validation Review Before Filing list One click to the record to fix Registration and LUT, set once Under Business Profile, Taxes, choose your GST Registration Type: Regular Taxpayer, Composition Taxpayer, Casual Taxable Person, Non-Resident Taxable Person or Not GST Registered. Exporters save the LUT / Bond Reference with its LUT Financial Year once, and every export without IGST fills it in From your tax settings, with Update LUT ready when a new financial year starts. Five registration types One LUT for each financial year Extra GST details printed when you switch them on Prepare the return Reports, GST Filing GSTR-1 JSON and GSTR-3B workpapers Pick a period and a return: GSTR-1 Outward Supplies, GSTR-1A Corrections, GSTR-3B Summary or GSTR-9 Annual Summary. The page shows taxable sales, tax collected, input tax credit and net payable, counts by section (B2B, B2C Large, B2C Small, Exports, Nil / Exempt / Non-GST, Credit Notes, HSN/SAC) and a return preview. Sales, purchase, HSN and 2B reconciliation CSVs download any time; the GSTR-1 JSON for the GST offline tool, the GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 workpapers and the filing pack unlock once you approve the return. Needs Review, Ready, Approve, Mark Filed JSON and workpapers after approval Ready to upload to the portal Draft invoices are never filed by accident Only issued invoices are filed. When drafts are dated in the period, the page shows how many are waiting and lists them, with Mark as Sent for each one, or Add a Customer First when a draft has no customer. Marking as sent posts the invoice to your books without emailing the customer. Drafts listed with date and total Mark as Sent from the return No email to the customer Debit notes, corrections and quarterly IFF Debit notes raised on sent invoices flow into GSTR-1 with the invoice they adjust. When a filed figure changes, Automatic Corrections works out the amendment, and GSTR-1A Corrections gives you a portal worksheet to enter it. Quarterly filers under QRMP get Download IFF JSON, Record IFF as Furnished and a PMT-06 Worksheet on the same page. Automatic Corrections from filed figures GSTR-1A Portal Worksheet IFF JSON and PMT-06 Worksheet for QRMP Purchases and closing Input tax credit and filed periods Bills and taxed expenses carry the vendor's GSTIN and place of supply, and either can be reverse charge. On an expense you also set ITC Eligibility. Eligible tax goes to Input Tax Credit; Ineligible - Section 17(5) and other ineligible tax stays in the cost and is reversed in GSTR-3B Table 4(B)(1); reverse charge is reported in 3.1(d) and 4(A)(3). Upload the GSTR-2B you download from the portal to match purchase ITC. ITC Eligibility on each expense Reverse charge self-assessed GSTR-2B JSON, CSV or Excel upload Expenses Filed returns lock their period When you mark a return Filed, Invoice Crowd locks its period: GSTR-1 locks Invoicing, and GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 lock Invoicing and Purchases, through the return's last day. A change dated in that period is refused with a link to the filed return. The account owner can still unlock on Lock Transactions with a reason, and corrections belong in a later return. Optional ARN from the GST portal Invoicing and Purchases locked Unlock only with a reason Lock Transactions Composition, reverse charge and TCS Composition taxpayers issue a Bill of Supply and get CMP-08 quarter and annual GSTR-4 workpapers from their books. Under Filing Tools, Reverse Charge Documents issues the self-invoice and payment voucher a reverse-charge purchase needs and lists those due soon. Businesses that collect income-tax TCS switch on Allow income-tax TCS, add it on the invoice and follow every collection in the TCS Collected report. Bill of Supply for composition sales Issue Self-Invoice and Issue Payment Voucher TCS Collected report Built in The GST details Indian invoices and returns need What Invoice Crowd records on each document and prepares for your return. GST treatments Domestic, export with or without IGST, SEZ, deemed export, nil-rated, exempt, non-GST and reverse charge. Domestic taxable #4941e3 Export with IGST #0ea5e9 Export under LUT SEZ #14b8a6 Deemed export Nil-rated #8a8d9f Exempt Non-GST Reverse charge #ff9f43 GST Treatment CGST, SGST or IGST Checked against the place of supply, with a warning if the tax heads don't match. Karnataka → Karnataka CGST + SGST Karnataka → Maharashtra IGST No IGST bal HSN/SAC summary Line HSN/SAC codes roll up into the HSN/SAC section and HSN CSV. 998391 · Design ₹440,000 998361 · Advertising ₹63,000 HSN/SAC rows GSTR-1 JSON B2B, B2C, exports and credit notes in a JSON file for the GST offline tool. B2B invoices B2C Small invoice Exports GSTR-3B workpaper Outward tax, input tax credit and net payable to fill GSTR-3B on the portal. Tax collected ₹90,540 Input tax credit −₹18,090 in Net payable ₹72,450 GSTR-9 workpaper An annual summary for you or your accountant to review. Apr–Mar 12 months Workpaper GSTR-9 Accountant Review Annual summary for review GSTR-2B matching Matched, Suggested, Mismatched, Missing in 2B and Missing in Books. GSTR-2B match 13 rows Matched Manual Suggested Mismatched Missing in 2B ITC eligibility Eligible for ITC, Ineligible - Section 17(5), Ineligible - Others and two Not Available reasons. #28c76f Eligible for ITC 4(A)(5) ₹5,400 #ea5455 Ineligible - 17(5) 4(B)(1) ₹300 Time limit 16(4) 4(D)(2) ₹0 Reverse charge self-invoices Bills and expenses self-assess GST under reverse charge, and Reverse Charge Documents issues the self-invoice and payment voucher. Reverse charge GST ₹2,700.00 Self-invoice Issued Payment voucher TDS on payments and its report TDS Withheld (%) on Record Payment, prefilled from your Default TDS Rate (%). Reports, TDS Receivable lists each deduction with the customer's PAN. Default TDS Rate (%) 10 TDS Withheld (%) TDS Receivable Booked Debit notes Create Debit Note on a sent invoice adds a DN- numbered charge linked to it and reported in GSTR-1. INV-2041 · Original ₹1,18,000.00 DN-00003 · Extra charge ₹11,800.00 Total billed ₹1,29,800.00 Ready for the GST portal Approve the return, download the JSON, file it on the GST portal, then mark it Filed to lock the period. Approve In-app Download JSON GST portal You file Mark it Filed to lock the period live Questions GST invoicing in India, answered Does Invoice Crowd create GST invoices for India? Yes. Invoice Crowd creates GST invoices for business profiles in India. Add your GSTIN under Business Profile, Taxes, and each invoice records the customer's GSTIN, the GST treatment and the place of supply, and checks that you charged CGST and SGST for a supply inside your State or IGST for another State. How do I file my GST return with Invoice Crowd? Prepare it on the GST Filing page, approve it, and download the GSTR-1 JSON for the GST offline tool and the GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 workpapers. You or your accountant then upload or enter the return on the GST portal, and you can mark it Filed with its ARN. Where do I save my LUT for exports? Under Business Profile, Taxes, in Services for overseas customers. Enter the LUT / Bond Reference, the ARN from your LUT acknowledgement, and its LUT Financial Year. Invoice Crowd fills it in on every export without IGST, shows From your tax settings on the invoice, and offers Update LUT when a new financial year begins. How does it check a GSTIN? A GSTIN has 15 characters, and the last one is a check digit worked out from the first 14. Invoice Crowd checks the format and the check digit; a customer or vendor GSTIN that fails appears under Review Before Filing on the GST Filing page, with a link to fix it. Can I claim input tax credit on expenses, not just bills? Yes. An expense with tax records the vendor's GSTIN, the place of supply, ITC Eligibility and Reverse Charge. Eligible tax goes to Input Tax Credit and appears in GSTR-3B Table 4(A); ineligible tax stays in the expense cost and is reversed in Table 4(B), so net ITC matches your books. What happens to draft invoices in a return period? Only issued invoices are included in a return, so the GST Filing page tells you how many drafts are dated in the period and lists them. Mark as Sent includes one in the return and posts it to your books without emailing the customer. Can I issue a GST debit note? Yes. On the Invoices list, choose Create Debit Note on a sent invoice and give the reason for the additional charge. Invoice Crowd opens a DN- numbered draft linked to the original invoice, with the customer and currency set, and reports the note in GSTR-1 with the invoice it adjusts. The original invoice stays exactly as issued. Does Invoice Crowd support composition taxpayers? Yes. Choose Composition Taxpayer as your GST Registration Type under Business Profile, Taxes, and your sales print as a Bill of Supply. The GST Filing page then prepares CMP-08 quarter and annual GSTR-4 workpapers from your books, ready for you or your accountant to file on the GST portal. Does it handle TDS and GST on late fees? Yes, for India business profiles. Record Payment has TDS Withheld (%), prefilled from the Default TDS Rate (%) in Business Profile settings and booked to TDS Receivable. Each deduction then appears in the TDS Receivable report. When automatic late fees are switched on, the fee line gets GST on Late Fees, and the invoice shows that a late fee plus GST applies after the due date. Can I collect income-tax TCS on my invoices? Yes, for India businesses that collect it. Switch on Allow income-tax TCS in Business Profile, Document Options, then use Add TCS on an INR invoice to choose the TCS Category, what it applies to and the rate. The TCS Collected report in Reports lists every collection and downloads a collection worksheet. What does the TDS Receivable report show? TDS Receivable, in Reports for India business profiles, lists the tax your customers deducted at source, receipt by receipt, so you can claim it against your income tax. The tiles show Net TDS Receivable, TDS on Payments, Withheld on Invoices and the number of Customers. Each row has the Date, Customer, Customer PAN, Invoice No., Payment Reference, Amount Received, TDS Rate and TDS Amount, and a credit note that gives withheld tax back shows as a negative row. The total equals the net movement of your TDS accounts in the General Ledger for the period, and the report downloads as CSV. What happens after I mark a return Filed? Invoice Crowd locks the period: GSTR-1 locks Invoicing, and GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 lock Invoicing and Purchases, through the return's last day. A change dated in that period is refused with a link to the filed return. The account owner can unlock on Lock Transactions with a reason, and corrections belong in a later return. Can Invoice Crowd prepare e-invoice and e-way bill files? Yes. Switch on This business is subject to e-invoicing under Business Profile, Taxes, and Prepare e-Invoice in an invoice's Actions creates the e-invoice file to upload to your IRP portal, which issues the IRN. For goods, This business moves goods that need e-way bills adds Prepare e-Way Bill, which creates the e-way bill file for your portal upload. Bill with GST and get your return ready to review Set your GSTIN once, invoice with tax heads checked against the place of supply, and take a checked GSTR-1 JSON and GSTR-3B workpaper to the GST portal each month. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Track Expenses URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/track-expenses/ Track business expenses with vendors, categories and receipts, set recurring costs to record themselves and see every expense in your books. Track every expense, from receipt to ledger Expense tracking in Invoice Crowd covers what leaves the business: subscriptions billed every month, one-off purchases, and the vendors behind them. Set a recurring expense once and it records itself on schedule, under a category you defined. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Track expenses Recurring expenses post themselves Costs grouped by vendor Categories you define pop What is inside From the first receipt to the ledger entry Expenses live inside your books. A cost is recorded once, filed under a vendor and a category, and it turns up in your reports and your accounts. Recording a cost Once, or on a schedule Recurring expenses that record themselves Some costs arrive on the same date every month: hosting, software subscriptions, the accountant's retainer, an annual license. Enter the amount and the frequency once and the expense is written up on each of those dates without you opening the app, so every recurring cost is captured on time. Set the amount and the frequency once Monthly subscriptions and annual fees Each occurrence lands as its own expense Categories that match how you spend Expense categories are yours to define. Marketing, equipment, travel, contractor fees, whatever the business actually argues about at month end. Every cost you record sits under one of them, and that single habit is what makes the reporting worth reading three months later. Name the categories your business uses Assign one to every expense Filter reports by category afterwards The vendor side Who you paid, and how much Every expense tied to a vendor Create a vendor once and assign costs to them as the bills come in. Every expense then shows who it was paid to, so a renewal conversation starts with the real number instead of a guess and a search through email. One record per supplier The vendor shown on every expense Add as many vendors as you need Easy to correct later Change the amount, the date, the vendor or the category when a bill turns out different from the quote, and the correction carries through everywhere the figure appears. Bills, purchase orders and vendor credits sit alongside for buying that needs paperwork. Edit any expense in an open period Corrections flow through to reports Bills and purchase orders alongside What it adds up to Reports and the accounts Expense reports by date, vendor or type Reporting breaks the spending down rather than handing you one number. Pull a period, a single supplier or one category and see where the money went. It runs on the same records as the rest of the account, so the totals agree with your ledger. Break costs down by date Isolate one vendor or category Download a copy to send on How reports are built Expenses land in the accounts Expense tracking is part of the accounting module rather than a bolt-on beside it. Each cost posts against an account in the chart of accounts, 103 of the 148 being expense accounts, so it shows in the general ledger and on the profit and loss statement without a second entry. Posts to the chart of accounts Shows in the general ledger Feeds the profit and loss statement Accounting in Invoice Crowd Also included The rest of the spending side Everything a cost touches sits in the same account: the supplier it came from, the report it appears in, and the books it settles into. Receipts attached Keep the receipt on the expense it belongs to instead of in a shoebox or a mail folder. Receipt PDF or photo Extract Text 1 AI credit Fields filled Amount, date Kept on the expense Recurring costs Subscriptions and annual fees post on the dates you set, the way recurring invoices bill your clients. #10b981 Studio rent Monthly · 1st $2,400.00 #f97316 AWS hosting $212.18 #6366f1 Domain renewals Yearly · Mar 2 $64.00 Vendor list Add as many suppliers as you deal with; each one keeps its own expense history. Pine Pinecrest Supply Co. Vendor Printer toner $74.25 + Add New Bills and purchase orders Raise a purchase order, record the bill against it, and track what has been paid out. PO-1019 Approved BILL-1050 Recorded Payment Paid out Paperwork where you need it 148 accounts ready Categorize costs consistently with a ready-made chart of accounts, and keep receipts with their entries. Office Supplies Expense Software Cash Asset Chart of accounts 148 ready bal Profit and loss What you spend shows against what you earned, month by month, in the P&L statement. $3,448.92 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Any period Look at last month, last quarter or the full year without exporting anything first. This Month Sep 2026 Last Three Months Jul–Sep Last Year 2025 Costs in any currency Record what you paid in the currency you paid it, and report in your base currency. Figma Professional €42.00 Exchange Rate 1.0714 In USD $45.00 Team entries Team members you invite can record expenses under the role you give them. AM PN #ec4899 TW #14b8a6 Priya added a lunch $86.40 Tom added a taxi $32.60 Alex added toner Several businesses Each business profile keeps its own expenses, vendors and accounts under one login. Northwind Studio 87 expenses Northwind Print Shop 23 expenses Vendors and accounts Per profile Custom categories Group costs the way your business talks about them, not the way a template decided. Office Space #4941e3 #0ea5e9 Travel #16a34a Accounting #f59e0b Advertising #ef4b24 Utilities #9333ea Contractors #16b980 Supplies #2b2c40 Add your own One login Expenses, invoices, customers and the ledger are the same account, not four subscriptions. Invoice Sent P&L Updated One login, one set of books live Questions Expense tracking, answered How do I set up a recurring expense? Enter the expense the way you would any other, then choose how often it repeats. From that point it is recorded on each scheduled date without further input, which suits monthly subscriptions, annual licenses and any other bill that arrives on a fixed cycle. Can I edit an expense after saving it? Yes. Reopen a saved expense and change the amount, the date, the vendor or the category it was filed under. The correction carries through to your reports and the ledger, so there's only ever one version of each cost. Expenses in a locked period or a closed bank reconciliation stay protected. Can I record spend against a supplier I have not set up yet? Yes. Record the expense and add the vendor as you go, or leave it against a category and attach the vendor later. Nothing has to be set up in advance before you can log what you spent. How does expense tracking connect to the accounting side? Expenses are part of the accounting module, not a separate tool that needs syncing. Each one posts to an account in the chart of accounts, which is why it appears in the general ledger, the profit and loss statement and the trial balance without being entered twice. Can I see what I spent on one category? Yes. Expense reporting filters by date range, by vendor and by category, so you can look at marketing spend for a quarter or everything paid to one supplier this year, then download the result in the usual formats. Can I keep the receipt with the expense? Can I record tax on an expense? Yes. Each expense can take a purchase tax rate or tax group, with Amounts Are set to Tax Inclusive or Tax Exclusive. Tax you can recover posts to Input Tax Credit, and tax you can't recover stays in the cost. For businesses in India, an expense also records the vendor's GSTIN, the place of supply, input tax credit eligibility and reverse charge, and feeds GSTR-3B Table 4 in GST Filing. Can I bill a client for an expense? Yes, when the expense is filed against a project. When you invoice the project's time, the invoice preview lists its unbilled expenses so you can add them to the client's invoice, with an optional markup. Projects are included on paid plans. Start recording what the business spends Expenses, vendors, categories and the ledger live in the same account as your invoicing, with nothing to connect. Expense tracking is included on paid plans. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Cancel anytime --- ## Balance Sheet URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/balance-sheet/ Review your balance sheet as of any date: assets, liabilities and equity, traced to source records and exported to PDF or Excel. Accounting A clear balance sheet, connected to every record See Assets, Liabilities and Equity as of any date, with earlier profit in Retained Earnings, then trace any balance through the ledger to the records behind it. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Balance Sheet Assets, Liabilities and Equity Traceable to every source PDF and Excel export pop How it works A clear view of assets, liabilities and equity Balances grouped by account family, earlier profit in Retained Earnings and this period's earnings in Equity, all ready to review alongside the General Ledger and Trial Balance. Read the statement Every account family in one statement. See Assets against Liabilities and Equity Each account's balance is grouped by family, with Retained Earnings and this period's earnings added to Equity. Total Assets and Total Liabilities & Equity sit side by side, so you can confirm they agree at a glance. Account-family subtotals Retained and current earnings Totals side by side Choose the business, date and currency Balances are shown as of the end date, and the start date sets which earnings count as this period's. Pick the report currency to see the statement the way you need it. Any business you manage As-of date and earnings period Report currency of your choice Export and inspect Share the statement in the format you need. Download PDF or Excel Export the Balance Sheet as a PDF or an Excel file, with the same dates and currency you see on screen. The PDF carries your letterhead and page numbers. PDF preview Excel (.xlsx) export Same dates and currency as on screen Spot and fix any difference If the statement is ever out of balance, it says by how much and offers Review and Fix, so you can find the cause and correct it at the source. Differences always shown Review and Fix built in Exact amount stated Compare dates, on cash or accrual Compare sets the Balance Sheet beside the Previous period, the Same period last year or the Last 12 months, with up to three earlier periods and the change on every line. Accounting Basis shows the position on an Accrual or a Cash basis, and the comparison downloads as a PDF or an Excel file. Up to three earlier periods Accrual or Cash basis Comparisons in PDF or Excel Review with confidence Every figure is grounded in your recorded activity. Set the period that matters The end date sets the position the statement shows, and the start date sets which earnings count as this period's. Open the ledger to see the activity behind any total. Balances as of the end date Earlier profit in Retained Earnings Any date range Trace any balance to its source Follow a balance into the General Ledger and on to the invoice, bill or journal behind it, then correct the original record if anything needs to change. Source-linked review Ledger drill-down Corrections at the source Built in Inside the Balance Sheet Sections, filters and exports built for a clear month-end review. Assets against Liabilities and Equity Totals side by side, with this period's earnings carried into Equity. Total Assets $216,160.00 Liabilities $31,195.00 Equity $184,965.00 bal Business, date and currency Run the statement for any business, as of any date, in the currency you choose. Business Northwind Date range FY 2025-26 Currency USD Export a PDF on your letterhead or an Excel file for further analysis. PDF #ea5455 CSV #28c76f Excel #1d7a47 Recomputed for your filters Retained Earnings handled Earlier profit rolls into Retained Earnings automatically. Liab. + Equity Gap to review $0.00 Any reporting period Month end, year end or a custom range, with earnings split correctly. Start 10/01/2025 End 09/30/2026 Statement Redrawn The end date sets the position Trace to the source Follow any balance through the ledger to the document behind it. Receivables $42,760 Ledger 1154 Invoice INV-2041 Follow a balance to its source Cash or accrual basis Read the position on an Accrual or a Cash basis, with the basis printed on the PDF. Accounting Basis Accrual Compare earlier dates Set the statement beside the previous period, the same date last year or the last 12 months. Sep 25 Dec 25 Mar 26 Jun 26 Sep 26 Equity accounts plus Retained Earnings and this period's earnings. Capital $10,000.00 Current Year Earnings $164,565.00 in Total Equity Review and Fix Any difference is shown with the exact amount and a way to resolve it. Assets $216,160 Left side Right side up Difference $0 balanced Trial Balance Compare debit and credit movement by account. Total Debit $537,835.00 Total Credit Accounts 21 General Ledger Open the transactions behind any account. INV-2041 · 09/28 $12,450.00 Payment · 09/28 $4,980.00 cn Receivable balance $7,470.00 live Questions Balance Sheet, answered Is Invoice Crowd's Balance Sheet a point-in-time statement? Yes. The Balance Sheet shows cumulative balances from the start of your books to the end date you choose, and it opens at today's position. Earlier profit is carried in Retained Earnings, and the start date only decides which earnings show as this period's. What sections appear on the Balance Sheet? Invoice Crowd groups the report into Assets, Liabilities and Equity, with Retained Earnings and a Current Year Earnings line inside Equity. Total Assets and Total Liabilities & Equity are shown side by side, so you can confirm they agree. What if my Balance Sheet is out of balance? The statement shows the exact difference and offers Review and Fix. Use the General Ledger and Trial Balance to find the entry behind it and correct the original record, so your books stay accurate at the source. Can I export the Balance Sheet? Yes. The Export menu downloads the Balance Sheet as a PDF or an Excel file for the date and currency you have on screen. The PDF carries your logo, business details and tax number, the period, basis and currency, and page numbers. Can I compare balance sheets or see one on a cash basis? Yes. In Filter Report, Compare sets the Balance Sheet beside the Previous period, the Same period last year or the Last 12 months, with up to three earlier periods and the change on every line, and Accounting Basis switches between Accrual and Cash. Comparisons download as a PDF or an Excel file, and the PDF prints the basis you chose. Does opening the report change accounting data? No. The Balance Sheet is read-only. Opening or exporting it leaves your documents, journals and exchange rates exactly as they are. Where can I inspect the entries behind a balance? Open the General Ledger to see every transaction by account and period, then correct any source record through its normal workflow. Know your financial position on any date Review balances as of the date you choose, export the statement and follow any figure back to its source. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Trial Balance URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/trial-balance/ Review opening balances, debits, credits and closing balances by account for any period, then export your trial balance to PDF or Excel. Accounting A trial balance that shows every account at a glance List every account with its opening balance, the period's debits and credits and its closing balance, with debit and credit totals side by side so you can confirm your books agree. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Trial Balance Debit and credit columns Opening, movement and closing Totals side by side pop How it works A quick check that your books balance Account totals sit next to each other in one compact report, so any account that needs a closer look stands out before you close the period. Review the columns One row per account, every column you need. Compare debit and credit by account Each account appears with its number, type, opening balance, the period's debit or credit movement and its closing balance. Totals at the bottom show at a glance whether the report ties. Account number and type Report totals and difference Choose the business, period and currency The report is calculated for your business, date range and currency. Opening balances come from earlier entries, with prior-period profit and loss closed into Retained Earnings. Any business you manage Any date range Opening balances from earlier entries Compare periods by the amount that matters Compare sets the Trial Balance beside the Previous period, the Same period last year or the Last 12 months, and Compare Amounts chooses the figure that lines up: Opening balance, Debits, Credits or Closing balance. Accounting Basis runs the report on an Accrual or a Cash basis, and comparisons download as a PDF or an Excel file. Opening, Debits, Credits or Closing Up to three earlier periods Accrual or Cash basis Investigate with ease Narrow the review, then open the detail. Debits and credits side by side Total debits and total credits sit together at the bottom of the report, so if they ever differ you can go straight to the accounts and transactions involved. Clear totals Read-only review Follow up in the ledger Move from total to transaction detail The General Ledger is the transaction-level companion to this summary. Open any account to see the dates, descriptions and sources behind its total. Account-level summary here Transaction detail in General Ledger Links to source records Export with context Share it with the same period you see on screen. Download PDF or Excel Export the Trial Balance as a PDF on your letterhead or as an Excel file, for exactly the period and currency on screen. PDF Excel Same period as on screen Trace every balance to its source Pair a balanced Trial Balance with the General Ledger and your source records for a complete, confident review of the period. Ledger drill-down History stays intact Out-of-balance results offer Review and Fix Built in Inside the Trial Balance The columns, filters and exports behind the report. Number, type, opening, debit, credit and closing for every account. 1201-2 Business Checking $148,920.00 2103 Accounts Payable $9,840.00 cn 5601-3 Sales $486,240.00 in Business, period and currency Recalculated for exactly the range and currency you choose. Business Northwind Date range FY 2025-26 Currency USD Debit and credit totals at the bottom confirm the report ties. Total Debit $537,835.00 Total Credit Side by side Ties bal Open any account in the General Ledger to see the transactions behind it. Checking General Ledger 14 rows Source Invoice Totals first, then transactions Share it on your letterhead or as a spreadsheet. #ea5455 CSV #28c76f #1d7a47 Follow any balance into the ledger and on to its source document. Software $18,690 Ledger rows 8207-7 Figma $540.00 Trace any balance to its record Period movement Activity for the period you choose. Debits by type $537,835 Assets COGS Expense Cash or accrual basis Run the Trial Balance on an Accrual or a Cash basis, with the basis printed on the PDF. Accounting Basis Cash $412,960.00 Compare Amounts Line up Opening balance, Debits, Credits or Closing balance against earlier periods. Opening balance #4941e3 Debits Credits #ff9f43 Closing balance #00cfe8 Account numbers Keep the chart reference beside every total. 1154 Accounts Receivable $42,760.00 2051 Loan $12,000.00 3056 Retained Earnings $10,400.00 Trace an account total into its source lines. Business Checking $38,015.00 Withdrawals $7,086.60 Net movement $30,928.40 Balance Sheet Review Assets, Liabilities and Equity for the period. Total Assets $216,160 Liab. + Equity Same total up Net Income $164,565 in Equity live Questions Trial Balance, answered What does the Trial Balance show in Invoice Crowd? Invoice Crowd lists account-level movement for the selected period and classifies each amount into debit or credit columns, with total debits, total credits and the difference at the bottom. What if the Trial Balance doesn't tie? Use the account totals to narrow it down, then open the affected account in the General Ledger and correct the original record through its normal workflow. Does the Trial Balance include opening balances automatically? Yes. Each account shows an Opening balance built from entries dated before the start date, then the period's debits and credits and a Closing balance. Profit and loss from earlier periods is carried into Retained Earnings. Can I export the Trial Balance? Yes. Invoice Crowd exports the selected Trial Balance as a PDF or an Excel file. The PDF carries your logo, business details and tax number, the period, basis and currency, and page numbers. Can I compare trial balances across periods? Yes. In Filter Report, Compare offers Previous period, Same period last year and Last 12 months, with up to three earlier periods, and Compare Amounts picks the figure to line up: Opening balance, Debits, Credits or Closing balance. Accounting Basis switches between Accrual and Cash, and the comparison downloads as a PDF or an Excel file. Does viewing the Trial Balance change any records? No. The Trial Balance is read-only, so your documents and journals stay exactly as they are. Find the account that deserves a closer look Compare debit and credit movement, check the totals agree and trace any account into the ledger before you sign off the period. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Cash Flow Statement URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/cash-flow-statement/ See opening cash, operating, investing and financing movement and ending cash for any period, then export your cash flow statement to PDF or CSV. Accounting A cash flow statement that shows where cash went Follow cash through operating, investing and financing activities, from beginning to ending cash, for any period you choose. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Cash Flow Statement Operating, investing and financing Opening and ending cash PDF, CSV and Print export pop How it works Cash movement, made easy to read KPI cards, an overview chart and a detailed statement show at a glance what changed your cash position, built from the accounts and entries you've recorded. Read the movement Opening cash, activity and the resulting ending cash. Separate operating, investing and financing activity Cash movement is grouped into the three familiar activity sections, so you can see exactly what changed your cash position in the period. Operating activities Investing activities Financing activities Keep the opening, change and ending figures together Summary cards and the statement total make the bridge from opening cash through net movement to ending cash easy to follow. Opening cash Net cash change Ending cash Explore the report Filter freely; your books stay untouched. Use the visual overview and statement table KPI cards and a chart sit above the detailed statement, with clear colors in both light and dark modes. KPI cards Overview chart Detailed statement rows Filter by business, date and currency Choose the business, date range and currency, and the report and its exports follow your selection exactly. Any business you manage Date and currency filters Exports match the screen Compare cash flow across periods Compare sets the Cash Flow Statement beside the Previous period, the Same period last year or the Last 12 months, so a quarter's operating cash sits next to the one before it. Up to three earlier periods line up with the change on every line, and the comparison downloads as a PDF or an Excel file. Previous period or same period last year Last 12 months, month by month Comparisons in PDF or Excel Connected to the rest of your books Built from the activity you've already recorded. Pair it with Bank Reconciliation Reconcile each bank statement to zero, and Cash Flow reports from the same ledger, so you can review ending cash with confidence. Reconciled to the bank One shared ledger Close each month at zero Every figure traceable Opening or exporting Cash Flow leaves your documents, accounts and exchange rates exactly as they are, and every entry links back to its source in the General Ledger. Read-only Stored exchange rates kept Links to source entries Built in Inside the Cash Flow Statement Activity groups, totals, filters and exports in one clear report. Three activity sections Operating, investing and financing, each with its own subtotal. Operating $156,680.00 in Investing −$12,200.00 cn Financing −$8,000.00 Opening to ending cash Follow the bridge from beginning cash through net movement to ending cash. Beginning Cash $14,920.00 Net Change in Cash +$136,480.00 Ending Cash $151,400.00 bal Chart and table together KPI cards and an overview chart above the detailed statement. Cash Flow Overview $151,400 Begin Ending Business, date and currency Run the report for any business, date range and currency. Business Northwind Date range FY 2025-26 Currency USD Pairs with Bank Reconciliation Reconcile your bank and review cash flow from the same ledger. Cash Flow Reads Reconciliation Matches Close $0.00 Two separate jobs, one set of books Traceable figures Every movement links back to the entries behind it in the General Ledger. CF #28c76f Open info Export Print ok Every figure traces back to the ledger Operating cash Cash movement from ordinary business activity. Received from customers $452,340.00 Paid to vendors −$318,040.00 Net Operating Compare periods Set this period beside earlier ones and download the comparison as a PDF or an Excel file. Net change in cash $136,480.00 Q4 25 Q1 26 Q2 26 Q3 26 Financing cash Cash movement from financing activity. Loan repayment Net Financing Opening cash plus the period's net movement. Net movement Bank Reconciliation Match statement lines and close a bank period. Statement ending $148,920.00 Cleared balance Difference General Ledger See every transaction, account by account. Figma team plan $540.00 Invoice: INV-2041 $4,980.00 Running balance $30,928.40 live Questions Cash Flow Statement, answered What does Invoice Crowd's Cash Flow report show? Invoice Crowd groups recorded cash movement into operating, investing and financing activities and shows the beginning cash, net change and ending cash for the selected period. Beginning and ending cash come from the same ledger as the Balance Sheet, so ending cash matches the Balance Sheet's cash. Can I filter Cash Flow by date and currency? Yes. The report runs for the selected business, date range and currency, and its exports use exactly the same selection. Can I compare cash flow with earlier periods? Yes. In Filter Report, Compare offers Previous period, Same period last year and Last 12 months, and Earlier Periods adds up to three columns. Every line shows its change, and Export downloads the comparison as a PDF or an Excel file; a single period exports as PDF, CSV or Print. Does opening Cash Flow change any accounting records? No. The Cash Flow Statement is read-only, so your transactions stay exactly as they are. Its Export menu offers PDF, CSV and Print. Where do I investigate an unexpected cash movement? Open the account in the General Ledger to see each entry's date, description and source, then correct the original record in its own editor. How does Cash Flow work with Bank Reconciliation? They work together. Bank Reconciliation matches your recorded entries to the bank statement and closes each month at zero; the Cash Flow Statement then summarizes that same activity into operating, investing and financing movement. Understand every movement of cash See the three activity sections, follow the bridge to ending cash and trace any movement back to its source. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## General Ledger URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/general-ledger/ Review your general ledger line by line: dates, debits, credits and running balances, linked to source records and exported to PDF or Excel. Accounting A general ledger that traces every total to its source See every transaction behind your financial statements. Filter by account and period, review debits, credits and running balances, and open the invoice, bill or expense behind each line. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features General Ledger Transaction-level account detail Links to source documents PDF and Excel export pop How it works From statement total to source document Every transaction line keeps its account and where it came from, with a link straight to the record that created it. Read the account Dates, descriptions and classified movement line by line. See each transaction behind the total The report expands an account's period movement into transaction-level rows with date, description, debit, credit and a running balance that starts from the account's opening balance. Transaction dates Debit and credit classification Net movement by account Filter by account and period Choose the business, account, date range and currency for your review. The ledger is calculated live, so it always reflects your latest entries. Account filter Date window Always up to date Follow the source Open the record behind any line. Jump straight to the source An expense opens in the expense editor, and an invoice item takes you back to its invoice. The same link-to-source behavior works across your accounting reports. Standalone expense to Expense Invoice item to Invoice Right business, every time Links you can rely on Every source link opens the exact record it belongs to. If a document is no longer available, its row is shown as plain text, so you always land in the right place. Only your business's records Always the right record Clear plain-text rows Export and interpret Share a filtered ledger with your accountant. Export PDF or Excel Export the ledger exactly as filtered, as a PDF on your letterhead with page numbers or as an Excel file, so every reader knows what the totals cover. PDF Excel Filters carried into the file Correct at the source The ledger shows exactly what was recorded. When something needs to change, fix the original invoice, expense or journal and the ledger reflects it on the next load. Read-only report Updates on next load Fix the original record Built in Everything in the General Ledger Transaction detail, source links, filters and exports in one report. Every transaction behind the total Date, description, debit, credit and a running balance from the opening balance. 09/02 Invoice: INV-2033 $9,860.00 in 09/03 Studio rent $2,000.00 cn Running balance $17,645.00 bal Narrow to the business, account, dates and currency you need. Account Checking Date range September Currency USD Jump to the source Open the expense, invoice or journal behind any line. Ledger row Figma plan Opens Expense Invoice row INV-2041 Each row opens its own source Every link opens the exact record it belongs to. Bank fee September $28.00 Source Link Opens the expense Share the filtered ledger on your letterhead or as a spreadsheet. #ea5455 CSV #28c76f #1d7a47 Fix the original record and the ledger reflects it on the next load. Ledger review GL #4941e3 Business Checking 1201-2 $30,928.40 Open info Filter Export ok Fix the source and the ledger follows Transaction rows Inspect dates, descriptions and amounts line by line. REC-0418 · 09/01 $4,500.00 REC-0419 · 09/01 $2,785.00 $7,285.00 Cash or accrual basis Read every account's movement on an Accrual or a Cash basis, with the basis printed on the PDF. Accounting Basis Cash Invoice payment $3,200.00 $18,640.00 Traced to the source Open the record behind each line. Figma team plan Expense editor $540.00 Invoice $4,980.00 AWS hosting $318.60 Accurate links Every link leads to the correct record. $2,400.00 Opens INV-2041 Trial Balance Start from the account-level debit and credit summary. Business Checking $148,920.00 Accounts Receivable $42,760.00 Total Debit $537,835.00 Chart of Accounts Review the accounts behind the report. Soft Software 8207-7 Office Space 8211-3 Subscriptions 8208-10 live Questions General Ledger, answered What is the General Ledger in Invoice Crowd? Invoice Crowd's General Ledger is a transaction-level report of account movement for the selected business and period. It shows the dates, descriptions, debits and credits behind an account total, starting from the account's opening balance and keeping a running balance. Can I open a source document from the General Ledger? Yes. Ledger rows link back to the invoice, expense or other record that created them, so you can open it in its own editor. Can I export the General Ledger? Yes. Invoice Crowd exports the current General Ledger as a PDF or an Excel file. The PDF carries your logo, business details and tax number, the period, basis and currency, and page numbers. Can I view the General Ledger on a cash basis? Yes. Set Accounting Basis to Cash in Filter Report and the ledger recognizes income and expenses when they are paid, including part payments; Accrual recognizes them when invoiced or billed. Your original transactions stay unchanged, and the PDF prints Cash Basis or Accrual Basis with the period and currency. Does the General Ledger update when I change a source record? Yes. The ledger is calculated from your current records, so a saved change shows the next time you open or refresh the report. How is the General Ledger different from the Trial Balance? The Trial Balance summarizes debit and credit movement by account; the General Ledger shows every transaction behind those totals. Start with one and drill into the other. Move from a total to the transaction that explains it Filter the account, inspect each movement and open the source record whenever a figure needs explaining. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Accounts Receivable Aging URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/accounts-receivable-aging/ Group unpaid customer balances into Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ day buckets, spot high-risk customers and expand each balance into its invoices. Reports Accounts receivable aging that shows who to call first The Age Debt report groups every unpaid balance by customer into Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days past due, as of any date you choose. Expand a customer to see the invoices behind the balance. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Accounts Receivable Aging Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90, 91+ days High Risk customers flagged Drill into every invoice pop How it works From customer balance to the invoice behind it Age totals, a customer table and invoice detail in one view, so you know exactly where to focus your follow-up. Read the risk Totals and high-risk counts at a glance. Split outstanding balances into five age buckets The report groups due amounts by days past the due date into Current (not yet due), 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days, with a Total Due figure as of the date you choose. Current and 1-30 days 31-60 and 61-90 days 91+ days Identify customers carrying older debt Each customer row shows the invoice count, bucket amounts, total due and a risk label, so the oldest balances stand out. High-risk customer count Invoice count per customer Sortable age columns Open the detail Expand a customer into the invoices that make up the balance. Review invoice dates, totals, paid and due Expand a customer to list each invoice number, issue date, due date, total, paid amount and amount still due, with a preview link to open the invoice. Issue and due dates Total, paid and due One-click invoice preview Every currency, clearly separated Billing in euros, dollars and pounds? Each currency keeps its own line in every bucket, so every total is exact. Currency-aware totals Exact amounts per currency Easy to read at a glance Share and follow up Send it, schedule it, act on it. Filter, export or schedule the report Download the Age Debt report as a PDF, email it, or schedule it to arrive weekly, monthly or on a cadence you set. Your filters kept PDF and email Scheduled delivery Review freely, act from the invoice The report is read-only, so you can sort and export with confidence. When you're ready to chase a balance, send a reminder or record a payment from the invoice itself. Read-only report Reminders from the invoice Balances stay accurate Built in Inside the aging report Everything you need to run collections, in one report. Aging as of any date Run the report for today, month end or any date you need. Age Debt $42,760 Current 1-30 31-60 61-90 91+ High Risk customers Customers are labelled High Risk, Watch or Current, with a count of who needs attention. #ea5455 Atlas Legal LLP High Risk $7,175.00 #ff9f43 Summit Fitness Co. Watch $8,360.00 #28c76f Lumen Architects $8,975.00 Invoice-level detail Issue date, due date, total, paid and amount due for every open invoice. INV-2036 total $6,400.00 Paid $3,200.00 in Amount Due bal Multi-currency ready Each currency keeps its own exact line in every bucket. €1,800.00 1-30 Days $3,150.00 Also 1-30 Days £2,400.00 PDF, email and schedules Download it, email it or schedule it to arrive automatically. Download PDF Send report by email #4941e3 Monthly schedule Age Debt can be scheduled Read-only and safe Explore freely; invoices change only when you act on them. INV-2034 SF #f97316 $5,720.00 Overdue bad In report warn Invoices change only when you act Age buckets Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days past due. $19,645 Not Yet Due up $13,300 Past Due 91+ Days $4,850 Payables Aging too The vendor side sits on the same Reports page: what you owe, from Current to 91+ days. Payables $18,240.00 Invoice detail Expand the balance into the invoices behind it. INV-2034 · due 09/08 cn INV-2029 · due 07/30 $2,640.00 Currency aware Each currency totalled on its own line. Kestrel Analytics Kept separate Exact Create Invoice Create and send invoices that flow straight into the report. Invoice Send Reminder Record Payment Actions stay on the invoice Customer Portal Give customers access to their own documents. Invoices Visible Credit Notes Proposals live Questions Accounts Receivable Aging, answered What aging buckets does Invoice Crowd use? Invoice Crowd's Age Debt report uses five standard buckets based on days past the due date: Current (not yet due), 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ Days, plus a Total Due, all as of the date you choose. Can I see which invoices make up a customer's aged balance? Yes. Expand a customer row to see the invoice number, issue date, due date, total, paid amount and amount still due, with a preview link to each invoice. How does the aging report handle multiple currencies? Each currency is shown on its own line, in every bucket and for every customer, so the amounts are always exact. How do I follow up on an overdue balance? Use Send Reminder from the invoice's row menu, or set up automatic payment reminders on the invoice. The aging report is read-only, so it shows you who to contact while every invoice stays exactly as it is. Can I export or email the Age Debt report? Yes. Download the Age Debt report as a PDF or email it straight from the report, and set it up as a scheduled report to send weekly, monthly, quarterly, half-yearly, yearly or on a custom schedule. Who can view the Accounts Receivable Aging report? The account owner, and team members whose role includes report access, for the businesses they work in. Does the aging report account for customer advances? Yes. When a customer has advance payments that have not been applied to an invoice yet, their row shows the unapplied advances and the net position beside the amount due. The advances themselves are recorded and applied in Payments Received. How does a written-off invoice show in the aging report? A write-off closes the invoice's remaining balance, so it leaves the aging buckets and the customer's total due. Write Off Balance in Manage Payments records the adjustment against an expense account such as Bad Debts, the invoice reads Written Off, and Reverse Write-Off brings the balance back into the report if the customer pays later. Is there an accounts payable aging report? Yes. Payables Aging, on the Reports page, groups what you owe vendors into Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days as of any date, with vendor credits applied. It downloads as PDF or CSV and can be scheduled by email, and it is included on paid plans. Can I give one customer a statement of what they owe? Yes. Statement of Account on the customer's row in Customers downloads a PDF statement. Outstanding lists the unpaid invoices as of a date, with what is overdue; Activity shows the opening balance, every invoice, payment and credit in a period, and the balance due. Each currency is stated separately, with its own amount due. Download the PDF and share it with your customer however you prefer. Know which balance to follow up first Start with the age buckets, open the customer, and trace the oldest amount to the invoice that explains it. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Profit and Loss Statement URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/pl-statement/ Run your profit and loss on a cash or accrual basis for any period, compare it with the previous period or last year, and export it to PDF or Excel. A profit and loss statement, month by month Invoice Crowd's P&L statement shows income, cost of goods sold, operating expenses and net profit month by month for any period you choose, on a cash or accrual basis and beside earlier periods, ready to export for an owner or adviser. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features P&L statement A column for every month Cash or accrual basis PDF or Excel download pop What is inside What the statement shows, and how to change it The P&L reads across the financial year: income on one side, expenses on the other, and the difference between them for each month in the period you chose. Reading it The year on one page Income and expenses are set out month by month across the financial year, so a quiet March or an expensive September is obvious at a glance. You are looking at the shape of the year rather than one annual total that hides everything inside it. Each month of the financial year Income and expenses side by side Movement visible without building a chart Clear, focused and easy to read Income, cost of goods sold, operating expenses, gross profit and net profit, with totals shown as a share of revenue and a gross margin beside them. Enough to know whether the last quarter paid for itself, and simple enough to read every month end. Just the figures that matter Clear for owners and advisers Detail one click away The ledger underneath Changing the view Dates in, statement out Set the period yourself Move the dates and the statement redraws for that span: a single month, a quarter, the tax year, or the eighteen months a lender asked about. The figures are always the latest in your account. Any start and end date Redraws as soon as the dates change Built from current records Ready when your accountant asks A P&L is usually wanted by somebody else: an accountant at year end, a bank reading an application, a partner who wants the quarter. Take the statement down as it stands and send that, instead of rebuilding the same numbers in a spreadsheet the night before. For year end, Report Pack puts the P&L, balance sheet, cash flow, trial balance and general ledger in one PDF behind an At a Glance cover. Send to an accountant or a lender Keep a copy per period on file Other reports you can pull Compare periods, on cash or accrual Compare puts the period beside the Previous period, the Same period last year or the Last 12 months, with up to three earlier periods and a Change and Change % on every line. Accounting Basis switches between Accrual, income when invoiced, and Cash, income when paid with part payments included, and the PDF prints the basis you chose. Previous period or same period last year Change and Change % on every line Cash Basis or Accrual Basis on the PDF Also included The statements either side of it The P&L answers what a period earned. The rest of the accounting module answers what the business holds, what it owes and where the cash went. Balance sheet Assets, liabilities and equity as they stand, sitting alongside the P&L in the accounting module. Total Assets $216,160.00 Liab. + Equity Balance Sheet Balanced bal Trial balance Every account with its debit and credit balance, for the period you select. Total Debit $537,835.00 Total Credit Trial Balance Ties Cash flow What actually moved in and out of the business, which is not always the same as profit. Net Profit $164,565.00 in Net Change in Cash $136,480.00 Difference $28,085.00 General ledger The line-by-line postings behind each figure, if you ever need to see them. Figma team plan $540.00 AWS hosting $318.60 Software 8207-7 $858.60 148 accounts The chart ships with 148 accounts: 19 asset, 12 liability, 8 equity, 6 income, 103 expense. Accounts 148 shared chart Expense 103 accounts Assets 19 Expenses feed it Costs recorded in expense tracking show up on the expense side of the statement. Figma $540 Software Expense line P&L September Recorded once, reported everywhere Invoices feed it Issued invoices, net of credit notes, land on the income side without being retyped. INV-2041 Sent Sales Income line No retyping Manual journals Post an accrual or a correction by hand when a period needs adjusting. Dr Business Insurance $650.00 Cr Prepaid Expenses Dr = Cr Budget vs actuals Budget each income and expense account by month, then read budget, actual and variance side by side, with the Net Variance at the top. Budget vs Actuals Jul Jul act Aug Aug act Sep Sep act Scheduled reports Have the Payables Aging, Age Debt, Expense, Income or Invoice report emailed on a schedule instead of remembering to open the app. Age Debt #ea5455 #ff9f43 Income #28c76f Invoice #4941e3 Emailed as a PDF Base currency Invoice in several currencies and still read one statement in the currency you report in. USD EUR #0ea5e9 GBP #7367f0 CAD Statement currency filter Report Pack, either basis Report Pack puts the five statements in one PDF behind an At a Glance cover, on the cash or accrual basis you choose. Choose the period FY 2025-26 Accounting Basis Cash Report Pack PDF Five statements At a Glance cover first live Questions The P&L statement, answered How do I change the date range on my P&L statement? Adjust the dates on the statement itself and it refreshes for that period. Looking at last quarter and then at the full year takes just two changes of date. Can I run a cash basis profit and loss statement? Yes. Open Filter Report on the Profit & Loss and set Accounting Basis to Cash. Income and expenses are then recognized when they are paid, including part payments, while Accrual recognizes them when invoiced or billed. Your original invoices, bills and expenses stay unchanged, and the PDF prints Cash Basis so every reader knows which view they hold. Can I compare this year's P&L with last year? Yes. In Filter Report, Compare offers Previous period, Same period last year and Last 12 months, and Earlier Periods adds up to three columns. Each line shows its Change and Change %, and Export downloads the comparison as a PDF or an Excel file. Comparisons work on the Cash basis too. Can I download the P&L statement? Yes, as a PDF or an Excel file. Most people take a copy at the end of a quarter or a year to send to an accountant, attach to a loan application or keep for the record. The download reflects the period and currency you had on screen. The PDF carries your logo, business details and tax number, the period and basis, and page numbers, and is named after your business, the report and the period. Is the statement showing current figures? Yes. It reads the most recent data in your Invoice Crowd account, so an invoice issued this morning and an expense entered an hour ago are both already in it. How much detail does the statement carry? It shows each income and expense account with a figure for every month in the period you selected, grouped into Income, Cost of Goods Sold and Operating Expenses, which is what most owners need to see. If you want the individual postings behind a figure, the general ledger in the accounting module holds them. Where do the income and expense figures come from? From the records already in the account. On the Accrual basis, issued invoices, net of credit notes, and recorded income make up the income side, and expenses and bills make up the other, all posting through the chart of accounts; on the Cash basis, each counts when it is paid. A payment settles its invoice, so income is counted once. Expense accounts marked as Cost of Goods Sold get their own section above Gross Profit. What other financial statements are available? The accounting module also carries a balance sheet, a trial balance, a cash flow statement and the general ledger, along with manual journals, opening balances, fixed assets, bank reconciliation and a budget versus actuals view. The accounting module is included on paid plans. Can I compare my P&L against a budget? Yes. Budget vs Actuals, under Accounting, compares monthly income and expense budgets with the activity actually posted. Add Budget sets an amount for one income or expense account, month and currency. The table then shows each account's budget, actual and variance for every month in the date range, which starts as your financial year, with totals per account, and the figures at the top show income and expenses against budget and the Net Variance. Like the P&L, it is included on paid plans. See where the year actually stands Invoice and record costs in the same account, and the profit and loss statement is written as you go. Pick a period and read it. Compare plans 30-day free trial Cancel anytime Nothing to install --- ## Reports URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/generate-reports/ Generate invoice, expense, income, aged-debt and inventory reports for any dates and categories, then download, email or schedule them. Generate reports for any dates and categories Open every report from one Reports page: invoice, expense, income, aged-debt, payables aging and inventory reports and the financial statements, plus GST Filing, TDS Receivable and TCS Collected for businesses in India. Filter, download or email them in a few clicks. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Features Generate reports Invoices, income, expenses, GST Filter by date and category Download, email or schedule pop What is inside Pick a report, narrow it, share it Reports read the records your account already holds. Choose the type, set the dates, add a filter, then read the result or take it with you. Pick a report Different questions, different reports A report for each side of the business Invoices, aged debt, payables aging, income, expenses and an inventory summary each have their own report, and businesses in India also get GST filing. Which one you open depends on the question in front of you: who owes money and for how long, what a category cost last quarter, or what goes into the next GST return. Invoice and aged debt reports Income and expense reports Inventory summary, plus GST filing in India Always up to the minute Each report is built the moment you open it, from the records in your account right then. An invoice paid an hour ago is already counted, so the numbers in front of you are always current. Generated for the requested filters Payments count as soon as they land Nothing to refresh Every report on one page Reports in the sidebar opens one page with every report for the business, grouped as Financial Statements, Sales and Purchases, Tax and Send and Schedule. Search Reports… finds one by name, and a star adds it to Favourites at the top, so the reports you open every week are one click away. Star up to 30 Favourites Search Reports… by name Tax reports for India businesses Narrow it Dates first, then categories The selected date window Set a start and an end date and the report covers exactly that span: a month for a management meeting, a quarter for a return, a year for the accountant. The same report answers an entirely different question once the dates move. Monthly, quarterly or annual Custom start and end dates Rerun with new dates in seconds Filter down to one category Past the dates, a report can be limited to a particular income or expense category, and the filters stack rather than replacing one another. One quarter, one category, one supplier turns a long list into exactly the answer you need. Income or expense categories Several filters applied at once Narrow first, download afterwards Share it Out of the app, into the meeting Polished PDFs, ready to share Each report downloads as a PDF with the filters you applied, on a letterhead with your logo, business details and tax number, the period and page numbers, and a file name made of your business, the report and the period. Invoice Details also offers PDF with Line Items. PDF with your filters applied Fit to share or to archive Named by business and period Reports that arrive on their own Send Report by Email sends the Invoice, Expense, Income, Age Debt or Inventory Summary report once, with the PDF attached. Schedule the Payables Aging, Age Debt, Expense, Income or Invoice report and the one you check every Monday simply arrives by email, so your team gets the summary even in your busiest month. Payables Aging, Age Debt, Expense, Income or Invoice Delivered by email Useful for a weekly or monthly summary Also included Reports for every part of the business Each report reads the documents and entries already in your account, so answers are ready the moment you ask. Invoice report Every invoice raised in a period, with what's paid and what's outstanding. Total Invoiced $486,240 FY 2025-26 up Amount Paid $443,480 Collected Amount Due $42,760 Open bad Aged debt What customers owe, grouped by days past the due date: Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+. Age Debt Current 1-30 31-60 61-90 91+ Expense report Costs by date, vendor or category, drawn straight from what expense tracking recorded. Expense · Sep 2026 $15,517.60 Contractors Advertising Office Space Software Income report What came in over the period, grouped by the category it was booked to. Sales $47,800.00 in Retainers $9,785.00 September $57,585.00 bal GST filing For businesses in India: GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 figures and files, ready to review and file on the GST portal. GSTR-1 #4941e3 GSTR-3B #28c76f GSTR-9 #ff9f43 For India · ready for the GST portal Inventory summary What you hold and what it's worth, in the same account as your invoices. Printed brand kits 40 on hand Sticker packs 120 on hand Inventory Value $3,860.00 Scheduled sends Email the Payables Aging, Age Debt, Expense, Income or Invoice report on the cycle you choose. #ea5455 Age Debt Report Monthly Oct 05 Expense Report Oct 31 Income Report Quarterly Jan 01 Accounting statements The P&L, balance sheet, cash flow, trial balance and general ledger open from the same Reports page, over the same ledger. P&L Accounting Balance Sheet Report Pack One PDF Statements live under Accounting Payables aging What you owe vendors as of any date, with credits applied and overdue bills grouped from Current to 91+ days. Payables $18,240.00 Per business profile Reports are scoped to the business profile you are in, so two companies never blur together. Northwind Studio Northwind Digital #0ea5e9 Reports follow the business you are in Team access Team members can pull the reports their role allows without asking you for a copy. Reports Full Access Export Allowed Schedule Built into your account Reports come with your account, and each team member sees what their role allows. Invoice Details Expense Income Per plan, role and business live Questions Reporting, answered How do I run a report for one category? Open the report you want, choose the income or expense category from the filter options, and generate it. The result covers that category alone for the dates you set, which is usually faster than reading a full list and adding up the lines yourself. What formats can I download reports in? Reports download as a PDF that matches the report as you filtered it on screen, so a copy can be sent to an accountant, dropped into a presentation or filed for the tax year. Invoice Details adds PDF with Line Items, which lists each invoice's items, discounts and taxes under it. The accounting statements (P&L, Balance Sheet, Trial Balance, General Ledger) also export to Excel, the Cash Flow Statement to CSV and period comparisons to PDF or Excel, while Payables Aging and the India-only TDS Receivable report download as CSV. Can I combine more than one filter? Yes. Date range, category and report type work together rather than one at a time, so you can ask for a single expense category across one quarter and get exactly that. Narrowing the report before you download it saves editing afterwards. How current is the data in a report? It is built when you request it, from the records in the account at that moment, so the newest invoice, payment or expense is already included. Your figures are always current. Which reports are available? Invoices, aged debt, payables aging, income, expenses and an inventory summary, with GST Filing, TDS Receivable and TCS Collected for businesses in India, all on one Reports page. The Payables Aging, Age Debt, Expense, Income and Invoice reports can be scheduled. On the paid plans, the accounting module adds the profit and loss statement, balance sheet, trial balance, cash flow statement and the general ledger behind all of them, and Report Pack puts those five in one PDF behind an At a Glance cover. Does Invoice Crowd have an accounts payable aging report? Yes. Payables Aging shows what you owe each vendor as of a date you choose, with vendor credits applied and overdue bills grouped into Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days. Download it as a PDF, as PDF with Bills and Credits or as CSV, and Schedule Payables Aging emails it on the dates you set. It is included on paid plans. How do I find a report quickly? Use Search Reports on the Reports page. It matches report names and everyday terms such as income statement or accounts receivable, and Add to Favourites pins the reports you use most to the top of the page. Each person's favourites are their own, and team members see the reports their role allows. Can a report be sent to me automatically? Yes, for the Payables Aging, Age Debt, Expense, Income and Invoice reports. Scheduled reports go out by email with the PDF attached on the cycle you choose, so the monthly summary reaches you without anyone having to open the app. The accounting statements and Report Pack download as PDFs whenever you need them. Every answer, one report away Every invoice, payment and expense you record is ready to report on. Pick the report, set the dates, narrow it if you need to and take the result with you. Compare plans 30-day free trial No credit card required Cancel anytime --- ## Projects URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/projects/ Project management with invoicing: tasks, team rates and budgets, profit per project, and logged hours turned into invoices in Invoice Crowd. Features Projects that carry their own rates, hours and invoices Each project belongs to one customer and carries its own billing method, so tracked hours turn into money the same way every time. Add tasks, assign your team with their hourly rates, log time, then bill hours, project expenses or part of a fixed fee from a live invoice preview laid out the way that client wants it. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Projects & Tasks One customer, one billing method Hourly rates per task or per member Four invoice line layouts pop What is inside Set the rate once, and every invoice off that project follows it A project ties one customer to one billing method. Tasks and assigned members carry the rates that method reads, and the billable hours you log become invoice lines laid out the way that client wants them. Setting up the job One customer, one method Pick the customer, then pick how it bills A project belongs to one customer and bills one of four ways: Fixed Cost for Project, Based on Project Hours, Based on Task Hours or Based on Member Hours. Task hours takes its rate from each task, and Member hours from each team assignment. Because the method lives on the project, every invoice raised from it follows the same rule. A fixed fee or three hourly methods Billed in the business profile's currency One customer per project Projects and tasks, kept simple A project holds its customer, billing method, cost or rate, an optional description, your custom fields and up to three budgets. A task holds a name, an optional hourly rate and hour budget, a billable flag and an active status. Everything you need to price the work, and nothing that slows you down. A cost or rate for fixed and project-hour billing Task rates for task-hour billing Mark projects and tasks inactive when done Start a project from an approved agreement In a customer's Client workspace, an approved estimate or proposal offers Start project. The new project carries the Approved scope, and its Client and billing section keeps the agreement, the invoices raised from it and anything that Needs Attention together for that client. Start project from an approved estimate or proposal Approved scope on the project Client and billing in one place Running the work Rates, access and charts Assign the team with their own rates Assign team members to a project, each with an hourly rate and an optional budget. The assignment also sets access, so each person reaches only the projects they work on, within the customers their permissions cover. Under Member hours those rates price the invoice, and a line grouping several people uses an exact weighted rate. Each person bills at their own rate Rates applied when you invoice The account owner is assigned automatically Watch the hours and the margin on one project Open a project for tabs covering the overview, tasks, time logs, expenses, invoices, estimates, notes and Profitability. The overview charts the hours logged over a period, and the Profitability tab sets invoiced revenue against labour cost (hours times each person's cost rate) and expenses to show profit and margin. Labour cost is a management figure that stays out of your books. Expenses filed against a job count toward its cost, and every invoice and estimate raised from it stays linked. Project notes for extra context Time logs remember your saved filter Each assignment can carry its own Cost per Hour Turning hours into invoices Four layouts, one transaction Select the hours, get the invoice Select the project, its tasks or individual time logs and click Create Invoice. A drawer opens with a live preview: bill work between the dates you choose, pick the line layout and rounding, add unbilled project expenses with an optional markup, or bill part of a fixed fee. Invoice Crowd builds the lines at the project's rate, marks each log as invoiced and opens the new invoice in the editor. One customer per invoice Layout and rounding set per project, or changed for one invoice Every hour billed exactly once Simple tasks, clear billing Every task carries exactly what billing needs: a name, an hourly rate, an hour budget, a billable flag and an active status. People are assigned to the project, so pricing stays clear and setup takes minutes. Once time is invoiced it locks, so the hours behind every sent bill stay exactly as billed. Invoiced time locks automatically Rates and budgets on every task Estimates link back to the project Invoice project work by percentage For a fixed-fee project, Invoice project work bills the Remaining fee, an Amount or a Percentage of total fee, with 25%, 50% and 100% one click away and each invoice capped at what remains. The preview shows the invoice lines subtotal before tax, and Add project cost on the Expenses tab records costs ready to re-bill. Remaining fee, Amount or Percentage Capped at what is left of the fee Project costs ready to re-bill Built in The rest of the project screen The four billing methods side by side, plus the budgets, fields and tools you use day to day. Fixed price A fixed cost on the project sets the amount. Hours are still logged for insight, while the job bills its agreed price. Lumen website redesign Fixed Cost Hours logged 42:30 Bills $18,500.00 bal One project rate Project hours applies one hourly rate to every log on the project, which suits a single blended rate for the whole team. Oakridge SEO program $95.00 / hr Keyword research 03:45 Line amount $356.25 Rate per task Task hours reads the rate from each task, so design can be billed at a different number to development on the same project. Logo concepts $120.00 / hr Brand guidelines $110.00 / hr Client workshop $150.00 / hr Rate per member Member hours reads the rate from each team assignment, so senior and junior time is priced apart on the same invoice. Alex Morgan Priya Nair Marcus Lee Custom project fields Define a field once for the account and fill it per project: label, data type, default value, help text, mandatory and on by default. PO reference HV-2026 Account lead Alex Mandatory Yes Cost and hour budgets Optional cost and revenue budgets sit on the project, with an hours budget entered as HH:MM in total, per task or per staff member. Cost Budget $12,000 Harbor & Vine Revenue Budget $18,000 Target up Hours Per task HH:MM Hours chart The hours chart plots time logged over one week to twelve months, or a custom range. A retainer project also shows its monthly hours bar. Project Hours 21:15 Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Profitability tab Invoiced revenue minus labour cost and expenses, shown as profit and margin for this or the previous financial year. The owner and timesheet managers see it. Income $9,840.00 Jul Aug Sep Four invoice layouts Per project: all selected hours on a single line, one line per time log, one line per task, or one per task split by member. Single Line For The Project #4941e3 Group By Project Tasks #16a34a Show All Timesheet Entries Individually #0ea5e9 Group By Project Tasks And Users #f59e0b Set per project Fast, paged lists Tasks, time logs, expenses, invoices, estimates and notes page through at 10, 25, 50 or 100 rows. Tasks 10 per page Time logs 25 per page Page sizes 10 to 100 Bulk project changes Select rows on the projects list to update status and team assignments, create invoices or delete in bulk. 3 projects Selected Bulk update Status Inactive Applied Out-of-scope rows refuse the lot Client view and approvals Customers invited to the customer portal see their own projects and timesheets and can approve or question each week's billable hours. They see hours only, never your rates. Customer portal Projects Read-only Timesheet The work behind the bill live Questions Projects & Tasks, answered Does Invoice Crowd do project management with invoicing? Yes. Invoice Crowd keeps projects, tasks, team assignments and time logs in the same account as the invoicing, so billable hours become invoice lines without exporting them to another tool. Each project is tied to one customer and one billing method (fixed, project hours, task hours or member hours) and that method decides the rate applied when tracked work is billed. How does Invoice Crowd decide what to charge for a project? The billing method on the project decides the rate. Fixed uses a set price for the whole job and ignores hours entirely. Project hours applies one hourly rate to all logged time. Task hours takes the rate from each task, and Member hours takes it from each assigned team member, so senior and junior time can be priced apart on the same invoice. Can invoices from a project be laid out differently for different clients? Yes. Line-item layout is a per-project setting in Invoice Crowd with four options: all selected hours on a single line, one line per individual time log, one line per task, or one line per task split by team member. The same tracked hours can be presented as one summary figure for one client and in full detail for another. Can a team member see only the projects they work on? Yes. Access follows the project assignment: a team member reaches a project only when assigned to it, and only within the customers their permissions cover. Customers invited to the customer portal see their own projects and timesheets and can approve or question each week's billable hours without seeing your rates, so the hours behind a bill are agreed before you send it. Can I see whether a project made money? Yes. The project's Profitability tab takes invoiced revenue, subtracts labour cost (hours logged times each person's cost rate) and the expenses filed against the project, and shows the profit and margin. Labour cost is calculated for this view only and stays out of your books, and every figure comes from the documents and expenses already recorded against the project. A separate hours chart plots logged time over one week to twelve months, or a custom range. What happens to a time log after it has been invoiced? It locks, so the hours behind a sent invoice stay exactly as billed. A billed log can't be edited or deleted, and later invoices built from the project skip it, so the same hours are never billed twice. Logs that have not been invoiced can be edited or deleted at any time. Can I bill a monthly retainer against logged hours? Yes. A retainer is a monthly recurring invoice that counts the billable hours logged on the projects you choose against the hours included each month. Unused hours carry over or expire, extra hours go on the next invoice, and retainer time is never billed twice. Retainers need a paid plan. Can I invoice a fixed-fee project in stages, by percentage? Yes. Invoice project work on a fixed-fee project bills the Remaining fee, a set Amount or a Percentage of total fee, with 25%, 50% and 100% as quick choices. Each invoice is capped at what remains of the fee, and the preview shows the invoice lines before tax, so progress billing stays exact from the first invoice to the last. Bill the hours you have already logged Create a project, pick how it bills, assign your team with their rates, then turn this month's billable logs into an invoice. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Time Tracking URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/time-tracking/ Time tracking in Invoice Crowd: a timer on every page, billable and non-billable hours, per-member rates, and logged time turned into an invoice. Features Time tracking that ends in an invoice, not a spreadsheet Invoice Crowd's time tracking puts a stopwatch in the app header on every page: log hours against a project task and mark them billable or not. When it is time to bill, select the logs and Invoice Crowd writes the invoice lines at the rate the project's billing method sets. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Time Tracking Timer on every page Billable and non-billable hours Logs become invoice lines pop What is inside Start the clock, price the hours, send the bill Every hour in Invoice Crowd follows one path: recorded against a project task, priced by the project's billing method, and carried onto an invoice line when you bill it. Getting the hours down Timer, entry or grid A timer in the header, on every page The stopwatch sits in the app header, so you can start tracking from the invoice editor or the dashboard without leaving the page. Pick the project, task and team member, mark the time billable or not, add a note and start. A live HH:MM:SS chip runs in the header, and pausing banks the time so far. Step away for ten minutes and the timer asks whether to keep the time, remove the idle part or stop when you left, and a forgotten timer stops on its own. Started one by mistake? Discard Timer ends it without saving. One running timer per person, across business profiles Rounds to the nearest minute Idle detection built in Type in the hour you forgot, or the whole week Not every hour gets a timer. The + menu on Projects and Timesheet takes a single Log Time entry with a date, project, task, team member and a duration in HH:MM, and a Weekly Log grid with a row per project and task and a cell for each day, so Friday afternoon can cover the whole week. Every log carries a billable flag. A stopped timer behaves like an entry you typed Every log names one project, one task and one member Edit, delete, filter and bill them all the same way Pricing the hours Four billing methods The project's billing method sets the rate A project is tied to one customer and one billing method, both chosen when the project is created, so the rate is settled once rather than on every invoice. Fixed prices the whole job. Project Hours, Task Hours and Member Hours price by the hour, taking the rate from the project, the task, or the member selected on the log. Under Member Hours the rate follows the selected member Round each entry on the invoice; logged minutes never change A grouped line spanning several people uses a weighted rate Billable and non-billable both stay on the record Every log carries a billable flag, and only billable logs are ever carried onto an invoice. Non-billable hours are still recorded and still show in the timesheet and on the project's time logs, so internal work, rework and admin stay visible to you without ever reaching a client's bill. Budgets sit beside the rates, on the project and on each assigned member. Cost, revenue and hours budgets, hours in HH:MM Budget in total, per task or per member Each assigned member carries a rate and an optional budget Sending the bill Selected logs, one invoice Select the logs and create the invoice Select the projects or individual logs you want to bill, or use Invoice These on the Timesheet, and Create Invoice opens a live preview: bill work between two dates, pick the layout and rounding, and add project expenses with a markup or part of a fixed fee. Invoice Crowd writes the lines at the project's rate, marks each log invoiced and opens the new invoice in the editor. Only unbilled, billable time is included, and only approved time when the project requires approval. One customer per invoice A fixed fee can be billed in parts Every hour billed exactly once The hours stay visible after the invoice goes out Every log lands in the Timesheet list and on the project's own time-logs tab, both easy to filter. The project detail charts those hours, and its Profitability tab sets invoiced revenue against labour cost and the expenses charged to the job. An invoice raised from tracked time is a standard invoice and sits in your books with the rest. Profit and margin per project, by financial year Tasks, expenses, invoices, estimates and notes on the same project Clients can approve or question weekly hours in the portal Built in The rest of the timesheet The pricing choices behind each invoice line, and the controls that keep your team's time accurate. Fixed price Fixed sets one agreed cost on the project, so logged hours stay visible for insight while the job bills its agreed price. Verde packaging refresh Fixed Cost Hours logged 03:00 Project price $6,200.00 bal Project Hours Project Hours takes one rate per hour from the project itself, a single blended rate that applies to everyone logging time on it. Juniper email automation $110.00 / hr Email templates 02:45 Line amount $302.50 Task Hours Task Hours reads the rate per hour from each task, so design can be billed at a different number to development. Logo concepts · 03:30 $420.00 Brand guidelines · 04:00 $440.00 Invoice lines $860.00 Member Hours Member Hours prices each line from the hourly rate on the assigned team member, keeping senior and junior time apart on the same task. Priya Nair · 04:15 $510.00 Marcus Lee · 06:15 $593.75 Kestrel dashboard design $1,103.75 Four line layouts One line for all the hours, a line per log, a line per task, or task split by member. The layout is set per project, and the invoice preview can change it for one invoice, round each entry and re-bill project expenses. Single Line For The Project #4941e3 Group By Project Tasks #16a34a Show All Timesheet Entries Individually #0ea5e9 Group By Project Tasks And Users #f59e0b Chosen per project Hours chart ranges The project's hours chart covers one week, one month, three, six or twelve months, or a custom range you set yourself. Range This Week Also 1–12 months Custom Date range Locked once billed A billed log locks and later invoices skip it, so every hour, including retainer time, is billed exactly once. Client workshop AM #6366f1 Alex Morgan · 02:00 $300.00 Unbilled bad Invoiced ok Billed exactly once Week view and approvals Fill in a week on the grid, submit it for approval, and check each person's hours against capacity on the Utilisation view. Mon · Logo concepts 02:30 Mon · Internal review 01:00 Review before billing 03:30 Simple tasks Each task keeps the name, hourly rate, hour budget, billable status and active state needed to price and invoice project work clearly. Rate per hour $120.00 Budget hours 24:00 Billable Yes Privacy-friendly time tracking Track the time needed for client billing without screenshots or GPS monitoring. Idle detection only asks the person running the timer what to do with time they were away. Screenshots None GPS Idle check Asks you first Logged Time and notes Who can track time Team members see only the projects they are assigned to, and the timer is reserved for your team. PN #ec4899 TW #14b8a6 ER Priya · Kestrel dashboard 04:15 Tom · Oakridge SEO 03:45 Elena · Summit launch 04:30 Estimates from a project Create an estimate from a project and it links the project and customer automatically. Harbor & Vine Project Create Estimate Estimate Linked Project and customer linked for you live Questions Time Tracking, answered Does Invoice Crowd have a timer, and does it work on every page? Yes. The timer sits in the app header as a stopwatch icon on every page, so you can start tracking from the invoice editor or the dashboard. Choose the project, task and team member, mark the time billable or not and add a note, and a live HH:MM:SS chip runs in the header with pause and stop beside it. Stop and Log saves the entry, rounded to the nearest minute, and Discard Timer ends a timer without saving. After ten idle minutes the timer asks what to do with that time, and a forgotten timer stops automatically. Can time be logged in Invoice Crowd without using the timer? Yes. Invoice Crowd takes a single manual entry from the + menu on Projects or Timesheet, with a date, project, task, team member and a duration in HH:MM, and a weekly grid with a row per project and task and a cell per day, so a whole week can be filled in at once. Manual entries and timer entries produce the same record and bill the same way. How do tracked hours become an invoice? Select the projects or time logs to bill, or use Invoice These on the Timesheet, then Create Invoice. A preview drawer lets you bill work between two dates, choose the line layout and rounding, add unbilled project expenses with an optional markup, and bill all or part of a fixed fee. Invoice Crowd builds the lines at the rate the project's billing method sets, marks each log as invoiced and opens the invoice in the editor. Only unbilled, billable time is included, and each invoice is for one customer. Can billable and non-billable time be separated? Yes. Every time log in Invoice Crowd carries a billable flag. Non-billable hours are still recorded and still appear in the timesheet and on the project's time logs, so internal work and rework stay visible, but they are never carried onto a client invoice. Only billable logs are consumed when tracked time is converted into an invoice. Can each team member have their own hourly rate? Yes. Team members are assigned to a project individually, each with an hourly rate, and the Member Hours billing method prices invoice lines from the rate of the member selected on the log. A grouped line covering several people uses an exact weighted rate. What happens to time once it has been invoiced? It locks. Once a time log has been converted into an invoice, it is kept exactly as billed and later invoices skip it, so the hours behind a sent bill always match and are never billed twice. Logs not yet invoiced can be edited or deleted at any time. Can team members submit timesheets for approval? Yes. Team members fill in their week on the Timesheet's Week view and submit it, and the owner or a timesheet manager approves it or sends it back from Approvals. When a project requires approval, only approved time can be invoiced. Timesheets need a paid plan. Can clients approve the hours before I bill them? Yes. In the customer portal, a client with access to the project can approve or question each week's billable hours. They see hours only, never your rates. You get a bell notification, and the invoice preview shows which weeks the client approved. Put this week's hours on an invoice Start the timer from any page in Invoice Crowd, mark the time billable against a project task, then select the logs and create the invoice. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Timesheets and Approvals URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/timesheets/ Track team hours in Invoice Crowd timesheets: a week grid, weekly approval, client sign-off in the portal, utilisation and one click to bill unbilled time. Features Timesheets your team submits, you approve, and you bill Timesheets in Invoice Crowd show every hour your team logs in four views: List, Week, Approvals and Utilisation. Team members submit their week, you approve it or send it back with a comment, and unbilled hours go to an invoice with Invoice These. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Timesheets Submit and approve weeks Client approval in the portal Import up to 1,000 rows by CSV pop What is inside From the week grid to an approved, billed week The Timesheet is where the team's hours meet your billing: entered in a list or a week grid, checked week by week, approved by you and, where you want it, by the client, then sent to an invoice. Logging the hours List, week grid or CSV Filter the list, then Invoice These The List view filters time by customer, project, team member, billing status and dates, and totals what is logged, billable and unbilled, with the unbilled value. Invoice These sends every unbilled entry that matches the filters to the invoice wizard. Export CSV downloads the filtered rows, and Import CSV checks a file before anything is saved. Import CSV takes up to 1,000 rows and 1 MB Every row checked before import Billing Status reads Unbilled, Invoiced or Non-Billable Time tracking Fill in the week, a row per task The Week view is a grid with a row per project and task and a cell per day. Type the hours in a cell and it saves. Copy Rows from Last Week brings back last week's projects and tasks, ready for this week's hours. Weeks run Sunday to Saturday Managers can open each team member's week Fill Your Week reminds anyone short of their hours Approving the week Submit, approve or send back Team members submit their week When a week is complete, a team member submits it from the Week view. You get a Timesheet Submitted notice in the bell, open the week, and Approve it or Send Back with a note of what needs to change. Submitted and approved weeks lock, so the hours you sign off stay exactly as approved. Submit straight from the Week view Every send-back explains why A second pair of eyes on every week Teams Approve weeks in one queue The Approvals view lists every week waiting, with each person's logged and billable hours. Tick weeks and Approve Selected, or send them back with one comment. Turn on Invoice Only Approved Time for any project, and only approved hours reach its invoices. The owner or a timesheet manager approves Approved weeks lock their time Reopening an approved week needs a comment Clients and capacity Hours only for clients Clients approve their hours in the portal On a project's overview in the customer portal, your client sees each week's billable hours and can Approve them or Question them with a comment. They see hours, never rates. You get a bell notice, the project overview lists every decision, and the invoice wizard shows how many weeks the client approved. Not Approved Yet, Approved or Questioned Changed Since Approval if the hours change later For portal customers with access to the project Customer portal Utilisation against each person's weekly hours The Utilisation view shows each person's billable hours as a share of their weekly hours, week by week, over the last 4, 8 or 12 weeks. In Cost Rates and Weekly Hours you set each person's weekly hours and cost per hour; the cost feeds project profitability and stays out of your books. Weekly hours start at 40 Team members see only their own row Cost rates are for the owner and timesheet managers Project profitability Built in The rest of the Timesheet Filters, files, reminders and the header timer that feeds it all. Four views List, Week, Approvals and Utilisation sit on one Timesheet screen, which opens on the view you used last. List Filter Week Grid Approvals Queue Utilisation Share Filters and totals Filter by customer, project, member, billing status and dates. The bar above the list totals logged, billable and unbilled time. Logged 112:30 Billable 104:00 up Unbilled 14:45 $1,877.50 bad Invoice These Sends every unbilled entry that matches your filters to the invoice wizard, up to 1,000 entries at a time. 2 entries Wizard Preview Up to 1,000 entries at a time Export CSV Downloads the filtered rows as a CSV file, with spreadsheet formulas neutralised for safety. Customer Rows Spreadsheet Safe cells Import CSV Date, project, task and hours, plus member email, billable and notes. Every row is checked first, up to 1,000 rows a file. october-time.csv 4 rows Rows ready in Rows to fix cn Imported until fixed bal Idle detection Back after 10 minutes or more with the timer running? Choose Keep the Time, Remove Idle Time, or stop at the time you left. #28c76f Keep the Time Counts the 14 min #ff9f43 Remove Idle Time Drops the 14 min #ea5455 Stop at 2:10 pm Ends the timer Forgotten timers stop A timer left running stops automatically and saves only the time allowed. The bell warns you first, then links to the entry. AM #4941e3 Timer still running Warning Timer stopped Notice Correct the entry Link Bell notices Timesheet Submitted, Approved or Sent Back, Fill Your Week, and Client Approved or Disputed Hours arrive in the bell. ML #448aff HD PN Timesheet Submitted 27 Sep Timesheet Approved Fill Your Week Friday Approved time only Turn on Invoice Only Approved Time on a project and its invoices bill only time from approved weeks. Invoice Only Approved Time On Website Redesign Project Approved weeks Billed Needs Decision A billable entry on a non-billable task waits for you to decide, with Decide Now above the list, before it can be billed. Logo Concepts Billable on a non-billable task 1:00 warn Bill It ok Decide Now from the list Continue a timer The play icon on a row starts a new timer on the same project and task, with the same notes. Homepage Build 3:15 Brand Refresh 4:00 Analytics Dashboard Data Model 1:20 Paid plans Timesheets, the header timer and approvals are part of Worklog, included on paid plans. Worklog Included live Questions Timesheets, answered Can I approve my team's timesheets in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Team members submit each week from the Week view of the Timesheet, and the account owner or a timesheet manager approves it or sends it back with a comment. Approved weeks are read-only, and a project can be set to invoice only approved time. Timesheet approval is part of Worklog on paid plans. Who can approve a timesheet? The account owner, or a team member whose role has full access to Timesheet, called a timesheet manager here. Every week is decided by someone other than the person who logged it, either the owner or another manager. The team member gets a bell notice when their week is approved or sent back. Can clients approve hours before I invoice them? Yes. In the customer portal, a client with access to a project sees each week's billable hours on the project overview and can approve them or question them with a comment. They see hours only, never your rates. You get a bell notice, and the invoice wizard shows how many weeks the client approved before you bill. How do I import time from a spreadsheet? Use Import CSV on the Timesheet. The file needs Date, Project, Task and Hours columns, and can add the team member's email, Billable and Notes; hours can be 2:30 or 2.5. Invoice Crowd checks every row and lists what needs fixing, and imports only when every row is valid, all in one go. A file can hold up to 1,000 rows and 1 MB. Does the timer notice when I step away? Yes. If the header timer is running and you come back after 10 minutes or more without activity in the app, it asks whether to Keep the Time, Remove Idle Time, or stop the timer at the time you left. It only uses activity in your own browser: there are no screenshots and no tracking of what you did. What happens if I forget to stop the timer? It stops by itself. A timer left running is stopped automatically and saves only the time one timer is allowed to record. You get a warning in the bell before it stops, and a notice when it does, with a link to correct the entry. Which plans include timesheets? Timesheets are part of Worklog, included on paid plans together with projects, the header timer and the invoice wizard. Approve this week's hours, then bill them Let the team fill in the week grid and submit it, approve it in one queue, and send the unbilled hours to an invoice with Invoice These. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Project Profitability URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/project-profitability/ See profit and margin per project in Invoice Crowd: revenue minus labour cost and expenses, then bill time, expenses and fixed fees from one wizard. Features See what each project earns after labour and expenses Project profitability in Invoice Crowd is the revenue invoiced on a project, minus labour cost (each person's hours times their cost per hour), minus project expenses, shown as profit and margin. The invoice wizard then bills work between the dates you choose, rounds each entry, re-bills project expenses and bills fixed fees in parts or by percentage. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Project Profitability Profit and margin per project Labour cost kept out of your books pop What is inside Know the margin, then bill what is waiting Profit per project Revenue, labour, expenses Revenue minus labour minus expenses The project's Profitability tab charts invoiced revenue, labour cost and project expenses by month, for this financial year, the previous one, or the last 6 or 12 months. Below the chart sit Invoiced, Labour Cost, Project Expenses, Profit with its margin, and Work in Progress: logged time not yet invoiced, shown beside profit rather than in it. Revenue counts on the invoice date, before tax An invoice shared by projects is split by time Uses your business's own financial year Projects Cost rates stay with you Set a cost per hour for each person in Cost Rates and Weekly Hours, or a different one on a project. Labour cost is hours times that rate, a management figure that stays out of your books. Anyone without a rate is flagged on the tab, with a link to set one. Only the owner and timesheet managers see costs Private from team members and clients Set Cost Rates links straight to the settings Timesheets Billing the work One Create Invoice wizard Bill work between two dates, rounded your way Create Invoice opens one drawer with a live preview. Bill work from and Bill work through set the dates to bill, and work outside them waits for a later invoice. Invoice Lines follow the project's setting, or switch to one line per project, each time entry, by task, or by task and team member. Round Each Entry to 6, 15 or 30 minutes, nearest or up: only the invoice is rounded, and logged minutes never change. Keep the rounding for the project's later invoices Shows how many weeks the client approved Running timers stay off the invoice Time tracking Re-bill project expenses with a markup Unbilled expenses filed against the project appear in the wizard. Tick the ones to re-bill and add a markup percentage: each becomes a sales line at cost plus markup, with its date and the markup noted. The expense keeps its own entry in your books and counts as billed while that invoice exists. Re-bill expenses filed to the project In the project's own currency Deleting the invoice frees the expense again Expenses Fixed fees and what is waiting Bill a fixed fee in parts For a fixed-fee project the wizard shows the Fee, what is Invoiced and what is Remaining. Bill Now takes the Remaining fee, an Amount up to what is left, or a Percentage of total fee with 25%, 50% and 100% in one click, and the line notes which part of the fee it is. A fee is never billed past what is left. Bill fee parts on their own invoice Deleting an invoice frees its part again The project overview shows Invoiced and Remaining Up to five customers, each in its own currency Retainer time handled separately Part of Worklog on paid plans Retainers Built in The rest of project profit and billing The periods, safeguards and choices behind the figures and the invoices. Choose the period This financial year, the previous one, or the last 6 or 12 months, following your business's own financial year. Period This Financial Year Jan-Dec Last 6 Months Last 12 Months 12 Margin, not just profit Profit shows its margin as a share of what was invoiced on the project in the period. Invoiced $23,500 Profit $8,460 up Margin 36% Work in progress Billable time not yet invoiced is valued at current rates and shown beside profit, not inside it. $8,460.00 $697.50 in Profit with WIP $9,157.50 bal Shared invoices split When one invoice bills several projects, each project counts its share by the time it billed. INV-2260 before tax $4,000.00 Website Redesign 75% $3,000.00 Brand Refresh 25% $1,000.00 Your books stay clean Labour cost is a management figure, so your journals and profit and loss statement stay exactly as recorded. Labour cost $13,900.00 Journal entries Untouched P&L statement Unchanged Missing rates flagged Anyone without a cost per hour is named above the figures, with a Set Cost Rates link to fix it. #ea5455 Hannah Draper Cost per hour $62.00 #448aff Marcus Lee $55.00 #ff9f43 Priya Nair Set Cost Rates Missing Five line choices As Set for the Project, One Line per Project, Each Time Entry, By Task, or By Task and Team Member, per invoice. Invoice Lines By Task and Team Member Each Time Entry One Line per Project Rounding that sticks Tick Use this rounding for these projects from now on, and later invoices start with it. Round to 15 minutes Nearest Keep for these projects On Logged minutes Approved time only Projects set to Invoice Only Approved Time bill only hours from approved weeks. Invoice Only Approved Time Weeks approved 3 of 4 Unapproved time Held back Item costs count Item costs on the project's invoices, and expenses linked to its invoice lines, count as project costs, each once. Project expenses $1,020.00 Item costs on its invoices $120.00 Project costs $1,140.00 Guided corrections If a selection spans customers or holds only retainer time, the wizard explains why and links you to fix it. Create Invoice HV Retainer time only $0.00 Explained warn Open retainer pri Every message links to the fix Paid plans #4941e3 Worklog Included #28c76f Account owner See profit Yes Timesheet managers live Questions Project Profitability, answered Can Invoice Crowd show profit per project? Yes. Each project has a Profitability tab that takes the revenue invoiced on the project, subtracts labour cost (hours times each person's cost per hour) and project expenses, and shows profit and margin for this financial year, the previous one, or the last 6 or 12 months. It is for the account owner and timesheet managers, as part of Worklog on paid plans. Does labour cost affect my accounts? Your books stay exactly as recorded. Labour cost is a management figure worked out from logged hours and each person's cost per hour, so your profit and loss statement shows invoices and expenses just as before. How is project revenue counted? From invoices linked to the project, or that billed its time, on the invoice date and before tax. When one invoice bills several projects, each project counts its share by the time it billed. Billable time not yet invoiced is shown separately as Work in Progress. Can I round billable time on invoices? Yes. In the invoice wizard, Round Each Entry rounds every time entry to 6, 15 or 30 minutes, to the nearest step or up. Only the invoice is rounded; logged minutes never change. Tick Use this rounding for these projects from now on to make it the project's default. Can I re-bill expenses to a client? Yes, for project expenses. Unbilled expenses filed against a project appear in the invoice wizard; tick them and add a markup percentage, and each becomes a sales line at cost plus markup. The expense keeps its own entry in your books. Can I invoice a fixed-fee project in milestones? Yes. Create an invoice for the fixed-fee project on its own, and the wizard shows the fee, what is already invoiced and what remains. Bill the remaining fee, any amount up to what is left, or a percentage of the total fee such as 25%, 50% or 100%. The fee is never billed twice, and deleting an invoice frees its part again. A dashboard card that lists the customers with the most unbilled time and project expenses, with the amount waiting for each. Create Invoice opens the invoice wizard with that customer's projects chosen. Time a retainer counts is left out, so it is never billed twice. Find the margin on your next project Set each person's cost per hour, open a project's Profitability tab, and bill what is waiting from one Create Invoice wizard. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## AI Assistant URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/ai-assistant/ Invoice Crowd's AI Assistant looks up invoices, expenses and customers, runs reports and logs time, then waits for you to confirm every new record. Features An AI Assistant that reads your books and never writes without you Invoice Crowd's AI Assistant is a chat panel that opens over any page of the app. Ask about your customers, invoices, expenses and projects and it answers from your own records. It can also write, edit and check your proposals. Every record it proposes waits on a confirmation card until you click Confirm. Included on paid plans, with 100 AI credits every month. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home AI Assistant Answers from your own records Nothing saved until you confirm Reads receipts and expense spreadsheets pop What is inside Ask it about your books, then decide what it writes The assistant does three things: it answers questions from your own records, it turns a receipt or an expense spreadsheet into expense rows ready to check, and it puts every new record on a card that waits for your click. Asking it A chat panel that follows you around the app The assistant opens over whatever page you are on, from the launcher at the bottom right or the AI Assistant item in the sidebar. It stays open as you move around the app, even after a reload. A new chat offers quick-start buttons for the page you are on, such as Create Proposal on Proposals or Improve Wording inside a proposal: the questions send straight away, and the create prompts fill the message box so you can adjust the wording first. Opens from the launcher or the sidebar Stays open while you move around the app A history drawer holds earlier conversations Answers drawn from your own records Ask about customers, vendors, items, invoices, expenses, projects, categories, taxes, payments received and made, credit notes, proposals, the chart of accounts, your business details or the product help catalog. Ask for a profit and loss, balance sheet, receivables or payables aging, or customer balance report, and every answer comes from your own records, one currency at a time. Answers respect each person's role, so a team member sees only the documents their permissions allow. Instant answers for the active business Look up any invoice, estimate, bill or purchase order Secured to your signed-in account Suggestions for the page you are on The assistant shows the page it is open on, such as Invoices, Customers or Reports, and offers the suggestions that fit it: Who Owes Me on Customers, Bills Due on your purchase pages, Explain This Report on any report. What is on the page is shared only when you send a message, and replies come back formatted, with paragraphs, lists and bold figures that are quick to scan. Quick actions matched to each page Explain This Report on any report Replies formatted for quick reading Letting it write Nothing saves until you click Every change arrives as a confirmation card When the assistant suggests a new record, it shows an itemized card listing every field it will save. Nothing reaches your books until you click Confirm, and each card can be confirmed only once, so a double click never posts the same record twice. Permissions checked again before saving Your newer edits are never overwritten Confirming saves, it never sends Turn receipts and spreadsheets into expenses Attach a JPG or PNG receipt and it comes back as expense fields filled in for you. Attach a CSV, XLS or XLSX and the rows come back as an itemized expense batch, up to 25 on one card. You check the rows before anything saves, and the file itself is never stored. 5 files a message, 3 of them receipt images Every upload screened for safety Larger sheets go through the expense importer Proposals written, edited and checked in the chat Tell the assistant who the proposal is for and what the work is. It asks for anything missing, such as deliverables, timing or prices, then builds the proposal the same way as Create with AI: a gallery or saved template filled with your words, pricing and brand. Open a proposal and it rewrites wording, fills a table, switches the customer or checks what still needs attention before you send, keeping the design and merge tags intact. A full proposal from a short brief Wording changes staged for your Confirm Prices only from you or your saved items Create with AI in the proposal builder Human control built into every action Credits, scope and safeguards 100 AI credits every month on paid plans Every paid monthly or yearly subscription includes 100 AI credits each calendar month. They are used first and reset at the start of the next month, and credits you buy in Billing and Plan never expire. A chat message is priced at 3 credits, the panel shows both balances and what each answer used, and you can always confirm or reject what the last turn prepared, even when your balance runs low. Credits are refunded when a receipt scan fails Balances never go negative Clear guidance when credits run low High-impact actions stay under your control Every change the assistant proposes arrives as an itemized card for the account owner to confirm, and it respects the permissions of every business and team member. Sending, payments, settings and deletions stay with you, in the app. For you and your team A fresh conversation for each business Page context handled safely AI Connections Built in The safeguards behind every card What the assistant can prepare, the drafts it can edit, and the safeguards that keep your books accurate. Records it can create Customers, vendors, items, taxes, expenses, incomes, projects and time entries (up to 20 at once) are proposed on a confirmation card and saved only when you press Confirm. #7367f0 Create customer Verde Coffee Awaiting #28c76f Create item Brand workshop Done #8a8d93 Create vendor Printhouse North Rejected Updates that check first It can update a customer, vendor, item or project, and it checks first, so your own newer edits are never overwritten. Prepared Update customer Changed since by you Checked Your edit kept Your newer edits always stay Drafts ready for review Invoices, estimates, bills, purchase orders, credit notes and complete proposals arrive as drafts with accounting posting off until you choose the account. Ask for a currency, template, your own number or payment methods and the draft carries them. EST-01054 OD #ec4899 Oakridge Dental Group $950.00 warn Confirmed ok Draft pri Accounting posting stays off Recurring starts paused A recurring invoice the assistant stages is created paused, so it bills nothing until you activate it yourself in the editor. Recurring invoice SUB-00132 Frequency Monthly Status Paused bal Edits to open drafts On an open draft that has not been sent, paid or posted, it can add or replace lines, including each line's tax, and change the dates, notes or document number. Unsent draft Editable Line items Add or replace Sent or paid Locked The full editor for complex drafts Drafts with invoice-level discounts or taxes, shipping, a deposit, a Payment Link, partial payments or Item Costs are edited in the full invoice editor. Document discount #ea5455 Document tax Shipping Deposit Payment Link Partial payments Left for you to set Staged actions expire A staged action you never confirm expires after 24 hours and leaves nothing behind in your books. AI 24 h Expired draft Nothing written to your books Built-in safety limits Each turn and confirmation runs within safety limits, keeping every request quick and every batch a manageable size. Messages 150 per day Rate per minute Batch 25 expenses Attachment size limits The panel shows the file, message and daily upload limits before you attach anything. Files per message Size per file 10 MB Accepted CSV, XLS(X), JPG, PNG Spreadsheet import Reads the first worksheet, up to 50 non-empty rows, 30 columns and 500 characters a cell, with formulas switched off for safety. Worksheet First sheet Rows 50 non-empty Columns 30 Formulas Off, for safety Category and payment account The category says what was bought and the payment account how it was paid; leave the account out and the Cash account is used by default. Rail travel €186.50 Category Travel Payment account Cash (default) Complete batches An expense batch saves as one complete set, so your books never hold half a batch. 3 expenses One card Confirm One save Stale row All rolled back live Questions AI Assistant, answered Do I approve everything the AI Assistant creates? Yes. Every new record arrives as a confirmation card in the chat, and nothing is saved until the account owner clicks Confirm. Ownership, permissions and record versions are checked again before anything is saved, and an action you never confirm expires after 24 hours, leaving your books untouched. How does the Invoice Crowd AI Assistant protect business records? Every change appears as an itemized confirmation card and is saved only after the owner confirms it. Permissions, business ownership, document status and version are checked again before a record changes, and sending, payments, settings and deletions stay in your hands in the app. Can the AI Assistant read a receipt photo or a spreadsheet of expenses? Yes. You can attach up to 5 files to a message in the Invoice Crowd AI Assistant, of which up to 3 can be JPG or PNG receipt images, at 10 MB per file and 20 MB per message. A receipt scan comes back as expense fields filled in on a confirmation card you check before saving. CSV, XLS and XLSX files are read up to 50 non-empty rows and 30 columns, and one confirmation card can carry up to 25 expenses. The panel shows your limits before you attach a file. Does the AI Assistant know which page I am on? Yes. Invoice Crowd's AI Assistant shows the page it is open on, such as Invoices, Customers or Reports, and its quick-start buttons change to match: Who Owes Me on Customers, Bills Due on your purchase pages and Explain This Report on any report. The visible page is shared only when you send a message, never from sensitive screens such as billing, security or payment settings, and replies come back formatted with paragraphs, lists and bold figures. Can the AI Assistant write a proposal? Yes. Tell the Invoice Crowd AI Assistant the customer and the work, for example “Create a website redesign proposal for Harbor & Vine Co. with three milestones”, and it asks for anything missing, then builds the proposal the same way as Create with AI, from a gallery or saved template filled with your copy, pricing and brand. The credits for the task are shown before it starts, the account owner confirms the card, and the result is an unsent draft ready to review in the proposal editor. Can the AI Assistant change a proposal I have already started? Yes. Open the proposal and choose AI Assistant in the editor. It reads the proposal's words and stages changes, such as rewriting a paragraph, filling a table or removing an example testimonial, while keeping the design and merge tags. It can also switch the customer on an unsigned proposal or check what still needs attention before you send. Every change waits on a card until the account owner confirms it. Can team members use the AI Assistant? Yes. Team members can ask questions within the business they are attached to, their permissions and any customer or project assignments. Creating records through the assistant is reserved for the account owner, and the assistant is available to you and your team only. How much does the AI Assistant cost in Invoice Crowd? Every paid monthly or yearly Invoice Crowd plan includes the AI Assistant and 100 AI credits each calendar month, used first and reset at the start of each month. A chat message is priced at 3 credits and a Create with AI proposal usually 5 to 15, and the panel shows the price before you send. For more, choose Buy Credits under Add-Ons & AI Credits in Billing and Plan; purchased credits never expire. Does the AI Assistant keep each business separate? Yes. Every answer and every proposed change is scoped to your account and the business profile that is active. Switching business profiles starts a fresh conversation, so information from one business never appears in another. Can I use Claude or ChatGPT with Invoice Crowd instead? Yes, on paid monthly and yearly plans. AI Connections let Claude, ChatGPT or another AI app that supports MCP read one of your businesses and prepare drafts and records from inside that app, and every change waits on the Integrations page until you approve it. The AI Assistant is the chat panel built into Invoice Crowd; AI Connections bring the AI app you already use. What is Ask AI, and how is it different from the AI Assistant? Ask AI is Invoice Crowd's built-in product guide. It answers how-to questions about features and helps you find your way around, for account owners and team members on every plan, without using AI credits. The AI Assistant works with your own records: it answers questions about your invoices, customers and expenses and prepares new records for you to confirm. Both open from the chat launcher at the bottom right, under How can we help? Let it do the looking up, and keep the last word Ask it about your customers, invoices and expenses, hand it a receipt, and confirm what it proposes. Invoicing, expense tracking and the chart of accounts work the same whether or not you ever open it. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Peppol E-Invoicing URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/peppol-e-invoicing/ Create Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 e-invoices as UBL files for your Access Point, and import supplier UBL invoices as draft bills in Invoice Crowd. E-invoicing Peppol e-invoicing, ready for your Access Point Invoice Crowd turns your sales invoices into Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 e-invoices in UBL 2.1 format, checks them before download, and hands you a file ready for the Peppol Access Point your business uses. Try Invoice Crowd Read the guide Home Features Peppol E-Invoicing Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 Works with your Access Point Supplier UBL import pop How it works Structured e-invoices, built from your data Invoice Crowd builds the e-invoice from the details you already keep and checks it before download. Your chosen Access Point delivers it across the Peppol network. Download and send Use the Access Point you already trust Build, check and download in one step Choose Download Peppol XML on a sales invoice, and Invoice Crowd builds the UBL file from your saved business, customer, tax, payment and total details. Built-in checks catch structural issues before you download. UBL 2.1 output Peppol BIS Billing 3 profile Checked before download Send through your own Access Point Upload the XML to the Access Point your business uses, and it delivers the invoice to your customer across the Peppol network. Any Access Point you choose No extra Invoice Crowd fee Network delivery by your provider Connected delivery Through your own Peppol.sh account Connect your Peppol.sh account Where connected delivery is available, enter the API key for your own Peppol.sh Personal account and choose your company from that workspace. Invoice Crowd encrypts the key and never displays it again. An optional delivery route Your own Peppol.sh account API key encrypted Every invoice sent exactly as written Connected delivery sends the complete UBL file with each invoice, and only once every detail carries across in full, so your customer receives exactly what you billed. Complete UBL attached Meaning preserved in full Refresh delivery status anytime Supplier UBL files Import supplier e-invoices as bills Turn a supplier file into a draft bill Upload a supplier's UBL file with Import UBL on Bills. Invoice Crowd checks it was addressed to your business and creates a draft bill for you to review. Draft first, posted by you Payment recorded when you choose Matched to your business Review before recording Every import is checked thoroughly, from the file itself to the receiver, the amounts and possible duplicates, so each bill arrives complete and ready for review. Created as a draft Duplicates detected You approve every bill Built in From invoice to e-invoice, done right The details that keep every Peppol invoice accurate, from the first line to delivery. Sales invoices Export any standard sales invoice as a Peppol e-invoice. Sales invoice Ready to export Format UBL 2.1 XML Profile BIS Billing 3 bal Invoice Crowd builds a true structured XML e-invoice, ready for automated processing. INV-2041 Invoice UBL 2.1 XML Structured data, ready to process Checks before download Built-in checks catch structural issues before the file leaves Invoice Crowd. #28c76f UBL structure Local check OK Parties and totals #ff9f43 Network validation Access Point Yours Peppol IDs on the customer Store each customer's Participant ID, Scheme ID and Endpoint ID on their record. Peppol EAS Scheme ID 0208 Peppol Endpoint ID 0123456789 Customer Lumen Architects Buyer reference Include your customer's buyer reference, kept separate from your own document numbers. PO-7781 Invoice number Kept separate Yes Tax per line Each line carries its own tax category, exactly as you set it. Line tax category Standard 21% Each line Its own category Exported Exactly as set Shipping as a line Add shipping as a line item so it carries its own tax category. Shipping Line item Tax category Its own Export Ready Add shipping as a taxed invoice line Discounts Apply discounts before tax so they carry into the e-invoice exactly. Line discount Supported Discount before tax E-invoice totals Exact Encrypted API key Your Peppol.sh API key is encrypted and never shown in full. Connected provider Peppol.sh Personal API key Encrypted Shown back Never in full Delivery status Refresh a connected invoice's delivery status whenever you need it. Sent via Peppol Refresh Any time Status From provider Delivery status on demand Supplier bill import Import a supplier's UBL file and review it as a draft bill. Supplier.xml UBL file Import UBL Bills BILL-0039 Draft Waits as a draft for your review Access Point flexibility Use a downloaded UBL file with the Access Point your business chooses, or connect your own Peppol.sh account where available. File exchange #4941e3 Your Access Point #0ea5e9 File exchange is on by default live Questions Peppol E-Invoicing, answered How does Invoice Crowd work with Peppol? Invoice Crowd creates your Peppol e-invoice as a UBL file, checks it and gets it ready for the Access Point your business uses, which delivers it across the Peppol network. Where connected delivery is available, you can also send through your own Peppol.sh Personal account. What do I need to send Peppol e-invoices? Just your Access Point. Download the UBL XML from the invoice and upload it through the Access Point you choose, with no extra Invoice Crowd account, fee or key to set up. How does optional connected delivery work? Where connected delivery is available, enter the API key for your own Peppol.sh Personal account, choose your company and send standard sales invoices straight from Invoice Crowd. Your Peppol.sh account handles onboarding, verification and network delivery. How do I bring in supplier e-invoices? Upload the supplier's UBL file with Import UBL on Bills. A valid document addressed to your business becomes a draft bill, ready for you to review and record. Which documents are supported? Standard sales invoices export as Peppol UBL files, and supplier UBL files import as draft bills. How do I cancel an invoice sent through Peppol? Void it. The invoice keeps its number, is marked Void and is reversed in your books. Agree any correction with your customer through your Access Point process. Get ready for e-invoicing Download your first Peppol e-invoice, send it through your Access Point, and keep invoicing the way you already do. Read the Peppol guide --- ## Zapier Automation URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/zapier/ Connect Invoice Crowd to Zapier: 6 triggers and 6 actions for customers, items, income, expenses, invoices and estimates. Invoices arrive as drafts. Zapier integration Automate Invoice Crowd with Zapier Connect Invoice Crowd to Zapier using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. A Zap can start when a customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate is added, or create those records from the other apps in your Zaps. Try Invoice Crowd Explore triggers and actions Home Features Zapier 6 triggers 6 actions Invoices arrive as drafts pop How it works How a Zap uses Invoice Crowd A Zap starts with a trigger and runs one or more actions. Invoice Crowd can sit at either end: the trigger that starts the Zap, or the action that saves a record in the business you chose. Connect Invoice Crowd Owner sign-in, revocable Connect your Invoice Crowd account in Zapier When Zapier asks for an Invoice Crowd connection, sign in with the account owner's email and password, add an authenticator code if two-factor sign-in is on, and choose the business. The connection lasts 90 days and appears under Connected Apps on your Integrations page, with when it was last used and a Revoke button. Owner email, password and authenticator code Choose the business to use Revoke it under Connected Apps Choose a trigger Runs on your Zapier schedule Start a Zap from a new Invoice Crowd record Use a new customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate to start the Zap. Zapier checks for new records on your Zapier plan's schedule. Add a Filter step to carry on only when a record matches, or Paths to branch. 6 triggers available Checked on your Zapier schedule Works with Filter and Paths steps Add an action Creates drafts for your review Create Invoice Crowd records from a Zap Add a customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate from an earlier step and map its fields. Invoice Crowd checks the required information, works out document totals itself and saves invoices and estimates as drafts, so nothing reaches your customer until you send it. 6 actions available Map fields from earlier steps Invoices and estimates saved as drafts Available triggers and actions 6 triggers and 6 actions for your Zaps Each trigger starts a Zap when a record is added in Invoice Crowd. Each action creates a record from an earlier step. Here is a typical use for each. New customer trigger Start a Zap when a customer is added, for example to add them to your email marketing list. Customer added Invoice Crowd New customer Trigger Next step Your workflow Picked up on your plan's check interval New item trigger Start a Zap when a product or service is added, for example to keep a price-list spreadsheet current. #6366f1 Website design Service $6,400.00 #14b8a6 Brand workshop $950.00 #f59e0b Web hosting $45.00 New invoice trigger Start a Zap when an invoice is created, for example to post a note in your team chat. INV-2048 KA #10b981 Kestrel Analytics $2,400.00 Created pri info ok New invoice, found on the next check New estimate trigger Start a Zap when an estimate is created, for example to open a deal in your CRM. EST-01053 New estimate New income trigger Start a Zap when income is recorded (New Other Income in Zapier), for example to log it in a cash-flow spreadsheet. Invoice: INV-2040 $4,800.00 Workshop fee New income found 2 records bal New expense trigger Start a Zap when an expense is recorded, for example to alert whoever approves spending. Figma plan Office Expense €540.00 AWS hosting Utilities $312.40 Rail travel Travel €186.50 Create customer action Add a customer when a lead form is submitted or a CRM deal is won. Customer Name Mapped Email Currency USD Create item action Add a product or service item when one is added to another catalog. Name Rate Item type Create invoice action Create a draft invoice from a won deal or a completed order, ready for you to review and send. Customer UX design · 12 × $120 $1,440.00 Invoice created INV-2049 Create estimate action Create a draft estimate from a quote request form. Form entry Your app Map fields Customer, items EST-01054 Create income action Record income from a sale made in another tool (Create Other Income in Zapier). Title Amount Income Recorded Create expense action Record an expense from a receipt or card transaction logged elsewhere. Category live Questions Zapier automation, answered Does Invoice Crowd work with Zapier? Yes. You connect through Zapier using your Invoice Crowd sign-in, and Zaps can use 6 Invoice Crowd triggers (a new customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate) and 6 actions that create those same records. What happens to an invoice a Zap creates? It is saved as an editable draft in the business the Zap uses, with totals worked out by Invoice Crowd. Nothing is emailed to your customer, so you review and send it from Invoice Crowd. How do I connect Invoice Crowd to Zapier? When Zapier asks you to connect an Invoice Crowd account, sign in with the owner's email and password, add an authenticator code if you use two-factor sign-in, and choose the business. Only the account owner can connect. How quickly do Invoice Crowd triggers run? Zapier checks Invoice Crowd for new records on your Zapier plan's schedule and starts the Zap as soon as it finds one. How long does the Zapier connection last? 90 days, after which you reconnect Invoice Crowd in Zapier. Connected Apps on your Integrations page shows the connection, when it was last used and when it expires, and lets you revoke it. Changing your Invoice Crowd password also disconnects it. Which Invoice Crowd plans work with Zapier? Every plan, including the free plan. A customer a Zap creates counts toward your plan's customer limit, just like one you add by hand. Can I connect an account that uses two-factor authentication? Yes, with a code from your authenticator app or a recovery code. If your two-factor sign-in uses email codes, switch on an authenticator app in Security Settings before connecting. Can I filter or branch a Zap on Invoice Crowd data? Yes. Invoice Crowd passes the record's fields to Zapier, so a Filter step can continue only for, say, invoices in one currency, and Paths can treat new customers and new estimates differently. Start automating Invoice Crowd with Zapier Connect Invoice Crowd in Zapier, pick a trigger or action, map your fields and test the Zap before you turn it on. Review all integrations --- ## Pabbly Connect Automation URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/pabbly/ Connect Invoice Crowd to Pabbly Connect: start workflows from new records or create them, with picklists from your account and tax-ready expenses. Pabbly Connect integration Automate Invoice Crowd with Pabbly Connect Connect Invoice Crowd to Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. A workflow can start from a new customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate, or create those records from other apps, using picklists of your own customers, categories and accounts. Try Invoice Crowd Explore triggers and actions Home Features Pabbly Connect Triggers and actions Picklists from your account Expenses with tax pop How it works How a Pabbly Connect workflow uses Invoice Crowd A workflow starts with a trigger step and runs action steps after it. Invoice Crowd can supply the trigger, receive the action, or both, and every record lands in the business you picked when you connected. Connect Invoice Crowd Valid for 90 days Add the Invoice Crowd connection in Pabbly Connect Pabbly Connect asks for the account owner's Invoice Crowd email and password, plus an authenticator or recovery code if two-factor sign-in is on, and the business to use. The connection is valid for 90 days. Changing your Invoice Crowd password ends it, and Connected Apps on your Integrations page lets you revoke it sooner. Connected by the account owner Choose the business to use Revoke anytime Add a trigger step Runs on Pabbly Connect's schedule Start a workflow from a new Invoice Crowd record Pick a trigger for a new record, such as a new customer, invoice or expense. Pabbly Connect checks Invoice Crowd for new records and passes their fields to the next step, where a Router can branch the workflow or a Filter can narrow it. Triggers for new records Record fields ready to map Use Router and Filter steps after it Add an action step Values from your own lists Create records with values Invoice Crowd supplies Action steps create a customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate. Pabbly Connect can load your customers, categories, payment accounts, templates and payment methods as picklists, so mapped values are ones your account already uses, and an expense can carry your purchase tax. 6 actions available Picklists loaded from your account Expenses tax inclusive or exclusive Available triggers and actions Triggers and actions for Pabbly Connect workflows Triggers fire when a record is added in Invoice Crowd; actions create one from an earlier step. Each card shows a way to use it in a workflow. New customer trigger Fires when a customer is added. Send them to a mailing list or a welcome sequence. Customer added Invoice Crowd New customer Trigger Next step Your workflow Found on Pabbly Connect's next poll New item trigger Fires when a product or service item is added. Push it to your online store or price sheet. #6366f1 Website design Service $6,400.00 #14b8a6 Brand workshop $950.00 #f59e0b Web hosting $45.00 New invoice trigger Fires when an invoice is created. A Router step can send large invoices one way and small ones another. INV-2048 KA #10b981 Kestrel Analytics $2,400.00 Created pri info ok Passed to the next workflow step New estimate trigger Fires when an estimate is created. Log it in a sales tracker or alert the account manager. EST-01053 New estimate New income trigger Fires when income is recorded. Copy it to a bookkeeping sheet or dashboard. Invoice: INV-2040 $4,800.00 Workshop fee New income found 2 records bal New expense trigger Fires when an expense is recorded. Filter by category and notify whoever approves spending. Figma plan Office Expense €540.00 AWS hosting Utilities $312.40 Rail travel Travel €186.50 Create customer action Creates a customer, with the currency and business picked from lists Invoice Crowd provides. Customer Name Mapped Email Currency USD Create item action Creates a product or service item with its rate and category. Name Rate Item type Create invoice action Creates a draft invoice for a customer, with the template and payment methods you choose. Customer UX design · 12 × $120 $1,440.00 Invoice created INV-2049 Create estimate action Creates a draft estimate from form or booking data, ready for you to review. Form entry Your app Map fields Customer, items EST-01054 Create income action Records income against an income category and payment account. Title Amount Income Recorded Create expense action Records an expense with its category, payment account and, if you like, purchase tax. Category live Questions Pabbly Connect automation, answered Does Invoice Crowd work with Pabbly Connect? Yes. You connect through Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. A workflow can start from a new customer, item, income, expense, invoice or estimate, and action steps can create any of those six records. Which lists can I pick from when mapping fields? Pabbly Connect can load your customers (searchable), business profiles, currencies, countries, invoice templates, payment methods, item, income and expense categories and payment accounts from Invoice Crowd, so you pick valid values instead of typing IDs. Payment method lists never include your gateway keys. Can an expense created in Pabbly Connect include tax? Yes. The create expense action accepts your purchase tax rates and whether the amount includes tax, and the tax is booked as it would be from the Expense form: recoverable tax to Input Tax Credit, the rest in the expense cost. How quickly does Pabbly Connect pick up new records? Pabbly Connect checks Invoice Crowd for new records on its regular schedule and starts your workflow when it finds one. How many records can a workflow create per minute? By default, up to 30 per connection and 60 across all of your connections each minute, with up to 120 reads a minute. That keeps a looping workflow from flooding your books. Do customers created by a workflow count toward my plan? Yes. Pabbly Connect works on every Invoice Crowd plan, including the free plan, and a customer created from Pabbly Connect counts toward your plan's customer limit, the same as one you add by hand. How do I disconnect Pabbly Connect? Open Integrations from your avatar menu and revoke the connection under Connected Apps, where you can also see when it was last used and when it expires. Connections last 90 days, and changing your Invoice Crowd password ends them too. Will a workflow email my customers? You decide when anything is sent. Invoices and estimates arrive as drafts for you to review and send, and records created through Pabbly Connect send no emails and trigger no webhooks. Start automating Invoice Crowd with Pabbly Connect Connect Invoice Crowd in Pabbly Connect, add a trigger or action step, map fields from the lists it loads, and run a test before you turn the workflow on. Review all integrations Invoices arrive as drafts Choose your business --- ## AI Connections URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/ai-connections/ Let Claude, ChatGPT or another MCP app read one business and prepare drafts in Invoice Crowd. Every change waits for your approval in the app. Features Connect Claude or ChatGPT to your books, and approve every change AI Connections let Claude, ChatGPT or another AI app that supports MCP read one of your businesses and prepare drafts, records and payments. Nothing the AI prepares is saved until you approve it in Invoice Crowd with your password, plus your authenticator code when two-factor sign-in is on. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home AI Connections Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP apps One business per connection You approve every change pop How it works Your AI app asks, Invoice Crowd checks, you decide The AI app connects with your Invoice Crowd sign-in and works with the business you pick. It can read at once. Anything it wants to create, change, send or pay becomes a request that waits on your Integrations page. Connecting Sign in, pick a business, allow access Add Invoice Crowd to Claude or ChatGPT Open How to Connect on the Integrations page and copy the Connection Address. In Claude, add it as a custom connector; in ChatGPT, create a connector with it. Your AI app then opens Invoice Crowd's own Allow Access page, where you sign in, choose one business and allow access. Your password never goes to the AI app. Step-by-step setup for Claude and ChatGPT Copy Setup Prompt for Claude Code, Cursor, VS Code and Windsurf Up to five connected apps Choose what each app can do A new connection can read customers, items and documents. Change Access adds the areas you allow: draft sales documents, draft purchase documents, customers and vendors, items, expenses and incomes, time and projects, payments, and sending. Every access change asks for your password, plus your authenticator code when two-factor sign-in is on. Each area is opt-in Sending is a separate area, off by default Revoke Access stops an app at once Reading and preparing Reads at once, changes wait Ask about your business in your AI app The AI app can look up customers, vendors, items, taxes, invoices, estimates, bills, purchase orders, expenses, projects and categories, and ask for Profit and Loss, receivables ageing, a financial summary or one customer's balance. The figures come from the same reports you see in the app, and it reads only the business you approved. It can also read a complete invoice, with every line, tax and total, so an accounting connector in the same AI app can create the matching invoice in QuickBooks or Xero. Read access is granted when you connect Live figures from your reports Each invoice comes with the link your customer sees Reports Let it prepare the work The AI app can prepare draft invoices, estimates, credit notes, bills and purchase orders and edits to them, recurring invoices, proposals, customers, vendors, items, expenses, incomes, projects and their tasks, time entries, and payments received or made. Invoice Crowd checks each one with the same rules as its own screens, and nothing is saved while it waits for you. Same validation as the app's own forms Requests expire after 15 minutes It can never delete anything Design proposals from your AI app Grant Create and Edit Proposal Designs and your AI app can prepare a complete, multi-page proposal from your designs, or edit one you already have, and you review it page by page before you approve it. Create and Edit Proposal Templates and Sections adds reusable templates and sections to your library, and Configure Proposal Review and Signing sets up who reviews and signs. Page-by-page preview before you approve Templates and sections for your library Reviewed in Invoice Crowd before saving Approving Review, then Approve Review each request before it is saved Requests Awaiting Approval lists what your AI apps prepared, with the amount and when it expires. Review opens the request exactly as it will be saved: the lines, taxes and totals, and Now beside After Approval for an edit. Approve saves it with your password or authenticator code; Cancel Request saves nothing and tells the AI app. Approving saves exactly what you reviewed Changed requests are prepared fresh A failed save leaves your books unchanged Sending always waits for you With Send access, an AI app can ask to mark an invoice as sent, email an invoice, estimate, credit note or proposal to your customer's saved addresses, or email your Profit and Loss to someone such as your accountant. Each one shows the recipients, subject and message, and the email goes only when you choose Approve and Send. Never saved or sent without your approval Up to 10 recipients per email Sent through your normal email limits Built in The rules behind every connection What a connection can reach, how long it lasts, and how you stay in control. One business each Each connection works with the business you chose when you allowed access. Connect again to work with another business. Sign in Invoice Crowd Pick a business Northwind Studio Allow Access For this business Connect again for another business Owner-controlled Only the account owner can connect apps, approve requests and change access. Account owner Approves bal Team members No access Portal users Your chats stay private Invoice Crowd keeps only the records you approve, with a history that names the AI app. Your AI conversations stay with your AI app. AI conversations Stay in your AI app Approved records Saved in Record history App named Automatically Save Eligible New Records Optionally, new draft invoices, estimates and purchase orders, proposals, customers, vendors and items save without a review. Edits, expenses, incomes, time, payments and sending always wait. New draft invoices Bills and credit notes Wait Edits, money and time Sending Always waits Stays signed in while in use A connection stays signed in while you use it. After seven idle days, simply connect it again. In use Stays signed in 7 days unused Reconnect Needed Connect again From your AI app Connection keys For AI tools that prefer a key, Create Connection Key makes one for one business. It is shown once and expires after 90 days or when you change your password. Copy Setup Prompt Copied Create Connection Key Shown once · 90 days In your books like the app An approved draft is saved through the same path as the invoice editor, so marking it as sent adds it to your books the usual way. Approve Draft saved Mark as Sent Added to books Same path As the editor Included on paid plans AI Connections are included on paid monthly and yearly plans. Monthly plan Included Yearly plan Works with Claude, ChatGPT live Questions AI Connections, answered Which AI apps can connect to Invoice Crowd? Claude and ChatGPT, with step-by-step setup on the Integrations page, and other AI apps and coding tools that support the Model Context Protocol (MCP), such as Claude Code, Cursor, VS Code and Windsurf. Apps that sign in use Invoice Crowd's own Allow Access page; tools that prefer a key can use a connection key instead. Can an AI app change my books without me? Only with your approval. Reads answer at once, while every change the AI app prepares waits under Requests Awaiting Approval until you approve it with your password, plus your authenticator code when two-factor sign-in is on. The one exception is your choice: Automatically Save Eligible New Records lets new draft invoices, estimates and purchase orders, proposals, customers, vendors and items save straight away. Bills and credit notes, which reach your books when saved, edits, expenses, incomes, time, payments, marking as sent and emails always wait. Can an AI app send invoices or emails to my customers? Yes, with the separate Send access and your approval of each email. It can ask to email an invoice, estimate, credit note or proposal to the customer's saved addresses, mark an invoice as sent, or email your Profit and Loss. The review shows the recipients, subject and message before you choose Approve and Send. Can an AI app create proposals in Invoice Crowd? Yes. With Create and Edit Proposal Designs, Claude, ChatGPT or another MCP app can prepare a complete multi-page proposal from your designs, or edit an existing one, and the request opens in Invoice Crowd as a page-by-page preview before you approve it with your password or authenticator code. Create and Edit Proposal Templates and Sections lets it save templates and sections to your library, and Configure Proposal Review and Signing sets up reviewers and signers. Each is a separate area you switch on under Change Access. Does Invoice Crowd store my AI conversations? Your conversations stay with your AI app, under that app's own terms. Invoice Crowd saves only the records you approve, and their history names the AI app that prepared them. Which plans include AI Connections? Paid plans billed monthly or yearly include AI Connections, and the Integrations page links straight to your plan options. How many AI apps can I connect, and how do I disconnect one? Up to five, connection keys included, and each works with one business. Revoke Access on the Integrations page stops an app at once. Changing your Invoice Crowd password also ends every connection. How is this different from the AI Assistant? The AI Assistant is the chat panel built into Invoice Crowd, running on AI credits. AI Connections let an AI app you already use, such as Claude or ChatGPT, work with your Invoice Crowd data from that app, with every change approved in Invoice Crowd. Can an AI app move my invoices into QuickBooks or Xero? Yes. Connect Invoice Crowd and your QuickBooks or Xero connector in the same AI app, and it can read each complete invoice, with every line, tax and total, and create the matching invoice in your accounting company. The Integrations page explains how to ask it to check the totals and get your confirmation before it creates anything, and Invoice Crowd charges no AI credits for these reads. To move invoices without an AI app, select them on the Invoices list and choose Export to QuickBooks / Xero. Bring your AI app to your books, and keep the last word Connect Claude or ChatGPT from the Integrations page, choose a business and what the app may do, then review each request before it is saved. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Developer API URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/developer-api/ Read customers, items and documents from Invoice Crowd and create drafts, expenses and time entries from your own software with an API key. Features Build on Invoice Crowd with a secure Developer API Give your own software secure, scoped access to one business. Read customers, items, vendors, projects, taxes and documents over a clean REST API, and create customers, items, draft invoices and estimates, draft bills and purchase orders, expenses and time entries with exactly the access you grant. Sending and payments stay in your hands. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Developer API Read-only or read-and-create keys Scoped to one business Sending and payments stay with you pop How it works Keys you control, a scope you choose Create a key on the Integrations page, choose its business and what it can do, and share it with your developer. You stay in control and can revoke any key at any time. Creating a key Created by the owner, confirmed with your password Create a key in seconds Name the key, choose its business and what it can do, then confirm with your password, plus your authenticator code when two-factor sign-in is on. The key is shown once, so store it somewhere safe, such as a password manager. Copy Setup Prompt hands your AI coding tool the address and key in one paste. Up to five keys 90-day keys you can renew Ends when your password changes Read-only or read-and-create access A Read Only key reads customers, items, vendors, projects and documents. Read and Create Records adds exactly the records you tick: Customers and Items, Draft Invoices and Estimates, Draft Bills and Purchase Orders, Expenses, and Time Entries. Need broader access later? Create a new key with the scope you want. Choose each kind of record See every key's access at a glance Revoke any key instantly Reading and creating Same rules as the app Read your business data securely Read the business's details, customers, items, vendors, projects, taxes and expense categories, and list or open invoices, estimates, bills and purchase orders. Results arrive as paged JSON, 25 rows at a time, and every key is scoped to its own business. JSON over HTTPS Paged results, 25 rows each Create records with built-in validation New records pass the same checks as Invoice Crowd's own forms. Invoices, estimates, bills and purchase orders arrive as drafts, ready for you to review and send. Expenses post to your books just like the Add Expense form, and time entries are logged on an existing project. Each record is saved the moment the request succeeds. Documents arrive as drafts Invalid requests save nothing Works within your plan's allowances Expense tracking Built for developers Reference, retries and usage A clear API Reference, built in The API Reference, opened from the Integrations page, gives your developer the base URL, authentication and a quick start, plus an OpenAPI file for their tools. Errors return JSON with a stable code and a plain-language message that explains the next step. OpenAPI file included Stable error codes One Authorization header to authenticate Idempotent requests and clear usage Every create carries an Idempotency-Key, so a retried request returns the original result instead of a duplicate. All your keys share one monthly request allowance, shown as Requests This Month on the Integrations page, and every response reports the requests remaining and the reset date. Retries never create duplicates One shared monthly allowance Resets each calendar month Built in Everything your integration needs Sync records from your own software with confidence. Sending documents and collecting payments stay in Invoice Crowd, under your control. Customers and items Read your customers and items, and create new ones from a CRM, a form or a product catalog. GET /customers Read GET /items POST /customers Create in POST /items Draft invoices and estimates Create drafts with lines priced by Invoice Crowd, ready for you to review and send from the app. INV-2044 HV #6366f1 Harbor & Vine Co. $6,184.50 Created ok Draft draft Nothing is sent Draft bills and purchase orders Create vendor bills and purchase orders as drafts from your purchasing or inventory software. Your software POST /bills Saved as draft Nothing sent You review In Invoice Crowd Expenses Record expenses with their category and payment account, posted to your books like the Add Expense form. Figma subscription $45.00 Category Software Paid From Checking bal Time entries Log time on an existing project from your own time tracker. #14b8a6 Website redesign 10/09/2026 3.5 h 10/10/2026 2 h Brand refresh 1.5 h You stay in control Sending documents, recording payments and changing or deleting existing records stay in Invoice Crowd, with you. Send #4941e3 Record payment Delete Edit existing Change settings Stays with you in Invoice Crowd Owner-managed keys Only the account owner can create, renew and revoke keys. Account owner Manages keys Team members No access Portal users Included on paid plans The Developer API is included on paid monthly and yearly plans. Monthly plan Included Yearly plan Keys managed by live Questions Developer API, answered Does Invoice Crowd have an API? Yes. The Developer API gives your own software secure access to one business with an API key. It reads your data and creates the records you allow: customers, items, draft invoices and estimates, draft bills and purchase orders, expenses and time entries. Keys are created on the Integrations page. Will the API send anything to my customers? Only you send documents to customers. Invoices and estimates created through the API arrive as drafts that you review and send from Invoice Crowd, and payments, deletions and edits to existing records stay in the app. Which plans include the Developer API? Paid plans billed monthly or yearly include the Developer API. Your monthly request allowance appears on the Integrations page as Requests This Month. How long does an API key last? Each key lasts 90 days, and you can renew it from its menu for another 90 days with the same access. Revoking a key or changing your Invoice Crowd password ends it at once, and you can hold up to five keys. What happens if my software retries a request? Nothing is duplicated. Every create carries an Idempotency-Key header, so sending the same key and body again returns the original result instead of creating a second record. Reusing a key with a different body is rejected. How is the Developer API different from Zapier, Pabbly Connect or AI Connections? Zapier and Pabbly Connect connect Invoice Crowd to other apps without code. AI Connections let Claude or ChatGPT prepare changes that you approve. The Developer API is for your own software, with a key you control and records saved straight away within the access you chose. Can Invoice Crowd notify my software when a record changes? Yes, with webhooks. On the Integrations page, add a webhook URL and choose events such as Invoice Updated, Customer Created or Expense Created, and Invoice Crowd posts signed JSON to your HTTPS address each time one happens. The API reads and creates records when your software asks; webhooks tell your software the moment something changes. Connect your own software to Invoice Crowd Create an API key on the Integrations page, choose its business and access, and share the API Reference with your developer. Compare plans No card required to start Your data stays yours Cancel anytime --- ## Teams URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/teams/ Invite team members, assign reusable roles, choose business profiles and customers, and control sensitive Invoice Crowd actions. Collaboration Team roles that give everyone the right access Invite your team and give each person exactly the access their work needs, with reusable roles, permissions by area, business profile assignments and optional customer restrictions. Team seats are included on the Team and Business plans. Explore the workflow See all features Home Features Teams Reusable permission roles Access by business and customer Sensitive actions protected pop How it works From invitation to the right access Access is built from roles, business profiles and customer assignments, so each person sees exactly what their work needs. Invite the right person Invitations are tied to an email address and expire if unused. Secure, email-matched invitations Invite a team member and they receive a time-limited join link. Their access starts once they accept with the email address you invited. Pending until accepted Matched to the invited email Invite can be resent or revoked Team seats at a glance The Team page shows how many seats your plan includes and how many are in use, and when every seat is taken, Invite explains how to add more. A pending invitation holds a seat, and a declined, removed or blocked invitation frees it again. Seats checked before you invite Seats used are visible Seats freed automatically Shape the role Turn each job into a reusable set of permissions. Named roles with fine-grained permissions On the Team page's Roles tab, build roles area by area, with permissions such as full access, create, edit, delete, export, share and schedule wherever they apply. Reusable roles Per-area access Sensitive actions granted separately Secure by default Every area and sensitive action needs an explicit permission, so a role opens only what you have granted. Explicit permissions per area Extra protection for sensitive actions Billing stays with the owner Focus each person's work Roles set what people can do; assignments set which businesses and customers they work with. Assign business profiles Choose one or more business profiles for each team member, and they work within those businesses day to day. Selected business profiles A clear active business Switch between assigned businesses Limit access to selected customers Give a member access to all customers in their assigned businesses, or focus them on a selected set when the work calls for it. All or selected customers Update a member's customers anytime Remove access in one step Built in Every team control in one place Everything you need to bring a team in with confidence, from invitations to owner-only areas. Member invitations Invite by name and email with a secure, time-limited link. Invite Elena Ruiz Pending Email link Accepted Same email The join link is time-limited Create roles once and apply them to any number of members. PN #6366f1 ML #14b8a6 ER #f59e0b Priya Nair Project Manager Marcus Lee Designer Accountant Module permissions Choose which product areas each role can open. Invoices Edit Customers Create Accounting Export Action permissions Set create, edit, delete, export, share and schedule permissions wherever they apply. Create · Edit Reports Export · Share Delete Off bal Sensitive actions Protect high-impact actions with permissions granted separately from everyday access. #ea5455 Send invoices Sensitive Post journals Integrations Business assignments Choose which business profiles a member may work within. Northwind Studio Northwind Digital #0ea5e9 Brightpath Media Meridian Creative #ec4899 Priya: 2 of 6 profiles Customer restrictions Allow all customers or focus a member on a selected few. Only selected customers On Harbor & Vine Co. Allowed Kestrel Analytics Owner-only areas Billing and Plan, Integrations and the owner's own account stay with the owner. Billing Owner only Team member No access Team seats The Team plan includes two team members and the Business plan three. Solo · Pro 0 seats Team 2 seats Business 3 seats Resend invitation Send a pending invitation again with one click. elena@northwindstudio.co Resend Invited pri warn Resent info Still pending until she accepts Revoke access Removing a team member ends their access and keeps your business data intact. Records Kept Access ends, business data stays Protected roles System roles and roles in use are protected from deletion, so every member keeps a working role. Predefined Assigned · 1 Both roles Protected live Questions Teams, answered Can I limit a team member to one business? Yes. Assign a team invitation to selected business profiles, and the member works within those businesses. Can I restrict a member to selected customers? Yes. Give a member access to all customers, or limit them to a selected list for a more focused workload. How do team invitations work? You invite a team member by name and email, and they receive a time-limited link. Access begins once they accept with the invited email address, and you can resend or revoke a pending invitation at any time. Is there a checklist for adding my first team member? Yes. Until your first member joins, the Team page shows a progress circle beside its title that opens Get Started with Your Team, with two steps: Invite a Member, then Member Joins once they accept from their invitation email. Invite Member opens the same Invite panel, where you set their role, permissions and business access. What stays with the account owner? Billing and Plan, Integrations and Lock Transactions stay with the account owner, so team members can focus on their day-to-day work. Can team members use the AI Assistant? Yes, to ask questions about the records their access covers. Only the account owner can confirm the changes the assistant proposes, such as creating an invoice or a customer. Team members also have Ask AI, the built-in product guide, for help with any feature. Can a team member approve other people's timesheets? Yes, if their role gives them full access to Timesheet, which makes them a timesheet manager. Team members log time and submit their week, and the owner or a timesheet manager approves it or sends it back; nobody approves their own week. Worklog and timesheets are part of the paid plans. Bring your team into Invoice Crowd Create a role, assign a business, invite your first team member, and expand access as your team grows. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Clear, reusable roles The owner stays in control --- ## Multi-Business URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/multi-business/ Invoice multiple businesses from one account, each with its own branding, taxes, currency, payment settings and reports. Business profiles Invoicing software for multiple businesses, with one subscription Run every business you own from one Invoice Crowd account. Each business profile carries its own company details, branding, documents, taxes, currency, payment settings, email and reports. Explore the workflow See all features Home Features Multi-Business Up to 10 business profiles Switch businesses from the top bar Separate settings per business pop How it works One account, every business you run Switch profiles and your documents, settings and reports follow, while each business keeps its own records. Create the identity Start with the details your customers and vendors see. Company details and branding Add the business name, contact details, address and logo, choose its document designs, and style the Customer Page your clients open. Business identity Logo and address Its own document designs Document and tax defaults Set each profile's currencies, taxes, payment terms and document preferences, so every new record starts with the right defaults. Currency defaults Tax configuration Payment terms and formats Operate in context The active business follows you through your work. Switch the active profile The business switcher in the top bar changes the active business, and its Show Amounts In row sets which currency the dashboard and lists use. Team members work in the profiles assigned to them. Always see the active business Assigned profiles for team members New records use the active business Every record in the right business Documents, accounts and reports stay with the business profile they belong to, so each business's activity is always clear. Customers assigned by business Sales and purchase documents Accounts and reports per business Configure delivery A business identity includes how documents are sent and how customers can pay. Email and reminder settings Give each profile its own sending identity, templates and reminder schedule. Its own sender Document templates Reminder schedule Payments and localization Choose the payment gateways, currencies, language and regional settings that suit each business and its customers. Default Payment Options Language and locale Currency and tax context Built in What belongs to a business profile Everything that lets each business run as its own brand. Profiles by plan Your plan sets how many business profiles you can run, up to ten. Basic · Solo 1 profile Pro 2 profiles Team 5 profiles Business 10 profiles bal Active profile The active business is always visible, so you know exactly where you are working. NS #6366f1 ND #0ea5e9 HL #14b8a6 PP #16a34a BM #f59e0b +1 Northwind Studio Current Brightpath Media Set Current MC #ec4899 Meridian Creative Store company, address, contact and logo details for each profile. Business Logo BM.png Company Name Visible Address London, UK Document defaults Set payment terms, date and currency formats for each business. Payment Terms Net 30 Date Format MM/DD/YYYY Currency Format $ ###,###.## Currencies Set each business's base and document currencies. Northwind Studio · USD Northwind Digital · USD Harbor Lane · CAD Pixel & Pine · CAD Brightpath Media · GBP Meridian Creative · AUD One accounting currency each Taxes Keep each business's tax rates and settings with that business. Sales Tax 8.5% VAT 20% GST 10% Customers and vendors Work with customers and vendors in the right business context. AL #10b981 Atlas Legal LLP Customer VC Verde Coffee PN Printhouse North Vendor Sales documents Create proposals, estimates and invoices for the active business. INV-0214 £2,400.00 Draft pri Sent info Paid ok Raised by Brightpath Media Purchases Record purchase orders, bills, expenses and payments under the right business. BILL-0038 £1,240.00 PO-0012 £860.00 Expense Rail travel £86.40 Payment gateways Choose which connected gateway accounts each profile offers by default, with optional gateway fees. Brightpath · Stripe GBP #635bff Brightpath · PayPal #003087 Northwind · Stripe USD Northwind · Square #111111 Set per business profile Email settings Set the sender, templates and reminders for each business. SMTP Host Custom Gmail Connected Invoice Reminder On Reporting Run accounting and business reports for each profile. Total Revenue £84,200 Brightpath up Expenses £31,900 This year Net Profit £52,300 62% live Questions Multi-Business, answered How many businesses can I add? Up to ten, depending on your plan: Basic and Solo include one business profile, Pro two, Team five and Business ten. The account owner adds new profiles. Can I choose which businesses a team member sees? Yes. Assign each team member to selected business profiles, and they work inside those businesses. Can each business have different payment settings? Yes. Each profile's Default Payment Options choose which connected gateway accounts its new invoices offer, with optional gateway fees. How do I delete a business profile? Switch to another profile first, then delete it from Business Profiles by typing its name to confirm. Data that belongs only to that profile is removed and data shared with another profile is kept, so export anything you need beforehand. Run every business from one account Set up your first business profile with its branding, currency, taxes and payments, then add the next whenever you are ready. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Separate branding per business One login for every brand --- ## Localization URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/localization/ Run Invoice Crowd in eight languages and send customers invoices, pages and emails in theirs, with currency, tax and date formats per business. Global business Work in your language, invoice in your customer's Invoice Crowd runs in eight languages. Choose one for your own screens and another for the pages and emails your customers see, with currency, tax and date formats set for each business. Explore the workflow See all features Home Features Localization Eight interface languages A language for your customers Regional formats per business pop How it works One account, every audience Your team, your business and your customers can each work in the language that suits them, while amounts, taxes and dates stay exactly as you set them. Your workspace Choose your language from the top bar Work in your own language Pick English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Japanese, Russian or Korean from the language menu, and the interface switches with you. Eight languages Switch in one click The full interface translated Light or dark, in any language Choose a light or dark theme alongside your language, and change either one whenever you like. Light and dark themes Translated interface text Your data stays as entered Your customers Pages, emails and documents in their language Emails and pages in their language Set a customer language for the pages your clients open and the emails they receive, and choose the email language right in the send window. Customer page language Customer email language Chosen again for any send Labels in your own words Rename the labels on invoices and proposals, such as Bill To and Invoice Total, to match how you talk to clients. Quantities, rates, taxes and totals stay exactly as they are. Rename standard labels Figures unchanged Reusable business defaults Regional settings Currency, tax and date formats per business Currency, tax and dates Set the document currency, tax rates, date format and currency format for each business, so every invoice reads naturally in its market. Currency per document Your own tax rates Regional date formats Local payment gateways Connect regional favorites such as Razorpay, PayFast, M-Pesa and GoCardless alongside PayPal and Stripe, so customers pay the way they prefer. 15 payment gateways Regional and global providers Several on one invoice Built in Everything you need to sell across borders Language, currency, taxes, dates and payments, each set the way your market expects. Interface language Work in any of eight languages, from English to Japanese and Korean. English #3b82f6 French #6366f1 German #2b2c40 Portuguese #16a34a Spanish #ef4444 Japanese #ec4899 Russian #0ea5e9 Korean #8b5cf6 8 interface languages Always readable Any text without a translation shows in English, so every screen stays readable. Dashboard Tableau de bord Reports Rapports Untranslated text Shown in English bal Customer emails Choose the email language in the send window for each message you send. Customer UI Language Customer Email Language Backend UI Language Document labels Rename labels, or print a design's headings and column names in any of the eight languages. Bill To Client Invoice Total Total payable Amount €3,960.00 Settings per business Each business profile keeps its own language, currency and format settings. Date Format DD/MM/YYYY Currency Format ### ###,## $ Payment Terms Net 30 Document currency Bill in the customer's currency while your books stay in yours. Currency : Euro-EUR-€ INV-2044 total Accounting currency USD Exchange rate Every foreign-currency document shows the exchange rate it used. Amount in € Exchange Rate 1.0842 Exchange Amount in USD $4,293.43 Tax settings Define the tax rates each business needs, including GST. Sales Tax US 8.5% #14b8a6 VAT UK 20% #f59e0b GST Australia 10% Date formats Show dates in the format your customers expect. MM/DD/YYYY UK, FR YYYY-MM-DD ISO Same date, in your customer's format Currency formats Display amounts in the currency format that suits your market. $ ###,###,###.## $ 12,450.00 $ ###.###.###,## $ 12.450,00 ### ### ###,## $ 12 450,00 $ Regional gateways Offer local favorites like Razorpay, PayFast and M-Pesa alongside PayPal and Stripe. Razorpay · India #0c2451 PayFast · South Africa #e02a2a M-Pesa · Kenya #3aa935 PayTabs · Middle East #0a6ebd Telr · Middle East #0a7d52 GoCardless · bank debit #1c1b18 Check your provider's markets You stay in control Language changes how documents read, while tax treatment stays exactly as you configure it. Language How it reads Tax You configure Invoice Ready to send Tax stays exactly as you set it live Questions Localization, answered Which languages does Invoice Crowd support? Invoice Crowd's interface is available in eight languages: English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Japanese, Russian and Korean, and each language covers the full interface. Choose yours from the language selector in the top bar. Can customer documents use a different language? Yes. In the business profile's Languages settings, switch on Custom, then choose a Customer UI Language for the pages customers open and a Customer Email Language for the emails they receive, separate from your own Backend UI Language. These are set per business profile, and the send window also has an Email Language choice. The invoice itself follows its design's Document language: headings, standard labels and column names print in that language, while text you type stays as entered. Are PDFs and app messages translated too? Yes. Payment receipts sent to a customer use the business's customer language, statements and report PDFs are produced in the language of the person downloading them, and app messages appear in your own interface language. How do I set up taxes and formats for my region? In your business profile. Set the tax rates your business needs, the date format and the currency format, and new documents follow them. Each business profile keeps its own settings, so two businesses under one login can each fit their own market. Which payment gateways can my customers use? Invoice Crowd connects 15 payment gateways: PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack. Offer the ones your customers know best, side by side on the same invoice. Speak every customer's language Choose your languages, currency, taxes and date formats, then preview an invoice exactly as your customer will see it. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Cancel anytime --- ## Notifications URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/features/notifications/ Use Invoice Crowd bell and email notifications for invoices, estimates, proposals, projects, inventory, imports, subscriptions, and AI credits. Workflow awareness Notifications that turn business events into next steps Invoice Crowd notifications appear in the bell in the top bar and in a full notification center, each with its business, a link to the record and an unread marker you can clear with Mark All Read. Choose which events reach the bell, and have overdue invoices and expired estimates emailed to you as well. Explore the workflow See all features Home Features Notifications Context on every alert Unread markers at a glance Bell and email alerts pop How it works Know what changed and where to go Every notification shows what happened, which business it belongs to, when it happened and a link straight to the record, in the bell and the notification center alike. See the event Recent alerts in the bell, full history in the notification center. Clear, detailed alerts Each alert has its own icon and category, with the business, document and customer details that matter. Icon, category and title Business and customer details Time and unread status Unread markers and Mark All Read The notification center shows how many items are new, marks each unread item with a dot, and lets you mark one item or use Mark All Read. The bell panel's footer links to All Notifications and to Notification Settings. Full history Unread dot and new count Mark one or all read Open the right record One click from alert to record. Straight to the right record Click an alert to open the invoice, estimate, proposal, project, worklog, expense, inventory, import, subscription or AI credits it is about. Opens the right record Safe, in-app links Older notifications still open Older alerts stay clear Older notifications stay readable and useful, showing every detail that was recorded at the time. Older notifications stay readable Accurate details only Links to the right list Choose each channel Choose your alerts; the essentials stay on. Smart defaults, your choice Start with sensible defaults, then switch each event's bell alert on or off. Overdue invoices and expired estimates can also reach your inbox when you switch email on. Email for overdue and expired Bell on or off per event Emails only when you opt in Your alerts, marked read your way Each person sees their own notifications. An alert is marked read only when you deliberately open it or rest your pointer on it, so nothing slips past unnoticed. Personal to each user Read only when you mean it Nothing missed by accident Coverage Stay on top of every part of the business Alerts cover invoicing, estimates, proposals, projects, inventory, accounting, team activity and more. Invoices Know when an invoice is sent, viewed, paid or overdue, when a recurring invoice goes out, and when a payment needs review. #1769ff Invoice viewed INV-2041 Bell #28c76f Payment received INV-2040 #ea5455 Invoice overdue INV-2034 Bell, Email Estimates Know when an estimate is sent, viewed, accepted, declined or expired. Sent EST-01052 Viewed Kestrel Accepted Approved Expired estimates are flagged too Proposals Follow each proposal from sent and viewed to accepted, declined or expiring. Proposal sent Brand refresh Proposal accepted Proposal declined Site audit Projects Assignments, time entries, budgets, long-running timers, submitted and approved timesheets, and hours a client approved or disputed. Timesheet submitted Priya Nair #ff9f43 Budget warning 80% used Long-running timer 8 hours Worklogs Know when an invoice or estimate is created from logged work. 12 entries Invoice INV-2049 Created Worklog invoice created Inventory Get a bell alert when an item reaches its reorder point, once you switch it on in your inventory settings. Reorder point reached Business setting Opt-in Inventory tracking On Accounting Recurring income and expense entries, Questions for you about your books, and an alert whenever an entry needs fixing. Recurring expense created AWS hosting Recurring income created Retainer Next entry 11/01/2026 bal Team and portals Team, customer-portal and vendor-portal join events, and a customer stopping or restarting a recurring schedule. PN #6366f1 HV #14b8a6 PH #f59e0b Team member joined Customer joined portal Harbor & Vine Vendor joined portal Printhouse North Imports Know when an import finishes or needs your attention. customers.csv 128 rows Import Completed Notified Failures are flagged with what to fix Subscriptions Your subscription renewal reminder, plus timely alerts about customer subscriptions on your payment gateways. Plan Business Renews 10/15/2026 Subscription renewal AI credits A heads-up when your AI credits are running low. 42 left bad Alert Low Heads-up Early before you run out Alerts that clear themselves Overdue and payment-review alerts leave the bell once they are handled, and All Notifications keeps your recent history. Overdue · INV-2041 Paid Bell alert Cleared in All Notifications Kept live Questions Notifications, answered Where can I see my notifications? In the bell at the top of every page. It shows every unread alert plus everything from the last 7 days, and its footer links to All Notifications, the full notification center where new items are marked, and to Notification Settings through the gear. Mark All Read clears the unread markers. Can a notification open the affected record? Yes. Click a notification to open the invoice, estimate, proposal, project or other record it is about, or the list it belongs to. Can I choose Bell and Email separately? Yes, for overdue invoices and expired estimates, which can also be emailed to you once you switch email on. Every other event arrives in the bell, and Notification Settings, opened from the gear in the bell panel, lets you choose which ones. Are any notifications always on? Yes, a few that you should not miss: Accepted estimate not invoiced, Timer stopped automatically, Entry not saved, Customer subscriptions on paid gateways and Business SMTP not delivering. They always arrive in the bell, so you never miss them. Do alerts clear themselves once they are handled? Yes. In Invoice Crowd, an overdue-invoice alert clears itself once that invoice is paid or voided, and a Payment needs review alert clears once the payment has been handled, so the bell lists only what still needs you. When everything is done, the bell says You're all caught up. All Notifications keeps read alerts for 30 days and unread alerts for 90 days. Stay on top of what matters Start with the recommended bell alerts, and switch on email for overdue invoices and expired estimates when you want them in your inbox. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Recommended defaults 30-day free trial --- ## Invoice Crowd for Freelancers URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/freelancers/ Create estimates and proposals, send invoices, track expenses, accept eligible payments and keep client records together with Invoice Crowd. Invoicing and accounting software for freelancers, from quote to tax time Invoice Crowd is invoicing and accounting software for freelancers: the proposal, the invoice, the chase for the late one and the books sit in one account. Quotes convert, deposits are taken up front, retainers bill themselves, and the ledger keeps up. Start your 30-day Solo trial See pricing Home Use Cases Freelancers Quote, invoice, get paid Deposits and retainers built in Books without a bookkeeper pop What is inside Winning the work, then being paid for it A freelance month is a handful of quotes, a handful of invoices, and one client who has gone quiet. These are the parts that deal with each of them. Winning it The unbillable hours before the job starts Proposals the client signs in a browser Build the scope, the price and the terms into one document, then send a link the client signs without printing anything. There are 70+ proposal templates to start from, and the sections you rewrite for every job live in a content library, so a new quote is mostly assembly. E-signature, so nothing gets scanned back to you 70+ proposal templates as a starting point The sections you reuse kept in a content library Inside the proposal builder Estimates when a proposal is overkill Most freelance work needs a price and a date, not fifteen pages. Send an estimate the client approves and signs from the email link, let them remove the lines they do not need, and let them set a quantity where the amount is genuinely theirs to decide. Add a deposit and the client accepts and pays it in one step, and the estimate becomes the invoice. An expiry date stops an old price being accepted months later, and a client who says no can decline with a reason. Lines the client can remove before approving Quantities the client sets, where you allow it An approved estimate converts without retyping Estimates and approvals Being paid Money before the work, and money on a cycle A deposit before you open the file Ask for part of the fee up front and bill the rest on delivery, both against the same invoice, or break a long project into installments. Each gateway you connected shows a Pay button on the invoice, and the amount still owed drops as each payment clears instead of living in your inbox. Deposits, installments and partial payments PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer and eight more The invoice shows what is settled and what is left Split and partial payments Retainers that raise their own invoice A monthly retainer should not be a monthly chore. For a flat fee, set the amount, the cycle and the start date once and each period issues its own invoice on the same template and with the same payment options. When the retainer buys a set number of hours, the hours you log count against the month's allowance and any extra goes on the next invoice. Reminders handle the ones that drift. A flat fee on any cycle as a recurring invoice Hours included each month, extras billed next time Reminders and a late fee for anything overdue Retainers At tax time The week you would otherwise pay someone for Costs logged while you still remember them Record software, hardware, travel and workspace costs under the right expense category, with the receipt kept on the entry. Add the tax you paid and any tax you can reclaim is tracked separately. Each cost filed under the right category The receipt image stays on the entry Recurring expenses for the subscriptions you pay monthly Tracking expenses A profit and loss you did not assemble Every invoice sent and every cost recorded posts into a double-entry ledger, so the profit and loss, the balance sheet and the income report are current on the day someone asks for them. Export what your accountant wants rather than building a spreadsheet in the last week of the year. A chart of 148 accounts underneath the invoicing Profit and loss with a column per month Export to spreadsheet or PDF The accounting behind it One job, end to end How a piece of work moves through the account The same job passes through five screens and never gets retyped between them. Start on whichever document the client expects. Start either way proposal Send a proposal Scope, price and terms in one signable document, assembled from templates and the sections you keep in the content library. estimate Send an estimate A priced quote the client approves and signs, or adjusts where you allowed it, answered straight from the email. invoice It becomes an invoice Approval carries the same lines into an invoice, so the bill matches the version the client agreed to. payment The client settles it Deposit now and balance later if that is the deal, through a connected gateway. Reminders and late fees cover the slow ones. accounting The ledger records it Revenue, receivables and the payment post themselves, which is why the year-end figures need no assembly from you. Also included The rest of a one-person operation None of this is a separate app bolted onto the invoicing. It is in the same login, reading the same customer records. Client portal Clients sign in to see everything you have sent them, download it and pay it. Total Invoiced $18,400 6 invoices up Paid $14,200 5 invoices Outstanding $4,200 1 invoice bad Service packages Bundle the work you always sell together on a reusable payment link the client pays online. Copy Link Copied Two Step Verification 305918 New customer created Reminders and fees Overdue invoices get chased on a schedule. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. #6366f1 3 Days Before Reminder Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees 1.5% Overdue +$14.70 Multi-currency billing Bill an overseas client in their own currency and still read one total in yours. INV-1048 · Lumen Architects £3,000.00 Exchange rate 1 GBP = $1.2700 In your books $3,810.00 bal Timesheets for hourly work Log hours against a project, then bill the unbilled hours up to a date, rounded to 6, 15 or 30 minutes if you like. Paid plans. Hours logged this week 31h 45m Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Custom fields Add the fields your trade needs to a document and reuse them on the next one. Client PO PO-4410 Job number NW-118 Usage term 12 months Outbound webhooks Send invoice, customer, item, expense and income events to a webhook URL you choose, or connect through Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. Invoice updated #16a34a Pabbly Connect Your CRM #0ea5e9 Your sheet Free forever plan The free Basic plan covers everyday invoicing with PayPal. Recurring invoices, retainers, timesheets and the accounting statements need a paid plan, so compare limits on the Pricing page. Basic · Free Solo Pro Team #f59e0b Business #2b2c40 30-day trial #ec4899 Compare plans on the Pricing page Credit notes Issue a credit note against an invoice you overcharged, leaving the original document and its history intact. CN-00012 LA Lumen Architects · INV-1045 $480.00 Open info Apply to Invoice pri Closed ok The original invoice stays as it was Aged debt report Every unpaid invoice grouped by days past due, from Current to 91+ Days, so chasing starts with the oldest. Age Debt $4,180 Current 1-30 Days 31-60 Days 61-90 Days 91+ Days Saved items Keep the rates you quote most often as items, then drop them onto an estimate or invoice. Logo Logo design · Service $1,800.00 Logo refresh · Service $900.00 Logo animation · Service $650.00 Customer-facing invoice updates Email notifications tell the client an invoice has arrived, and you see when it is opened and viewed. Invoice sent Email Opened Email opened Viewed Link clicked Email plus the in-app bell Refunds A client cancels or pays twice? Refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice, with the credit note made for you. INV-1052 Lumen Architects · Stripe $600.00 Refund Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it Payments received Money that arrives before the invoice is recorded as an advance with its own receipt, then applied when you bill. One payment can also settle several open invoices, oldest first. Advance · Northwind $2,000.00 in Applied to INV-1061 −$1,500.00 Applied to INV-1064 −$500.00 Unused advance $0.00 AI Assistant Ask for this month's profit and loss, or type “log 3h on the Northwind logo yesterday”, in plain words. Nothing is saved until you confirm it. Paid plans, with AI credits. Ask Plain words Draft Time entry Confirm You approve Nothing is saved until you confirm live Questions Freelancing with Invoice Crowd, answered Can one person keep the books without a bookkeeper? Yes, that is what the ledger underneath is for. Invoices and expenses post themselves against a chart of 148 accounts, so profit and loss, the balance sheet and the income report stay current on their own. The statements export to spreadsheet or PDF when your accountant asks for the year. Can I ask for a deposit before starting work? Yes. Bill part of the fee up front and the rest on delivery against the same invoice, or split a long project into installments. Each payment is recorded against that document, so the amount still owed is always the difference rather than something you work out yourself. How do I bill a monthly retainer? For a flat monthly fee, create a recurring invoice with the amount, the cycle and the start date; every period raises its own invoice until you pause or stop it. If the retainer covers a set number of hours, use a retainer: logged hours count against the monthly allowance, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours go on the next invoice. Both need a paid plan. Can I invoice a client in another currency? Yes. The invoice goes out in the currency your client works in, while your reports total in the base currency you report in. GST-enabled invoices and custom tax rates cover the tax side, so an overseas job does not need a document built by hand. What does Invoice Crowd cost for one freelancer? The Basic plan is free forever: unlimited invoices, 5 customers, 1 business profile, 2 invoice templates and PayPal payments. Paid plans add recurring invoices, retainers, timesheets, the accounting statements and more, and each starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed. Current prices are on the Pricing page. Is there anything to install? No. Invoice Crowd runs in the browser at apps.invoicecrowd.com, so the laptop in a coffee shop and the desktop at home are the same account. Clients install nothing either: a proposal is signed and an invoice is paid from the link you send them. Send your next quote from here Start with the proposal, take the deposit, and let the recurring invoices and the ledger run behind them. One login covers the whole month. Compare plans Review free trial terms Current plans and limits on the Pricing page Statements ready for your accountant --- ## Invoice Crowd for Solopreneurs URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/solopreneurs/ Create proposals, send invoices, track expenses and manage more than one business profile from a connected Invoice Crowd workspace. Proposal and invoicing software for solopreneurs, with the books included Invoice Crowd is proposal, invoicing and accounting software for a business of one: the sales team, the billing department and the bookkeeper in one account. From the Pro plan up, it holds a second brand beside the first without a second subscription to pay for. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Solopreneurs Up to 10 business profiles Proposals through to ledger No second bookkeeping tool pop What is inside Everything a business of one has to run Selling the work, billing for it and booking it are three different jobs, and the same person does all three. These are the pieces that stop each becoming an evening. One login, more than one business Separate brands, separate books Business profiles keep the ventures apart Run the consultancy and the product from the same account without their numbers meeting. Each profile carries its own name, logo, invoice template, customers and books, so a statement for one venture never quietly picks up revenue that belongs to the other. Two profiles on Pro, five on Team, ten on Business Its own branding and invoice template per profile Every invoice and expense is tagged to a profile Payment links instead of pricing from scratch The three or four things you actually sell can sit as payment links: a fixed offer with its price already worked out, shared as a link the client pays online, which raises the invoice for you. Saved items cover the lines you bill on a quote or an invoice, so nothing gets priced twice. Reusable payment links with a set price Saved items for the lines that recur Saved items work on a quote and its invoice How payment links work Sell it, then bill it Without typing the same lines twice Proposals that come back signed Send a proposal the client signs in the browser, with client-removable line items they can take or leave and quantities they can set where you allow it. What comes back is the version they agreed to, and that version is what converts, so the invoice never argues with the quote. E-signature on the proposal itself Client-removable items and client-editable quantities One step from approved document to invoice Client-removable line items Recurring billing, and the chasing after it On a paid plan, subscriptions, retainers and maintenance plans run on a cycle you set once, each period raising its own invoice. If a client buys a set number of hours a month, a retainer counts your logged time against them and bills any extra on the next invoice. Reminders go out before and after the due date, and a flat or percentage late fee set on the invoice is added automatically if it is still unpaid after the due date, which is the part a one-person business usually lets slide. Retainers that count the hours you log Reminders on both sides of the due date Late fee as a percentage or a flat amount Recurring invoices and retainers No second tool for the books Where the second subscription usually goes The accounting is in the same account The ledger sits directly under the invoicing. Every invoice and cost you save is posted to a ready-made chart of 148 accounts, and the trial balance, profit and loss and balance sheet are built from those entries. Lock a finished period so its numbers can't change Manual journals and opening balances for a mid-year move Bank reconciliation and a fixed asset register alongside The full accounting module Clients answer their own questions One person cannot also be a support desk. The portal gives each client a sign-in of their own showing the estimates waiting on them, the invoices they owe and what they have already paid, which is where the “can you resend that invoice?” emails stop arriving at nine in the evening. View, download and pay in one place Their whole history with you, not just the last document Approve an estimate without an email thread The customer portal One subscription, not four What a solo stack usually pays for twice Working alone, every extra tool is another login, another bill and another export to reconcile. These four things are already in the one account. one-login 1 login Selling and booking in one place The thing that wins the work and the thing that books it are the same subscription, which is exactly where a solo stack normally splits in two. brands 10 profiles A second brand costs no extra account Business profiles keep their own customers, branding and statements under one account: two on Pro, five on Team and ten on Business. gateways 15 gateways Paid however the client pays Fifteen payment gateways are available on paid plans, so you can usually offer one that works where your client is. currency 1 base currency Clients abroad, one set of books A client overseas gets an invoice in their own currency while your statements still add up in the single one you report and file in. live Also included The rest of what running it alone involves These sit in the same login as the proposals and the ledger, reading the same customers and the same items. Customer records One record per client holding their documents, payments and contact details, filterable by profile. Northwind Goods Juniper & Sage $620.00 Verde Coffee Roasters $0.00 Summit Fitness Co. $390.00 Estimate to invoice Turn an approved estimate into an invoice without re-entering a single line of it. EST-0132 Approved Convert to Invoice INV-1062 Draft Same lines, nothing retyped Deposits and installments Take part of the money up front and bill the rest against the same invoice later. INV-1058 · Lumen Architects $2,400.00 Deposit Requested 40% $960.00 Paid 09/24/2026 −$960.00 in Amount Due $1,440.00 bal Expense tracking Log a cost, keep the receipt on it, and see it reach profit and loss immediately. #a855f7 Figma Software $15.00 #ef4444 Adobe CC $59.99 #10b981 Coworking desk Office Space $320.00 Scheduled reports The reports you actually read arrive by email instead of waiting to be run. #6366f1 Invoice Monthly 1st #ea5455 Age Debt Weekly Mon #f59e0b Expense Invoice templates Pick a template per business profile so each brand bills in its own look. Template 1 #4941e3 Template 2 #16a34a Template 3 #ef4b24 Template 4 #0ea5e9 Template 5 #ef3d10 Template 6 #16b980 Template 7 #9333ea Template 8 #2b2c40 A default per business profile Outbound webhooks Send new and updated invoices, customers, items, expenses and incomes to a webhook URL you choose, or into Pabbly Connect. Customer created Pabbly Connect Your CRM Your sheet Compare current plans The free Basic plan covers everyday invoicing with PayPal. Paid plans add recurring billing, retainers and the books, and start with a 30-day free trial with no card needed. Basic · Free Solo Pro Team Business Monthly or yearly #ec4899 Compare on the Pricing page Bills from suppliers Record a vendor bill, the purchase order behind it and the payment you made against it. PO-0021 to Bill BILL-0044 Paid Payment kept in Payments Made 70+ proposal templates Start a proposal from one of more than seventy templates rather than from a blank page. Web Design Consulting Agreement Social Media Branding & Identity Sales Deck Workshop 70+ templates to start from GST filing report India businesses prepare GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 data from their invoices, bills and expenses in the GST Filing workspace, then file it on the GST portal. GSTR-1 Needs Review Approve Ready Mark Filed Exports Nothing is filed from the app Reusable content blocks Scope, terms and biography paragraphs live in a content library and drop into the next proposal. Terms Terms and Conditions Section Payment terms About Us Reminders and late fees Reminders go out before and after the due date on the schedule you set. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. 3 Days Before Reminder Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date Late Fees 2% Overdue +$24.00 Payments received Every payment, advance and leftover credit in one list, and one payment can settle several open invoices, oldest first. Payment · Harbor & Vine Co. $1,500.00 INV-0412 (oldest) −$900.00 INV-0418 −$450.00 Kept as credit $150.00 AI Assistant Ask for this month's profit and loss, or log yesterday's hours, in plain words. Nothing is saved until you confirm it. Paid plans, with AI credits. Ask This month's P&L Answer From your books Confirm Before any save Nothing is saved until you confirm Questions Running solo on Invoice Crowd, answered Can I run two businesses from one account? Yes, from the Pro plan up. Each business profile has its own name, logo, invoice template, customers and accounting records, and every document belongs to the profile that raised it. Pro holds two profiles, Team five and Business ten. What is the difference between a payment link and a saved item? A saved item is one line you bill often, with its description and price already written, and it drops into a proposal, an estimate or an invoice rather than being typed again. A payment link is a fixed offer at a set price that the client pays from a shared link, which creates the invoice for you. Do I still need bookkeeping software alongside this? Usually not. The accounting side includes a chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, bank reconciliation, fixed assets, trial balance, cash flow, profit and loss and balance sheet. Because invoices and expenses post into it as you save them, there is no export and match step. Can clients pay an invoice in parts? Yes. Split an invoice into installments, or take a deposit and bill the balance on delivery, and the client settles each part through any gateway you connected. The invoice keeps a running record of what has been paid and what is still open. Which plan fits a one-person business? The Basic plan is free forever: unlimited invoices, 5 customers, 1 business profile, 2 invoice templates and PayPal payments. Paid plans add recurring invoices, retainers, more business profiles, the accounting statements and more, and each starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed. Current prices are on the Pricing page. Can I connect it to the other tools I use? Yes. Connect through Zapier or Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in to create records or start a workflow when a new invoice, customer or expense arrives. Outbound webhooks also send invoice, customer, item, expense and income events to a URL you choose. One login, however many ventures you run Start with a single profile and add the next when the next brand appears. The proposals, the billing and the ledger are already sitting together. Compare plans Free trial terms on the Pricing page Business profiles from one to ten Accounting included, not an add-on --- ## Invoice Crowd for Small Business Owners URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/small-business-owners/ Connect proposals, invoices, purchases, payments and accounting records in one Invoice Crowd workspace built for small business workflows. Small business accounting and invoicing that your accountant can work from Invoice Crowd is small business accounting and invoicing software: it covers the money coming in and the money going out, and posts both into a double-entry ledger with GST, aged debt and statements on top. It is built for a business with staff, suppliers and a tax return. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Small Business Owners Money in and money out GST invoices and a filing report Team members with roles pop What is inside Both sides of the business, in one ledger Invoices are the visible half. The other half is suppliers, bills, staff and the morning in spring when somebody asks for last year's numbers. Money in Sales, tax, and the customers running late Sales documents with the tax already on them Quote, bill and correct in one flow. An approved estimate becomes an invoice, GST applies where it should and custom tax and discount rates handle the lines that differ, and a credit note reverses an overcharge without deleting the original. Each document belongs to a business profile and posts to that profile's books, and a sent invoice is voided, not deleted, so its number stays in the sequence. GST-enabled invoices with custom tax and discount rates Credit notes that reverse rather than erase Custom fields for the references your trade needs Invoicing end to end Aged debt makes chasing a list, not a mood The aged debt report groups every unpaid invoice into Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ days past due, which turns “we are owed a lot” into names with amounts and dates beside them. Reminders go out before and after the due date on the schedule you set. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. Outstanding invoices grouped by how far overdue they are Automatic reminders either side of the due date Late fees as a percentage or a fixed amount Late fees and reminders Money out Suppliers, bills and what the business spends Vendors, bills and purchase orders The supplier side has the same shape as the customer side. Keep a record per vendor, raise a purchase order, enter the bill that comes back against it and record what you paid, so payables sit next to receivables instead of in a folder somebody has to open. The supplier's own invoice number stored on each bill, with a warning on duplicates Purchase orders and the bills that follow them Payments made and vendor credits recorded against the vendor Costs categorized the day they happen Record rent, subscriptions, travel and materials under the right expense category, add the tax you paid, keep the receipt with the entry and use recurring expenses for repeat costs. Tax you can reclaim is tracked separately, and every saved cost shows up in your reports. Tax on expenses, with reclaimable tax kept apart Receipts held against the transaction they explain Recurring expenses for rent and monthly subscriptions Expense tracking The books and the filing What gets handed over at year end Statements an accountant recognizes Profit and loss, balance sheet, trial balance, cash flow and the general ledger behind them, all drawn from the postings your invoices and bills already made. Manual journals cover the adjustments no document creates, and opening balances bring in the year you carried across. Once a period is closed, Lock Transactions stops anyone posting into it. A chart of 148 accounts, numbered and classified on day one Trial balance and cash flow for closing a period Cost of goods sold and gross profit on the profit and loss The accounting module GST filing and the reports around it For India businesses, the GST Filing workspace prepares GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 data from your invoices, bills and expenses, ready to file on the GST portal. Invoice, income and expense reports sit alongside it, and the invoice, income, expense and aged debt reports can be emailed to you on a schedule. GST Filing for India: GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 Invoice, income, expense and inventory summary reports Scheduled reports delivered by email GST invoicing and filing Also included The rest of what a small company needs All of it is in the same subscription as the invoicing, reading the same customers, vendors and accounts. Team and roles Invite team members and give each a role that controls what they can see and change. AM #6366f1 PN #14b8a6 TW #f59e0b Priya Nair · Accountant View Tom Whitfield · Sales Edit Alex Morgan · Owner Full Timesheets and projects Hours logged against a project, so billable work is not estimated at the end of the month. Billable hours · September 142h Wk 1 Wk 2 Wk 3 Wk 4 Customer portal Clients check what they owe and settle it themselves instead of calling the office. Total Invoiced $21,480 Clearpath up Paid $12,100 5 invoices Outstanding $9,380 4 invoices bad Recurring invoices Maintenance contracts and flat monthly fees raise their own invoice on the cycle you set. Maintenance Monthly $450.00 Retainer $1,200 Service plan Quarterly $900.00 Bank reconciliation Match what the ledger says against what the bank says, period by period. Statement balance $48,210.00 Ledger balance Auto-matched 42 of 44 in Difference $0.00 bal Budget vs actuals Set a budget account by account and watch the variance build as the year runs. Advertising vs budget $240 under Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Multi-currency reporting Sell across borders while every statement totals in the currency you file in. INV-3322 · Lumen Architects £4,800.00 Exchange rate 1 GBP = $1.2700 Posted to Sales $6,096.00 Business profiles Separate books and branding for each company you own, still under one login. Northwind Studio USD Own books Northwind Retail Northwind India INR Outbound webhooks Send customer, invoice, expense and income events to a CRM or a spreadsheet through a webhook URL you choose. Customer created Your CRM #0ea5e9 Your sheet #16a34a Pabbly Connect 15 payment gateways Customers settle an invoice through PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr or M-Pesa. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Razorpay #0c2451 Square #2b2c40 Payoneer #ff4800 Braintree #1a1a1a Authorize.net #1c3f94 Airwallex #612fff GoCardless #1c1b18 PayFast #e8412c PayTabs #1f64c1 Telr #0f9d58 M-Pesa #43b02a Fixed asset register Record what the business owns, depreciate it straight-line and record a sale or write-off when it goes. Delivery van · 09/01/2026 $28,000.00 Straight-line, 5 years −$466.67 cn Book value 09/30 $27,533.33 Quotes and proposals Send a priced estimate or a proposal the client signs before the first invoice exists. EST-0418 CL Clearpath Logistics $12,400.00 Sent info Approved ok Invoiced pri Approved and signed in the browser Payments received One customer payment can settle several open invoices, oldest first, and anything left over is kept as credit for the next one. Payment · Verde Coffee Roasters $4,200.00 INV-2207 (oldest) −$2,600.00 INV-2214 −$1,300.00 Kept as credit $300.00 Stock and reordering Stock is tracked first-in, first-out, a bell alert you can turn on tells you when an item hits its reorder point, and the Reorder tab drafts purchase orders grouped by vendor. Paper cups 12oz Reorder point 40 left PO-0088 · draft Grouped by vendor 3 items #10b981 Stock value First in, first out $6,420 Refunds Refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice. The credit note is made for you and the refund is booked once the provider confirms it. INV-2211 VC Verde Coffee · PayPal $320.00 Refund Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it live Questions Small business accounting, answered Does Invoice Crowd handle GST? Yes, for India business profiles. Invoices carry GSTIN, HSN/SAC and place of supply, and the GST Filing workspace prepares GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 data from your invoices, bills and expenses. You or your accountant then file the return on the GST portal; nothing is submitted from the app. If a customer deducts TDS, record it with the payment and it is booked to TDS Receivable. Can I track what I owe suppliers as well as what customers owe me? Yes. Vendors, purchase orders, bills, payments made and vendor credits are all part of the same account. Raise the order, record the bill when it arrives and settle it, so what you owe and what you are owed are read from one ledger. Will my accountant accept these reports? The statements are the standard set: profit and loss, balance sheet, trial balance, cash flow and the general ledger behind them, all from double-entry postings. Each exports to spreadsheet or PDF, and manual journals let an accountant post the adjustments a year end needs. How many people can I put on the account? The Team plan includes two team members and the Business plan three, each with a role, so the person entering expenses does not get the same access as the person reviewing the books. Basic, Solo and Pro have no team members. Can I keep books for more than one company? Yes. Each business profile has its own customers, invoice templates, branding and accounts, and reports stay scoped to the selected profile. Pro holds two profiles, Team five and Business ten. What does it cost for a small team? The Basic plan is free forever: unlimited invoices, 5 customers, 1 business profile, 2 invoice templates and PayPal payments. Paid plans add the accounting statements, recurring invoices, more business profiles and, on Team and Business, team members, and each starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed. Current prices are on the Pricing page. Put the invoices, the bills and the books together Raise an invoice, enter a supplier bill, then open the profit and loss and watch both of them already in it. That is the whole case for one account. Compare plans Free trial terms on the Pricing page Payables and receivables in one ledger Statements export for your accountant --- ## Invoice Crowd for Digital Agencies URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/digital-agencies/ Manage retainers, project billing, proposals, invoices, payments and accounting in one connected Invoice Crowd workflow for digital agencies. Invoicing software for digital agencies with retainers and projects Invoice Crowd runs both ways a digital agency bills from one account: a monthly retainer that should never need chasing, and project work that has to be scoped, tracked and invoiced. The ledger sits underneath both. Start your 30-day Team trial See pricing Home Use Cases Digital agencies Recurring retainer billing Time logged against projects Team roles and permissions pop What is inside Two revenue models, one account Retainer income should arrive without anyone raising it. Project income has to be quoted, staffed and tracked. The same account handles both, and the books keep up with each. Recurring revenue Set the schedule once, then stop touching it Retainers that raise themselves Set a retainer per client with its monthly fee and the hours it includes, and the invoice goes out on schedule whether or not anyone remembers it. Time the team logs on that client's projects counts against the hours, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours go on the next invoice. A flat fee with no hours can run as a plain recurring invoice. Reminders chase what is unpaid, so a retainer that slips is caught before it becomes a quarter. Hours included each month, counted as time is logged Reminders before anyone writes an awkward email A flat or percentage late fee, added automatically after the due date Retainers Saved items for the retainer bundle Most agency retainers are a fixed bundle: so many hours of strategy, a content run, a reporting call. Save each part as an item with its own rate and description, then add the same items to the estimate, the invoice or the recurring profile, priced the same way for every client on the same tier. Save the services you sell over and over as items Pull the saved items onto an estimate or an invoice Update an item's rate once for the next document Saved items Project work From the pitch to the last hour logged Scope it in a proposal, bill what was signed New project work starts as a proposal: scope, phases, price and terms, signed in the browser rather than printed. What the client accepts is what carries into the invoice, so the number on the first bill matches the number they agreed to. More than 70 proposal templates to start from E-signature on the document itself Accepted pricing carries into the invoice The proposal builder Time logged against the right project Projects hold the work and the timesheet holds the hours, and each project's Profitability tab subtracts labour cost and expenses from what you billed. Team members log time against the project they are on, so when a client asks what the retainer actually covered last month there is a record rather than a reconstruction from calendars and memory. Members submit their week, you or a timesheet manager approve it, and a project can be set so only approved time is billed. The Utilisation view shows logged hours against each person's capacity. Weekly timesheets submitted and approved Hours attached to a project, not a spreadsheet tab A record to answer a scope question with Project profitability The team and the books Who can open what, and what it all adds up to Team members with roles, not shared logins Bring account managers, designers and a bookkeeper into the same account and give each person a role that limits what they can open and change. A member can also be limited to selected customers only. A role per person instead of one password Two team members on Team, three on Business Accounting open only to the people who need it What each plan includes Agency numbers, not just invoice totals Under the invoicing sits a double-entry ledger with a chart of 148 accounts already built. Contractor bills, software subscriptions and studio costs post into it alongside the revenue, so profit and loss shows the agency's real position rather than a sum of what was billed. 148 accounts ready before you post anything Costs and revenue in the same set of books Profit and loss, balance sheet and cash flow The accounting module Why agencies consolidate One account from the pitch to the balance sheet Agencies usually end up with a proposal tool, an invoicing tool and a bookkeeping tool, plus somebody whose afternoon goes on moving numbers between them. one-login 1 login Proposals, invoices and books together The document you pitched with, the invoice it became and the ledger entry behind it are three views of one record, not three exports to reconcile. brands 10 profiles Sub-brands and side ventures Business profiles keep separate branding, customers and books under one account. Pro holds two, Team five and Business ten. gateways 15 gateways However the client wants to pay PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack, with split and partial payments when a project is billed in stages. currency Multi-currency Clients abroad, reporting at home Bill an overseas client in their currency and still read the agency's revenue in yours, because the ledger holds base-currency values. live Also included The rest of what an agency runs on The parts of agency admin that usually end up in a spreadsheet, a shared drive or somebody's inbox. Client portal Clients approve proposals, download invoices and pay in one place instead of a mail thread, and approve or question each week's hours on their projects (hours only, never rates). Website Redesign LA #f59e0b Lumen Architects · portal $18,600.00 Proposal ok Invoice info Paid Approved, downloaded and paid by the client Estimate to invoice Approve an estimate and the invoice writes itself from the same lines, taxes included. EST-0418 Approved Auto Convert to Invoice INV-2051 Draft Lines, taxes and discounts carried over Payment gateways Fifteen payment gateways, so the client pays on the invoice rather than by bank transfer. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Razorpay #0c2451 Square #2b2c40 Payoneer #ff4800 Braintree #1a1a1a Authorize.net #1c3f94 Airwallex #612fff GoCardless #1c1b18 PayFast #e8412c PayTabs #1f64c1 Telr #0f9d58 M-Pesa #43b02a Pay on the invoice itself Split payments Bill a project in stages: deposit up front, balance on delivery, both against one invoice. Split 1 · 40% $7,440.00 in Split 2 · 60% $11,160.00 Invoice total bal Reminders and late fees Chase an overdue retainer automatically. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. #ff9f43 1 Day Before Reminder Sent #ea5455 7 Days After Late Fees 2% Overdue +$91.20 Expense tracking Log contractor invoices and software costs with the receipt attached to the transaction. #0ea5e9 Freelance dev Contractors $2,400 #a855f7 Figma seats Software $75.00 #10b981 Hosting Online $129.00 Vendors and bills Record what freelancers and suppliers charge you as bills, and tag the related expenses to the project they belong to. BILL-0112 Record Payment Recorded Payments Made Freelancer bills next to client invoices Outbound webhooks Push invoice, customer and expense events to a webhook URL you choose, or connect through Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. Invoice updated #16a34a Pabbly Connect #6366f1 Your CRM Your sheet Reports and exports Review aged debt, income and expense reports on screen, have them emailed on a schedule, and prepare GST returns if you bill from India. Income report · 6 months $231,400 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Client records One record per client holds the contacts, currency, terms and every document ever raised against them. Harbor Harbor & Vine Co. USD · Net 30 Harbor Lane Consulting CAD · Net 21 Harborview Dental USD · Net 7 Budget against actuals Set a spend budget per ledger account, then read it against what the agency actually posted. Contractors vs budget 96% used Proposal templates A content library keeps reusable sections, and 70+ proposal templates give the document a starting shape. Web Design #4941e3 WordPress Development SEO Agreement #ef4b24 Digital Marketing Social Media #9333ea Shopify 70+ templates and a content library Invoice wizard Bill time up to a date, rounded to 6, 15 or 30 minutes, re-bill project expenses with a markup, and invoice part of a fixed fee per milestone, with a live preview. Paid plans. Time to 31 Oct · 15 min rounding $6,750.00 Project expenses + 10% markup $594.00 Fixed fee · milestone 2 of 3 $4,000.00 Invoice preview $11,344.00 Payments received Record a client's advance before the invoice exists, with its own receipt, and apply it when you bill. One payment can also settle several open invoices, oldest first. Advance · Lumen Architects $5,000.00 Applied to INV-3108 −$3,200.00 Applied to INV-3115 −$1,800.00 Unused advance $0.00 Refunds Refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice. The credit note is made for you and the refund is booked once the provider confirms it. INV-3102 HV #14b8a6 Harbor & Vine Co. · Stripe $1,200.00 Refund pri Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it Questions Running an agency on Invoice Crowd, answered Can I bill retainer clients automatically every month? Yes. A retainer raises the monthly invoice on schedule without anyone opening the app, and counts the hours your team logs against the hours it includes, billing any extra on the next invoice. A flat fee with no hours runs as a recurring invoice. Reminders go out if it is unpaid, and a flat or percentage late fee set when you send the invoice is added automatically if it is still unpaid after the due date. How many people can work in the account? The Team plan includes two team members and the Business plan three. Each gets a role, so you decide who can open accounting records and who only sees the work their permissions allow. Can I track time against a project? Yes. Projects and a timesheet are part of the same account, so hours are logged against the project they belong to rather than in a separate tracker. That leaves you a record of what a retainer month actually contained when a client asks. Does it handle a client who pays in another currency? Yes. Invoice in the client's currency while your reports total in the business profile's accounting currency, and the Show Amounts In switch lets you read the dashboard in one currency or across all of them. Can two agency brands run from one subscription? Yes, through business profiles. Each profile keeps its own branding, customers and accounting records, and you switch between them from one login. Pro holds two profiles, Team five and Business ten. Is there a trial before we move the whole agency across? Thirty days, with no credit card. That is long enough to run a full retainer cycle: raise the recurring invoices, send a proposal, log some hours and see what the reports look like at month end. Paid plans start at ten dollars a month. Put the retainers on a schedule and the projects on record Set the recurring profiles up once, scope the project work in a proposal, and let the ledger keep pace with both. Compare plans Retainers invoiced on schedule A role for every team member Thirty-day trial, no card needed --- ## Invoice Crowd for Marketing Agencies URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/marketing-agency/ Manage proposals, retainers, project invoices, media costs, payments and accounting in one connected Invoice Crowd workflow for marketing agencies. Marketing agency invoicing, from the pitch to the media bill Invoice Crowd carries the three ways a marketing agency gets paid in the same month: a retainer that repeats, project fees that follow a signed proposal, and media or supplier spend passed on at cost. It records what you paid out as well as what you billed. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Marketing agencies Retainers on a schedule Supplier bills and purchase orders Proposals with e-signature pop What is inside Winning the account, then billing it every month A pitch that gets signed turns into a retainer, and a retainer turns into a monthly bill with media spend on top. Each of those is a different document, all in one place. The pitch Before the account is yours Proposals built from blocks, signed online A new-business proposal is assembled from sections rather than typed into a template: the strategy, the deliverables, the channel plan, the price. More than 70 templates ship with the account, and the paragraphs you write once, credentials, process and terms, live in the content library for the next pitch. 70+ proposal templates included Reusable sections in the content library Signed in the browser, no printing The proposal builder Extra scope the client can remove Put the paid social test or the extra landing page on the document, turn on item removal, and let the client remove what they do not want before signing. The total updates as they choose, which turns a negotiation over price into a decision about scope. Lines the client can keep or remove The total recalculates while they read Quantities the client can set themselves Client-removable items The monthly bill Retainer plus whatever moved this month A monthly retainer with an hour bank Put the base fee on a retainer: a monthly recurring invoice with the hours it includes. Time the team logs on the client's projects counts against those hours, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours go on the next invoice as their own line. Campaign work outside the retainer is still invoiced on its own. Clients can approve or question each week's hours in their portal, and your team's weeks can be approved before they are billed. Hours included each month with the base fee Campaign work invoiced separately Clients see hours used in the portal, never rates Retainers Media and supplier spend recorded as bills Ad platforms, printers, photographers and freelancers all invoice you before you invoice the client. Enter each as a bill against the vendor, raise a purchase order first when the spend needs approval, and record what you actually paid out instead of netting it off in a spreadsheet. Vendors, bills and purchase orders Payments made tracked against each supplier The supplier's own invoice number stored, with a duplicate warning Tracking expenses What you kept Billings are not income Gross billings against real margin Pass-through media inflates what an agency bills and says nothing about what it earns. Because bills and invoices post to the same double-entry ledger, profit and loss shows fee income and supplier cost separately instead of one blended number at the end of the quarter. Mark media and supplier accounts as Cost of Goods Sold and the profit and loss shows gross profit before overheads, and each project's Profitability tab shows the margin after the team's hours at cost rate and the project's expenses. Income and expense accounts kept apart Budget against actuals, account by account, month by month Statements you can hand to an accountant Profit and loss Chasing the invoice without chasing the client Reminders go out on the schedule you set before an account manager has to write an awkward email, and a flat or percentage late fee set when you send the invoice is added automatically if it is still unpaid after the due date. The client sees every open invoice in their portal, so nobody is asking which one is outstanding. Automatic reminders on your own schedule Late fees on the terms already agreed Aged debt report by customer Reminders and late fees How a client account runs From the pitch deck to the ledger entry Every marketing client goes through the same sequence, whether the work is a one-off campaign or a twelve-month retainer. Start either way proposal Pitch with a proposal A full document with strategy, deliverables and price, signed in the browser, with lines the client can remove before signing. estimate Quote with an estimate When the client only wants a number for a defined campaign, send a priced estimate they approve online instead. invoice Bill the fee and the spend The approved document becomes an invoice, and the retainer keeps repeating on its own schedule alongside it. payment Take payment on the invoice Fifteen payment gateways, split and partial payments, and a portal where the client settles without a bank transfer. accounting Post it against the books Fee income, supplier bills and expenses land in the ledger, so the statements stay current without a separate bookkeeping pass. Also included The other side of running client accounts Agency work generates more paperwork than invoices. These are the parts that usually get handled by hand. Purchase orders Approve what a supplier is about to charge before the campaign spend lands as a bill. PO-0142 Approved Convert to Bill BILL-0413 Draft Spend approved before the bill lands Client portal Where a marketing client reads the proposal, approves it, and pays without a reply-all thread. Launch campaign SF #f97316 Summit Fitness Co. $10,400.00 Proposal info ok Paid Read, signed and paid from one place Saved rate card Save a retainer's components as items once, then quote them the same way for every account on that tier. Retainer Retainer · Starter $2,500.00 Retainer · Growth $4,800.00 Retainer · Scale $8,200.00 Approved to invoiced One approved estimate carries its lines, taxes and discounts straight onto the invoice. EST-0633 approved $11,750.00 Discount 5% −$587.50 cn Sales Tax 8.5% +$948.81 in INV-2219 total $12,111.31 bal Multi-currency work Bill a client abroad in their currency while your own reporting stays in one base currency. INV-2220 · Lumen Architects €6,200.00 Exchange rate 1 EUR = $1.0900 In your books $6,758.00 Deposits and stages Take part of a campaign fee up front and the rest when the work actually runs. INV-2217 · Launch campaign Deposit Requested 30% $3,120.00 Balance on launch $7,280.00 Connect your stack Send invoice, estimate and customer events to a webhook URL you choose, or connect through Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. Estimate updated #16a34a Pabbly Connect #6366f1 Your CRM #0ea5e9 Your sheet Scheduled reports Have the invoice, income and aged debt reports arrive by email on a fixed day. Invoice Monthly 1st #ea5455 Age Debt Weekly Mon #10b981 Income Team roles Bring account managers into the same account with a role that limits what they can change. AM ER #ec4899 MB #f59e0b TW #14b8a6 Elena Ruiz · Account lead Edit Tom Whitfield · Media Create Marcus Lee · Finance Export Retainers with hours When a retainer buys hours, the team's logged time counts against the monthly allowance and extra hours go on the next invoice. Verde Coffee $6,500 Bluefin $9,800 Kestrel $8,200 GST filing India businesses prepare GSTR-1, GSTR-3B and GSTR-9 data from their invoices, bills and expenses in the GST Filing workspace, then file it on the GST portal. GSTR-1 Needs Review 2B Recon Matched Filing Pack ZIP Ready to file on the GST portal Refunds A campaign is cut short? Refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice, with the credit note made for you. INV-4021 NW Northwind · PayPal Refund pri Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it live Questions Marketing agency billing, answered How do we bill media spend we paid for on the client's behalf? Record what the platform or supplier charged against that vendor and tag the expense to the client's project. The invoice wizard then re-bills unbilled project expenses on the client's invoice, with a markup if you add one. Both sides post to the ledger, so the pass-through shows up as cost and as billed revenue rather than disappearing. Can a retainer and a campaign invoice run for the same client? Yes. The retainer sits on a recurring profile and issues on its own cycle, while campaign or project work is invoiced separately as it is delivered. The client sees both in the portal and can settle either one through the same gateway. Does the proposal let a client pick options before they sign? Yes. Turn on item removal and the client can remove lines in the browser, with the total recalculating as they go. Quantities can be left editable too, so a client can decide how many months or how many assets they are buying. Which payment methods can we offer clients? Fifteen payment gateways are available: PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack. A client can pay in full, in part, or as a deposit followed by a balance, and the payment is recorded against the invoice it settles rather than keyed in again later. Can it replace the bookkeeping tool we export to? For most agencies, yes. There is a chart of accounts with 148 accounts ready to use, a general ledger, manual journals, bank reconciliation and the statements behind them. Invoices, bills and expenses post into it directly, so nothing has to be exported and matched. What does it cost for a small agency team? The Basic plan is free forever for everyday invoicing with PayPal. Paid plans add retainers, timesheets and the accounting statements; the Team plan includes two team members and Business three. Each paid plan starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed, and current prices are on the Pricing page. Bill the retainer, the campaign and the media in one place Pitch it, sign it, invoice it and record what it cost you, without moving numbers between four separate tools. Compare plans Retainers issue on their own Supplier spend recorded as bills 30 days free, no card --- ## Invoice Crowd for Design Agencies URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/designing-agencies/ Scope design work, manage revisions, invoice by milestone, collect deposits and track project finances with Invoice Crowd for design agencies. Design agency billing that scopes revisions and bills by milestone Invoice Crowd gives a design agency a proposal that states the revision rounds and an invoice schedule tied to milestones, so both sides work from the same document. That covers where design work goes wrong: one more round, a second concept nobody priced, files handed over before the final invoice cleared. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Design agencies Revision rounds written into scope Client-removable lines for extra concepts Deposit, milestone and balance pop What is inside Put the argument in the document, before the work starts Most disputes in a design studio are about scope, rounds or handover, and all three are things a proposal can state plainly and an invoice can then follow. The scope What is included, and what is not Rounds of revision, written down Two rounds included, further rounds charged at a stated rate: the sentence that prevents the argument belongs in the proposal, not in an email six weeks later. Save it once in the content library and it goes out with every document from then on. Terms held in a reusable content library 70+ proposal templates to start the document Signed in the browser, stored with the proposal Building the proposal Extra concepts as client-removable lines A third route explored, an alternate logo lockup, an extra set of social templates: price them as client-removable lines the client can keep or remove before signing. Leave the quantity editable when the number of concepts or pages is genuinely the client's call. Client-removable lines priced but not assumed Client-editable quantities on the document The total moves as the client decides Client-removable items The billing Money that arrives during the project, not after it Deposit first, milestones after A design project is rarely one payment at the end. Take a deposit before the first concept, invoice again at each agreed stage, and let the client pay part of an invoice now and the rest later, with every payment recorded against the invoice it belongs to. Or request the deposit on the estimate, and the client accepts and pays it in one step. On a fixed-fee project, the invoice wizard (paid plans) bills part of the fee at each milestone and shows what is invoiced and what remains. Deposit invoiced before work begins A deposit and instalments, each with its own due date The balance due updates with each payment Split and partial payments An invoice that looks like your work A studio that sells design cannot send a default template. Invoice templates carry your logo, colors and layout, and each business profile keeps its own set, so the document that asks for money looks like it came from the same people who made the work. Branded invoice and proposal templates Separate branding per business profile Custom fields for job numbers and references Creating an invoice The handover The last mile of a design job One place the client approves and pays The client opens a link and finds the proposal to sign, the estimate to approve, the invoices to download and the button to pay them. Nothing depends on someone locating the right attachment in a thread that already has forty replies in it. Approve, download and pay from one screen Full document history for the client No attachments to hunt through The client portal Licensing and handover terms on the document Usage rights, the file formats delivered, and whether ownership passes on final payment are terms rather than afterthoughts. Keep the wording in the content library so it appears on every proposal, and bill the last milestone before you release the files. Licensing wording reused on every proposal Signed copy kept with the accepted document Final invoice tied to the last milestone Also included The rest of a studio's paperwork Everything a design business needs between winning the job and closing the year. Signing online The client signs a proposal or approves an estimate in the browser, with no printing involved. Lumen Brand Identity LA #f59e0b Lumen Architects $14,200.00 Sent info Opened warn Approved ok Signed in the browser, nothing printed Approved to billed An approved estimate becomes an invoice with the same lines, tax and discount already on it. EST-0342 Convert to Invoice INV-3108 Draft Same lines, tax and discount Retainer work Bill a flat monthly retainer on a recurring schedule, or set the hours it includes and bill extra hours on the next invoice. #ec4899 Juniper & Sage Monthly $2,200 #6366f1 Harbor & Vine $1,800 #10b981 Bluefin Quarterly $4,500 Reusable quotes Save a brand identity proposal as a template, or its lines as saved items, and quote it the same way next time. Brand identity Proposal Save as template Next client Quoted Scope, lines and prices reused Overdue reminders Automatic reminders, plus a flat or percentage late fee you set when you send the invoice, added automatically if it is still unpaid after the due date. Chasing a final payment is not a phone call. 3 Days Before Reminder #ea5455 7 Days After Late Fees 1.5% Overdue +$36.00 Studio expenses Fonts, stock, printing and freelance illustrators, each logged with its receipt attached. #0ea5e9 Font licence Software $240.00 #a855f7 Stock images Online $99.00 Illustrator Contractors $1,200 Profit and loss See what the studio actually earned after freelancers, software and subscriptions come out. Total Revenue $214,600 Jan–Sep up Expenses $71,300 33% Net Profit $143,300 67% Studio access Add designers and a producer with roles that keep the books out of everyone's way. AM PN #14b8a6 TW Priya Nair · Designer Edit Tom Whitfield · Producer Create Alex Morgan · Owner Full Overseas clients Quote and invoice in the client's currency, then read your own totals in your base currency. INV-3107 · Lumen Architects £11,180.00 Exchange rate 1 GBP = $1.2700 In your books $14,198.60 bal Hours against a project Log studio time on the timesheet against the project it belongs to, then bill from that record. Lumen brand identity · hours 86h Wk 1 Wk 2 Wk 3 Wk 4 Wk 5 What is still unpaid The aged debt report lists open invoices by client and how far each has drifted past due. Age Debt $6,760 1-30 Days 31-60 Days 61-90 Days 91+ Days Connecting other tools Outbound webhooks send selected events to a URL you control, and Pabbly Connect, connected with your Invoice Crowd sign-in, wires the same records into workflows you already run. Invoice updated #16a34a Pabbly Connect Your CRM Your sheet Quotes that expire Give an estimate an expiry date so an old price can't be accepted months later. A client who says no can decline it with a reason. EST-0218 Expiry date 30 days New quote If it lapses Every accepted price is current Void, not delete Void a sent invoice that should not stand. It keeps its number and history, and its entries are reversed in the books. INV-0731 PP Pixel & Pine $3,400.00 Void bad The number stays in the sequence Refunds Refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice, with the credit note made for you. INV-0726 HV Harbor & Vine Co. · Square $750.00 Paid Refund pri Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it live Questions Design studio billing, answered How do I stop revision rounds from running past the budget? State them in the proposal: how many rounds the fee covers and what an additional round costs. Keep that clause in the content library so it appears on every document, and bill extra rounds as a new invoice against the wording the client already signed. Can a client add a second concept without renegotiating? Put it on the proposal as its own priced line and turn on item removal for the pricing table. The client keeps or removes it before signing and the total adjusts, so the extra concept is a decision on the page rather than a conversation about whether it was ever in scope. Can I bill a design project in stages? Yes. Raise an invoice at each milestone, or raise one invoice and let the client pay it in parts, including a deposit before work starts. Each payment is recorded against the invoice it settles, so the outstanding balance is always the current figure. Do the invoices and proposals carry the studio's branding? Yes. Invoice templates and proposal templates both take your logo, colors and layout, and more than 70 proposal templates are there to start from. If you run a second studio or a side brand, each business profile keeps its own branding under the same login. How does a client actually accept and pay? From the link you send. They read the proposal, sign it in the browser, and later open the invoice with a Pay button on it. Clients you invite to the customer portal can also find every document there. Payments run through PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr or M-Pesa. Does it keep the studio's books as well? Yes. Behind the invoicing there is a double-entry ledger with a chart of 148 accounts, expenses with receipts attached, bank reconciliation and statements including profit and loss and a balance sheet. Studio costs and client revenue sit in the same books. Write the scope down, then bill against it Rounds, extra concepts, milestones and handover terms all live on documents the client has already read and signed. Compare plans Revision terms on every proposal Milestone and deposit invoicing Test the workflow, no card --- ## Invoice Crowd for Content Creators URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/content-creators/ Create proposals, scope brand work, invoice sponsors, collect payments and keep business records together with Invoice Crowd for content creators. Invoicing and proposals for content creators running brand deals Invoice Crowd lets you send a brand a proposal that states the deliverables, the usage window and the fee, collect an e-signature and take a deposit. Invoice in the currency the brand pays in, and see which collaborations are still owing without opening a spreadsheet. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Content Creators Deliverables and usage terms in writing Deposit before the first post Paid in the brand's currency pop What is inside From the pitch to the payment that clears A brand deal is a document problem before it is a money problem. What was agreed, what it costs, what happens if the campaign extends, and who still has not paid. The agreement Everything the brand signs off on A proposal that lists every deliverable Briefs arrive as a chat message and end as an argument about what was promised. Build the proposal in sections instead: the deliverables by platform and count, the shoot and posting dates, the usage window, the exclusivity you are agreeing to, and the fee that covers all of it. 70+ proposal templates, or start from a past deal E-signature the brand adds in the browser Sections for scope, dates, usage and fee Proposal builder Terms you write once, not every deal Usage rights, exclusivity, revision limits, approval turnaround, what happens if a post is pulled. These clauses barely change from one sponsor to the next, so keep them in the content library and pull the right block into the document. Then rewrite only the paragraph that genuinely differs for this campaign. Content library for the blocks you reuse Saved items so a Reel or an integration has a rate Duplicate a past proposal for a returning sponsor The money Deposits, currencies and gateways A deposit before the first post goes up Content is expensive to produce and impossible to un-publish. Bill a percentage on signature and the balance when the campaign goes live, from one invoice rather than two documents that have to be matched up later. The portal shows the brand what has landed and what is left. Split and partial payments on a single invoice The brand sees the amount received and the balance Reminders and late fees on what is still outstanding Split and partial payments Overseas brands pay in their own currency A sponsor in another country should not have to work out a conversion before approving a budget. Invoice in their currency, connect the gateway their finance team already uses, and let your own reporting total in your base currency so the year still adds up. Multi-currency invoicing with base-currency reporting PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex and more A Pay button on the invoice the brand receives Payment gateways The follow-up What is outstanding, and what it cost to make Which collaborations have not paid yet Agency accounts pay on their own schedule, and a creator can be three campaigns deep before noticing. The aged debt report sorts every unpaid invoice by how far past its due date it has gone, so chasing becomes a decision about one brand rather than a memory test across twelve. Aged debt grouped by how overdue an invoice is Automatic reminders before you have to write the email Invoice and income reports for any period Reports Monthly content retainers that count the hours When a brand pays every month for a set number of your hours, make it a retainer. Time you log on that brand's projects counts against the month, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra editing time goes on the next invoice. Cameras, editing software and travel still go in as expenses against the same set of books. Hours included each month on one monthly invoice Gear and software logged as expenses with receipts Extra hours billed on the next invoice Retainers Also included The rest of what a creator business runs on Brand deals are not the only paperwork. Everything below is in the same account as the proposals and the invoices. Proposal e-signature The brand approves the deal in the browser and the signed copy stays with the proposal. Autumn Blend Launch VC #ec4899 Verde Coffee Roasters $6,000.00 Sent info Opened warn Approved ok Signed copy kept with the proposal Approved to invoiced An approved estimate converts to an invoice carrying the same lines, so nothing is keyed twice. Put an expiry date on the quote so last season's rate can't be accepted. EST-0212 Convert to Invoice INV-0419 Draft Nothing keyed twice Lines the brand can drop Turn on item removal and the brand can drop lines it doesn't want, such as an extra Story set, before approving. Reel × 3 Kept $3,600 #f59e0b Story set × 2 $900.00 #ea5455 Usage +3 months Removed $0.00 Rate card items Keep a post, a Reel and a Story set as saved items with their rates, and quote them the same way all year. Reel Instagram Reel · Service $1,200.00 Reel edit only · Service $600.00 Reel usage, 3 months $750.00 Brand portal Sponsors sign in to view, approve, download and pay, and see which invoices are paid and what is still due. Total Invoiced $6,000 Verde up Paid $3,000 Deposit Outstanding On go-live bad Reminders and late fees Overdue invoices chase themselves on the schedule you set instead of waiting on you. #6366f1 3 Days Before Reminder #ff9f43 On Due Date Late Fees 2% Overdue +$44.00 Kit and subscriptions Log gear, editing software and travel as expenses with the receipt kept on the transaction. #0ea5e9 Camera body Hardware $2,199 #a855f7 Editing app Software $54.99 #10b981 Train to shoot Travel $86.40 Channel and company Run the creator brand and a production company as separate profiles under one login. Northwind Studio USD Own books Alex Morgan Media #14b8a6 Northwind Films EUR Outbound webhooks Send invoice and customer events to a webhook URL you choose, or connect through Pabbly Connect using your Invoice Crowd sign-in. Invoice updated #16a34a Pabbly Connect Your CRM Your sheet Client-set quantities Let a sponsor set the number of posts or videos on the estimate before they approve it. Instagram Reel 4 × $1,200 Story set 2 × $450 Total the brand set $5,700.00 bal Sponsor records One record per brand holding their contacts, past proposals, invoices and everything they have paid. 3 proposals Verde Café Vendor Verdant Home 1 invoice Custom tax rates Set your own tax and discount rates per line, for the deals that are taxed differently. Subtotal £2,000.00 VAT 20% +£400.00 in Total £2,400.00 Refunds A campaign is pulled? Refund the online payment through Stripe, PayPal and six other gateways straight from the invoice, with the credit note made for you. INV-0544 Verde Coffee · Stripe $1,800.00 Refund pri Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it Paid before you invoice When a brand pays before the invoice exists, record it as an advance with its own receipt and apply it when you bill. Advance · Northwind Receipt ADV-0007 Applied to INV-0551 −$1,200.00 Unused advance GST and TDS in India Creators billing from India add GST to the invoice, and when a brand deducts TDS, record it with the payment so your books show it as TDS receivable. INV-0560 · fee + GST 18% ₹1,18,000 TDS withheld 10% ₹10,000 Received ₹1,08,000 TDS receivable live Questions Brand deals and invoicing, answered Can I put usage rights and exclusivity into a proposal? Yes. A proposal is built from sections you write, so the usage window, the exclusivity period, revision limits and approval turnaround sit alongside the deliverables and the fee. Save that wording in the content library and pull it into the next deal rather than rewriting it. How do I take a deposit before I make the content? Split and partial payments let one invoice carry a deposit and a balance. Bill a percentage when the brand signs and the rest when the campaign goes live. The portal shows the sponsor what has been received and what is still due against that same total. You can also request the deposit on an estimate, and the brand accepts and pays it in one step. Can I invoice a brand abroad in their own currency? Yes. Multi-currency invoicing sets the document in the customer's currency while your reports total in your base currency. Fifteen payment gateways are available, from PayPal and Stripe through to Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net and Airwallex, so a finance team can pay the way it already does. How do I know which brand deals are still unpaid? The aged debt report groups unpaid invoices by how long they have been overdue, and the invoice report shows what was raised and what settled in a period. Reminders run on the invoice on the schedule you set, and a flat or percentage late fee set when you send the invoice is added automatically if it is still unpaid after the due date, so most of the chasing happens without you. Can invoices carry my own branding? Yes. Invoice templates take your logo and colors, and proposals start from 70+ templates you can adapt. If you run more than one brand, business profiles hold a separate look and a separate set of books for each of them under a single login. What does it cost, and is there a trial? Yes. Every paid plan starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed, and the Basic plan is free forever for everyday invoicing with PayPal. Current prices are on the Pricing page. Get the deal in writing and the fee in on time Write the proposal, take the deposit, invoice in the sponsor's currency and keep the unpaid list short. It is one account, not four tools. Compare plans 30 days free, no credit card asked for Deliverables, fee and usage in one signed document Multi-currency invoicing for overseas sponsors --- ## Invoice Crowd for Videographers URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/videographers/ Quote a video project, collect deposits, invoice milestones and track project expenses and payments with Invoice Crowd for videographers. Estimates, deposits and invoices built for videographers Invoice Crowd lets you build a video estimate with kit, crew, edit days and licensing as separate lines. Agree the extras with the client, save the final scope and request approval. Set out the deposit and final-balance schedule before the shoot. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Videographers Agreed extras in the saved estimate Deposit before the crew rolls Balance due before delivery pop What is inside A shoot priced the way it is actually budgeted Quote video work in parts: days, kit, people, post-production and rights. Agree which parts the client wants before approval, then convert the accepted estimate into an invoice. The quote Every line the budget really has Kit, crew, edit days and licensing as lines A shoot day, a second operator, a gimbal, three edit days and a two-year broadcast term are five different costs, and a client will ask about all five. Save each as an item with its own rate and tax, then assemble the estimate from that list instead of typing rates from memory. Saved items hold their rate and tax Custom tax and discount rates rather than a fixed set Saved items for a wedding film or a brand day you sell often Create an estimate Agree drone, color grade and extra edits Price each extra separately so the client can discuss what to include. Save the agreed lines and quantities before requesting approval. Changes after sharing an estimate need a revised document for the client to review. Give the estimate an expiry date so a held shoot date doesn't stay open forever; the client can also decline it with a reason. Save the agreed extras before requesting approval Editable quantities where you allow them, such as a second shoot day The total recalculates with every choice Explore estimates The money, in two halves Before the shoot and before delivery Deposit before the crew is booked Crew and rental have to be paid whether or not the client changes their mind. A single invoice can carry a deposit now and a balance later, so the money before the shoot and the money before delivery belong to the same document and the same total. Deposit and balance, each with its own due date The client sees what has cleared and what remains Late fees and reminders run on the remainder Deposits and part payments The approved estimate becomes the invoice Convert the approved estimate into an invoice using its saved lines, quantities and totals. Review the resulting invoice and payment schedule before sending it. Approval converts the estimate into an invoice Numbering and the invoice template stay consistent Approved estimate lines carry into the invoice Convert to an invoice After the wrap Post, costs and the final handover Edit hours logged against the project Post is where a fixed-fee job quietly loses money. Log edit hours to a project on the timesheet while they happen, and record the rental, the drives and the freelance colorist as expenses with their receipts. The hours and the costs sit against the job rather than being reconstructed in December, and rentals tagged to the project can be re-billed on the next invoice, with a markup if you add one. Projects and a timesheet for the hours after the shoot Expenses with the receipt attached to the transaction Profit and loss for the period from the same ledger Profit and loss The handover happens on a settled invoice The portal is where a production client looks up its own paperwork: the estimate they approved, every invoice raised against the job, what they have paid and what is still open. Send the final invoice, watch it settle there, then release the delivery. Clients view, approve, download and pay in one place Payment history the client can check without emailing you Fifteen payment gateways, PayPal and Stripe among them Client portal Also included Around the production The same account holds the pitch, the schedule of payments and the costs of the shoot, so nothing moves between tools. Treatment proposals Pitch the concept, the crew and the schedule as a document the client signs in the browser. Brand film treatment SF #f97316 Summit Fitness Co. $8,200.00 Sent info Opened warn Approved ok Signed in the browser Shoot packages Sell a fixed package, such as a highlights film, as a payment link the client pays online. They become a customer with an invoice automatically. Copy Link Copied Two Step Verification 720415 New customer created Editable quantities Let a client add a second shoot day themselves before the estimate is approved. Second shoot day 1 → 2 Rate $800.00 Estimate total $5,400.00 bal Content retainers Bill a flat monthly retainer on a schedule, or set the edit hours it includes and bill extra hours on the next invoice. Summit Fitness Monthly $2,400 #ec4899 Verde Coffee $1,500 #14b8a6 Kestrel Quarterly $3,600 How the client pays Attach PayPal, Stripe, Square, Razorpay or nine others to the invoice you send. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Square #2b2c40 Razorpay #0c2451 Payoneer #ff4800 Braintree #1a1a1a Authorize.net #1c3f94 Airwallex #612fff GoCardless #1c1b18 PayFast #e8412c PayTabs #1f64c1 Telr #0f9d58 M-Pesa #43b02a 15 payment gateways Chasing the balance Automatic reminders and late fees run on overdue invoices without you writing the email. #6366f1 3 Days Before Reminder #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees 1.5% Overdue +$61.50 Rental and gear costs Record camera hire, drives, insurance and travel as expenses with receipts attached. #0ea5e9 Camera hire Equipment $640.00 #a855f7 SSD drives Hardware $258.00 #10b981 Kit insurance Insurance $120.00 Crew on the account Add an editor or producer as a team member with a role that controls what they can open. The Team plan includes two members, Business three. AM ER TW Elena Ruiz · Editor Worklog Tom Whitfield · Producer Invoices Alex Morgan · Owner Full Agencies abroad Invoice an overseas agency in their currency while your own reports total in yours. INV-1290 · Lumina Skincare €6,400.00 Exchange rate 1 EUR = $1.0900 In your books $6,976.00 Rental house bills Raise a purchase order for a gear rental, then record the bill and the payment against that vendor. PO-0077 Convert to Bill BILL-0161 Paid Gear rental recorded against the vendor Branded invoice templates Pick an invoice template that carries the studio's logo and colors on every document you send. Template 1 #4941e3 Template 2 #16a34a Template 3 #ef4b24 Template 4 Template 5 #ef3d10 Template 6 #16b980 Template 7 #9333ea Template 8 Your logo and colors on each Income by period The income report totals what a season of shoots billed, drawn from the same ledger. Income report · 2026 $96,400 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Cancelled shoots A shoot is cancelled? Refund the online deposit through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice, with the credit note made for you. INV-0915 NW Northwind · Stripe $1,250.00 Deposit paid Refund pri Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it What each line cost you Turn on Item Costs and record what a line cost you, such as crew hire or a lens rental, as an expense, so what the job cost sits beside what you charged. Second operator · price $650.00 Crew hire · your cost $400.00 cn Saved as an expense Item Costs Booking fees A booking fee paid before you invoice is recorded as an advance with its own receipt, then applied to the shoot's invoice. Advance · Harbor & Vine Co. $500.00 in Receipt ADV-0012 Applied to INV-0921 −$500.00 Unused advance $0.00 live Questions Quoting and billing a shoot, answered Can a client add or drop extras before approving the estimate? Yes, with one catch. Turn on Remove Items and the client can drop lines before approving, and with Customize Quantity they can change quantities such as shoot days. Remove Items applies to every line, so if the base production cost must stay fixed, agree the extras with the client and save the final estimate before you send it. How do I take a deposit before the shoot? Request a deposit on the estimate, and the client can accept it and pay the deposit in one step; the estimate becomes the invoice and the balance stays open on it. Split and partial payments take the rest before delivery, and the client can see what has been received and what is still outstanding. Does an approved estimate become the invoice automatically? It can. Turn on Auto Convert to Invoice and approval creates the invoice from the same lines and quantities. Otherwise convert it with one click. A deposit paid on acceptance is already on the invoice. Can I track edit hours against a project? Yes. Projects and a timesheet are part of the same account, so hours logged during post are recorded as they happen rather than estimated afterwards. Rentals, drives and freelance invoices go in as expenses, with the receipt kept on the transaction itself. Can I invoice for licensing separately from the shoot? Licensing is a line like any other, with its own rate and tax, so a two-year broadcast term or a usage extension can be quoted on the original estimate or raised later as its own invoice against the same customer. What does Invoice Crowd cost for a one-person outfit? The Basic plan is free forever: unlimited invoices, 5 customers, 1 business profile, 2 invoice templates and PayPal payments. Paid plans add recurring invoices, retainers, timesheets, the accounting statements and more, and each starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed. Current prices are on the Pricing page. Quote the shoot, hold the deposit, deliver on a paid invoice Put the kit, the crew, the edit and the license on one estimate, agree the extras with the client, and bill it in two halves. Compare plans 30 days free, no card required Agreed scope saved before approval Deposit and balance on a single invoice --- ## Invoice Crowd for Event Planners URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/event-planners/ Build event proposals, schedule deposits, invoice milestones, track vendor bills and close each event with clearer records in Invoice Crowd. Proposals, staged invoices and vendor bills for event planners Invoice Crowd lets an event planner quote the event, take a booking deposit, raise each staged invoice as the date approaches, and keep every supplier bill in the same account as the fees charged. An event is booked months ahead and paid for in pieces. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Event Planners Staged payments across the lead time Supplier bills in the same account Headcount changes the quantity pop What is inside Nine months of documents for one afternoon A wedding or a conference generates a quote, a deposit, several staged invoices, a pile of supplier bills and a final reconciliation. All of it belongs to one client and one date. Winning the booking The document the client signs Venue, catering and staffing in one document Event pitches run long: the concept, the run of show, the suppliers, the staffing plan and a budget broken down by category. Build it in sections from a template, price the budget table inside it, and let the client sign in the browser rather than printing a page to scan back. 70+ proposal templates, editable section by section Content library for terms, cancellation and payment schedules E-signature the client adds online Proposal builder Headcount moves, the quantity moves with it Catering, hire and staffing are priced per head, and that number is rarely final until the week of the event. Let the client edit the quantity on the lines you choose, and the line total and the grand total follow. A revised guest list stops being a rebuilt quote. Client-editable quantities on the lines you allow Client-removable items for the extras they may or may not take Totals recalculate as the numbers change Change quantity Paying for it in stages Deposit, interim, balance Booking deposit now, balance before the date Most event contracts are settled in three or four moves across a long lead time. Split and partial payments put the deposit and the remaining amount on the same invoice, so a total is never tracked across separate documents and the client can see how much of it is closed. Deposit and balance held against one total The client sees what has been received and what remains Reminders and late fees on the outstanding amount Split and partial payments Instalments on the dates you agreed A payment schedule agreed in January should not depend on somebody remembering it in June. Give the deposit and each instalment its own due date on the invoice's payment schedule, or raise each stage as its own invoice when the milestone lands, so every stage is tracked against the customer instead of a line in a planning doc. Deposit and instalments, each with its own due date Automatic reminders before a due date passes Aged debt showing which stage went unpaid Payment schedules What the event cost Suppliers on one side, fees on the other Supplier bills beside the event's invoices Florists, AV, venue hire, security and catering all invoice you separately and rarely on time. Record them as vendor bills with purchase orders behind them, track what has been paid and what is still owed to whom, and hold it in the account that already has the client's invoices. Vendors, bills and purchase orders in one place Payments made and vendor credits recorded per supplier Expenses carrying the supplier receipt with them Track expenses The fees and the costs read one ledger Because invoices, supplier bills and expenses all post into the same double-entry ledger, the income, expense and profit and loss reports are drawn from one set of books. Group the work under a project for the event so the documents and the team's hours stay together, and supplier costs tagged to that project can be re-billed on the client's invoice with your markup. Income and expense reports for any period Profit and loss without a separate bookkeeping tool Projects and timesheets for on-site and planning hours Profit and loss The order of documents One event, from the first quote to the closed books Long lead times mean the paperwork outlives the planning. Each document hands to the next inside one account, so nothing is rekeyed between the pitch and the final reconciliation. Start either way proposal Proposal For a pitch that has to sell the concept: run of show, suppliers, staffing and a budget the client signs online. estimate Estimate For a booking that only needs numbers: priced lines and per-head quantities the client can adjust before approving, and the booking deposit paid as they accept. invoice Staged invoices Approval raises the first invoice, and the deposit and later stages all sit against the same customer and the same date. payment Payments in The client settles each stage through the portal using a gateway you connected, in full or as a part payment. accounting Costs and books Supplier bills and expenses post beside the fees, so the ledger holds both sides of the event. Also included The rest of an event planning practice Nothing here is an add-on. It is the same subscription the proposals and the staged invoices already live in. Event packages Save a ceremony, a reception and day-of coordination as priced items, or as a proposal template, and quote them repeatedly. Wedding Wedding ceremony package $4,800.00 Wedding reception setup $3,200.00 Wedding day coordination $1,900.00 Lines the client can drop Turn on item removal and the client can drop a photo booth or an extra hour of bar service before approving. #6366f1 Venue and styling Kept $9,600 #ea5455 Photo booth Removed $0.00 Extra bar hour Client portal Couples and corporate clients check documents, balances and payment history without emailing you. Total Invoiced $14,400 Draper & Lee up Paid $3,600 Deposit Outstanding $10,800 2 stages bad 15 payment gateways PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack attach to an invoice. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Razorpay #0c2451 Square #2b2c40 Payoneer #ff4800 Braintree #1a1a1a Authorize.net #1c3f94 Airwallex #612fff GoCardless #1c1b18 PayFast #e8412c PayTabs #1f64c1 Telr #0f9d58 M-Pesa #43b02a Overdue stages Reminders go out around each invoice's due date, so a late stage is chased without waiting for a free afternoon. 7 Days Before Interim stage Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date Late Fees 1.5% Overdue +$94.50 Coordinators on the account Add planners as team members, two on the Team plan and three on Business, and use roles to control what each person can open. AM SB #ec4899 DO #14b8a6 Sofia Bennett · Planner Invoices Daniel Okafor · On site Worklog Alex Morgan · Owner Full Destination events Invoice a client or a venue abroad in their currency while your reports stay in yours. INV-5126 · Villa in Lisbon €12,000.00 Exchange rate 1 EUR = $1.0900 In your books $13,080.00 bal Aged debt See which stage of which event is unpaid and how far past its due date it has drifted. Age Debt $16,900 1-30 Days 31-60 Days 61-90 Days 91+ Days Weddings and corporate Run two sides of the business as separate profiles with their own branding and books. Northwind Weddings USD Own books Northwind Corporate Northwind Europe EUR Cancellations and refunds Raise a credit note when a booking is canceled, or refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways from the invoice. A sent invoice for a cancelled booking is voided, not deleted. CN-00031 BH #10b981 Bluefin Hospitality · INV-5121 $1,800.00 Open info Refund pri Closed ok Refund recorded, invoice kept as it was Customer-facing invoice updates Clients get each invoice by email with a link to view and pay it, and you see when it is opened. Selected events can also go to a webhook URL you choose. Invoice sent Email Opened Email opened Viewed Link clicked Email and the in-app bell Event reference fields Custom fields carry the event date, venue and booking reference onto the documents you raise for that event. Event date 06/12/2027 Venue Harborview Booking ref WED-0612 Quotes that expire An expiry date on the quote stops a client accepting last year's price for this year's date. They can also decline it with a reason. EST-0332 Expiry date 14 days New quote If it lapses Last year's price stays last year's Booking fees A booking fee paid before the contract is recorded as an advance with its own receipt, then applied to the first invoice. Advance · Harbor & Vine Co. $1,000.00 in Receipt ADV-0021 Applied to INV-1203 −$1,000.00 Unused advance Profit per event Run the event as a project and its Profitability tab takes the fees invoiced, subtracts the team's hours at cost rate and the expenses tagged to it, and shows the margin. Paid plans. Fees invoiced $24,000.00 Team hours at cost −$5,600.00 Supplier costs −$11,900.00 Profit · 27% margin $6,500.00 live Questions Billing an event, answered Can I set up a payment schedule for an event booked a year out? Yes. The invoice's payment schedule holds a deposit and each instalment with its own due date against one total, and the client pays each part from the same link. If you prefer, raise each stage as its own invoice, and reminders go out around each invoice's due date. What happens when the guest count changes? Per-head lines are quantities, so you can let the client edit them on the estimate or proposal and both the line and the grand total follow. Anything they may not take, an extra hour of bar or a second photographer, they can remove themselves when item removal is on. Can I record what suppliers charge me for an event? Yes. Vendors, bills, purchase orders, payments made and vendor credits all sit in the same account as the invoices you raise. Attach receipts to expenses, and the supplier side of an event sits beside the fees instead of living in a separate spreadsheet. Can I see the profit on a single event? Yes, if you group the event under a project. Its Profitability tab takes the fees invoiced, subtracts the team's hours at cost rate and the expenses tagged to it, and shows the profit and margin. Every fee and cost also posts into one double-entry ledger, so the income, expense and profit and loss reports read the same books. Do clients get somewhere to check what they have paid? Yes. The customer portal shows the proposal or estimate they approved, every invoice raised for the event, what has been received and what is still due. They can download a PDF and settle a stage from the same screen through a gateway you connected. Can I run weddings and corporate events as separate businesses? Yes, from the Pro plan up. Business profiles give each operation its own branding, documents and accounting records under one login, and every invoice, bill and expense belongs to its profile. Pro holds two profiles, Team five and Business ten. Book the event, stage the payments, close the file Quote it once, collect the deposit, raise each stage on time, and keep the supplier bills next to the fees they were spent against. Compare plans Test the workflow, no credit card Deposit, interim and balance on schedule Client fees and supplier bills in one ledger --- ## Invoice Crowd for Non-Profits URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/non-profit-organizations/ Prepare estimates and invoices, track expenses, manage projects and keep operational financial records organized with Invoice Crowd for nonprofits. Invoicing and accounting software for nonprofit operations Invoice Crowd lets a nonprofit invoice sponsors, funders and member organizations, record operating expenses under the right accounts, and review the resulting profit and loss, balance sheet and trial balance from one workspace. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home Use Cases Non-Profit Organizations Chart of 148 accounts One profile per program Board-ready statements pop What is inside From the funder's invoice to the year-end pack A non-profit's books have to answer two questions: who still owes you, and what happened to money that was given for a purpose. Both are answered from the same entries. Money coming in Sponsors, funders, members and anyone else you bill Invoice a sponsor or a grant funder Funders and sponsors are customer records, with their own contacts, currency and payment terms. Bill against a grant reference, a purchase order number or a cost center using custom fields, and the invoice carries your organization's logo and the wording your finance policy requires. A grant paid before you invoice is held as an advance and applied to the invoices it covers, and one payment can settle several invoices. Custom fields for grant, program and reference numbers Payment terms and due dates set per funder Credit notes when an amount is reduced or returned Customer records Pledges and sponsorships that repeat A corporate sponsor paying quarterly, a partner organization on an annual agreement, a service contract billed every month. Set the amount, the schedule and the start date once and the invoice is raised and sent on each date without anyone marking a calendar. Weekly, monthly, quarterly or annual cycles Pause or stop a schedule at any time Reminders before and after the due date, on the schedule you set Recurring invoices Where the money goes Filed to an account, not to a memory Program spend, filed to a named account Each payment out is posted to an account from a chart that arrives with 148 of them, 103 on the expense side. Add accounts for the categories a funder asks you to report against, and attach the receipt to the entry so the evidence stays with the figure. Record the tax on each expense; if you can't reclaim it, it stays in the cost where a funder expects to see it. Add accounts to match a funder's categories Attach the receipt or supplier invoice to the entry Recurring entries for rent, insurance and subscriptions Expense tracking A budget per account, checked as the year runs Set what a program is meant to spend on each account and read the variance while there is still time to act on it. Budget against actuals sits next to the ledger it draws from, so the figure a trustee questions can be traced in the general ledger to the entries that produced it. Budget set account by account Variance visible long before year end The general ledger lists the postings behind each account What the board sees The pack a treasurer or an auditor asks for Statements produced from the same entries Income and expenditure across the year in monthly columns, a balance sheet as at any date, a trial balance that has to balance, and a cash flow statement drawn from the same postings. Nothing is retyped from a spreadsheet, so a question at a board meeting has an answer underneath it. Balance sheet and trial balance for the auditor Aged debt showing which invoices are still unpaid Reports emailed on a schedule you set Profit and loss statement One business profile per program Where a program needs its own books, a business profile keeps its logo, documents, invoices, accounts and statements separate under one login. Pro holds two profiles, Team five and Business ten. Separate books without a second subscription One to ten profiles depending on the plan Team members invited with the role you choose The accounting module Also included The rest of what a small organization needs All of this is in the same subscription, whether you are a two-person charity or a foundation running several programs. Customer portal Funders open, download and pay their invoices in one place instead of asking for a resend. Total Invoiced $90,000 Cedar Valley up Paid $45,000 INV-0610 Outstanding INV-0642 bad Online payment PayPal, Stripe, Razorpay, Square, Payoneer, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless, PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, M-Pesa, PhonePe and Paystack attach to the invoice. PayPal #003087 Stripe #635bff Razorpay #0c2451 Square #2b2c40 Payoneer #ff4800 Braintree #1a1a1a Authorize.net #1c3f94 Airwallex #612fff GoCardless #1c1b18 PayFast #e8412c PayTabs #1f64c1 Telr #0f9d58 M-Pesa #43b02a 15 payment gateways Overseas grants Bill an overseas funder in the currency of the grant while reporting in your base currency. INV-0650 · EU arts fund €20,000.00 Exchange rate 1 EUR = $1.0900 Grant income $21,800.00 bal Estimates and proposals Set out a piece of work for a funder and collect an approval signature online. Literacy program 2027 CV #14b8a6 Cedar Valley Community Fund $90,000.00 Sent info Opened warn Approved ok Signed online by the funder Team roles Invite a bookkeeper, a program lead or a treasurer and give each the access they need. AM #6366f1 PN JC #f59e0b Priya Nair · Bookkeeper Edit James Carter · Treasurer Export Alex Morgan · Director Full Outbound webhooks Send new and updated invoices, customers, expenses and incomes to a webhook URL you choose, for example to keep a funder spreadsheet up to date. Income created Donor CRM #0ea5e9 Your sheet #16a34a Pabbly Connect Scheduled reports Have the month's figures arrive by email before the meeting rather than after it. #10b981 Income Monthly 1st Expense #ea5455 Age Debt Weekly Mon Locked periods Lock a closed year so nothing is posted into it after the accounts are signed off. Only the owner can lock or unlock, and every change is logged. INV-0642 · 09/30/2026 +$45,000.00 in Rent, October −$3,200.00 cn Printing, Sep −$690.00 Bank Account balance $128,410.00 Bank reconciliation Tie the ledger to the bank statement period by period, so nothing is missed at year end. Bank rules suggest the account for a statement line, so reconciliation goes faster. Statement balance Ledger balance Auto-matched 37 of 37 Difference $0.00 Suppliers and bills Enter what a supplier charges as a bill, and raise a purchase order first when spend needs approval. PO-0019 Convert to Bill BILL-0073 Spend approved before it is billed Manual journals Post an adjustment or a year-end correction directly to the ledger, with both sides of the entry recorded. MJ-0012 · Year-end accrual Dr Rent or Lease $3,200.00 Cr Accruals Journal balanced Dr = Cr Opening balances Enter what each account held on the day you started, so the first year's statements are complete. Bank Account · 10/01/2025 $84,200.00 Accounts Receivable $12,500.00 Opening Balance equity $96,700.00 A project per grant Run a grant as a project with a cost and revenue budget, and get a warning when it reaches 80% of budget. Paid plans. Literacy grant · cost budget 82% used Q1 20 Q2 42 Q3 64 Q4 82 Grants paid up front Record a grant paid before you invoice as an advance with its own receipt, then apply it to the invoices it covers. Advance · Northwind Foundation $12,000.00 Applied to INV-0081 −$6,000.00 Applied to INV-0094 −$4,000.00 Unused advance $2,000.00 Payment reminders Reminders go out before and after the due date on the schedule you set, and you can switch them off for a funder who shouldn't receive them. 7 Days Before Reminder #ff9f43 On Due Date #94a3b8 Brightpath Trust Reminders off Skipped live Questions Non-profit finances in Invoice Crowd, answered Can Invoice Crowd track donations as well as invoices? It is invoicing and accounting software rather than a donation platform. Money in is recorded as an invoice or an income entry against an account you choose, so sponsorship, grants, membership fees and service income all land in the same ledger and the same statements. Can Invoice Crowd replace specialist nonprofit fund accounting? Not fully. There is no fund accounting, so restricted and unrestricted funds aren't tracked as separate balances. Many small organizations use a separate account or business profile per program instead. Check with your accountant whether that meets your reporting rules. What reports can we hand to a board or an auditor? Profit and loss by month, a balance sheet as at a date, trial balance, cash flow, and the general ledger behind all of them. Alongside those sit aged debt, expense and income reports. Each one exports to spreadsheet or PDF, and the invoice, income, expense and aged debt reports can also arrive by email on a schedule. Can we run several programs under one login? Yes, from the Pro plan up. A business profile keeps a program's invoices, accounts and statements separate, with its own name and logo on documents. Pro holds two profiles, Team five and Business ten. Do you handle grants paid in another currency? Yes. An invoice can be raised in the funder's currency while your accounts continue to total in the one currency you report in. That keeps a euro grant and a dollar grant comparable in the same income statement without anyone converting figures by hand. What does this cost a small organization? The Basic plan is free forever: unlimited invoices, 5 customers, 1 business profile, 2 invoice templates and PayPal payments. Paid plans add recurring invoices, the accounting statements, Lock Transactions and more, and each starts with a 30-day free trial with no card needed. Current prices are on the Pricing page. Put the funding and the accounts in one place Bill the funder, file the spend, and let the statements assemble themselves from the entries behind them. Thirty days is long enough to run a month of your own figures through it. Compare plans Chart of 148 accounts on day one A profile for each program Trial for 30 days, no card --- ## Invoice Crowd for Photographers URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/photographers/ Create photography proposals and estimates, collect partial payments, record production expenses and invoice clients in one connected financial workflow. For photography businesses Invoicing software for photographers, from estimate to final balance Invoice Crowd lets photographers quote the shoot, take a deposit when the client accepts, collect the rest in instalments and keep expenses beside the final invoice. Your gallery and booking tools keep doing their jobs. Try Invoice Crowd See all features Home Use Cases Photographers Proposals and estimates Deposits and instalments Expenses with receipts and tax pop The workflow A clearer money path for every shoot Photography billing begins before the camera comes out. These three steps keep the package, the payment stages and your costs in one place, while your gallery and booking tools keep doing their jobs. Scope the work Make the package and price easy to understand Present packages in a proposal or estimate Describe the session, deliverables, usage terms and price in a proposal or estimate. Agree the extras with the client, or turn on item removal and let them drop lines before approving, and they approve and sign in the browser. Clear package and deliverable descriptions Approval and signature in the browser Agreed extras appear in the saved estimate Explore proposals Stage the billing Keep the accepted scope and payment stages connected Move from an accepted estimate to the invoice Convert the agreed estimate into an invoice instead of rebuilding it. Turn on split payments and the client pays a deposit and then instalments by set dates, with the balance always shown on the invoice. Accepted amounts carry into invoicing Deposit and instalments with their own due dates Customer history keeps documents together See partial payments Know the business cost Record what the project consumed Keep rentals, travel and production expenses visible Record equipment hire, travel and print production with the vendor, category, amount and receipt, and add the tax you paid so any tax you can reclaim is tracked separately. Vendor and category on every cost The receipt kept on the entry Tax on expenses, with reclaimable tax kept apart Track expenses Why it fits Why photographers bill from here The quote, the deposit, the instalments and the costs of a shoot sit in one account, so nothing is retyped between them. one-login 1 account From quote to final balance The estimate the client accepts becomes the invoice, and every deposit and instalment is recorded against it. customer Per client Every shoot for a client in one record Each client's record holds their estimates, invoices, payments and balance. gateways 15 gateways Paid the way the client prefers Connect PayPal, Stripe, Square or ten others and the client pays from the invoice. PayPal works on the free plan too. currency Multi-currency Destination and overseas clients Invoice a client abroad in their currency while your reports stay in yours. live Also included The rest of a photography business Everything below is in the same account as your estimates and invoices, reading the same clients. Mini-session payment links Sell a fixed mini-session package as a payment link. The client pays online and becomes a customer with an invoice automatically. Copy Link Copied Two Step Verification 482613 New customer created Deposit on acceptance Request a deposit on the estimate and the client accepts and pays it in one step. The estimate becomes the invoice with the balance still open. Accept EST-0418 Pay deposit $900.00 Invoiced INV-0418 Accepted and invoiced in one step Quotes that expire Give an estimate an expiry date so last season's price can't be accepted for next year's wedding. The client can also decline it with a reason. Sent EST-0421 Expiry date 30 days New quote If it lapses Old prices stay in the past Payment schedule Set a deposit and instalments, each with its own due date, and the client pays each part from the same invoice. Deposit · paid in Instalment 1 · due 15 Mar $1,050.00 Instalment 2 · due 15 May Invoice total $3,000.00 bal Refunds A session is cancelled? Refund an online payment through Stripe, PayPal, Square and five other gateways straight from the invoice. INV-0412 AM #ec4899 Alex Morgan · Stripe $450.00 Paid ok Refund pri Credit note info Booked once the provider confirms it Reminders and late fees Reminders go out before and after the due date. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. #6366f1 7 Days Before Reminder #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees 2% Overdue +$21.00 Client portal Clients you invite sign in to see every estimate and invoice you sent them, what they have paid and what is still due. Total Invoiced $3,000 1 invoice up $1,950 2 payments Outstanding $1,050 Due 15 May bad Saved items Keep your packages, prints and albums as saved items with their prices, then add them to any estimate or invoice. Album Lay-flat album 10x10 · Product $480.00 Parent album 8x8 · Product $260.00 Album design · Service $150.00 Booking fees Record a booking fee before the invoice exists and download a numbered receipt for it, then apply it when you bill. Advance · Alex Morgan $300.00 Receipt ADV-0004 Applied to INV-0418 −$300.00 Unused advance $0.00 Profit and loss On a paid plan, the profit and loss shows what the business kept after rentals, prints, travel and second shooters. Net profit by month $14,820 Apr 35 May 60 Jun 85 Jul 70 Aug 90 Sep 55 Weddings and commercial apart Run wedding and commercial work as separate business profiles, each with its own branding and books. Pro holds two profiles. Weddings Portraits Own branding #16a34a Commercial #0ea5e9 Product shoots #f59e0b Own books #2b2c40 Two profiles on Pro Compare like with like When you compare tools, test each one on the same job: a package quote, a deposit and the final balance. Proposals #4941e3 Estimates Invoices #ef4b24 Payments Expenses #9333ea Accounting One account for the money side Questions Photographers invoicing, answered Can photographers create proposals and estimates in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Create proposals and estimates with scope, pricing and terms, and the client approves and signs in the browser. Agree additions or removals with the client and save the revised estimate, or turn on Remove Items and Customize Quantity and let the client adjust the estimate before approving. Can I collect a photography deposit? Yes. Request a deposit on the estimate and the client can accept it and pay the deposit in one step; the estimate becomes an invoice with the balance still open. A payment schedule covers the instalments after it, and the client pays through any gateway you connected. How does Invoice Crowd fit with photography studio software? Use Invoice Crowd for proposals, estimates, deposits, invoices, payments and financial records while your preferred studio platform manages scheduling, proofing and image delivery. Can I record equipment rental and travel expenses? Yes. Record each cost with its vendor, category, amount, tax and receipt, and it shows up in your expense reports. Can I invoice international photography clients? Yes. Invoice in the client's currency while your reports stay in yours, and the exchange rate is stored with each invoice. The client pays through any gateway you connected. Is there a client history for photography customers? Yes. Each customer record keeps their proposals, estimates, invoices, payments and balance together, and clients you invite to the customer portal can sign in to see every document you sent them. Quote the shoot, take the deposit, close the balance Send the estimate, take the deposit when the client accepts, and let the instalments and reminders run until the balance is paid. Review pricing No card required to start Free Basic plan for everyday invoicing Deposit, instalments and final balance on one invoice --- ## Invoice Crowd for Virtual Assistants URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/virtual-assistants/ Manage virtual assistant retainers, billable time, recurring invoices, international clients and payments in one connected financial workspace. For virtual assistant businesses Invoicing software for virtual assistants with retainers and billable time Invoice Crowd lets a virtual assistant bill a monthly retainer with included hours, record project time and invoice clients in the currency agreed. Clients can approve your hours in their portal before the invoice goes out. Try Invoice Crowd See all features Home Use Cases Virtual Assistants Billable project time Retainers with included hours Invoices in the client's currency pop The workflow Retainer billing without losing the work behind it A virtual assistant may combine a stable monthly fee with overage hours, one-off projects and client expenses. These screens put each part on the right invoice. Record the variable work Attach time to a client project instead of a loose sheet Keep billable time tied to the right project Use projects, tasks and timesheet entries to record work that sits outside the fixed retainer. Bill those hours on the next invoice, rounded to 6, 15 or 30 minutes if you like, without turning the invoice into a task list. Time attached to a project and task Unbilled work stays visible Idle time removed when you step away See time tracking Schedule the stable fee Raise the recurring part on the agreed cycle Put the monthly retainer and its hours on one schedule Set up a retainer with the monthly fee and the hours it includes. Time you log on that client's projects counts against the allowance, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours go on the next invoice. A flat fee with no hours can stay a plain recurring invoice. Clients can see their retainer hours in the portal and approve or question each week's hours before you invoice. Hours included each month on the invoice Unused hours carry over or expire Retainer time is never billed twice Retainers Keep each client's details The right customer and currency on every record Organize international client records Each client's details, currency and balance are reused on every proposal and invoice, so you bill in the currency you agreed. Keep their passwords and inbox access in a password manager, not here. Customer details reused across documents Each client billed in their own currency Financial history kept apart from passwords Manage customers Why it fits Why virtual assistants bill from here The retainer, the extra hours and the client's approval of them sit on one record, so the invoice is never a guess. one-login 1 account Time, retainers and invoices together Log the hours, count them against the retainer and bill the extra, without exporting a timesheet. Paid plans. customer Per client Clients approve the hours In the customer portal, clients see their retainer hours and approve or question each week before you invoice. They see hours, never rates. gateways 15 gateways Paid from the invoice Connect PayPal, Stripe, Payoneer or ten others and clients pay from the invoice. PayPal works on the free plan too. currency Multi-currency Clients in any country Invoice each client in their own currency while your reports total in yours. live Also included The rest of a VA business These sit in the same account as your retainers, hours and invoices. A timer that notices you left Start a timer from the header. If you step away, keep the time, remove the idle part or stop at the moment you left, and a forgotten timer stops automatically. Timer Inbox triage Away 25 min Remove Idle time Only the time you worked is logged Rounded on the invoice Bill unbilled hours up to a date, rounded to 6, 15 or 30 minutes if you like. Only the invoice is rounded; your logged minutes never change. Logged · Verde Coffee Roasters 7 h 52 min Each entry rounded to 15 min 8 h 00 min At $35 an hour $280.00 Invoice preview bal Reminders and late fees Reminders go out before and after the due date. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. #6366f1 3 Days Before Reminder Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees $15 Overdue +$15.00 AI Assistant Type “log 2h on Northwind inbox yesterday” and the assistant drafts the time entry for you to confirm. Paid plans, with AI credits. Ask Log 2h Draft Time entry Confirm You approve Nothing is saved until you confirm Prepaid hours Prepaid hours are recorded as an advance with its own receipt, then applied to the invoices they cover. Advance · Harbor & Vine Co. $700.00 in Receipt ADV-0009 Applied to INV-0233 −$700.00 Unused advance $0.00 Subcontractors On the Team or Business plan, invite a subcontractor with a role and limit them to selected customers only. Role Assistant Customers Selected only Accounting No access Client portal Clients sign in to see every invoice you sent them, what they have paid and how their retainer hours are going. Retainer · October 14 of 20 h Wk 1 30 Wk 2 55 Wk 3 70 Wk 4 Hour packs as payment links Sell a fixed starter pack, such as five hours of inbox support, as a payment link the client pays online. They become a customer with an invoice automatically. Copy Link Copied Two Step Verification 719204 New customer created Compare like with like When you compare tools, test each one on the same job: a retainer, two overage entries and a foreign-currency invoice. Proposals #4941e3 Estimates #16a34a Invoices #ef4b24 Payments #0ea5e9 Expenses #9333ea #2b2c40 Same test month in every tool Questions Virtual assistant invoicing, answered Can virtual assistants track billable time in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Start the timer or log time against a client's project and task. If you step away, you can remove the idle time when you come back. Time tracking needs a paid plan. Can I create recurring invoices for VA retainers? Yes. A retainer is a monthly recurring invoice with an hours allowance: logged hours count against it and overage goes on the next invoice. For a flat fee with no hours, a recurring invoice holds the amount, customer, currency and schedule. Both need a paid plan. How does Invoice Crowd fit into a virtual assistant tool stack? Use it for proposals, time, retainers, invoices and payments, and keep using your task and chat tools for the daily work. Can I invoice virtual assistant clients in different currencies? Yes. Invoice each client in their own currency while your reports total in yours, and they pay through any of the gateways you connected. Can subcontractors use the same account? Yes, on the Team plan (two members) or Business plan (three). Each person gets a role, and you can limit a member to selected customers only. Where should I keep client credentials? Use a dedicated password manager approved for that purpose. Do not store passwords or access secrets in invoices, customer notes or time entries. Bill the retainer and the extra hours from one place Set up the retainer, log the work and let the client approve the hours before the invoice goes out. Review pricing Free Basic plan for everyday invoicing 30-day free trial, no card needed Retainer hours counted, never billed twice --- ## Invoice Crowd for Consultants URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/consultants/ Connect consulting proposals, project time, retainers, expenses, invoices and online payments in one client-focused financial workflow. For independent consultants and advisory firms Invoicing software for consultants who bill scope, time and retainers Invoice Crowd takes a consultant from a signed proposal to project time, expenses tagged to the client, retainers and the client invoice in one account. Try Invoice Crowd See all features Home Use Cases Consultants Proposal approval and signature Project and hourly billing Retainers and expenses pop The workflow Make every consulting charge traceable to the engagement Fixed diagnostics, hourly advisory work and monthly retainers are billed in different ways. Invoice Crowd keeps the scope, the hours, the costs and the invoices for an engagement in one place. Agree the engagement Scope and price before delivery starts Put deliverables, fees and terms into a proposal Create a proposal that explains the engagement, phases, price and terms, then let the client approve and sign it in the browser. When it is approved, convert the proposal into the first invoice. Clear phases and commercial terms Browser approval and signature An approved proposal converts to an invoice Build proposals Support the variable fee Project time stays attached to the work Record time against the consulting project Log time against the client's project and task, then bill the unbilled hours straight from that record. Clients can approve or question each week's hours in the customer portal before you invoice; they see hours, never rates. Each project's Profitability tab then sets the hours at your cost rate, and the expenses, against what you billed. Time logged to a project and task Weekly hours approved by the client Profit and margin for each project Explore timesheets Separate fees from costs Travel and research remain distinct records Keep reimbursable expenses visible Record travel, research and other business costs with the vendor, category, amount, tax and receipt. When your terms allow it, expenses tagged to a project can be re-billed on the next time invoice, with an optional markup. Vendor and category detail The receipt kept on the entry Costs do not disappear into a fee total Track expenses Why it fits Why consultants bill from here Scope, hours, retainers and costs end up on the same invoice, so an engagement never has to be pieced together from four tools. one-login 1 record Hours, approvals and invoices in one record Time is logged, approved by the client and billed from the same project, so every hourly line has the entries behind it. customer Monthly Retainers that count hours A retainer counts the hours you log against the monthly allowance, carries unused hours over or lets them expire, and bills extra hours on the next invoice. Paid plans. gateways 15 gateways Paid from the invoice Connect Stripe (including US bank payments), PayPal, GoCardless or ten others, and the client pays from the invoice. currency Multi-currency Clients in other countries Invoice a client abroad in their currency while your reports total in yours, with the exchange rate stored on each invoice. live Also included The rest of a consulting practice These sit in the same account as your proposals, hours and invoices. Client hour approvals Clients approve or question each week's billable hours on their project in the customer portal. They see hours, never rates. Week of 6 Oct LA #f59e0b Lumen Architects 14.5 h Logged info Client approved ok Invoiced pri Hours only, never rates Timesheet approvals Associates submit their week and you or a timesheet manager approve it, and a project can require approved time before it is billed. Paid plans. JD #6366f1 Week 41 · 38.0 h Submitted Approved RK #14b8a6 Week 41 · 31.5 h SM Week 41 · 12.0 h Sent back Fixed Reminders and late fees Reminders go out before and after the due date. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. 7 Days Before Reminder Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees 1.5% Overdue +$63.00 Retainers paid up front A retainer paid in advance is held as an advance with its own receipt, then applied to the invoices it covers. Advance · Northwind $6,000.00 in Applied to INV-0710 −$2,000.00 Applied to INV-0731 Unused advance $2,000.00 bal Lock Transactions Lock a finished period so its numbers can't change once the books are closed. Only the owner can lock or unlock, and every change is logged. Paid plans. Invoicing Locked to 30 Sep Purchases Accounting AI Assistant Type “log 2h on the Northwind strategy review yesterday” and the assistant drafts the time entry for you to confirm. Paid plans, with AI credits. Ask Log 2h Draft Time entry Confirm You approve Nothing is saved until you confirm Connect your other tools Send invoices, customers and expenses to your other tools through webhooks or Pabbly Connect. Invoice updated #16a34a Pabbly Connect Your CRM #0ea5e9 Your sheet TDS for clients in India Billing from India? When a client deducts TDS, record it with the payment and it is booked to TDS receivable. INV-0742 · fee ₹2,00,000 TDS withheld 10% ₹20,000 Received ₹1,80,000 TDS receivable Compare like with like When you compare tools, test each one on the same job: a fixed diagnostic, two hourly entries and a retainer. Proposals #4941e3 Estimates Invoices #ef4b24 Payments Expenses #9333ea #2b2c40 Same test job in every tool Questions Consultants invoicing, answered Can consultants create and sign proposals in Invoice Crowd? Yes. A proposal sets out scope, pricing and terms, and the client approves and signs it in the browser, by typing or drawing a signature. Can I bill consulting work by the hour? Yes. Log time to a project and task, then the invoice wizard bills the unbilled hours up to a date you pick, rounded to 6, 15 or 30 minutes if you want. Review the entries before you send the invoice. Can I schedule a consulting retainer? Yes. A recurring invoice handles a flat monthly fee. If the retainer covers a set number of hours, a retainer counts the time you log against that allowance, carries unused hours over or lets them expire, and bills extra hours on the next invoice without billing that time twice. Retainers need a paid plan. How does Invoice Crowd fit with consulting CRM or resource planning? Use Invoice Crowd for proposals, time, retainers, expenses, invoices, payments and the books, alongside the CRM or planning tool your firm already uses. There is no built-in CRM sync, but webhooks and Pabbly Connect can send invoices, customers and expenses across. Can I record consulting travel and research costs? Yes. Record each cost with its vendor, category, amount, tax and receipt. Tag it to the client's project and it can be re-billed on the next invoice, with a markup if your agreement allows. Can consulting clients pay online? Yes. Connect any of 15 gateways, such as Stripe (including US bank payments), PayPal or GoCardless, and the client pays from the invoice. The provider's own fees apply. Bill the engagement the way you agreed it Send the proposal, log the hours, let the retainer count them and invoice it all from one account. Review pricing Free Basic plan for everyday invoicing 30-day free trial, no card needed Hours, retainers and expenses on one invoice --- ## Invoice Crowd for Cleaning Businesses URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/cleaning-businesses/ Quote cleaning services, reuse service items, schedule recurring invoices, collect payments and track supply expenses in one financial workflow. For owner-operated cleaning businesses Invoicing software for cleaning businesses with repeat services Invoice Crowd lets a cleaning business reuse service items, quote the work, schedule recurring invoices, charge regular customers automatically and record supply costs in one account. Try Invoice Crowd See all features Home Use Cases Cleaning Businesses Reusable service items Recurring invoices Supply and vendor expenses pop The workflow Repeatable services without repetitive billing setup A weekly clean can still have extras, pauses and supply costs. These three steps keep the quote and the billing in order, while your crew schedule stays in the tool you already use. Standardize the service list Reuse names, descriptions and prices Save the services you quote repeatedly Create reusable service items for regular cleans, deep cleans and common add-ons. Bring those items into an estimate so the customer can see what is included and what changes the price. Reusable service names and descriptions Consistent selling prices Clear add-ons in the estimate Explore items Repeat the billing cycle Keep the next invoice visible Schedule invoices for regular customers On a paid plan, put a regular clean on a recurring invoice, weekly, monthly or on your own cycle, and see when the next one goes out. Pause it for a skipped month, invoice one-off extras separately, and switch a regular customer to automatic charging once they approve it. Visible recurring invoice schedule Pause and resume a schedule Charge a card or bank mandate automatically Track what the work consumed Supplies and repairs belong in the books Record supplies, equipment and vendor costs Record cleaning supplies, equipment servicing and other costs with the vendor, category, amount, tax and receipt, so you can see what the business spends beside what it bills. Supply and equipment categories The receipt kept on each cost Costs beside what you billed in your reports Track expenses Why it fits Why cleaning businesses bill from here Regular customers, one-off deep cleans and supply costs sit in one account, and the money for each clean comes in without a chase. one-login 1 account Quote, bill and get paid Quote a deep clean, put the weekly clean on a recurring invoice and see every payment against it. customer Per customer Every visit billed to one record Each customer's record holds their estimates, invoices, payments and balance. gateways 15 gateways Card, bank or PayPal Customers pay from the invoice through Stripe, Square, PayPal, GoCardless or another of the 15 gateways. PayPal works on the free plan too. brands Up to 10 profiles Homes and offices kept apart Run residential and commercial cleaning as separate business profiles, each with its own branding and books. Pro holds two. live Also included The rest of a cleaning business These sit in the same account as your services, recurring invoices and payments. Automatic charging Switch a regular customer to automatic charging. Once they approve it, each cycle is charged to their card or bank mandate through Stripe, Square, GoCardless or another gateway that supports it. Paid plans. REC-0042 · Weekly HV #14b8a6 Harbor & Vine Co. $180.00 Approved ok Charged info Paid Collected through the gateway each cycle One payment, several invoices One transfer covering four weekly cleans? Record it once and it settles the oldest invoices first, with anything left kept as credit. Payment · Lumen Architects $500.00 in INV-0611 · INV-0614 −$240.00 INV-0617 · INV-0620 Kept as credit $20.00 bal Reminders and late fees Reminders go out before and after the due date. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. #6366f1 1 Day Before Reminder Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees $10 Overdue +$10.00 Reminders off for one customer Turn off automatic reminders for a long-standing customer you would rather call yourself, and everyone else is still chased on schedule. Verde Coffee Roasters Reminders on Northwind Alex Morgan Reminders off Deposit on acceptance Ask for a deposit on a move-out or deep-clean estimate, and the customer accepts and pays it in one step. Accept EST-0207 Pay deposit $150.00 Invoiced INV-0207 Accepted and invoiced in one step Quotes that expire Put an expiry date on a quote so an old price can't be accepted months later. The customer can also decline it with a reason. EST-0211 Expiry date 14 days New quote If it lapses Old prices stay in the past Supervisors on the account On the Team or Business plan, invite a supervisor with a role and limit them to selected customers only. Role Supervisor Customers Selected only Accounting No access Customer portal Customers you invite sign in to see every invoice you sent them, what they have paid and what is still due. Total Invoiced $2,160 12 invoices up $1,980 11 invoices Outstanding $180 1 invoice bad Compare like with like When you compare tools, test each one on the same job: a weekly service, a deep-clean add-on and a supply expense. Proposals #4941e3 Estimates #16a34a Invoices #ef4b24 Payments #0ea5e9 Expenses #9333ea #2b2c40 Same test week in every tool Questions Cleaning business invoicing, answered Can cleaning businesses save reusable service items? Yes. Save each service with its description and price, then add it to any estimate or invoice. Can I create recurring invoices for regular cleaning clients? Yes, on a paid plan. A recurring invoice goes out on the cycle you set, and can charge the customer automatically once they approve it. It doesn't schedule the cleaning visit itself. How does Invoice Crowd fit with cleaning scheduling software? Use Invoice Crowd for quotes, recurring invoices, payment collection, customer balances and expense records alongside the scheduling or workforce tool your team prefers. Can I record cleaning supplies and equipment expenses? Yes. Record supplies, equipment servicing and other costs with the vendor, category, amount, tax and receipt. Can customers pay cleaning invoices online? Yes. Connect Stripe, Square, PayPal, GoCardless or another of the 15 gateways and customers pay from the invoice. With Stripe, Square or GoCardless, a recurring invoice can also charge them automatically once they approve it. Where should I store property access codes? Use a controlled field-service or password system. Do not store door codes or alarm instructions in customer-facing invoice notes. Bill the regular cleans without rebuilding the invoice Save your services, put each regular customer on a recurring invoice and let reminders handle the late ones. Review pricing Free Basic plan for everyday invoicing 30-day free trial, no card needed Recurring invoices and automatic charging --- ## Invoice Crowd for Coaches URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/coaches/ Sell coaching packages with proposals, payment links, recurring invoices, partial payments and connected client financial records. For coaching businesses Invoicing software for coaches selling packages and retainers Invoice Crowd lets coaches present the engagement in a proposal, share a reusable payment link or schedule recurring invoices, collect payments and keep every client balance visible. Try Invoice Crowd See all features Home Use Cases Coaches Proposal-led packages Reusable payment links Recurring invoice schedules pop The workflow A commercial workflow around the coaching offer From the signed proposal to the monthly invoice, every coaching package is billed from the same account, and each client's balance stays in view. Explain the engagement Package, price and terms before payment Present the coaching package in a proposal Describe the package, its price, the payment terms and your conditions, and the client approves and signs it in the browser. Keep private session goals out of the finance document. Clear commercial package description Browser approval and signature Private coaching notes remain separate Build proposals Share a fixed offer A link the client pays online Create a reusable payment link for a package Turn a fixed package into a payment link and share it anywhere. The client pays online, becomes a customer automatically and gets an invoice, so there is nothing to set up by hand. One link you can share anywhere The client is added as a customer when they pay Let clients pick a quantity, such as extra sessions See payment links Bill an ongoing engagement Use a visible schedule for the stable fee Schedule recurring invoices for continuing coaching On a paid plan, put a flat monthly fee on a recurring invoice and see when the next one goes out, with each payment recorded against the client's balance. When the fee buys a set number of hours each month, a retainer counts the hours you log against it and bills any extra on the next invoice. Visible next-send date Hours included each month on a retainer Separate from session booking and notes Recurring invoices and retainers Why it fits Why coaches bill from here Packages, instalments and monthly plans all end in the same place: an invoice the client can pay online. one-login 1 account Proposal, payment link and invoice Sell the package in a signed proposal or a payment link, and every payment lands against the client's balance. customer Per client Each client's history in one record Estimates, invoices, payments and the balance for each client, and a portal where they can see them too. gateways 15 gateways Paid by card, bank or PayPal Connect Stripe, PayPal, Square or ten others and clients pay from the invoice or the payment link. PayPal works on the free plan too. currency Multi-currency Clients in other countries Invoice an international client in their currency while your reports total in yours. live Also included The rest of a coaching practice These sit in the same account as your proposals, payment links and invoices. Instalment plans Split a package into a deposit and instalments, each with its own due date, and the client pays each part from the same invoice. Deposit · paid $600.00 in Instalment 1 · due 1 Nov Instalment 2 · due 1 Dec Package total $1,800.00 bal Monthly card subscriptions Run a monthly coaching plan as a subscription: once the client approves it, their card is charged each month through Stripe, Square or another gateway. Clients can cancel a Stripe or Square subscription from their portal. Paid plans. SUB-0019 · Monthly AM #ec4899 Alex Morgan · monthly $250.00 Approved ok Charged info Paid Charged through the gateway each month Refunds Refund a payment made on an invoice through Stripe, PayPal and six other gateways, straight from the invoice. This works on one-off invoices, not subscriptions or payment links. INV-0388 NW #6366f1 Northwind · PayPal $300.00 Refund pri Credit note Booked once the provider confirms it Packages paid up front A package paid up front is held as an advance with its own receipt, then applied as you invoice the sessions. Advance · Alex Morgan $1,200.00 Applied to INV-0391 −$400.00 Applied to INV-0397 Unused advance $400.00 Reminders and late fees Reminders go out before and after the due date. Set a flat or percentage late fee when you send the invoice, and it is added automatically if the invoice is still unpaid after the due date. 3 Days Before Reminder Sent #ff9f43 On Due Date #ea5455 Late Fees 2% Overdue +$12.00 Client portal Clients you invite sign in to see every invoice you sent them, what they have paid and what is still due. Total Invoiced $1,800 1 invoice up $1,200 2 payments Outstanding $600 Due 1 Dec bad Proposal templates Start from 70+ proposal templates and keep your terms, method and bio in a content library for the next client. Coach Coaching terms · Section Library Coaching bio · Section Coaching package · Template Saved Saved items Keep sessions, workshops and assessments as saved items with their prices, then add them to any proposal, estimate or invoice. Session 1:1 session · 60 min · Service $150.00 Session pack · 6 · Service $810.00 Team workshop · Service Compare like with like When you compare tools, test each one on the same job: a package, a partial payment and a finite billing schedule. Proposals #4941e3 Estimates #16a34a Invoices #ef4b24 Payments #0ea5e9 Expenses #9333ea Accounting #2b2c40 Same test client in every tool Questions Coaching invoices, answered Can coaches sell packages through Invoice Crowd? Yes. Describe the package in a proposal the client signs, or sell it from a payment link the client pays online. Can I create recurring invoices for coaching retainers? Yes, on a paid plan. A recurring invoice bills a flat monthly fee, and a retainer counts the hours you log against a monthly allowance. Neither books the sessions themselves. How does Invoice Crowd fit with coaching or scheduling software? Use Invoice Crowd for proposals, package pricing, payment links, recurring invoices, payments and client balances alongside your preferred scheduling or program-delivery platform. Should I store coaching notes in Invoice Crowd? No. Keep confidential session notes and client-progress information in an appropriate, access-controlled system. Finance records only need the commercial detail required to explain the charge. Can a coaching client make a partial payment? Yes. Split the package into a deposit and instalments, each with its own due date, or allow partial payments with a minimum amount. The client pays each part from the same invoice. Can coaching clients see their invoice history? Yes. Clients you invite to the customer portal can sign in to see every invoice you sent them, what they have paid and what is still due. Sell the package, collect the instalments Send the proposal or share the payment link, split the fee into instalments and let reminders follow up on the late ones. Review pricing Free Basic plan for everyday invoicing 30-day free trial, no card needed Packages, instalments and monthly plans --- ## Payment Integrations URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/ Connect Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square and 11 more payment integrations to Invoice Crowd, so customers pay invoices online the way they trust. Integration directory Payment integrations your customers already trust Invoice Crowd connects to 15 payment gateways, so customers can pay your invoices online by card, wallet, bank debit or mobile money. Each payment is recorded on its invoice as soon as the provider confirms it. Browse providers Payment gateway overview Home Integrations 15 payment gateways Cards, wallets and bank debit Payments recorded automatically pop Find your fit Choose the right way to get paid Pick providers by how your customers like to pay, where your business operates and how you want each payment confirmed. Choose by how customers pay Cards, wallets, bank debit and payment requests. Meet customers where they pay Offer hosted card checkout, mobile money, direct debit or payment requests, and let each customer choose the option they know. Hosted checkout and wallets Mobile money and direct debit Several options per invoice A checkout customers recognize Customers pay through a trusted provider they already know, right from the invoice you sent. Pay from the invoice page Familiar provider brands Mobile-friendly pay page Choose by region Local favorites and global providers side by side. Local providers, global reach Regional favorites such as M-Pesa, PayFast, Razorpay, PayTabs and Telr sit beside multi-market providers like Stripe and PayPal. Africa, India and the Middle East Multi-market card providers Bill in your customer's currency Connect your own merchant account Each gateway connects with your own merchant account, so payouts and processing rates stay between you and the provider. Your account, your rates Payouts on your provider's schedule Turn each gateway on or off Confirmed before it's recorded Every payment checked before it reaches your books. Every payment verified Invoice Crowd confirms each payment with the provider and checks the amount and currency against the invoice before marking it paid. Confirmed with the provider Amount and currency matched Marked paid automatically Nothing slips through the cracks A payment that can't be applied on its own waits in Payments Needing Review, so you decide where it goes. Bank debits show as processing until the provider confirms them. Payments Needing Review Processing until confirmed You stay in control Provider directory Explore every payment integration Open a guide to see how each provider works with Invoice Crowd, from setup and checkout to recurring billing and refunds. Stripe Accept cards, US bank payments and the local methods you enable in your Stripe Dashboard, such as iDEAL, SEPA Direct Debit and Klarna. PayPal Let customers pay with the PayPal account they already trust, included on every plan. Razorpay Collect payments from customers across India with Razorpay, for one-time invoices and subscriptions alike. M-Pesa Get paid in KES through the mobile money your customers in Kenya use every day. PayFast Accept ZAR payments from customers in South Africa through PayFast's trusted checkout. GoCardless Collect invoices and recurring payments by direct debit, straight from your customers' bank accounts. PhonePe Let customers across India pay invoices with PhonePe, from one-time payments to AutoPay for recurring billing. Square Accept card payments and card-on-file subscriptions through Square, with payment notifications set up for you. Authorize.net Process card payments through your Authorize.net merchant account with secure, tokenized checkout. Braintree Accept card payments through Braintree for one-time invoices and recurring billing. Payoneer Send Payoneer payment requests to clients around the world, straight from the invoice. PayTabs Offer a hosted checkout trusted by customers across the Middle East. Telr Accept card payments from customers in the Middle East with Telr's secure checkout. Airwallex Get paid by international customers through Airwallex's hosted checkout. Paystack Accept payments from customers in Nigeria, Ghana, Kenya and South Africa in NGN, GHS, KES, ZAR or USD. Bank QR Add a UPI, Pix, GiroCode, Swiss QR-bill, PayNow or PromptPay code to invoices and PDFs, so customers pay straight from their banking app. Beyond payments Automation, AI and developer connections Connect Invoice Crowd to the apps you already run, send events to your own URL with webhooks, let an AI app prepare work for your approval, or build on the API. The account owner controls every connection. Zapier Six triggers and six actions for customers, items, incomes, expenses, invoices and estimates, connected with your Invoice Crowd sign-in. Pabbly Connect The same records as triggers and actions in Pabbly Connect, with picklists loaded from your account. AI Connections Connect Claude, ChatGPT or another MCP app to one business. It reads right away, and every change it prepares waits for your approval. Included on paid monthly and yearly plans. Developer API Read one business and create records from your own software with an API key, and it can never delete anything. Included on paid monthly and yearly plans. Questions Payment integrations, answered Which payment gateways does Invoice Crowd support? Invoice Crowd supports 15 payment gateways: Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, M-Pesa, PayFast, GoCardless, Square, Authorize.net, Braintree, Payoneer, PayTabs, Telr, Airwallex, PhonePe and Paystack. The directory above links to each guide with setup, checkout and refund details, and bank payments through Stripe ACH and GoCardless are covered on the ACH and Direct Debit page. Bank QR codes are a separate, gateway-free option. Which gateways support recurring payments? Stripe, Razorpay, Square, GoCardless and PayFast are among the gateways that collect recurring subscriptions automatically. Each provider guide in the directory shows how it handles one-time and recurring payments. Can customers pay in their own currency? Yes. Invoice a customer in their currency and they pay through a gateway that accepts it, while your own reporting stays in your base currency. Choose providers that match the currencies you bill in, such as Paystack for NGN, GHS, KES, ZAR and USD. How do I know an online payment has arrived? Invoice Crowd confirms every payment with the provider and checks the amount and currency before it marks the invoice paid. A confirmed payment that can't be applied to its invoice waits in Payments Needing Review until you decide what to do with it. How do gateway fees work? You connect your own merchant account, so you pay the processing rates you agreed with your provider, separately from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can also pass the fee on to the customer with Gateway Fees, set per gateway. Can I refund a gateway payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice and Invoice Crowd sends the refund through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex, GoCardless or Paystack, then books it once the provider confirms it. For other providers, refund in your provider account and record it in the same Refund window. Does Invoice Crowd connect to anything besides payment gateways? Yes. Zapier and Pabbly Connect link Invoice Crowd to your other apps on every plan, and outbound webhooks send invoice, estimate, customer, item, expense and income events to your own HTTPS address. On paid monthly and yearly plans, AI Connections let Claude or ChatGPT prepare work for your approval, and the Developer API connects your own software. Does Invoice Crowd support webhooks? Yes. The account owner can add a webhook URL on the Integrations page and choose the events to send, from invoice and estimate updates to new or updated customers, items, expenses and incomes. Each event is posted as JSON to your HTTPS address and signed with a secret shown on the page, and a failed delivery is retried with the same delivery ID so your system can ignore repeats. Get paid online, the way customers prefer Connect the gateways that suit your customers, send an invoice, and see the payment land on it. Start with a 30-day free trial. Start free See pricing 30-day free trial --- ## Stripe Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/stripe/ Connect Stripe for hosted checkout with cards, ACH and the methods enabled in your Stripe Dashboard, recorded only after Stripe confirms. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Stripe Let customers pay your invoices on Stripe Checkout, by card or with the methods you've turned on in your Stripe Dashboard, such as iDEAL, SEPA Direct Debit, Klarna or US bank accounts. Bill subscriptions through Stripe too, and refund a payment straight from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Stripe Cards and Dashboard methods Subscriptions included Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Stripe Connect your Stripe account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Stripe before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Stripe account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Stripe in a few fields Paste your publishable key and secret key, then choose Live or Sandbox. The secret key is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Stripe account you already have Customers pay into your own Stripe account, on your existing Stripe pricing. Availability depends on your Stripe account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Every method in your Stripe Dashboard With Offer All Payment Methods Enabled in My Stripe Account switched on, the default for new connections, Stripe Checkout shows every method you've turned on in your Stripe Dashboard that suits the invoice's currency and amount. Prefer to keep it simple? Offer cards, plus US bank payment on USD invoices with Allow US bank payment. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure Stripe-hosted checkout Subscriptions billed through Stripe Start a Stripe subscription from a subscription invoice, and each renewal is recorded once Stripe confirms it. Subscriptions created in Stripe Renewals confirmed by Stripe Every renewal recorded Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Stripe confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd waits for Stripe's signed confirmation, then checks it matches your account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before the invoice is marked paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Stripe Bank debits, tracked to the end Bank payments such as ACH or SEPA Direct Debit show as processing until Stripe confirms them. If a debit fails, you get a notification, so you always know where a payment stands. Processing until confirmed Alerts on failed debits Always an accurate balance At a glance Everything Stripe brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Stripe Checkout Customers pay on Stripe's secure hosted checkout, straight from the invoice. Your Dashboard methods Offer every method you've enabled in Stripe that suits the invoice, from cards to iDEAL, Klarna and SEPA Direct Debit. Subscriptions Bill recurring customers through Stripe, with each renewal recorded once Stripe confirms it. Quick setup Add your publishable and secret keys, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Confirmed by Stripe An invoice is marked paid once Stripe's signed confirmation matches the invoice, the amount and the currency. Your Stripe account Payments go to your own Stripe account, on your existing Stripe pricing. Bank debits made clear ACH and SEPA Direct Debit payments show as processing until Stripe confirms them, and a failed debit notifies you. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Stripe, booked once Stripe confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Stripe if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Stripe and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Stripe and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Stripe? Yes. Connect your Stripe account and customers pay on Stripe Checkout by card, or with the other methods you've enabled in your Stripe Dashboard when Offer All Payment Methods Enabled in My Stripe Account is on. On USD invoices you can also offer US bank payment with Allow US bank payment. What do I need to connect Stripe? Your Stripe publishable key and secret key, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode for the business profile. Stripe is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Stripe checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Stripe and pays on Stripe Checkout. Checkout offers the methods your Stripe settings allow for that invoice's currency and amount, and the payment is recorded as soon as Stripe confirms it. Can I bill subscriptions through Stripe? Yes. Start a Stripe subscription from a subscription invoice and each renewal is recorded once Stripe confirms it. If your account moves to the free plan, Stripe subscriptions keep collecting for 30 days and then pause rather than cancel, ready to resume when you upgrade. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a Stripe payment? Invoice Crowd waits for Stripe's signed confirmation and checks it matches your account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Stripe transaction fees? Stripe sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Stripe agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund a Stripe payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via Stripe. The refund is booked once Stripe confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with Stripe Connect Stripe in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Stripe before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## PayPal Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/paypal/ Let customers pay your invoices with PayPal, on every Invoice Crowd plan. Each payment is confirmed with PayPal, and refunds go back from the invoice. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with PayPal Let customers pay your invoices with PayPal, the checkout they already know, on every Invoice Crowd plan, the free plan included. Each payment is confirmed with PayPal before it's recorded, and refunds go back through PayPal from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations PayPal Included on every plan Confirmed by PayPal Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with PayPal Connect your PayPal account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with PayPal before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own PayPal account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect PayPal in a few fields Enter your account type, merchant email, client ID and client secret, then choose Live or Sandbox. The client secret is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the PayPal account you already have Customers pay into your own PayPal account, on your existing PayPal pricing. Availability depends on your PayPal account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using PayPal Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using PayPal and completes the payment on PayPal. PayPal appears on invoices in the currencies PayPal supports, so every customer sees a checkout that works. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure PayPal checkout PayPal is part of every Invoice Crowd plan, the free plan too, so you can take online payments from your very first invoice. Included on Free Works from day one More gateways on paid plans Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once PayPal confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd retrieves the completed payment from PayPal and checks your account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before the invoice is marked paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by PayPal Dashboard refunds stay in sync Refund a payment from the invoice, or in your PayPal dashboard. A dashboard refund waits in Payments Needing Review for you to record, so the invoice and your books always agree. Dashboard refunds picked up Books always in step At a glance Everything PayPal brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. PayPal checkout Customers pay through PayPal, straight from the invoice. Currency-aware PayPal appears on invoices in the currencies PayPal supports, so customers always see a checkout that works. On every plan PayPal is included on the free plan and on every paid plan. Quick setup Add your merchant email, client ID and client secret, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. The completed payment is retrieved from PayPal and matched to the invoice, the amount and the currency before it's recorded. Your PayPal account Payments go to your own PayPal account, on your existing PayPal pricing. A refund made in your PayPal dashboard waits in Payments Needing Review, ready for you to record. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through PayPal, booked once PayPal confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for PayPal if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside PayPal and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions PayPal and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with PayPal? Yes. Connect your PayPal account and customers pay through PayPal straight from the invoice. PayPal appears on invoices in the currencies PayPal supports. What do I need to connect PayPal? Your PayPal account type, merchant email, client ID and client secret, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. PayPal is included on every Invoice Crowd plan, including the free plan. How does PayPal checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using PayPal and pays on PayPal. Invoice Crowd then retrieves the completed payment from PayPal, checks it and records it against the invoice. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a PayPal payment? Invoice Crowd retrieves the completed payment from PayPal and checks your account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the PayPal transaction fees? PayPal sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your PayPal agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund a PayPal payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via PayPal. The refund is booked once PayPal confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with PayPal Connect PayPal in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by PayPal before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Razorpay Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/razorpay/ Accept one-time and recurring invoice payments through Razorpay Checkout. Each payment is confirmed with Razorpay before it's recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Razorpay Let customers pay your invoices through Razorpay Checkout, for one-time invoices and recurring subscriptions alike. Each payment is confirmed with Razorpay before it's recorded, and refunds go back through Razorpay from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Razorpay One-time and subscriptions Confirmed by Razorpay Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Razorpay Connect your Razorpay account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Razorpay before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Razorpay account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Razorpay in a few fields Enter your API key, API secret and webhook secret for the mode you choose, Live or Sandbox. Secrets are saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Razorpay account you already have Customers pay into your own Razorpay account, on your existing Razorpay pricing. International payments follow your Razorpay account settings. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Razorpay Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Razorpay and pays on Razorpay Checkout. Invoice Crowd verifies the payment with Razorpay and applies it to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure Razorpay Checkout Subscriptions billed through Razorpay Bill recurring customers through Razorpay subscriptions. Each renewal is checked with Razorpay before it's recorded. Recurring billing built in Renewals checked with Razorpay Every period recorded Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Razorpay confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd verifies Razorpay's signature, then checks the captured payment, the order, the amount and the currency against your invoice before marking it paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Razorpay Dashboard refunds stay in sync Refund a payment from the invoice, or in your Razorpay dashboard. A dashboard refund waits in Payments Needing Review for you to record, so the invoice and your books always agree. Dashboard refunds picked up Books always in step At a glance Everything Razorpay brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Razorpay Checkout Customers pay on Razorpay Checkout, straight from the invoice. Verified payments Every payment is checked against Razorpay's signature, order and captured amount before it's recorded. Subscriptions Bill recurring customers through Razorpay, with each renewal checked before it's recorded. Quick setup Add your API key, API secret and webhook secret, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. An invoice is marked paid once the captured payment matches the invoice, the amount and the currency. Your Razorpay account Payments go to your own Razorpay account, on your existing Razorpay pricing. A refund made in your Razorpay dashboard waits in Payments Needing Review, ready for you to record. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Razorpay, booked once Razorpay confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Razorpay if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Razorpay and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Razorpay and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Razorpay? Yes. Connect your Razorpay account and customers pay on Razorpay Checkout straight from the invoice. Invoice Crowd verifies each payment with Razorpay before recording it. What do I need to connect Razorpay? Your Razorpay API key, API secret and webhook secret for the mode you choose, Live or Sandbox. Razorpay is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Razorpay checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Razorpay and pays on Razorpay Checkout. Invoice Crowd verifies the signature, checks the captured payment and order with Razorpay, and records the payment against the invoice. Can I bill subscriptions through Razorpay? Yes. Razorpay subscriptions are supported, and each renewal is checked with Razorpay before it's recorded. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a Razorpay payment? Invoice Crowd verifies Razorpay's signature and checks the captured payment, the order, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Razorpay transaction fees? Razorpay sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Razorpay agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund a Razorpay payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via Razorpay. The refund is booked once Razorpay confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with Razorpay Connect Razorpay in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Razorpay before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## M-Pesa Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/mpesa/ Let customers pay your KES invoices from their phone with an M-Pesa prompt. Each payment is confirmed with M-Pesa before it's recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with M-Pesa Let customers pay your KES invoices from their phone. They approve an M-Pesa prompt, and Invoice Crowd confirms the payment with M-Pesa before recording it. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations M-Pesa Pay from the phone Built for KES invoices Confirmed by M-Pesa pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with M-Pesa Connect your M-Pesa account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with M-Pesa before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own M-Pesa account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect M-Pesa in a few fields Enter your consumer key, consumer secret, shortcode, pass key and transaction type, then choose Live or Sandbox. Secrets are saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the M-Pesa account you already have Customers pay into your own M-Pesa account, on your existing M-Pesa pricing. M-Pesa appears on invoices in Kenyan shillings (KES). Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay with an M-Pesa prompt Your customer chooses M-Pesa on the invoice and approves the STK Push prompt on their phone. Invoice Crowd confirms the result with M-Pesa and applies it to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Approved on the customer's phone One prompt per payment If a response is slow to arrive, Invoice Crowd waits for M-Pesa's answer rather than sending a second prompt, so customers aren't asked to pay twice. No double prompts Status confirmed by M-Pesa Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once M-Pesa confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd checks the result with M-Pesa and matches the checkout request, the invoice and the KES amount before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by M-Pesa Refunds kept in step Make a refund in your M-Pesa account, then record it with Refund on the invoice. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Refund in M-Pesa Record it in one step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything M-Pesa brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Customers approve an M-Pesa STK Push prompt on their phone, straight from the invoice. Made for KES M-Pesa appears on your invoices in Kenyan shillings. A slow response never triggers a second prompt, so customers aren't asked to pay twice. Quick setup Add your consumer key, shortcode and pass key, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. An invoice is marked paid once M-Pesa confirms the payment for the exact KES amount. Your M-Pesa account Payments go to your own M-Pesa account, on your existing M-Pesa pricing. Try the whole flow in Sandbox, then switch to Live when you're ready. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Refund in your M-Pesa account, then record it with Refund on the invoice, so the invoice and your books agree. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for M-Pesa if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside M-Pesa and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions M-Pesa and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with M-Pesa? Yes. Customers pay your KES invoices by approving an M-Pesa STK Push prompt on their phone, and Invoice Crowd confirms the result with M-Pesa before recording the payment. What do I need to connect M-Pesa? Your M-Pesa consumer key and consumer secret, shortcode, pass key and transaction type, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. M-Pesa is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does M-Pesa checkout work? Your customer chooses M-Pesa on the invoice and receives an STK Push prompt on their phone. Once they approve it, Invoice Crowd confirms the payment with M-Pesa and records it against the invoice. How does Invoice Crowd confirm an M-Pesa payment? Invoice Crowd checks the result with M-Pesa and matches the checkout request, the invoice and the KES amount before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the M-Pesa transaction fees? M-Pesa sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your M-Pesa agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. How do I refund an M-Pesa payment? Make the refund in your M-Pesa account, then record it with Refund on the invoice in Invoice Crowd. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Start getting paid with M-Pesa Connect M-Pesa in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by M-Pesa before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## PayFast Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/payfast/ Let customers pay your ZAR invoices through PayFast, including recurring payments. Each payment is verified with PayFast before it's recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with PayFast Get paid in rand. Customers pay your ZAR invoices through PayFast checkout, including recurring payments, and each payment is verified with PayFast before it's recorded. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations PayFast Built for ZAR invoices Verified with PayFast Recurring payments pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with PayFast Connect your PayFast account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with PayFast before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own PayFast account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect PayFast in a few fields Enter your merchant ID and merchant key, choose Live or Sandbox, and add your PayFast passphrase to unlock recurring payments. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the PayFast account you already have Customers pay into your own PayFast account, on your existing PayFast pricing. PayFast appears on invoices in South African rand (ZAR). Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using PayFast Your customer opens a ZAR invoice, chooses Pay Using PayFast and pays on PayFast's checkout. Invoice Crowd builds the checkout from the invoice amount, so the customer always pays the right balance. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure PayFast checkout Recurring payments through PayFast Add your PayFast passphrase and you can bill recurring customers through PayFast, with each payment verified before it's recorded. Recurring billing built in Unlocked by your passphrase Every payment verified Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once PayFast confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd verifies PayFast's signed payment notification, confirms it with PayFast, and checks the merchant and the exact ZAR amount before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by PayFast Refunds kept in step Make a refund in your PayFast account, then record it with Refund on the invoice. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Refund in PayFast Record it in one step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything PayFast brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. PayFast checkout Customers pay on PayFast's checkout, straight from a ZAR invoice. Signed and verified Every payment notification is signature-checked and confirmed with PayFast before it's recorded. Add your PayFast passphrase to bill recurring customers through PayFast. Quick setup Add your merchant ID and merchant key, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Confirmed by PayFast An invoice is marked paid once PayFast confirms the payment for the exact ZAR amount. Your PayFast account Payments go to your own PayFast account, on your existing PayFast pricing. Made for rand PayFast appears on your ZAR invoices, built from the invoice amount. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Refund in your PayFast account, then record it with Refund on the invoice, so the invoice and your books agree. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for PayFast if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside PayFast and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions PayFast and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with PayFast? Yes. Customers pay your ZAR invoices through PayFast checkout, and Invoice Crowd verifies each payment with PayFast before recording it. What do I need to connect PayFast? Your PayFast merchant ID and merchant key, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. Add your passphrase to bill recurring payments. PayFast is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does PayFast checkout work? Your customer opens a ZAR invoice, chooses Pay Using PayFast and pays on PayFast's checkout. Invoice Crowd builds the signed checkout from the invoice amount, verifies PayFast's payment notification and records the payment. Can I bill recurring customers with PayFast? Yes. With your PayFast passphrase added, recurring payments run through PayFast, and each one is verified before it's recorded. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a PayFast payment? Invoice Crowd verifies the signature on PayFast's payment notification, confirms it with PayFast, and checks the merchant and the exact ZAR amount before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the PayFast transaction fees? PayFast sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your PayFast agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. How do I refund a PayFast payment? Make the refund in your PayFast account, then record it with Refund on the invoice in Invoice Crowd. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Start getting paid with PayFast Connect PayFast in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by PayFast before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## GoCardless Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/gocardless/ Collect one-off and recurring invoice payments by direct debit with GoCardless. Each payment is recorded once GoCardless confirms it. Payment integration Collect direct debit payments with GoCardless Collect invoice payments by direct debit from your customer's bank account with GoCardless, for one-off invoices and recurring billing. Each payment is recorded once GoCardless confirms it, and refunds go back through GoCardless from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations GoCardless One-off and recurring direct debit Confirmed by GoCardless Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with GoCardless Connect your GoCardless account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with GoCardless before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own GoCardless account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect GoCardless in a few fields Add your GoCardless API credentials and choose Live or Sandbox for the business profile. Credentials are saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the GoCardless account you already have Customers pay into your own GoCardless account, on your existing GoCardless pricing. Availability depends on your GoCardless account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay by direct debit Your customer sets up a direct debit mandate through GoCardless, tied to your business and that customer. The payment is collected from their bank and recorded once GoCardless confirms it. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Collected from the customer's bank Recurring billing by direct debit Bill recurring customers through GoCardless. Each collection is matched to the customer, mandate and subscription, and recorded once GoCardless confirms it. Recurring billing built in Matched to the mandate Every collection recorded Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once GoCardless confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd checks the payment, the customer, the mandate, the amount and the currency with GoCardless before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by GoCardless Pending until it's paid Direct debits take time to clear. A pending collection stays pending in Invoice Crowd until GoCardless confirms it, so your balances are always accurate. Clear payment status Pending stays pending Accurate balances At a glance Everything GoCardless brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Direct debit Collect invoice payments straight from your customer's bank account. Mandates made simple GoCardless sets up the mandate with your customer, tied to your business and that customer. Recurring billing Bill recurring customers by direct debit, with each collection recorded once GoCardless confirms it. Quick setup Add your GoCardless API credentials, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to collect. Each payment is checked with GoCardless against the customer, the mandate, the amount and the currency. Your GoCardless account Payments go to your own GoCardless account, on your existing GoCardless pricing. Pending until paid A collection stays pending until GoCardless confirms it, so your balances are always accurate. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through GoCardless, booked once GoCardless confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for GoCardless if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside GoCardless and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions GoCardless and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices by direct debit with GoCardless? Yes. Connect your GoCardless account and customers pay by direct debit from their bank account. GoCardless sets up the mandate, and Invoice Crowd records each payment once GoCardless confirms it. What do I need to connect GoCardless? Your GoCardless API credentials, a direct debit account enabled with GoCardless, and a choice of Live or Sandbox mode for the business profile. GoCardless is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does a GoCardless payment work? Your customer sets up a direct debit mandate through GoCardless, tied to your business and that customer. GoCardless collects the payment from their bank, and Invoice Crowd records it once GoCardless confirms it. Can I bill recurring customers with GoCardless? Yes. Recurring direct debits through GoCardless are supported, with each collection matched to the customer's mandate and subscription and recorded once GoCardless confirms it. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a GoCardless payment? Invoice Crowd checks the payment, the customer, the mandate, the amount and the currency with GoCardless, and a pending collection stays pending until GoCardless confirms it. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the GoCardless transaction fees? GoCardless sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your GoCardless agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund a GoCardless payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via GoCardless. The refund is booked once GoCardless confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with GoCardless Connect GoCardless in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by GoCardless before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## ACH And Direct Debit URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/ach-direct-debit/ Let customers pay invoices from their bank: US bank payment through Stripe Checkout, or one-off and recurring direct debit through GoCardless. Payment integration Accept ACH and direct debit payments Let customers pay invoices straight from their bank account: by US bank payment through Stripe, or by direct debit through GoCardless, for one-off and recurring billing. Each payment is recorded once the provider confirms it. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations ACH & Direct Debit US bank payments via Stripe Direct debit via GoCardless Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid, straight from the bank Connect Stripe, GoCardless or both, and customers pay from their bank account. Each payment is confirmed by the provider before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Stripe or GoCardless account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Stripe or GoCardless Connect Stripe or GoCardless to the business profile. For Stripe, switch on Allow US bank payment on the invoice; Stripe takes care of bank selection, verification and the mandate. Per business profile Stripe, GoCardless or both Credentials saved securely Use the accounts you already have Customers pay into your own Stripe or GoCardless account, on your existing pricing. Available schemes and currencies depend on your provider account and region. Your own merchant accounts Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Bank payment, card or both On a USD invoice with Allow US bank payment on, Stripe Checkout offers card and US bank payment together. GoCardless sets up a direct debit mandate and collects from the customer's bank. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Bank step hosted by the provider Recurring billing by direct debit Bill recurring customers by direct debit through GoCardless, with each collection matched to the customer's mandate. Stripe US bank payment covers one-time USD invoices. Recurring with GoCardless One-time with Stripe Every collection recorded Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once the provider confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Stripe's signed confirmation, or GoCardless's confirmed payment, must match your account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before the invoice is marked paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by the provider Bank payments, tracked to the end Bank payments take time to clear. They show as processing until the provider confirms them, so your balances are always accurate. Processing until confirmed Clear payment status Accurate balances At a glance Everything bank payments bring to your invoices Get paid straight from the bank, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Pay from the bank Customers pay straight from their bank account, through Stripe or GoCardless. Card and bank in one checkout On USD invoices, Stripe Checkout can offer card and US bank payment side by side. Recurring direct debit Bill recurring customers by direct debit through GoCardless. Quick setup Connect Stripe or GoCardless, then switch on Allow US bank payment on the invoices where you want it. Confirmed by the provider An invoice is marked paid once Stripe or GoCardless confirms the payment. Your own accounts Payments go to your own Stripe or GoCardless account, on your existing pricing. More bank debits with Stripe Switch on Offer All Payment Methods Enabled in My Stripe Account to offer the bank debits in your Stripe Dashboard, such as SEPA Direct Debit. Stripe handles the bank details. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Stripe or GoCardless, whichever took the payment, booked once that provider confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside bank payments and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions ACH and direct debit, answered Can customers pay invoices by ACH or direct debit? Yes. Customers can pay USD invoices by US bank payment through Stripe Checkout, or by direct debit through GoCardless. Each payment is recorded once the provider confirms it. What do I need to offer ACH or direct debit? A Stripe or GoCardless account connected to the business profile. For Stripe US bank payment, switch on Allow US bank payment on a one-time USD invoice, or turn on US bank accounts in your Stripe Dashboard and switch on Offer All Payment Methods Enabled in My Stripe Account. Stripe and GoCardless are included on paid plans. How does a bank payment work for my customer? With Stripe, the customer chooses US bank payment in Stripe Checkout, and Stripe handles bank selection, verification and the mandate. With GoCardless, the customer sets up a direct debit mandate and the payment is collected from their bank. Can I collect recurring payments by direct debit? Yes, through GoCardless. Each recurring collection is matched to the customer's mandate and recorded once GoCardless confirms it. Stripe US bank payment covers one-time USD invoices. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a bank payment? Bank payments show as processing until the provider confirms them. Invoice Crowd then checks the confirmation matches your account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the fees for bank payments? Stripe and GoCardless set their own fees under your merchant agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund an ACH or direct debit payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice and Invoice Crowd sends the refund through Stripe or GoCardless, whichever took the payment, and books it once that provider confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start taking bank payments Connect Stripe or GoCardless in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice from a bank account, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview 30-day free trial --- ## Square Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/square/ Take invoice payments through Square, refund them from Invoice Crowd, and let customers keep a card on file for Square subscriptions. Setup is automatic. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Square Let customers pay your invoices through Square checkout, or keep a card on file for a Square subscription. Square's payment notifications set themselves up when you save your details, and refunds go back through Square from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Square One-time and subscriptions Automatic setup Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Square Connect your Square account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Square before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Square account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Square in a few fields Enter your application ID, access token and location ID, then choose Live or Sandbox. Square's payment notifications are set up for you, and the access token is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Square account you already have Customers pay into your own Square account, on your existing Square pricing. Availability depends on your Square account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Square Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Square and pays on Square's secure checkout. The completed payment is confirmed with Square and applied to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure Square checkout Card-on-file subscriptions Customers can start a card-on-file Square subscription from a subscription invoice, and each period is recorded once Square confirms the payment. Card kept on file by Square Renewals confirmed by Square Every period recorded Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Square confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd confirms the completed payment with Square and checks the merchant, location, invoice, amount and currency before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Square Notifications set up for you Invoice Crowd sets up Square's payment notifications when you save your Square details or switch between Live and Sandbox. If anything needs your attention, the account's edit panel tells you why. Set up when you save Follows Live and Sandbox Clear guidance if needed At a glance Everything Square brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Square checkout Customers pay on Square's secure checkout, straight from the invoice. Confirmed payments The completed Square payment is checked again before Invoice Crowd records it. Customers start a Square subscription from a subscription invoice, and each period is recorded once Square confirms it. Quick setup Add your application ID, access token and location ID, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Confirmed by Square An invoice is marked paid once the Square payment matches your location, the invoice, the amount and the currency. Your Square account Payments go to your own Square account, on your existing Square pricing. Square's payment notifications are set up for you when you save your details or switch between Live and Sandbox. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Square, booked once Square confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Square if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Square and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Square and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Square? Yes. Customers pay your invoices through Square checkout, or keep a card on file for a Square subscription. Each payment is confirmed with Square before Invoice Crowd records it. What do I need to connect Square? Your Square application ID, access token and location ID, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. Square's payment notifications are then set up for you. Square is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Square checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Square and pays on Square's secure checkout. Invoice Crowd confirms the completed payment with Square and records it against the invoice. Can I bill subscriptions through Square? Yes. Customers can start a card-on-file Square subscription from a subscription invoice, and each period is recorded once Square confirms the payment. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a Square payment? Invoice Crowd confirms the completed payment with Square and checks your merchant, location, invoice, amount and currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Square transaction fees? Square sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Square agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund a Square payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via Square. The refund is booked once Square confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with Square Connect Square in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Square before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Authorize.Net Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/authorize-net/ Let customers pay your invoices by card through Authorize.net. Each transaction is confirmed before it's recorded, and refunds go back from the invoice. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Authorize.net Let customers pay your invoices by card through Authorize.net. Card details are tokenized, each transaction is confirmed with Authorize.net before it's recorded, and refunds go back through Authorize.net from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Authorize.net Tokenized card payments Confirmed by Authorize.net Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Authorize.net Connect your Authorize.net account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Authorize.net before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Authorize.net account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Authorize.net in a few fields Enter your API login ID, client key, transaction key and signature key, then choose Live or Sandbox. Your keys are saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Authorize.net account you already have Customers pay into your own Authorize.net account, on your existing Authorize.net pricing. Availability depends on your Authorize.net account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Authorize.net Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Authorize.net and pays by card. The payment is captured, and the invoice updates once Authorize.net returns a settled or captured result. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Card details stay with Authorize.net Tokenized for security Card details are tokenized for each payment, so your customer's card number stays with Authorize.net. Tokenized card data Card numbers stay with Authorize.net Keys saved securely Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Authorize.net confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd checks the authenticated transaction result, your merchant account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Authorize.net Nothing slips through If the invoice changes after checkout starts, a confirmed payment waits in Payments Needing Review. You apply it to the invoice, keep it as customer credit, or refund it. Nothing applied blindly You decide the next step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything Authorize.net brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Card payments Customers pay by card through Authorize.net, straight from the invoice. Settled or captured The invoice updates once Authorize.net returns a settled or captured result. Card details are tokenized for each payment and stay with Authorize.net. Quick setup Add your API login ID and keys, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Each authenticated transaction result is matched to the invoice, the amount and the currency before it's recorded. Your Authorize.net account Payments go to your own Authorize.net account, on your existing Authorize.net pricing. Try the whole checkout in Sandbox, then switch to Live when you're ready. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Authorize.net, booked once Authorize.net confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Authorize.net if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Authorize.net and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Authorize.net and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Authorize.net? Yes. Connect your Authorize.net account and customers pay by card straight from the invoice. The card is tokenized and the payment captured, and the invoice updates once Authorize.net confirms the result. What do I need to connect Authorize.net? Your Authorize.net API login ID, client key, transaction key and signature key, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. Authorize.net is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Authorize.net checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Authorize.net and pays by card. The card is tokenized, the payment is captured, and Invoice Crowd records it once Authorize.net returns a settled or captured result. How does Invoice Crowd confirm an Authorize.net payment? Invoice Crowd checks the authenticated transaction result, your merchant account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Authorize.net transaction fees? Authorize.net sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Authorize.net agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund an Authorize.net payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via Authorize.net. The refund is booked once Authorize.net confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with Authorize.net Connect Authorize.net in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Authorize.net before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Braintree Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/braintree/ Let customers pay invoices and subscriptions through Braintree. Each transaction is confirmed with Braintree, and refunds go back from the invoice. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Braintree Let customers pay your invoices through Braintree's secure card fields, for one-time invoices and subscriptions. Each transaction is confirmed with Braintree before it's recorded, and refunds go back through Braintree from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Braintree One-time and subscriptions Confirmed by Braintree Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Braintree Connect your Braintree account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Braintree before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Braintree account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Braintree in a few fields Enter your merchant ID, public key, private key and tokenization key, add a merchant account ID if you use one, then choose Live or Sandbox. The private key is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Braintree account you already have Customers pay into your own Braintree account, on your existing Braintree pricing. Availability depends on your Braintree account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Braintree Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Braintree and enters card details in Braintree's secure hosted fields. The transaction is confirmed with Braintree and applied to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Card details handled by Braintree Subscriptions billed through Braintree Bill recurring customers through Braintree subscriptions, matched to your merchant account and plan. Each renewal is checked with Braintree before it's recorded. Recurring billing built in Renewals checked with Braintree Every period recorded Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Braintree confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd reads the transaction from Braintree and checks your merchant account, the invoice, the amount and the currency. Transactions are recorded once Braintree submits them for settlement. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Braintree Nothing slips through If the invoice changes after checkout starts, a confirmed payment waits in Payments Needing Review. You apply it to the invoice, keep it as customer credit, or refund it. Nothing applied blindly You decide the next step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything Braintree brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Secure card fields Customers enter card details in Braintree's hosted fields, straight from the invoice. Settled payments Invoices are marked paid once the transaction is submitted for settlement, settling or settled. Subscriptions Bill recurring customers through Braintree, matched to your merchant account and plan. Quick setup Add your merchant ID and keys, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Each transaction is read from Braintree and matched to the invoice, the amount and the currency before it's recorded. Your Braintree account Payments go to your own Braintree account, on your existing Braintree pricing. Try the whole checkout in Sandbox, then switch to Live when you're ready. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Braintree, booked once Braintree confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Braintree if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Braintree and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Braintree and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Braintree? Yes. Connect your Braintree account and customers pay by card through Braintree's secure hosted fields, straight from the invoice. Each transaction is confirmed with Braintree before it's recorded. What do I need to connect Braintree? Your Braintree merchant ID, public key, private key and tokenization key, an optional merchant account ID, and a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. Braintree is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Braintree checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Braintree and enters card details in Braintree's hosted fields. Invoice Crowd records the payment once Braintree submits the transaction for settlement. Can I bill subscriptions through Braintree? Yes. Braintree subscriptions are supported, matched to your merchant account and plan, and each renewal is checked with Braintree before it's recorded. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a Braintree payment? Invoice Crowd reads the transaction from Braintree and checks your merchant account, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Braintree transaction fees? Braintree sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Braintree agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund a Braintree payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via Braintree. The refund is booked once Braintree confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with Braintree Connect Braintree in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Braintree before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Payoneer Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/payoneer/ Create a Payoneer payment request from any invoice and share the link. Each payment is recorded once Payoneer confirms it. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Payoneer Create a Payoneer payment request from any invoice and share the link, so customers pay through Payoneer. The payment is recorded as soon as Payoneer confirms it. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Payoneer Payment requests from the invoice Shareable payment link Confirmed by Payoneer pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Payoneer Connect your Payoneer account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Payoneer before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Payoneer account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect your Payoneer account Add your payee email and approve the connection with Payoneer. Once Payoneer approves it, you're ready to send payment requests. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Payoneer account you already have Customers pay into your own Payoneer account, on your existing Payoneer pricing. Availability depends on your Payoneer account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. A payment request for every invoice Create a Payoneer payment request from the invoice and Invoice Crowd builds a shareable Payoneer link for the exact amount. Your customer opens it and pays through Payoneer. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Paid through Payoneer Always the right amount Change the invoice amount and the open payment request is replaced, so the link always asks for the current balance. Built from the invoice Updated when amounts change One open request at a time Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Payoneer confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd checks the payment request, your Payoneer account, the amount and the currency, and records the payment once Payoneer reports it paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Payoneer Refunds kept in step Make a refund in your Payoneer account, then record it with Refund on the invoice. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Refund in Payoneer Record it in one step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything Payoneer brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Payment requests Create a Payoneer payment request straight from the invoice. A link to share Each request comes with a Payoneer link for the exact invoice amount, ready to send to your customer. Change the invoice and the open request is replaced, so customers always pay the current balance. Quick setup Add your payee email and approve the connection with Payoneer, and you're ready to send requests. The payment is recorded once Payoneer reports the request paid, for the right amount and currency. Your Payoneer account Payments go to your own Payoneer account, on your existing Payoneer pricing. Try the whole flow in Sandbox, then switch to Live when you're ready. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Refund in your Payoneer account, then record it with Refund on the invoice, so the invoice and your books agree. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Payoneer if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Payoneer and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Payoneer and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Payoneer? Yes. Create a Payoneer payment request from the invoice and your customer pays through a shareable Payoneer link. The payment is recorded once Payoneer confirms it's paid. What do I need to connect Payoneer? Your Payoneer payee email, and an approved connection with Payoneer for the mode you choose, Live or Sandbox. Payoneer is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How do Payoneer payment requests work? Create a payment request from the invoice and Invoice Crowd builds a Payoneer link for the exact amount. Your customer pays through Payoneer, and if the invoice amount changes, the open request is replaced with one for the new balance. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a Payoneer payment? Invoice Crowd checks the payment request, your Payoneer account, the amount and the currency, and records the payment once Payoneer reports it paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Payoneer transaction fees? Payoneer sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Payoneer agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. How do I refund a Payoneer payment? Make the refund in your Payoneer account, then record it with Refund on the invoice in Invoice Crowd. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Start getting paid with Payoneer Connect Payoneer in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Payoneer before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## PayTabs Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/paytabs/ Let customers pay your invoices on PayTabs' hosted checkout. Each payment is verified with PayTabs before it's recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with PayTabs Let customers pay your invoices on PayTabs' secure hosted checkout. Each payment is verified with PayTabs before it's recorded, and your customer returns to an invoice marked paid. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations PayTabs Hosted checkout Verified with PayTabs Paid where they started pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with PayTabs Connect your PayTabs account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with PayTabs before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own PayTabs account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect PayTabs in a few fields Enter your profile ID and server key, add a client key if you use one, pick your PayTabs region, then choose Live or Sandbox. The server key is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the PayTabs account you already have Customers pay into your own PayTabs account, on your existing PayTabs pricing. Availability depends on your PayTabs account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using PayTabs Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using PayTabs and pays on PayTabs' hosted checkout. The payment is verified with PayTabs and applied to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure PayTabs checkout Checkout opens in its own window. Once the payment is verified, that window refreshes the invoice page and closes, so your customer sees the invoice marked paid. Checkout in its own window The invoice refreshes itself A clear paid confirmation Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once PayTabs confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd checks the signature on PayTabs' notification, then asks PayTabs directly to confirm the profile, invoice, amount and currency before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by PayTabs Refunds kept in step Make a refund in your PayTabs account, then record it with Refund on the invoice. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Refund in PayTabs Record it in one step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything PayTabs brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Customers pay on PayTabs' secure hosted page, straight from the invoice. Signed and verified Every notification is signature-checked and confirmed directly with PayTabs before it's recorded. Checkout opens in its own window, then refreshes the invoice page and closes once the payment is verified. Quick setup Add your profile ID and server key, pick your region, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Confirmed by PayTabs An invoice is marked paid once PayTabs confirms the payment for the right profile, amount and currency. Your PayTabs account Payments go to your own PayTabs account, on your existing PayTabs pricing. Your PayTabs region Connect through the PayTabs regional API that serves your account, chosen from a list. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Refund in your PayTabs account, then record it with Refund on the invoice, so the invoice and your books agree. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for PayTabs if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside PayTabs and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions PayTabs and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with PayTabs? Yes. Connect your PayTabs account and customers pay on PayTabs' hosted checkout, straight from the invoice. Each payment is verified with PayTabs before it's recorded. What do I need to connect PayTabs? Your PayTabs profile ID and server key, an optional client key, your PayTabs region, and a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. PayTabs is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does PayTabs checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using PayTabs and pays on PayTabs' hosted checkout in its own window. Once PayTabs confirms the payment, the window refreshes the invoice page and closes, and the payment is recorded. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a PayTabs payment? Invoice Crowd checks the signature on PayTabs' notification, then asks PayTabs directly to confirm the profile, invoice, amount and currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the PayTabs transaction fees? PayTabs sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your PayTabs agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. How do I refund a PayTabs payment? Make the refund in your PayTabs account, then record it with Refund on the invoice in Invoice Crowd. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Start getting paid with PayTabs Connect PayTabs in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by PayTabs before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Telr Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/telr/ Let customers pay your invoices on Telr's hosted checkout. Each payment is confirmed with Telr before it's recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Telr Let customers pay your invoices on Telr's secure hosted checkout. Each payment is confirmed with Telr before it's recorded, and your customer returns to an invoice marked paid. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Telr Hosted checkout Confirmed by Telr Paid where they started pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Telr Connect your Telr account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Telr before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Telr account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Telr in a few fields Enter your store ID and auth key, add your merchant ID and API key if you use them, then choose Live or Sandbox. The auth key is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Telr account you already have Customers pay into your own Telr account, on your existing Telr pricing. Availability depends on your Telr account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Telr Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Telr and pays on Telr's hosted checkout. Invoice Crowd checks the order with Telr and applies the payment to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure Telr checkout Checkout opens in its own window. Once the payment is verified, that window refreshes the invoice page and closes, so your customer sees the invoice marked paid. Checkout in its own window The invoice refreshes itself A clear paid confirmation Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Telr confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd creates the order with Telr, then checks the order, your store, the amount and the currency, and records the payment once Telr reports it paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Telr Refunds kept in step Make a refund in your Telr account, then record it with Refund on the invoice. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Refund in Telr Record it in one step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything Telr brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Customers pay on Telr's secure hosted page, straight from the invoice. Order checked with Telr Every order is checked with Telr and recorded once Telr reports it paid. Checkout opens in its own window, then refreshes the invoice page and closes once the payment is verified. Quick setup Add your store ID and auth key, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. An invoice is marked paid once Telr confirms the order for the right store, amount and currency. Your Telr account Payments go to your own Telr account, on your existing Telr pricing. One payment, one invoice Each Telr payment is matched to exactly one invoice, so your records stay clean. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Refund in your Telr account, then record it with Refund on the invoice, so the invoice and your books agree. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Telr if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Telr and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Telr and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Telr? Yes. Connect your Telr account and customers pay on Telr's hosted checkout, straight from the invoice. Invoice Crowd records the payment once Telr reports it paid. What do I need to connect Telr? Your Telr store ID and auth key, plus your merchant ID and API key if you use them, and a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. Telr is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Telr checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Telr and pays on Telr's hosted checkout in its own window. Invoice Crowd checks the order with Telr, records the payment, and the window refreshes the invoice page and closes. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a Telr payment? Invoice Crowd checks the order with Telr and matches your store, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Telr transaction fees? Telr sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Telr agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. How do I refund a Telr payment? Make the refund in your Telr account, then record it with Refund on the invoice in Invoice Crowd. The invoice, its credit note and your books stay in step. Start getting paid with Telr Connect Telr in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Telr before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Airwallex Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/airwallex/ Let customers pay invoices through your Airwallex account. Invoice Crowd checks each payment with Airwallex and can refund it from the invoice. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Airwallex Let customers pay your invoices on Airwallex's hosted payment page, using your own Airwallex account. Each payment is confirmed with Airwallex before it's recorded, and refunds go back through Airwallex from the invoice. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Airwallex Hosted payment page Automatic setup Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Airwallex Connect your Airwallex account once and every invoice can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Airwallex before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Airwallex account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect Airwallex in a few fields Enter your client ID and API key, then choose Live or Sandbox. Airwallex's payment notifications are set up for you, and the API key is saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the Airwallex account you already have Customers pay into your own Airwallex account, on your existing Airwallex pricing. Availability depends on your Airwallex account and region. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Airwallex Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Airwallex and pays on Airwallex's hosted payment page. The payment is confirmed on your Airwallex account and applied to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure Airwallex payment page Notifications set up for you Invoice Crowd sets up Airwallex's payment notifications when you connect, so each payment is confirmed on your account, even if the customer closes the browser. Set up when you connect Signed notifications Confirmed on your account Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Airwallex confirms the payment. Every payment matched to its invoice Invoice Crowd reads the payment from your Airwallex account and checks the request, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. Right account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Confirmed as paid by Airwallex Nothing slips through If the invoice changes after checkout starts, a confirmed payment waits in Payments Needing Review. You apply it to the invoice, keep it as customer credit, or refund it. Nothing applied blindly You decide the next step Books stay accurate At a glance Everything Airwallex brings to your invoices Get paid online, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step without extra work. Customers pay on Airwallex's secure hosted page, straight from the invoice. Your own credentials Checkout runs on your business's own Airwallex account and credentials. Airwallex's payment notifications are set up for you when you connect. Quick setup Add your client ID and API key, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready to take payments. Confirmed by Airwallex Each payment is read back from your Airwallex account and matched to the invoice, the amount and the currency. Your Airwallex account Payments go to your own Airwallex account, on your existing Airwallex pricing. Try the whole checkout in Sandbox, then switch to Live when you're ready. A receipt with every payment Each payment gets its own receipt PDF, attached to the customer's payment confirmation email. If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Airwallex, booked once Airwallex confirms it. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for Airwallex if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Airwallex and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions Airwallex and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Airwallex? Yes. Connect your Airwallex account and customers pay on Airwallex's hosted payment page, straight from the invoice. Invoice Crowd records the payment once Airwallex confirms it on your account. What do I need to connect Airwallex? Your Airwallex client ID and API key, plus a choice of Live or Sandbox mode. Airwallex's payment notifications are then set up for you. Airwallex is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does Airwallex checkout work? Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using Airwallex and pays on Airwallex's hosted payment page, using your own Airwallex account. Invoice Crowd confirms the payment on your account and records it against the invoice. How does Invoice Crowd confirm an Airwallex payment? Invoice Crowd reads the payment from your Airwallex account and checks the request, the invoice, the amount and the currency before marking the invoice paid. If a confirmed payment can't be applied, for example because the balance changed, it waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the Airwallex transaction fees? Airwallex sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Airwallex agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Can I refund an Airwallex payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, from the invoice list, the editor or Manage Payments, then pick Refund it to the customer via Airwallex. The refund is booked once Airwallex confirms it. Refunds from the invoice cover one-time payments made on the invoice page. Start getting paid with Airwallex Connect Airwallex in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Airwallex before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Paystack Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/paystack/ Let customers in Nigeria, Ghana, Kenya and South Africa pay invoices through Paystack. Each payment is verified with Paystack before it is recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with Paystack The Paystack integration lets customers pay your Invoice Crowd invoices on Paystack's hosted checkout, with the cards, bank and mobile money channels you have enabled in Paystack. Invoice Crowd verifies each payment with Paystack before recording it, and can send refunds back through Paystack. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations Paystack Hosted Paystack checkout NGN, GHS, KES, ZAR and USD Refunds from the invoice pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with Paystack Connect your Paystack account once and every invoice in a currency you accept can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with Paystack before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own Paystack account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Add your Paystack keys In Payment Methods, open Paystack and choose Add New. Pick Live or Sandbox (Paystack Test Mode), then enter a nickname, the Public Key and the Secret Key for that mode from Paystack's Settings, API Keys & Webhooks. Invoice Crowd checks each key matches the mode, and the Secret Key is saved securely: afterwards it shows only as Saved · Ending in •••• and its last four characters. Live or Sandbox, matched to the keys Write-only Secret Key A Cash & Bank account for the gateway Your currencies, checked with Paystack Saving the account asks Paystack which currencies it accepts and shows the answer, for example Your Paystack account accepts: ZAR. Customers then see Paystack only on invoices in those currencies. After saving, paste the account's Webhook URL into Paystack for the same mode, so a payment is confirmed even if the customer closes the browser. Limited to what your account accepts Webhook URL shown after saving A smooth checkout for customers Customers see only the payment options that suit their invoice. Pay Using Paystack The customer opens the invoice, presses Pay and chooses Pay Using Paystack. Paystack's checkout opens in its own window with the amount set by Invoice Crowd. Once the payment is verified, that window refreshes the invoice page and closes, so the customer sees the invoice paid where they started. The amount comes from the invoice Full, partial, deposit and split payments Works on payment-link checkouts too Built for one-time invoices Paystack covers your one-time invoices, and the invoice editor flags any invoice in a currency your Paystack account doesn't take. Paystack uses the customer's email address, so keep one on each customer record. One-time hosted checkout Currency check in the editor Uses the customer's email Confirmed before it's recorded An invoice is marked paid once Paystack confirms the payment. The payment must match the invoice Invoice Crowd asks Paystack itself, server to server, whether that exact transaction succeeded, and checks the account, reference, amount, currency and live or test mode. A signed webhook from the same account leads to the same check. A browser return alone never marks an invoice paid. Merchant account and mode Same invoice, amount and currency Paystack reports it as successful Refunds through Paystack Choose Refund on the paid invoice and pick Refund it to the customer via Paystack. Invoice Crowd sends the refund through Paystack, books it once Paystack confirms, and a refund made in the Paystack dashboard waits on Payments Needing Review for you to record. Partial refunds allowed Booked only after Paystack confirms Dashboard refunds reach the review page At a glance Everything Paystack brings to your invoices Get paid in the currencies your Paystack account accepts, keep every payment matched to its invoice, and keep your books in step. Paystack checkout A hosted Paystack checkout on your invoices, included on paid plans. PS #09a5db Northwind Paystack Paid plans Connected ok One-time info Hosted checkout One-time payment Paystack's hosted checkout, with the cards, bank and mobile money channels enabled on your Paystack account. Cards Bank #0f766e Mobile money #f59e0b Channels your account enables Pair it for recurring billing Use Paystack for one-time invoices and another gateway, such as Stripe or Razorpay, for subscriptions. Invoice Checkout Stripe Recurring Both gateways, one account Merchant setup Nickname, Public Key, write-only Secret Key and Live or Sandbox mode, plus the Webhook URL pasted into Paystack. Mode Live Public Key pk_live_… Secret Key Saved Confirmed by Paystack Paystack's own transaction record must match the account, reference, amount, currency and mode before anything is recorded. Reference INV-2052 Amount R28,175.00 Paystack status success in Currencies NGN, GHS, KES, ZAR and USD, matched to the currencies your Paystack account accepts, with USD once Paystack enables it for you. NGN GHS #b45309 KES #15803d ZAR #4941e3 USD #1e3a8a Limited to what you accept Checkout window Checkout opens in its own window. After a verified payment it refreshes the invoice page and closes itself. New window Verified By Paystack Refreshed The window closes itself Fees and part payments Gateway fees, partial payments, deposits and split instalments work as on other gateways; each payment is its own Paystack transaction. Deposit via Paystack R8,452.50 Gateway Fees +R245.12 Remaining R19,722.50 bal Unmatched payments If a confirmed Paystack payment can't be applied to its invoice, for example because the balance changed, it is held in Payments Needing Review for you to apply, keep as credit or refund. Paystack payment Needs Review Balance changed Apply or credit You choose Nothing applied blindly Refunds Choose Refund on the invoice and the money goes back through Paystack. The refund is booked only after Paystack confirms it. LA Lumen Architects R6,900.00 Refund sent Confirmed Booked Refund via Paystack Your Paystack pricing Paystack's transaction fees and settlement timing come from your Paystack agreement, not the Invoice Crowd subscription. Transaction fees Set by Paystack #14b8a6 Settlement timing Invoice Crowd plan Billed separately Plan Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside Paystack and customers choose the one they prefer. #635bff PayFast #e8412c M-Pesa #43b02a Razorpay #0c2451 PayPal #003087 Configure another gateway live Questions Paystack and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with Paystack? Yes. Customers pay on Paystack's hosted checkout with the cards, bank and mobile money channels you've enabled, and Invoice Crowd records the payment once Paystack confirms it. Paystack is included on paid plans. What do I need to connect Paystack? Your Paystack Public Key and Secret Key for the mode you choose, Live or Sandbox (Paystack Test Mode). After saving, paste the Webhook URL Invoice Crowd shows into Paystack under Settings, API Keys & Webhooks. Paystack is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. Which currencies can customers pay in? Paystack is offered on invoices in NGN, GHS, KES, ZAR or USD, and only in the currencies your own Paystack account accepts. Invoice Crowd checks this with Paystack when you save the account; save it again after enabling a new currency in Paystack. Can customers pay part of an invoice with Paystack? Yes. Partial payments, deposits and split instalments each start their own Paystack payment for exactly that amount, and only that part of the invoice is settled. Can I refund a Paystack payment from Invoice Crowd? Yes. Choose Refund on the invoice, then Refund it to the customer via Paystack. Invoice Crowd sends the refund through Paystack and books it only after Paystack confirms it. This works for online payments made on the invoice page. Who sets the Paystack transaction fees? Paystack sets its transaction fees, exchange costs and payout timing under your Paystack agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Start getting paid with Paystack Connect Paystack in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice in a currency your account accepts, then switch to Live keys when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by Paystack before it's recorded Every payment matched to its invoice --- ## PhonePe Integration URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/integrations/phonepe/ Accept one-time INR invoice payments and PhonePe AutoPay for subscriptions. Each payment is confirmed with PhonePe before it's recorded. Payment integration Accept invoice payments with PhonePe Let customers pay your INR invoices through PhonePe, as a one-time payment or automatically with PhonePe AutoPay for subscriptions. Every payment is confirmed with PhonePe before it's recorded. See how it works All integrations Home Integrations PhonePe One-time payments and AutoPay Confirmed by PhonePe Made for INR invoices pop From setup to paid From invoice to paid with PhonePe Connect your PhonePe account once and your INR invoices and subscriptions can offer it. Each payment is confirmed with PhonePe before it reaches your books. Connect your account Each business profile uses its own PhonePe account, in Live or Sandbox mode. Connect PhonePe in a few fields Enter the Client ID, Client Version and Client Secret from your PhonePe Developer Settings, plus a webhook username and password, for the mode you choose, Live or Sandbox. Secrets are saved securely and never shown again. Per business profile Live and Sandbox modes Secret keys stay hidden Use the PhonePe account you already have Customers pay into your own PhonePe merchant account, on your existing PhonePe pricing. Your own merchant account Your existing pricing Paid into your account A smooth checkout for customers PhonePe appears on your INR invoices, ready to pay. Pay Using PhonePe Your customer opens the invoice, chooses Pay Using PhonePe and completes the payment on PhonePe's secure checkout. Invoice Crowd confirms the order with PhonePe and applies the payment to that invoice. Amount taken from the invoice Applied to the right invoice Secure PhonePe checkout Full, partial and split payments Offer PhonePe for the full balance, a partial payment, a split payment or a payment link. Every payment lands on the invoice it belongs to. Full or partial payments Split payments Payment links PhonePe AutoPay for subscriptions Customers approve once in their UPI app, and each billing period is collected automatically. Approve once, paid every period On a subscription invoice, your customer agrees to the amount and billing schedule, then approves the first payment and the recurring mandate in their UPI app. PhonePe notifies them at least 24 hours before each later debit, and every renewal is confirmed with PhonePe before it's recorded. First payment approved in UPI 24 hours' notice before each debit Every period recorded Follow every mandate from the subscription The PhonePe AutoPay card on the subscription shows the payment amount, next billing date and last payment. Recheck the status with PhonePe at any time, or cancel AutoPay in one step. Amount and next billing date Recheck status any time Cancel in one step At a glance Everything PhonePe brings to your invoices Get paid online, collect subscriptions automatically, and keep every payment matched to its invoice. PhonePe checkout Customers pay your INR invoices on PhonePe's secure checkout, straight from the invoice. Verified payments Every payment is checked directly with PhonePe, matching the order, amount and currency before it's recorded. PhonePe AutoPay Bill subscriptions automatically through a recurring UPI mandate your customer approves once. Quick setup Add your Client ID, Client Version and Client Secret, set a webhook username and password, choose Live or Sandbox, and you're ready. An invoice is marked paid once PhonePe confirms a completed payment for that invoice, amount and currency. Your PhonePe account Payments go to your own PhonePe merchant account, on your existing PhonePe pricing. Flexible billing schedules AutoPay follows your subscription: daily, weekly, fortnightly, monthly, every two months, quarterly, half-yearly or yearly. Customers stay in control Customers get at least 24 hours' notice before each AutoPay debit and can pause or revoke the mandate in their UPI app. Nothing slips through If an invoice changes after checkout starts, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review, ready for you to decide. Offer PhonePe for the full balance, a partial payment, a split payment or a payment link. Pass on processing fees Add a gateway fee for PhonePe if you choose, shown to the customer as Gateway Fees on the invoice. Offer more ways to pay Switch on other gateways alongside PhonePe and customers choose the one they prefer. Questions PhonePe and Invoice Crowd, answered Can my customers pay invoices with PhonePe? Yes. Connect your PhonePe account and customers pay your INR invoices on PhonePe's secure checkout, straight from the invoice. Invoice Crowd confirms each payment with PhonePe before recording it. What do I need to connect PhonePe? The Client ID, Client Version and Client Secret from your PhonePe Developer Settings, plus a webhook username and password, for the mode you choose, Live or Sandbox. PhonePe is included on paid plans; the free plan includes PayPal. How does PhonePe AutoPay work? PhonePe AutoPay collects subscription payments automatically. Your customer opens the subscription invoice, agrees to the amount and billing schedule, and approves the first payment and the recurring mandate in their UPI app. PhonePe notifies them at least 24 hours before each later debit, and each renewal is recorded once PhonePe confirms it. Which subscriptions can use PhonePe AutoPay? PhonePe AutoPay covers INR subscriptions from ₹1 to ₹15,000 per billing period, including any gateway fee, on a daily, weekly, fortnightly, monthly, every-two-months, quarterly, half-yearly or yearly schedule. Customers can pause, resume or revoke the mandate in their UPI app, and you can recheck its status or cancel AutoPay from the subscription. How does Invoice Crowd confirm a PhonePe payment? Invoice Crowd checks the order status directly with PhonePe and matches the merchant account, order, amount and currency to your invoice before marking it paid. If the invoice changed in the meantime, the payment waits in Payments Needing Review for you to decide. Who sets the PhonePe transaction fees? PhonePe sets its transaction fees and settlement timing under your PhonePe agreement, separate from your Invoice Crowd plan. You can pass a processing fee on to customers with the gateway fee setting. Start getting paid with PhonePe Connect PhonePe in Sandbox mode, pay a sample invoice, then switch to Live when you're ready. Start free Payment gateway overview Confirmed by PhonePe before it's recorded 30-day free trial --- ## Invoice Crowd Comparisons URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/ Compare Invoice Crowd with popular invoicing and accounting tools. Connect proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing in one business workspace. Why Invoice Crowd Compare Invoice Crowd with your shortlist Bring proposals, invoices, projects, payments and purchasing into one workspace. See how Invoice Crowd compares with the tools you are considering and find the fit for your business. Browse the guides See pricing Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Why choose Invoice Crowd Manage the work and the financial records together Choose a platform around the records your business uses every day, from the first client agreement to the final payment. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices for repeat charges and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Projects and time Bills and purchase orders Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Confirm specialist requirements Check any local tax filing, payroll, live bank-feed, industry or approval requirements before switching. The comparison guides identify material differences and link to the vendors for current details. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Comparison guides Compare the products you are considering See how our connected workflow fits beside each product, with the differences that matter for a buying decision. Invoice Crowd vs QuickBooks Connect proposals, project work and billing with your accounting records. Invoice Crowd vs FreshBooks Bring client billing and supplier records into the same workspace. Invoice Crowd vs Zoho Invoice Go from invoicing to a broader business workflow. Invoice Crowd vs Wave Connect proposals, projects and purchasing with your invoices. Invoice Crowd vs Xero Keep proposals, client work and financial records connected. Invoice Crowd vs BILL Bring sales, project billing and purchasing together. Questions Choosing Invoice Crowd Who is Invoice Crowd for? We build Invoice Crowd for small businesses, freelancers, creators and teams that want proposals, invoices, projects, purchasing and financial records in one workspace. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Try Invoice Crowd Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd vs QuickBooks URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/invoice-crowd-vs-quickbooks/ Compare Invoice Crowd and QuickBooks for proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing. See key features, plan considerations and switching steps. Invoice Crowd vs QuickBooks Invoice Crowd vs QuickBooks: compare features and workflows Invoice Crowd takes you from an accepted proposal to project work, invoices and payments, with purchasing and accounting records in the same workspace, while QuickBooks is accounting-first with a broad ecosystem. Choose Invoice Crowd when the client workflow drives your business. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs QuickBooks: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd QuickBooks Online Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current regional QuickBooks pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price the exact QuickBooks edition, users and add-ons Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities Quotes and estimates, not the same interactive proposal workflow Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made yes Strong bill management; purchase-order access depends on plan Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Time and project profitability are available, with plan differences Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to Invoice Crowd plan Each company normally needs its own QuickBooks Online subscription Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Mature general ledger and accountant-oriented workflows Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Accounting-first small businesses and accountant collaboration Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://quickbooks.intuit.com/pricing/ and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Connect proposals, project work and billing with your accounting records With Invoice Crowd, you can move from an accepted proposal to project work, invoices and payments while keeping purchasing and financial records in the same workspace. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where QuickBooks may fit your requirements QuickBooks offers a broad accounting ecosystem. Check the specific payroll, tax, bank-feed and adviser workflows your business needs when comparing the two products. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. QuickBooks official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and QuickBooks How does Invoice Crowd compare with QuickBooks? Invoice Crowd is built around the client workflow: proposals, estimates, project time, invoices, payments and purchasing, with a chart of accounts and financial statements behind them. QuickBooks is accounting-first, with a mature general ledger and accountant-oriented workflows. Invoice Crowd reconciles uploaded bank statements and has no live bank feeds or payroll, so check those needs before you choose. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd vs FreshBooks URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/invoice-crowd-vs-freshbooks/ Compare Invoice Crowd and FreshBooks for proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing. See key features, plan considerations and switching steps. Invoice Crowd vs FreshBooks Invoice Crowd vs FreshBooks: compare features and workflows Invoice Crowd and FreshBooks both handle client invoicing, time and projects, and Invoice Crowd adds supplier bills, purchase orders and vendor credits in the same workspace. That gives you one view of the work you sell and the cost of delivering it. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs FreshBooks: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd FreshBooks Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current regional FreshBooks pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price the exact FreshBooks plan, users and add-ons Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities yes Proposals and retainers are available from Plus upward Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made Accounts Payable appears on Premium; purchasing breadth differs Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Unlimited time tracking and project billing are core strengths Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan Additional businesses generally require separate account context Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Double-entry reports and reconciliation are available from Plus upward Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Client billing, time and expense polish Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Bring client billing and supplier records into the same workspace Our proposals, estimates and invoices sit alongside projects, time, bills, purchase orders and vendor credits. That gives you a connected view of both the work you sell and the costs of delivering it. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where FreshBooks may fit your requirements FreshBooks includes client invoicing, time and expense workflows, with accounting and proposal access depending on the plan. Compare the required plan and purchasing workflow with your actual needs. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. FreshBooks official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and FreshBooks How does Invoice Crowd compare with FreshBooks? Both handle client invoicing, time tracking and project billing; Invoice Crowd also keeps supplier bills, purchase orders, vendor credits and accounting records in the same workspace, with several business profiles depending on plan. FreshBooks offers proposals, retainers and double-entry reports from its Plus plan upward, so compare the plan you would actually need. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd vs Zoho Invoice URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/invoice-crowd-vs-zoho-invoice/ Compare Invoice Crowd and Zoho Invoice for proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing. See key features, plan considerations and switching steps. Invoice Crowd vs Zoho Invoice Invoice Crowd vs Zoho Invoice: compare features and workflows Invoice Crowd goes beyond invoicing: customer billing sits with proposals, purchasing, project time and accounting records in one product, while Zoho Invoice leaves full accounting and purchasing to Zoho Books. Choose Invoice Crowd when you want those parts of the business together. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs Zoho Invoice: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd Zoho Invoice Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing yes Check Zoho Invoice's current official pricing and limits Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Include Zoho Books if the workflow needs full accounting Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities partial Professional quotes and estimates, but not the same proposal flow Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made no Expense tracking is included; full purchasing belongs to Zoho Books Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Time and expense tracking are included Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan Organization and wider-suite rules apply Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Zoho Invoice connects to Zoho Books for full accounting Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Free-first invoicing inside the Zoho ecosystem Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.zoho.com/invoice/pricing/ and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Go from invoicing to a broader business workflow Invoice Crowd connects customer billing with proposals, purchasing, project time and accounting records. Choose our platform when you want those parts of the business together rather than stopping at invoice creation. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where Zoho Invoice may fit your requirements Zoho Invoice is a free invoicing product with usage conditions. For broader accounting and purchasing, compare the relevant Zoho Books offering as well as Zoho Invoice. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. Zoho Invoice official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and Zoho Invoice How does Invoice Crowd compare with Zoho Invoice? Invoice Crowd covers invoicing plus proposals, purchasing, projects and accounting in one product, while Zoho Invoice handles quotes, invoices, time and expenses and connects to Zoho Books for full accounting and purchasing. Choose Invoice Crowd if you want those parts of the business together without a second app. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd vs Wave URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/invoice-crowd-vs-wave/ Compare Invoice Crowd and Wave for proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing. See key features, plan considerations and switching steps. Invoice Crowd vs Wave Invoice Crowd vs Wave: compare features and workflows Invoice Crowd adds proposals, project time and a fuller purchasing workflow to the invoicing and bookkeeping that Wave covers, all in one workspace. You can follow the work from the agreed scope through the invoice and payment, with costs recorded alongside it. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs Wave: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd Wave Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing yes Check Wave's current regional access and plan limits Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features partial Include the exact Wave edition, business count and payment services Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities Estimates are included; not the same interactive proposal workflow Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made Bills are included; purchasing workflow is narrower Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability no No comparable native project-and-time workflow in the listed plans Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan One account can hold profiles, but Pro is priced per business Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Free bookkeeping records; Pro adds bank import and automation Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Free-first bookkeeping in supported markets Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.waveapps.com/pricing and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Connect proposals, projects and purchasing with your invoices We bring proposals, project time, customer billing and supplier records into one workspace. You can follow the work from the agreed scope through the invoice and payment, with costs recorded alongside it. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where Wave may fit your requirements Wave offers a free Starter plan and a paid Pro plan in supported markets. Compare its accounting and invoicing scope, regional availability and per-business pricing with the workflow you need. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. Wave official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and Wave How does Invoice Crowd compare with Wave? Invoice Crowd covers more of the client workflow than Wave: proposals, project time and a fuller purchasing workflow sit beside invoicing and accounting. Wave focuses on free-first bookkeeping and invoicing in supported markets, and its Pro plan is priced per business. Compare the scope you need with each product's plan and regional availability. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd vs Xero URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/invoice-crowd-vs-xero/ Compare Invoice Crowd and Xero for proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing. See key features, plan considerations and switching steps. Invoice Crowd vs Xero Invoice Crowd vs Xero: compare features and workflows Invoice Crowd runs the client workflow and the accounting in one workspace, from proposal and project time to invoice, payment and purchasing, while Xero is accounting-first with a large app ecosystem. Choose Invoice Crowd when you want the work and the records it creates together. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs Xero: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd Xero Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current regional Xero pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price the exact Xero edition, users and add-ons Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities Quotes are included; not the same interactive proposal workflow Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made yes Bills and purchasing are established accounting workflows; Early has limits Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Project time and costs are included on Established Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan Each organization generally has its own subscription Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Mature general ledger, reconciliation and accounting controls Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Accounting-first businesses and advisor collaboration Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.xero.com/us/pricing-plans/ and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Keep proposals, client work and financial records connected With Invoice Crowd, proposals, estimates, project time, invoices and purchasing share the same business context. It is a practical choice when you want to manage the client workflow alongside the financial records it creates. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where Xero may fit your requirements Xero provides accounting, reconciliation and an app ecosystem, with project and currency features varying by plan and region. Check the bank connections, adviser tools and local requirements you depend on. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. Xero official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and Xero How does Invoice Crowd compare with Xero? Invoice Crowd covers the client workflow from proposal to payment, plus bills, purchase orders, projects and accounting records, in one workspace. Xero is accounting-first, with mature reconciliation and adviser collaboration, and its project features vary by plan. Invoice Crowd reconciles uploaded bank statements and has no live bank feeds, so check that against how you work. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd vs BILL URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/compare/invoice-crowd-vs-bill-com/ Compare Invoice Crowd and BILL for proposals, invoices, projects and purchasing. See key features, plan considerations and switching steps. Invoice Crowd vs BILL Invoice Crowd vs BILL: compare features and workflows Invoice Crowd covers both sales and purchasing in one workspace, while BILL focuses on payables, receivables and spend and syncs with a separate accounting system. With Invoice Crowd you manage proposals, invoices, projects, supplier bills and purchase orders together. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Compare Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs BILL: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd BILL Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current BILL product and pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price AP, AR or spend workflows separately as required Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities no BILL focuses on AP, AR and spend rather than sales proposals Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made yes Deep AP controls; advanced PO matching appears on higher tiers Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability No comparable native project-and-time billing workspace Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan Multi-entity and multi-location controls are enterprise-oriented Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Synchronizes with accounting systems rather than replacing their ledger Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing AP/AR automation and finance-team controls Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.bill.com/product/pricing/ and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Bring sales, project billing and purchasing together Invoice Crowd combines proposals and customer invoicing with projects, supplier bills, purchase orders and payment records. You can manage the work that creates a charge alongside the documents and balances that follow. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where BILL may fit your requirements BILL focuses on AP, AR and spend workflows and connects with accounting systems. If you need complex approval routing or specialized finance-team controls, compare those requirements directly. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. BILL official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and BILL How does Invoice Crowd compare with BILL? Invoice Crowd runs sales and purchasing together: proposals, invoices, projects, supplier bills, purchase orders and its own accounting records. BILL focuses on payables, receivables and spend automation and syncs with accounting systems rather than replacing their ledger. If you need complex approval routing or finance-team controls, compare BILL on those directly. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Invoice Crowd Alternatives URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/alternatives/ Looking to switch invoicing or accounting software? See how to move from QuickBooks, FreshBooks or Xero to Invoice Crowd, and what carries over. Why Invoice Crowd An alternative that connects more of your business Bring proposals, invoices, projects, payments and purchasing into one workspace. See how Invoice Crowd compares with the tools you are considering and find the fit for your business. Browse the guides See pricing Home Alternatives Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Why choose Invoice Crowd Manage the work and the financial records together Choose a platform around the records your business uses every day, from the first client agreement to the final payment. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices for repeat charges and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Projects and time Bills and purchase orders Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Confirm specialist requirements Check any local tax filing, payroll, live bank-feed, industry or approval requirements before switching. The comparison guides identify material differences and link to the vendors for current details. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Comparison guides Find your Invoice Crowd alternative guide See how our connected workflow fits beside each product, with the differences that matter for a buying decision. QuickBooks alternative Connect proposals, project work and billing with your accounting records. FreshBooks alternative Bring client billing and supplier records into the same workspace. Xero alternative Keep proposals, client work and financial records connected. Questions Choosing Invoice Crowd Who is Invoice Crowd for? We build Invoice Crowd for small businesses, freelancers, creators and teams that want proposals, invoices, projects, purchasing and financial records in one workspace. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Try Invoice Crowd Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## QuickBooks Alternative URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/alternatives/quickbooks/ Moving from QuickBooks? Import customers, items and records from CSV or Excel, map your accounts and opening balances, and start invoicing the same day. QuickBooks alternative QuickBooks alternative for connected business management Switch from QuickBooks by exporting customers, vendors, products and services, invoices and estimates as CSV or Excel files and importing them into Invoice Crowd. Then map your accounts to the default chart and enter opening balances; there is no direct QuickBooks sync. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Alternatives Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs QuickBooks: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd QuickBooks Online Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current regional QuickBooks pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price the exact QuickBooks edition, users and add-ons Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities Quotes and estimates, not the same interactive proposal workflow Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made yes Strong bill management; purchase-order access depends on plan Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Time and project profitability are available, with plan differences Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to Invoice Crowd plan Each company normally needs its own QuickBooks Online subscription Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Mature general ledger and accountant-oriented workflows Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Accounting-first small businesses and accountant collaboration Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://quickbooks.intuit.com/pricing/ and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Connect proposals, project work and billing with your accounting records With Invoice Crowd, you can move from an accepted proposal to project work, invoices and payments while keeping purchasing and financial records in the same workspace. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where QuickBooks may fit your requirements QuickBooks offers a broad accounting ecosystem. Check the specific payroll, tax, bank-feed and adviser workflows your business needs when comparing the two products. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. QuickBooks official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. QuickBooks migration guide Export, map, test and reconcile your QuickBooks records step by step. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and QuickBooks How do I switch from QuickBooks to Invoice Crowd? Export your QuickBooks lists and sales documents as CSV or Excel files and import them into Invoice Crowd: customers to Customers, vendors to Vendors, products and services to Items, and invoices and estimates with their numbers, lines and balances due. There is no direct QuickBooks connection, so on a paid plan map your accounts onto the default chart of 148 accounts, adding any you need, and enter opening balances as of your cutover date. Keep QuickBooks for payroll, journal history and filed tax records; our QuickBooks migration guide walks through each step. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## FreshBooks Alternative URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/alternatives/freshbooks/ Moving from FreshBooks? Import clients, items and records from CSV or Excel, set up proposals, time tracking and payments, and keep your numbering. FreshBooks alternative FreshBooks alternative for connected business management Switch from FreshBooks by exporting your clients, items, invoices and estimates as CSV or Excel files and importing them into Invoice Crowd. Then enter opening balances and set up projects, recurring invoices and retainers on a paid plan. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Alternatives Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs FreshBooks: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd FreshBooks Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current regional FreshBooks pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price the exact FreshBooks plan, users and add-ons Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities yes Proposals and retainers are available from Plus upward Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made Accounts Payable appears on Premium; purchasing breadth differs Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Unlimited time tracking and project billing are core strengths Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan Additional businesses generally require separate account context Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Double-entry reports and reconciliation are available from Plus upward Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Client billing, time and expense polish Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Bring client billing and supplier records into the same workspace Our proposals, estimates and invoices sit alongside projects, time, bills, purchase orders and vendor credits. That gives you a connected view of both the work you sell and the costs of delivering it. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where FreshBooks may fit your requirements FreshBooks includes client invoicing, time and expense workflows, with accounting and proposal access depending on the plan. Compare the required plan and purchasing workflow with your actual needs. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. FreshBooks official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. FreshBooks migration guide Export, map, test and reconcile your FreshBooks records step by step. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and FreshBooks How do I switch from FreshBooks to Invoice Crowd? Export your FreshBooks clients, items, invoices and estimates, then import the files into Invoice Crowd as CSV, TXT, XLS or XLSX. Clients become Customers, items and services become Items, and invoices and estimates come in with their numbers, lines, taxes and any balance due. There is no direct FreshBooks connection, so rebuild recurring invoices, retainers and projects yourself and keep FreshBooks for history; our FreshBooks migration guide covers each step. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Xero Alternative URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/alternatives/xero/ Moving from Xero? Import contacts and items from CSV or Excel, map your chart of accounts and opening balances, and connect the gateways you use. Xero alternative Xero alternative for connected business management Switch from Xero by exporting your contacts, products and services, invoices and quotes as CSV or Excel files and importing them into Invoice Crowd. Then map your accounts to the default chart and enter opening balances; there is no direct Xero sync. Try Invoice Crowd Compare features Home Alternatives Proposals to payments Projects and purchasing Multiple business profiles pop Decision table Invoice Crowd vs Xero: key features Start with the work you need to do, then compare the features and plan access below. We publish this comparison as Invoice Crowd. Invoice Crowd Xero Plan and trial access Current access and limits are published on Pricing partial Check the current regional Xero pricing page Complete plan cost Price the needed business profiles, users and features Price the exact Xero edition, users and add-ons Interactive proposals Proposal builder with e-signature approval; clients can remove items or change quantities Quotes are included; not the same interactive proposal workflow Bills and purchase orders Bills, POs, vendor credits and Payments Made yes Bills and purchasing are established accounting workflows; Early has limits Projects and time Projects, tasks, timer, timesheet approvals, retainers and project profitability Project time and costs are included on Established Multiple businesses Several business profiles according to plan Each organization generally has its own subscription Accounting depth Chart of accounts, general ledger, manual journals, financial reports, statement-import reconciliation and transaction locks Mature general ledger, reconciliation and accounting controls Best fit Small businesses, freelancers and teams connecting proposals, billing, projects and purchasing Accounting-first businesses and advisor collaboration Compare the required plan and regional edition before choosing. Prices, users, payment fees, add-ons and availability can change. Official sources: https://www.xero.com/us/pricing-plans/ and https://invoicecrowd.com/pricing/. Why choose Invoice Crowd Keep proposals, client work and financial records connected With Invoice Crowd, proposals, estimates, project time, invoices and purchasing share the same business context. It is a practical choice when you want to manage the client workflow alongside the financial records it creates. From agreement to payment Reuse the context you already captured. Keep scope and billing connected Create proposals and estimates, record the accepted work and carry the billing details into customer invoices. Your team can see what was agreed alongside what has been charged. Proposals and estimates Customer invoices Recorded payments Bill ongoing work consistently Use recurring invoices and monthly retainers for repeat charges on paid plans, and track partial payments against the remaining balance. Keep the customer history available when a question or correction needs attention. Recurring invoices Partial payments Customer balances The costs behind the work Keep sales and purchasing in the same business context. Connect projects, time and purchasing Record project work and billable time alongside supplier bills, purchase orders and expenses. You can follow the activity behind a client charge without rebuilding it from separate files. Expenses and vendor credits Review the financial records Use the chart of accounts, general ledger, journals and financial reports to review business activity. Reconcile imported statement records with the transactions behind the balances. General ledger and journals Financial reports Statement-import reconciliation Choose the right setup Check the requirements that affect your decision. Match your businesses and team to a plan Choose the Invoice Crowd plan that covers the business profiles, users and features you need. Compare the recurring subscription and payment-provider charges using your actual workload. Business profiles Team access Current plan details Where Xero may fit your requirements Xero provides accounting, reconciliation and an app ecosystem, with project and currency features varying by plan and region. Check the bank connections, adviser tools and local requirements you depend on. Regional availability Required integrations Plan-specific access Features and plans Explore the features behind the comparison Look at the workflow in more detail, then compare the plans you would actually use. Customer invoicing Create invoices and keep payment history connected with the customer. Connect project tasks and billable time with client billing. Accounting records Review the accounts, journals and reports behind your business balances. Invoice Crowd plans Choose the features, users and business profiles for your setup. Xero official plans Check current regional pricing, feature access and payment fees directly with the vendor. Migration plan Archive your Xero exports, test the import and reconcile totals before you switch. Questions Questions about Invoice Crowd and Xero How do I switch from Xero to Invoice Crowd? Export your Xero contacts, products and services, invoices and quotes, then import them into Invoice Crowd as CSV or Excel files. Customers go to Customers, suppliers to Vendors, products and services to Items, and invoices and quotes to Invoices and Estimates with their numbers, lines and balances due. There is no direct Xero connection, so on a paid plan map your accounts onto the default chart of 148 accounts and enter opening balances as of your cutover date. Our migration guide covers the archive, test import and reconciliation steps. Can I manage more than one business? Invoice Crowd supports separate business profiles according to your plan. Check the current profile and user limits on our Pricing page and set up each business with its own records and settings. How should I compare the total cost? Compare the plan you need, the normal renewal price, required users and business profiles, add-ons and payment-provider fees. Use the official pricing links for current regional terms. What should I check before switching? Export your existing records, choose a cutover date and reconcile open balances. Test a representative proposal, invoice, payment, supplier bill and report. Confirm any specialist tax, payroll, bank-feed or industry requirements before moving current work. Bring your next client workflow into Invoice Crowd Start with a proposal or estimate, create the invoice and see how the customer, payment and financial records stay connected. Review pricing Proposals and invoicing Plans for your business --- ## Free Invoice Generator URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/free-invoice-generator/ Create a polished invoice in your browser, calculate line items and tax, switch layouts, then print or save a PDF. No account or upload required. Free business tool Create a free, private, print-ready invoice in your browser Add your business, customer and line items, watch the totals update, choose a document style and use your browser to print or save a PDF. The sample stays on your device. Use the free tool Try Invoice Crowd Home Free Invoice Generator No account required Calculates totals live Print or save as PDF pop Free browser tool Build your free invoice Try the working generator below. Your entries remain in this browser tab and are not submitted to Invoice Crowd. invoice 1000 30 Northstar Studio Harbor & Co. INV-1001 Thank you. Payment is due within 14 days. This generator creates a printable document, not an Invoice Crowd account record. Confirm tax, payment terms and legal invoice requirements for your jurisdiction. USD USD ($) EUR EUR (€) GBP GBP (£) INR INR (₹) CAD CAD (C$) AUD AUD (A$) AED AED (د.إ) SGD SGD (S$) classic Classic Structured and familiar minimal Minimal Quiet and spacious bold Bold Confident colour accent Brand identity workshop 750 Design production 120 Project support 125 How to use it well A complete document workflow without a signup wall Use it for a quick invoice now, then move recurring client work into Invoice Crowd when you need saved customers, document history and payment tracking. Build the document The essentials stay together in one focused workspace. Enter the parties and line items Add the sender, customer, document number, dates, services, quantities and rates. Add or remove rows without reloading the page. Repeatable line items Editable dates and number Live customer preview Keep the arithmetic visible Subtotal, tax and total recalculate from the values on screen so the printable preview matches the working form. Quantity × rate Explicit tax percentage Subtotal and total breakdown Choose the presentation A useful invoice should also feel credible when it reaches the customer. Switch between three document styles Classic, Minimal and Bold alter the preview presentation while preserving the document values you entered. Classic layout Minimal layout Bold layout Preview before you deliver The right-hand document updates as you type, including client details, dates, notes and every line total. Live document preview Responsive editing layout No hidden calculation state Save without uploading The browser handles the working data and final print dialog. Print or save a PDF Use the Print or save PDF button, then choose your browser's PDF destination or a connected printer. Browser print workflow PDF destination support Clean print stylesheet Move to Invoice Crowd when you need records The free generator does not store customers, payment status or document history. An Invoice Crowd account adds those ongoing workflows. No server-side record here Saved workflows require an account Start free when ready Questions Free Invoice Generator, answered Is this invoice generator free? Yes. You can build, preview and print the invoice without creating an account or entering payment details. Does Invoice Crowd store what I type into this invoice? No. The working values stay in the current browser tab and are not submitted to Invoice Crowd. Closing or reloading the page clears the draft. Can I save the document as a PDF? Yes. Select Print or save PDF, then choose the PDF destination provided by your browser or operating system. Can I add more than one line item? Yes. Add or remove line items, then enter a description, quantity and rate for each one. The subtotal, tax and total update from those rows. Which currencies are available? The free generator includes USD, EUR, GBP, INR, CAD, AUD, AED and SGD display formats. Select the currency that matches the document; exchange conversion is not performed. What does an Invoice Crowd account add? The browser tool creates one temporary invoice. An account adds saved customers, products, taxes, document history and the connected proposal, invoice, payment and purchase workflows. Ready to keep the work, not just the calculation? Use Invoice Crowd to save customers, products, taxes and business documents in one connected workspace. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Your records stay yours Cancel anytime --- ## Invoice Templates URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/invoice-templates/ Try three polished invoice templates with a live browser preview, automatic totals and a clean print-to-PDF workflow. No account required. Free business tool Free invoice templates you can edit online Choose a layout, replace the sample business and customer details, and add your invoice items. Check the totals in the preview, then use your browser to print or save a PDF. No account is required. Use the free tool Try Invoice Crowd Home Invoice Templates Three responsive styles Live invoice preview Free print-ready output pop Free browser tool Try every template with your own details Replace the sample details below. Enter a description, quantity and rate for each item, then set your currency, dates and tax rate. Changing the layout keeps your entries in place. invoice 1000 10 30 Fieldwork Creative Meadow Goods INV-2408 Please include the invoice number with payment. Templates provide a general document layout. Check the fields and tax disclosures required where your business and customer are located. USD USD ($) EUR EUR (€) GBP GBP (£) INR INR (₹) CAD CAD (C$) AUD AUD (A$) AED AED (د.إ) SGD SGD (S$) classic Classic Structured and familiar minimal Minimal Quiet and spacious bold Bold Confident colour accent Brand identity workshop 750 Design production 120 Project support 125 How to use it well How to fill in your invoice template Start with the details your customer needs to identify the work and pay the right amount. The example below explains the sample figures already in the tool. Choose your invoice layout Try Classic, Minimal or Bold. All three use the same invoice details and totals, so you can compare them without entering everything again. Classic for familiar clarity A structured header and restrained accents make the document immediately recognizable to clients and finance teams. Conventional hierarchy Clear metadata Easy to scan Minimal for quiet confidence A lighter visual treatment keeps attention on services, rates and the amount due. Reduced visual noise Generous spacing Detail-first layout Check the sample calculation The sample uses USD and an illustrative 10% tax rate. Replace that rate with the treatment that applies to your invoice. How the sample reaches $2,156 One workshop at $750, eight hours at $120 and two hours at $125 add up to $1,960. At the sample 10% rate, tax is $196 and the total is $2,156. Workshop: 1 x $750 = $750 Design: 8 x $120 = $960 Support: 2 x $125 = $250 Replace the sample before sending Use your own business and customer details, an invoice number and a clear description of each charge. Check the issue date, payment due date, currency and tax rate against your agreement. Use your own invoice number Describe each charge clearly Check dates, currency and tax Save a copy before leaving Your draft is temporary. Closing or reloading this page clears the entries, so save your finished invoice before leaving. Save the selected template as PDF Open the browser print dialog and choose Save as PDF for a clean client-ready file. Print-focused layout PDF-ready output No account required Use Invoice Crowd for reusable records When templates become recurring work, Invoice Crowd can retain customers, products, taxes and document history. Saved contacts Reusable product data Track the document lifecycle Questions Invoice Templates, answered Is this invoice generator free? Yes. You can build, preview and print the invoice without creating an account or entering payment details. Does Invoice Crowd store what I type into this invoice? No. The working values stay in the current browser tab and are not submitted to Invoice Crowd. Closing or reloading the page clears the draft. Can I save the document as a PDF? Yes. Select Print or save PDF, then choose the PDF destination provided by your browser or operating system. Can I add more than one line item? Yes. Add or remove line items, then enter a description, quantity and rate for each one. The subtotal, tax and total update from those rows. Which currencies are available? The free generator includes USD, EUR, GBP, INR, CAD, AUD, AED and SGD display formats. Select the currency that matches the document; exchange conversion is not performed. What does an Invoice Crowd account add? The browser tool creates one temporary invoice. An account adds saved customers, products, taxes, document history and the connected proposal, invoice, payment and purchase workflows. Can I design my own invoice template in Invoice Crowd? Yes. In an Invoice Crowd account, the template builder opens any of eight provided designs, or New Template starts a design of your own. Build the layout from modules such as Bill To, Items Table, Totals and Amount In Words, click any text, header cell or row to style it, and the PDF prints exactly as the editor shows. Saving a customized design is included on paid plans and in the 30-day free trial. Ready to keep the work, not just the calculation? Use Invoice Crowd to save customers, products, taxes and business documents in one connected workspace. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Your records stay yours Cancel anytime --- ## Free Estimate Generator URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/free-estimate-generator/ Create an itemized estimate in your browser, compare three layouts, calculate tax and print or save a PDF. Private and free to use. Free business tool Turn an early conversation into a clear, client-ready estimate Describe the work, quantity and rate, add the dates and tax context, then share a polished estimate from your browser. No account is required and the draft is not uploaded. Use the free tool Try Invoice Crowd Home Free Estimate Generator Itemized pricing Private browser calculation Print or save as PDF pop Free browser tool Build a free estimate Use realistic scope and pricing below, review the preview, then print or save the document as a PDF. estimate 1000 30 Juniper Design Co. Atlas Coffee EST-1001 Estimate valid for 30 days. Work begins after written approval. This estimate is a general commercial document, not a contract by itself. Add the acceptance, expiration, tax and scope terms appropriate to your work. USD USD ($) EUR EUR (€) GBP GBP (£) INR INR (₹) CAD CAD (C$) AUD AUD (A$) AED AED (د.إ) SGD SGD (S$) classic Classic Structured and familiar minimal Minimal Quiet and spacious bold Bold Confident colour accent Brand identity workshop 750 Design production 120 Project support 125 How to use it well Make the scope legible before the work begins A useful estimate shows how the total was formed and where assumptions belong, helping both sides discuss changes before an invoice exists. Describe the scope Break the work into understandable units. Itemize services, quantity and rate Use one row per deliverable or work unit so the customer can see what shapes the estimate. Repeatable scope rows Quantity and rate Visible line totals Add the parties and timing Include the sender, customer, estimate number, issue date and intended due or validity date. Sender and customer Document number Clear dates Check the commercial picture Keep estimated tax and the total visible while editing. Calculate before sharing The preview recalculates the subtotal, tax and estimated total whenever an input changes. Live subtotal Explicit tax rate Estimated total State the assumptions Use the notes area for validity, exclusions, deposit expectations and the approval step. Validity period Scope boundaries Approval context Move from estimate to work Use the document now and a saved workflow when the project grows. Print or save the result Use the clean print layout to deliver a PDF or paper copy without the editing controls. PDF-ready Print friendly No upload Convert accepted work in Invoice Crowd The account product adds stored estimates, customers and the path into an invoice after acceptance. Saved history Customer records Estimate-to-invoice workflow Questions Free Estimate Generator, answered Is this estimate generator free? Yes. You can build, preview and print the estimate without creating an account or entering payment details. Does Invoice Crowd store what I type into this estimate? No. The working values stay in the current browser tab and are not submitted to Invoice Crowd. Closing or reloading the page clears the draft. Can I save the document as a PDF? Yes. Select Print or save PDF, then choose the PDF destination provided by your browser or operating system. Can I add more than one line item? Yes. Add or remove line items, then enter a description, quantity and rate for each one. The subtotal, tax and total update from those rows. Which currencies are available? The free generator includes USD, EUR, GBP, INR, CAD, AUD, AED and SGD display formats. Select the currency that matches the document; exchange conversion is not performed. What does an Invoice Crowd account add? The browser tool creates one temporary estimate. An account adds saved customers, products, taxes, document history and the connected proposal, invoice, payment and purchase workflows. Ready to keep the work, not just the calculation? Use Invoice Crowd to save customers, products, taxes and business documents in one connected workspace. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Your records stay yours Cancel anytime --- ## Late Fee Calculator URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/late-fee-calculator/ Estimate a simple annualized late fee from the unpaid amount, annual rate and days overdue. Free browser calculator with a transparent formula. Free business tool Estimate a late fee with the formula left in plain sight Enter the unpaid amount, annual percentage rate and days overdue. The calculator uses simple interest (amount × annual rate × days ÷ 365) and shows the fee and new balance separately. Use the free tool Try Invoice Crowd Home Late Fee Calculator Transparent simple-interest formula Runs entirely in your browser No right to charge is assumed pop Free browser tool Calculate an estimated late fee Adjust the amount, annual rate and days late. The result updates with the fee and total balance. late-fee 2500 30 Northstar Studio Sample Client DOC-1001 Thank you for your business. This estimate does not establish a right to charge a late fee. Confirm the signed contract, invoice terms and applicable law before adding any fee. USD USD ($) EUR EUR (€) GBP GBP (£) INR INR (₹) CAD CAD (C$) AUD AUD (A$) AED AED (د.إ) SGD SGD (S$) classic Classic Structured and familiar minimal Minimal Quiet and spacious bold Bold Confident colour accent Brand identity workshop 750 Design production 120 Project support 125 How to use it well Arithmetic is the easy part and authorization is the important part The calculator explains one simple-interest method. Your agreement and local rules determine whether a fee is allowed and how it must be disclosed. Use the formula A predictable estimate from three explicit inputs. Start with the unpaid principal Use only the balance that is actually overdue, excluding amounts already paid or formally credited. Unpaid amount No hidden compounding Separate fee result Convert the annual rate by days The calculation is amount × annual rate ÷ 100 × days ÷ 365. It does not compound prior fees. Annual rate 365-day basis Simple interest Check permission first A calculation is not authorization. Read the signed agreement Confirm that the customer accepted the rate or fee terms before the payment became overdue. Signed contract Invoice terms Customer notice Check applicable limits Consumer, commercial, usury and prompt-payment rules vary by jurisdiction and transaction type. Jurisdiction matters Rate caps may apply Professional advice may be needed Communicate clearly Show the customer how the amount was derived. State the period and formula Include the original due date, overdue days, rate basis and resulting fee on any notice. Original due date Overdue period Transparent breakdown Keep the underlying invoice unchanged Preserve the original invoice and record any authorized fee as a separate adjustment or document according to your process. Preserve source facts Separate adjustment Maintain an audit trail Questions Late Fee Calculator, answered How is the estimated late fee calculated? The calculator uses simple interest: unpaid amount × annual rate ÷ 100 × days overdue ÷ 365. It does not compound prior fees. Does this calculator mean I can charge the result? No. A numerical result does not create a right to charge. Check the signed agreement, invoice terms and laws that apply to the transaction. Should I include amounts the customer already paid? No. Use the portion of principal that remains unpaid for the overdue period you are calculating. Why does the formula use 365 days? This tool converts an annual rate using a 365-day simple-interest basis. Your contract or jurisdiction may prescribe a different method. Does the calculator compound the fee? No. It estimates a fee on the entered unpaid principal only. It does not add past late fees to the interest-bearing amount. Is any invoice information uploaded? No. The three numeric inputs and result remain in your current browser tab. Ready to keep the work, not just the calculation? Use Invoice Crowd to save customers, products, taxes and business documents in one connected workspace. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Your records stay yours Cancel anytime --- ## VAT Calculator URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/vat-calculator/ Calculate VAT from a net amount or extract VAT from an inclusive total. Free, browser-only and transparent about the tax basis. Free business tool Calculate VAT in seconds, or extract it from an inclusive total Enter an amount and VAT rate, then choose whether the amount already includes tax. The calculator shows the net amount, VAT component and gross total without uploading your figures. Use the free tool Try Invoice Crowd Home VAT Calculator Inclusive or exclusive VAT Live net, tax and gross breakdown Browser-only calculation pop Free browser tool Calculate the VAT breakdown Leave the box clear to add VAT to a net amount, or check it to extract VAT from a tax-inclusive total. vat 1000 20 30 Northstar Studio Sample Client DOC-1001 Thank you for your business. VAT rates, exemptions, place-of-supply rules and rounding requirements vary. Confirm the correct treatment for the transaction and jurisdiction. USD USD ($) EUR EUR (€) GBP GBP (£) INR INR (₹) CAD CAD (C$) AUD AUD (A$) AED AED (د.إ) SGD SGD (S$) classic Classic Structured and familiar minimal Minimal Quiet and spacious bold Bold Confident colour accent Brand identity workshop 750 Design production 120 Project support 125 How to use it well Know which amount you started with before applying a percentage Adding VAT to a net price and extracting VAT from a gross price use different formulas. The mode control and three-part breakdown keep that distinction visible. Choose the direction Say whether the entered amount includes tax. Add VAT to a net amount For an exclusive price, tax equals net × rate and gross equals net plus tax. Net is the starting amount VAT is added Gross is calculated Extract VAT from a gross amount For an inclusive price, net equals gross ÷ (1 + rate) and VAT is the difference. Gross is the starting amount VAT is extracted Net is calculated Use the right rate The calculator accepts the rate; it does not choose one for you. Confirm the applicable percentage Rates can depend on the goods or services, customer, location, registration and transaction date. Product classification Place of supply Transaction date Review rounding rules A tax authority or accounting policy may require line-level, document-level or currency-specific rounding. Currency precision Line versus total Document policy Carry the result into records Keep the basis as well as the tax amount. Record net, VAT and gross separately A transparent document keeps the three values available for customer review and reporting. Net amount VAT component Gross total Use Invoice Crowd for ongoing documents The free calculator does not save tax settings or transactions. Invoice Crowd can retain them within your document workflow. Saved tax settings Reusable customers Document history Questions VAT Calculator, answered How does the VAT calculator work? Enter an amount and VAT rate. In exclusive mode the tax is added to the entered net amount. In inclusive mode the tax is extracted from the entered gross total. How do I calculate tax from a VAT-inclusive price? Check Amount includes tax. The tool divides the gross amount by one plus the entered rate to calculate the base, then displays the tax difference. Does the calculator choose the correct rate? No. You provide the rate. Confirm the applicable percentage, exemptions, place-of-supply rules and transaction date for your jurisdiction. How are decimals rounded? The display rounds to two decimal places. Tax authorities or accounting policies may require different currency, line-level or document-level rounding. Does this provide tax advice? No. It is a general arithmetic tool. A qualified adviser or tax authority can confirm the treatment for a specific transaction. Are my figures sent to Invoice Crowd? No. The calculation runs locally in your browser and the entered figures are not submitted to Invoice Crowd. Ready to keep the work, not just the calculation? Use Invoice Crowd to save customers, products, taxes and business documents in one connected workspace. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Your records stay yours Cancel anytime --- ## GST Calculator URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/gst-calculator/ Calculate GST on a pre-tax amount or extract GST from a tax-inclusive total. Free, private and available in your browser. Free business tool See the pre-tax amount, GST component and total at a glance Enter an amount and GST percentage, then specify whether tax is already included. The calculator handles both directions and keeps every part of the result visible. Use the free tool Try Invoice Crowd Home GST Calculator Inclusive or exclusive GST Transparent three-part breakdown No data submitted pop Free browser tool Calculate the GST breakdown Use exclusive mode to add GST, or inclusive mode to extract the GST already present in a total. gst 1000 18 30 Northstar Studio Sample Client DOC-1001 Thank you for your business. GST systems differ by country and may use multiple components, exemptions or special rounding. Confirm the jurisdiction-specific rate and reporting treatment. USD USD ($) EUR EUR (€) GBP GBP (£) INR INR (₹) CAD CAD (C$) AUD AUD (A$) AED AED (د.إ) SGD SGD (S$) classic Classic Structured and familiar minimal Minimal Quiet and spacious bold Bold Confident colour accent Brand identity workshop 750 Design production 120 Project support 125 How to use it well Make the inclusive-versus-exclusive choice explicit A percentage cannot be interpreted correctly until you know whether the entered amount is before tax or already includes it. Calculate in either direction The same three values, with a different starting point. Add GST to a pre-tax amount Exclusive mode multiplies the base amount by the rate, then adds the tax to produce the total. Pre-tax base GST amount Inclusive total Extract GST from an inclusive price Inclusive mode divides by one plus the rate to recover the base, then shows the GST difference. Inclusive starting value Recovered base Extracted GST Apply the correct context Rate selection remains a business responsibility. Check registration and supply rules Applicable rates can depend on the supplier, customer, location, item category and transaction date. Registration status Supply location Item classification Account for multi-part GST where relevant Some systems split a total rate into central, state, provincial or harmonized components. This tool shows one combined rate. Combined rate only Local components may differ Confirm return treatment Keep the evidence A breakdown is more useful than a single final number. Show the base and GST separately Carry both values into the document or record so the tax basis remains understandable. Pre-tax amount Tax-inclusive total Save recurring settings in Invoice Crowd The calculator is intentionally temporary. The product workflow can keep taxes, customers and documents together. Reusable taxes Saved documents Customer records Questions GST Calculator, answered How does the GST calculator work? Enter an amount and GST rate. In exclusive mode the tax is added to the entered net amount. In inclusive mode the tax is extracted from the entered gross total. How do I calculate tax from a GST-inclusive price? Check Amount includes tax. The tool divides the gross amount by one plus the entered rate to calculate the base, then displays the tax difference. Does the calculator choose the correct rate? No. You provide the rate. Confirm the applicable percentage, exemptions, place-of-supply rules and transaction date for your jurisdiction. How are decimals rounded? The display rounds to two decimal places. Tax authorities or accounting policies may require different currency, line-level or document-level rounding. Does this provide tax advice? No. It is a general arithmetic tool. A qualified adviser or tax authority can confirm the treatment for a specific transaction. Are my figures sent to Invoice Crowd? No. The calculation runs locally in your browser and the entered figures are not submitted to Invoice Crowd. Ready to keep the work, not just the calculation? Use Invoice Crowd to save customers, products, taxes and business documents in one connected workspace. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Your records stay yours Cancel anytime --- ## What Is Invoice Crowd? URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/what-is-invoice-crowd/ See how Invoice Crowd connects proposals, invoicing, payments, purchasing, accounting, projects and time tracking for small businesses and independent professionals. Product guide Invoice Crowd, explained plainly Invoice Crowd is a web-based, multi-business invoicing and accounting application for freelancers, agencies, consultants, small businesses and their teams. It connects proposals, sales documents, purchasing, payments, projects, time and financial reports in one owner-facing workspace. Explore the product See pricing Home What Is Invoice Crowd? Sales and purchases in one workspace Accounting, projects and time included Paid plans from $10/month pop How it fits together One product, three connected operating loops Invoice Crowd is most useful when sales, purchasing and billable work need to share customers, vendors, items, taxes, business profiles and reporting context. Sell and get paid Move from a commercial conversation into an issued document and recorded payment. Proposals, estimates and invoices Build interactive proposals from 70+ templates or with Create with AI, prepare ordinary estimates, convert accepted work into invoices, reuse products and customers, and manage one-time documents, recurring invoices and hour-based retainers. Interactive proposals Estimates and invoices Recurring document workflows Payment choices and customer access Configure supported gateways, create Payment Links, see every receipt and customer advance on Payments Received, and let customers view relevant documents through the customer portal. Provider integrations Payment Links Customer document access Buy and track the business Keep the purchase side near the sales records instead of in a separate spreadsheet. Vendors, purchase orders and bills Create vendor records, issue purchase orders, enter bills and expenses, apply vendor credits and record payments made. Vendor records Purchase orders and bills Credits and outgoing payments Chart, journals and reports Classify activity through the chart of accounts, add balanced manual journals, reconcile bank statements, lock closed periods with Lock Transactions and review connected ledgers and financial reports. Chart of accounts Reconciliation and journals Ledger and financial reports Deliver client work Connect time and project context to the document that bills it. Projects, tasks, time and timesheets Organize client work into projects and tasks, track billable time in weekly timesheets with approvals, see each project's profitability and use selected worklogs when preparing an invoice. Projects and tasks Live and manual time entry Billable worklog conversion Profiles, teams and localization Run more than one business profile, invite team members with role controls, use multiple currencies and work across the product's supported interface languages. Multiple business profiles Team access rules Currencies and localized UI Capability map What the product includes today A retrievable capability map with links to the detailed pages, followed by the boundaries that help determine fit. Invoices and recurring invoices Create, send, schedule and track sales documents. Proposals and estimates Present scope and pricing before converting accepted work. Sell a defined offer through a shareable customer link. Purchases Manage vendors, purchase orders, bills, credits and payments made. Accounting Use the chart, journals, reconciliation, ledger and current report surfaces. Projects and time Track client work and carry billable worklogs toward an invoice. Items and inventory Reuse products and services and review inventory-oriented records. AI Assistant Ask about records and stage supported changes behind explicit confirmation. Multi-currency Issue foreign-currency documents and preserve the selected rate context. Peppol e-invoicing Use the documented Peppol transmission surfaces where configured. Security controls Review sign-in security, how each business's data is kept separate, payment verification and what we don't claim. Pricing Free plan plus Solo, Pro, Team and Business tiers from $10 to $30 per month. Questions What Is Invoice Crowd?, answered What is Invoice Crowd? Invoice Crowd is web-based proposal, invoicing and accounting software for small businesses, digital agencies, freelancers, solopreneurs and other independent professionals. It connects estimates, invoices, purchases, vendors, payments, projects, time and financial reports in one workspace. Does Invoice Crowd have AI features? Yes. Invoice Crowd's AI Assistant, on paid plans, answers questions from your own records and prepares invoices, expenses and other records for you to confirm, and Ask AI is a built-in guide to the product for owners and team members. On paid monthly and yearly plans, AI Connections let Claude, ChatGPT or another MCP app work with one business, with every change approved in Invoice Crowd. Who is Invoice Crowd best for? It is best suited to freelancers, agencies, consultants and small businesses that want proposals, invoicing, purchasing and billable work connected without starting with a large accounting suite. How much does Invoice Crowd cost? Invoice Crowd has a free plan and four paid plans: $10 Solo, $15 Pro, $20 Team and $30 Business a month, as listed on the pricing page on October 6, 2026. Annual billing lowers the effective monthly price. Recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers, Worklog, the AI Assistant, the customer portal, Lock Transactions and every payment gateway other than PayPal need a paid plan. Plan limits and prices can change, so verify the pricing page before purchase. Is Invoice Crowd a full replacement for QuickBooks or Xero? Invoice Crowd brings proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, purchasing, projects, time tracking and accounting records into one small-business workspace. Compare the workflow, collaboration model and regional requirements that matter to your business. What does Invoice Crowd not do? Invoice Crowd does not run payroll, connect live bank feeds (you upload bank statements instead), file returns to a government tax portal or send SMS. Invoices move to QuickBooks Online or Xero as import-ready files with Export to QuickBooks / Xero on the Invoices list. It covers the commercial and financial workflow around customers, vendors, projects, documents, payments and accounting, so check regulated tax, legal or industry needs with a professional. Do I need to install software? No. Invoice Crowd is a web application used through a supported browser. External payment providers and other integrations may have their own accounts, terms and availability. Decide with the real workflow in front of you Start with representative customers, documents and one business profile, then compare the connected workflow against the system you use today. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Visible product boundaries Cancel anytime --- ## About Invoice Crowd URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/about-us/ Learn how Invoice Crowd connects proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, purchases and accounting for freelancers, agencies and small businesses. We build one account that runs from quote to ledger Invoice Crowd brings proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, purchasing and accounting views into one browser-based account. Current report boundaries and provider availability remain visible rather than being presented as automatic guarantees. Try Invoice Crowd See pricing Home About us Proposals through to the ledger Nothing to install or update free trial pop What is inside What Invoice Crowd is, and how it gets made Two things are worth saying on an about page. What the software actually does, and the rules we hold ourselves to while adding to it. What we build One account, from the first quote to the year end Work you win and work you bill Proposals and estimates go out priced, with client-removable lines the client can keep or remove and quantities they can change. An approved estimate becomes an invoice without being retyped, and the invoice carries the payment methods you connected. The document a client signs is the document that gets billed. Priced proposals with e-signature client-removable items the client keeps or removes Approved estimates convert straight to invoices How the proposal builder works Accounting records connected to billing Invoice Crowd keeps billing records and accounting records in the same workspace. Use the configured chart of accounts, manual journals and opening balances, then review the general ledger, trial balance, profit and loss and balance sheet. Report accuracy still depends on the records, accounts and periods your business configures. A configurable, classified chart of accounts General ledger, journals and opening balances Financial reports built from recorded entries The accounting module How we build it The rules that decide what gets built Reduce duplicate handoffs Proposals, estimates, invoices, purchases and accounting records share the same business context. That can reduce repeated data entry and make it easier to follow a customer document into the records created from it. Available modules and limits still depend on the current plan and configuration. Connected records from quoting through accounting Exports remain available when another system is required Current plans and limits are listed on Pricing Plans and what they cost We publish the roadmap in the open Everything planned, in progress and already released sits on a roadmap that anyone can read without an account. The documentation is open on the same terms, a support launcher is on every page of this site, and the reviews further down are reproduced as customers wrote them, most of them on Trustpilot, Capterra and G2. A public roadmap, not a private backlog Documentation open before you sign up Reviews quoted in full, not edited down Ways to reach us What the product argues for Four decisions that shape everything else An about page is easy to write and hard to prove. These capabilities are visible in the product, while plan, provider and country boundaries remain part of the description. one-login 1 login Quoting through to the ledger Proposals, estimates, invoices, payments, expenses and accounting records and report views with visible integrity checks run from one sign-in, so no figure has to be carried by hand between two systems. brands Multiple profiles Documents that look like the sender Business profiles keep their own identity, settings and records. The number available depends on the current plan, so check Pricing before planning a multi-business workflow. gateways Multiple provider integrations Getting paid is part of the job Connect an available payment provider to the relevant business and offer its supported checkout path on customer documents. Provider, currency, country and one-time or recurring-payment support differ, so the integration page states each boundary. currency Multi-currency A border should not need a workaround Create customer documents in supported currencies while financial reporting follows the business profile accounting currency. Country-specific tax review or export workflows are described separately and are not presented as automatic government filing. What customers wrote about Invoice Crowd Reproduced word for word, with the source named wherever the reviewer left one. The links underneath go through to the rest of them on Trustpilot and G2. Ursula L. July 5, 2022 via Capterra “Invoice Crowd is an invoicing tool that makes it easy to create and send invoices” Overall, I’m extremely happy with Invoice Crowd and would recommend it to anyone looking for an easy-to-use invoicing tool. The service support is available to help with any questions or issues and they are already working on correcting some minor bugs! Mike A. Nov 23, 2021 via G2 “Invoicing that is simple, effective and even pretty!” The simplicity of Invoice Crowd makes it pleasing to use. I found it intuitive and easy to deploy the first time. https://www.g2.com/products/invoice-crowd/reviews Jake Walker Invoice Crowd has streamlined our ability generate and send professional quality invoices to our customers. The PayPal functionality built into the documents really helps to simplify the payment process for our customers. In addition, the beautifully designed web based user interface makes it easy for us to use wherever we are! I highly recommend giving Invoice Crowd a chance to simplify your day. Read the rest of them on the sites they were left on G2 Trustpilot Read all customer reviews /customers/ Questions About Invoice Crowd, answered What does Invoice Crowd actually do? Invoice Crowd connects proposals, estimates, invoices, recurring billing, supported payment integrations, purchases, expenses and accounting records in a browser-based workspace. The exact workflow depends on plan, provider, country settings and the records your business configures. Who is Invoice Crowd built for? It is designed for freelancers, agencies and small businesses that quote, bill, collect and keep operational accounting records. It can also support more than one business profile where the current plan allows it. Is it a web app or something I install? It runs in a browser at apps.invoicecrowd.com. Sign in to the same account to work with its permitted business profiles, documents, customers and accounting records. What does it cost, and is there a free option? Yes, there is a free plan, and four paid plans from $10 to $30 a month, each with a 30-day trial. Recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers, Worklog, the AI Assistant and Lock Transactions need a paid plan. Plans, limits and trial terms can change, so the Pricing page is the current source before signup. How do I get help or ask for a feature? Documentation is at doc.invoicecrowd.com and a support launcher is on every page of this site. Feature requests go the same way, and the public roadmap shows what is planned and what has shipped. The contact page lists which route to use for support, sales, billing or partnerships. Judge the product, not the about page The clearest way to evaluate the workflow is inside the app. Create a proposal or estimate, convert an approved document and review the resulting records with the settings your business actually needs. Compare plans Review free trial terms on Pricing Compare current plans and limits Nothing to install, it runs in a browser --- ## Invoice Crowd Security URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/security/ Understand Invoice Crowd authentication, tenant and business scoping, payment-provider verification, backups, and the certifications we do not claim. Trust center Security controls explained without a wall of badges Invoice Crowd protects business records through authenticated sessions, CSRF checks, optional two-factor sign-in, role and capability gates, active-business scoping and provider-side payment verification. This page also states the limits that still matter to a buyer's review. Review the controls Contact Invoice Crowd Home Security Optional two-factor sign-in Payment success revalidated with providers No unverified certification claims pop Current controls Layered controls around identity, business records and money movement The application uses several narrow boundaries rather than treating a visible page or browser response as proof of authority. Protect account access Identity checks start before a business record is loaded. Session authentication, password controls and TOTP The owner application uses Laravel session authentication and CSRF protection. New passwords require upper- and lowercase letters, a number and a special character, and changing your password signs out your other sessions. Two-factor sign-in works with an authenticator app or an email code, and switching it off requires you to confirm your identity again. Authenticated web sessions CSRF checks on state changes Optional two-factor sign-in with recovery codes Adaptive abuse controls Signup uses CAPTCHA, layered address/IP throttles and a six-digit email code that expires after 10 minutes. Login applies account and IP limits and can require an adaptive CAPTCHA after repeated failures. Signup verification Account and source-IP throttles Adaptive login challenge Keep business contexts separate An authenticated user still needs the right owner, business and capability context. Owner, team and active-business checks Application operations resolve the owner or team parent and the selected business profile. Team-visible modules and sensitive actions pass permission or named-capability checks, with unknown team modules denied by default. Owner or team-parent scope Selected business profile Module and capability gates A boundary that remains under continuous hardening The mature application does not rely on one database-wide rule to keep each business's data separate. Each part of the code that reads or saves data must check the owner and active business itself, so security review and regression tests remain part of every sensitive change. No blanket global-scope claim Per-operation ownership checks Ongoing adjacent regression coverage Verify money and operations A browser return or posted status is never enough evidence of payment. Active payment flows revalidate provider evidence Supported active gateways verify a signature and/or perform an authenticated provider read, then compare the business account, gateway account, allocation, amount, currency and successful state before settling an invoice. A confirmed payment that can't be applied to its invoice is held in Payments Needing Review instead of being applied blindly. Provider evidence required Amount and currency matched Replay-resistant event handling Backups and deployment are operational controls The application includes a scheduled daily database-backup command and production preflight processes. A schedule is not a recovery guarantee by itself: monitoring, retention, restore testing and production configuration still need operational verification. Daily backup task in application schedule Deployment gates and health checks Restore claims require live evidence Evidence and boundaries The security posture a buyer can verify Current controls, operational dependencies and explicit non-claims, based on the application reviewed October 6, 2026. Authentication Laravel session authentication with CSRF protection for the owner application. Two-factor authentication Optional two-factor sign-in by authenticator app or email code, with recovery codes. Turning it off requires re-authentication. Signup and login abuse controls CAPTCHA, account/address limits and source-IP throttles are applied at the server boundary. Team permissions Module rules and named capabilities restrict team-visible and sensitive operations. Business scoping Records are resolved within the owner or team parent and selected business profile. Payment verification Active flows require provider evidence and exact commercial binding before settlement. Payments that cannot be applied wait in Payments Needing Review. Upload controls Application upload paths validate allowed type, extension and content at their owning boundary. AI write safety The in-app assistant and connected AI apps use a fixed set of tools, reach only the business they are allowed, and save nothing until you confirm or approve it. Backups A daily database-backup task exists; production monitoring and restore readiness are separate operational evidence. Encryption claims Some protected credentials use dedicated encryption, but no blanket claim is made for every setting. Certifications This site does not claim SOC 2, ISO 27001, HIPAA or another independent certification without evidence. Responsible review Report a suspected security issue privately through the support contact rather than posting account data publicly. Questions Security, answered Does Invoice Crowd support two-factor authentication? Yes. Two-factor sign-in is optional in account security settings, using an authenticator app (TOTP) or an email code, with recovery codes. Switching it off requires you to confirm your identity again, and changing your password signs out your other sessions. How does Invoice Crowd separate one business from another? Application operations resolve the owner or team parent and the active business profile before accessing business records. Team roles and named capabilities further restrict modules and sensitive actions. Does a payment gateway redirect automatically mark an invoice paid? No. Active payment paths require provider-side evidence, such as a verified signature or authenticated provider read, and compare the account, allocation, amount, currency and successful state before settlement. Does Invoice Crowd store card numbers? Invoice Crowd integrates with external payment providers for configured checkout and payment methods. This page does not make a blanket PCI-scope or zero-card-data claim; the exact data path depends on the provider integration and should be reviewed for the gateways you enable. Is Invoice Crowd SOC 2 or ISO 27001 certified? No such certification is claimed on this page. Ask Invoice Crowd for current written evidence if a procurement process requires an independent certification, penetration test or data-processing document. Are backups guaranteed? The application schedules a daily database-backup task, but a schedule alone does not prove production completion, retention or restore readiness. Those operational controls should be verified for the live environment and your recovery requirements. Can past accounting periods be locked? Yes. Accounting → Lock Transactions lets the business owner lock transactions dated on or before a date, for all areas or just Invoicing, Purchases or Accounting. Dates can be partially unlocked for a while, and Lock History records who changed a lock, when and why. Accounting users can view locks; creating or editing one needs a paid plan. Are outbound webhooks signed? Yes. Outbound webhooks can only be sent to a public HTTPS address, and each delivery is signed so your receiving system can check that it came from Invoice Crowd. What can a connected AI app or API key access? Only what the account owner allows. An AI app such as Claude or ChatGPT connects through Invoice Crowd's own sign-in page, works with one business and the access areas the owner chooses, and the changes it prepares wait for the owner's approval with their password or authenticator code, unless the owner chooses to let new drafts save without asking. Conversations in a connected AI app stay with that app. A Developer API key also works with one business, is shown once, expires after 90 days or on a password change, and can only read and create records, never send, record payments or delete. The owner can revoke either at any time. Bring your security questions to the same table as your workflow needs Review the product, ask for the evidence your organization requires, and start with a limited account and representative data before wider rollout. Start free Contact us No card required to start Visible product boundaries Cancel anytime --- ## Migrate To Invoice Crowd URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/migrate/ Plan a safe move to Invoice Crowd with immutable source exports, reviewed CSV or Excel mapping, test imports, skipped-row review, and reconciled cutover. Migration center Move systems without losing the story behind the numbers Plan a safe move to Invoice Crowd with immutable source exports, reviewed CSV or Excel mapping, test imports, skipped-row review, and reconciled cutover. Use the migration plan Explore Invoice Crowd Home Migrate Preservation before transformation CSV and Excel mapping Reconcile before activation pop Safe cutover A four-part migration control, not a file upload A safe migration preserves what the source knows, moves only supported operational records through reviewed mappings, and proves the result before live work changes systems. Preserve before transforming The source remains the evidence for history the target does not recreate. Build a read-only migration archive Preserve dated source exports, document PDFs, attachments, financial reports and the source account or archive access required for history, tax, contractual and audit needs. Dated original exports PDFs and attachments Source access retained Define the historical boundary Decide which records must operate in Invoice Crowd and which remain in the source archive. Record the cutover date, owners and retention requirements. Operational records Historical evidence Retention owner Normalize and test Invoice Crowd analyzes CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files before supported imports. Map the supported record types Current analyzers cover items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Auto-detection suggests columns, but required fields and warnings must be reviewed before import. Customers and vendors Items Invoices and estimates Use a representative test set Test duplicate names, foreign currencies, taxes, discounts, long descriptions and open documents. Review the preview and skipped-row output instead of assuming a successful request means every row was accepted. Representative edge cases Preview and warnings Skipped-row report Reconcile and cut over Activation follows totals, document meaning and ownership, not a raw row count. Prove the target working set Provider-specific accounting, payroll, reconciliations, automation, attachments and historical events may not have equivalent target import fields. Record those boundaries and establish approved opening positions instead of manufacturing detail. Counts and totals Open document balances Currencies and tax context Run a controlled switch Pause or sequence writes, take final exports, import approved deltas, reconcile opening and open-document totals, and keep a documented fallback path before inviting the wider team. Final dated export Approved opening position Rollback and archive links Migration checklist The evidence to collect before you switch Use this checklist with the people responsible for bookkeeping, operations, retention and customer communication. Source archive Keep dated, immutable source exports and access. Supported files Use CSV, TXT, XLS or XLSX within the configured upload limit. Customers Map required identity and contact fields. Vendors Map supplier identity and contact fields. Map product and service fields deliberately. Invoices Preserve document number, dates, customer, currency, lines, tax, discounts and totals. Estimates Preserve quote identity, dates, customer and line details. Preview Review detected headers, suggested mapping, required fields and sample rows. Warnings Resolve missing required fields before committing the job. Skipped rows Download and review rejected records instead of hiding them. Reconciliation Match open documents, customer balances and approved opening totals. Historical boundary Record what remains in each source system and why. Questions Migration planning, answered Is this a one-click migration? No. Invoice Crowd currently analyzes and imports supported CSV or Excel data for items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Historical records and provider-specific structures need an explicit archive, rebuild or reconciliation decision. Which file types can I upload? The current analyzer accepts CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files within the configured upload-size boundary. Which records have dedicated analyzers? Items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Bank reconciliation has a separate import workflow and is not a substitute for migrating a complete accounting ledger. Should I close the old account after importing? Not immediately. Keep source access and immutable exports until financial, tax, contractual and audit retention needs are covered and every material balance has been reconciled. How do I know the migration worked? Check field mapping, warnings, row outcomes, representative document rendering, open balances, currencies, taxes and approved opening totals. A successful upload or matching row count is not enough. What happens to data that has no target field? Document it in the migration register and either preserve it in the source archive, attach it through a supported operational process, or rebuild it deliberately. Never silently discard it. Test with copies before moving live work Create the archive, normalize a representative set, inspect warnings and skipped rows, and reconcile the result before the production cutover. Start free See pricing Source history preserved Visible mapping review Reconciled activation gate --- ## Migrate From QuickBooks URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/migrate/quickbooks/ Plan a preservation-first QuickBooks to Invoice Crowd migration using reviewed exports, field mapping, test imports, and a reconciled cutover. Migration guide Move from QuickBooks with a preservation-first cutover Plan a preservation-first QuickBooks to Invoice Crowd migration using reviewed exports, field mapping, test imports, and a reconciled cutover. Use the migration plan All migration guides Home Migrate QuickBooks Preservation before transformation CSV and Excel mapping Reconcile before activation pop Safe cutover A four-part migration control, not a file upload Invoice Crowd can be a simpler operating fit for small businesses, agencies and independent professionals centered on proposals, invoices, purchasing, projects and time. QuickBooks remains stronger for many businesses that depend on its deeper accounting ecosystem, payroll options or accountant familiarity. Preserve before transforming The source remains the evidence for history the target does not recreate. Build a read-only migration archive Export the customer, vendor, product/service, invoice and estimate data you intend to carry forward. Keep the original QuickBooks company and immutable export files available for historical detail, attachments, payroll, tax filings and audit support that the target import does not reproduce. Dated original exports PDFs and attachments Source access retained Define the historical boundary Decide which records must operate in Invoice Crowd and which remain in the source archive. Record the cutover date, owners and retention requirements. Operational records Historical evidence Retention owner Normalize and test Invoice Crowd analyzes CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files before supported imports. Map the supported record types Current analyzers cover items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Auto-detection suggests columns, but required fields and warnings must be reviewed before import. Customers and vendors Items Invoices and estimates Use a representative test set Test duplicate names, foreign currencies, taxes, discounts, long descriptions and open documents. Review the preview and skipped-row output instead of assuming a successful request means every row was accepted. Representative edge cases Preview and warnings Skipped-row report Reconcile and cut over Activation follows totals, document meaning and ownership, not a raw row count. Prove the target working set QuickBooks classes, locations, inventory valuation, payroll, sales-tax detail, reconciliations, credits, journal history and attachments do not automatically become equivalent Invoice Crowd records. Decide what remains in the source archive and validate opening balances with an accountant. Counts and totals Open document balances Currencies and tax context Run a controlled switch Pause or sequence writes, take final exports, import approved deltas, reconcile opening and open-document totals, and keep a documented fallback path before inviting the wider team. Final dated export Approved opening position Rollback and archive links Migration checklist The evidence to collect before you switch Use this checklist with the people responsible for bookkeeping, operations, retention and customer communication. Source archive Keep dated, immutable source exports and access. Supported files Use CSV, TXT, XLS or XLSX within the configured upload limit. Customers Map required identity and contact fields. Vendors Map supplier identity and contact fields. Map product and service fields deliberately. Invoices Preserve document number, dates, customer, currency, lines, tax, discounts and totals. Estimates Preserve quote identity, dates, customer and line details. Preview Review detected headers, suggested mapping, required fields and sample rows. Warnings Resolve missing required fields before committing the job. Skipped rows Download and review rejected records instead of hiding them. Reconciliation Match open documents, customer balances and approved opening totals. Historical boundary Record what remains in QuickBooks and why. Questions QuickBooks migration, answered Is this a one-click migration from QuickBooks? No. Invoice Crowd currently analyzes and imports supported CSV or Excel data for items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Historical records and provider-specific structures need an explicit archive, rebuild or reconciliation decision. Which file types can I upload? Invoice Crowd imports CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files within the upload size limit. Item imports are checked in batches of up to 1,000 rows or 2 MiB. Which records have dedicated analyzers? Items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Item imports show a full preview first, and one invalid row stops the whole batch until you fix it. Bank reconciliation has a separate import workflow and is not a substitute for migrating a complete accounting ledger. Should I close the old account after importing? Not immediately. Keep source access and immutable exports until financial, tax, contractual and audit retention needs are covered and every material balance has been reconciled. How do I know the migration worked? Check field mapping, warnings, row outcomes, representative document rendering, open balances, currencies, taxes and approved opening totals. A successful upload or matching row count is not enough. What happens to data that has no target field? Document it in the migration register and either preserve it in the source archive, attach it through a supported operational process, or rebuild it deliberately. Never silently discard it. Test with copies before moving live work Create the archive, normalize a representative set, inspect warnings and skipped rows, and reconcile the result before the production cutover. Start free See pricing Source history preserved Visible mapping review Reconciled activation gate --- ## Migrate From FreshBooks URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/migrate/freshbooks/ Move from FreshBooks to Invoice Crowd with preserved exports, deliberate customer and invoice mapping, a test import, and reconciled totals. Migration guide Move from FreshBooks with a preservation-first cutover Move from FreshBooks to Invoice Crowd with preserved exports, deliberate customer and invoice mapping, a test import, and reconciled totals. Use the migration plan All migration guides Home Migrate FreshBooks Preservation before transformation CSV and Excel mapping Reconcile before activation pop Safe cutover A four-part migration control, not a file upload Invoice Crowd may fit teams that want purchases, vendors, accounting reports and multi-business context beside client billing. FreshBooks can remain the better fit where its polished client-service workflow, support or established integrations are central. Preserve before transforming The source remains the evidence for history the target does not recreate. Build a read-only migration archive Export clients, items or services, invoices and estimates plus any available expense, payment, time and report archives. Preserve PDFs and the original account for material history that is not represented by the target import types. Dated original exports PDFs and attachments Source access retained Define the historical boundary Decide which records must operate in Invoice Crowd and which remain in the source archive. Record the cutover date, owners and retention requirements. Operational records Historical evidence Retention owner Normalize and test Invoice Crowd analyzes CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files before supported imports. Map the supported record types Current analyzers cover items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Auto-detection suggests columns, but required fields and warnings must be reviewed before import. Customers and vendors Items Invoices and estimates Use a representative test set Test duplicate names, foreign currencies, taxes, discounts, long descriptions and open documents. Review the preview and skipped-row output instead of assuming a successful request means every row was accepted. Representative edge cases Preview and warnings Skipped-row report Reconcile and cut over Activation follows totals, document meaning and ownership, not a raw row count. Prove the target working set FreshBooks projects, time, expenses, retainers, payments, credits, late fees, recurring profiles, attachments and custom fields need an explicit keep, rebuild or archive decision. Do not treat a row count as proof that balances or document meaning survived. Invoice Crowd has its own recurring invoices, retainers and late fees, so set up the ones you still need instead of importing them; recurring invoices and retainers need a paid plan. Counts and totals Open document balances Currencies and tax context Run a controlled switch Pause or sequence writes, take final exports, import approved deltas, reconcile opening and open-document totals, and keep a documented fallback path before inviting the wider team. Final dated export Approved opening position Rollback and archive links Migration checklist The evidence to collect before you switch Use this checklist with the people responsible for bookkeeping, operations, retention and customer communication. Source archive Keep dated, immutable source exports and access. Supported files Use CSV, TXT, XLS or XLSX within the configured upload limit. Customers Map required identity and contact fields. Vendors Map supplier identity and contact fields. Map product and service fields deliberately. Invoices Preserve document number, dates, customer, currency, lines, tax, discounts and totals. Estimates Preserve quote identity, dates, customer and line details. Preview Review detected headers, suggested mapping, required fields and sample rows. Warnings Resolve missing required fields before committing the job. Skipped rows Download and review rejected records instead of hiding them. Reconciliation Match open documents, customer balances and approved opening totals. Historical boundary Record what remains in FreshBooks and why. Questions FreshBooks migration, answered Is this a one-click migration from FreshBooks? No. Invoice Crowd currently analyzes and imports supported CSV or Excel data for items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Historical records and provider-specific structures need an explicit archive, rebuild or reconciliation decision. Which file types can I upload? Invoice Crowd imports CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files within the upload size limit. Item imports are checked in batches of up to 1,000 rows or 2 MiB. Which records have dedicated analyzers? Items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Item imports show a full preview first, and one invalid row stops the whole batch until you fix it. Bank reconciliation has a separate import workflow and is not a substitute for migrating a complete accounting ledger. Should I close the old account after importing? Not immediately. Keep source access and immutable exports until financial, tax, contractual and audit retention needs are covered and every material balance has been reconciled. How do I know the migration worked? Check field mapping, warnings, row outcomes, representative document rendering, open balances, currencies, taxes and approved opening totals. A successful upload or matching row count is not enough. What happens to data that has no target field? Document it in the migration register and either preserve it in the source archive, attach it through a supported operational process, or rebuild it deliberately. Never silently discard it. Test with copies before moving live work Create the archive, normalize a representative set, inspect warnings and skipped rows, and reconcile the result before the production cutover. Start free See pricing Source history preserved Visible mapping review Reconciled activation gate --- ## Migrate From Zoho Invoice URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/migrate/zoho/ Prepare a Zoho Invoice to Invoice Crowd move through source exports, normalized CSV or Excel mapping, a test company, and reconciled cutover. Migration guide Move from Zoho Invoice with a preservation-first cutover Prepare a Zoho Invoice to Invoice Crowd move through source exports, normalized CSV or Excel mapping, a test company, and reconciled cutover. Use the migration plan All migration guides Home Migrate Zoho Invoice Preservation before transformation CSV and Excel mapping Reconcile before activation pop Safe cutover A four-part migration control, not a file upload Invoice Crowd may suit businesses wanting sales, purchases, accounting, projects and multiple business profiles in one owner workspace. Zoho Invoice remains compelling for a no-cost invoicing workflow and for organizations already committed to the broader Zoho ecosystem. Preserve before transforming The source remains the evidence for history the target does not recreate. Build a read-only migration archive Export customers, vendors where used, items, invoices and estimates from Zoho Invoice, and separately preserve payment, expense, credit-note, project, time, recurring, attachment and report records needed for history. Dated original exports PDFs and attachments Source access retained Define the historical boundary Decide which records must operate in Invoice Crowd and which remain in the source archive. Record the cutover date, owners and retention requirements. Operational records Historical evidence Retention owner Normalize and test Invoice Crowd analyzes CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files before supported imports. Map the supported record types Current analyzers cover items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Auto-detection suggests columns, but required fields and warnings must be reviewed before import. Customers and vendors Items Invoices and estimates Use a representative test set Test duplicate names, foreign currencies, taxes, discounts, long descriptions and open documents. Review the preview and skipped-row output instead of assuming a successful request means every row was accepted. Representative edge cases Preview and warnings Skipped-row report Reconcile and cut over Activation follows totals, document meaning and ownership, not a raw row count. Prove the target working set Zoho organizations, custom fields, automation, tax rules, templates, portals, projects, time, credits, payments and recurring schedules do not all map through the five supported target import analyzers. Document the archive location and rebuild only current operational settings. Counts and totals Open document balances Currencies and tax context Run a controlled switch Pause or sequence writes, take final exports, import approved deltas, reconcile opening and open-document totals, and keep a documented fallback path before inviting the wider team. Final dated export Approved opening position Rollback and archive links Migration checklist The evidence to collect before you switch Use this checklist with the people responsible for bookkeeping, operations, retention and customer communication. Source archive Keep dated, immutable source exports and access. Supported files Use CSV, TXT, XLS or XLSX within the configured upload limit. Customers Map required identity and contact fields. Vendors Map supplier identity and contact fields. Map product and service fields deliberately. Invoices Preserve document number, dates, customer, currency, lines, tax, discounts and totals. Estimates Preserve quote identity, dates, customer and line details. Preview Review detected headers, suggested mapping, required fields and sample rows. Warnings Resolve missing required fields before committing the job. Skipped rows Download and review rejected records instead of hiding them. Reconciliation Match open documents, customer balances and approved opening totals. Historical boundary Record what remains in Zoho Invoice and why. Questions Zoho Invoice migration, answered Is this a one-click migration from Zoho Invoice? No. Invoice Crowd currently analyzes and imports supported CSV or Excel data for items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Historical records and provider-specific structures need an explicit archive, rebuild or reconciliation decision. Which file types can I upload? Invoice Crowd imports CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files within the upload size limit. Item imports are checked in batches of up to 1,000 rows or 2 MiB. Which records have dedicated analyzers? Items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Item imports show a full preview first, and one invalid row stops the whole batch until you fix it. Bank reconciliation has a separate import workflow and is not a substitute for migrating a complete accounting ledger. Should I close the old account after importing? Not immediately. Keep source access and immutable exports until financial, tax, contractual and audit retention needs are covered and every material balance has been reconciled. How do I know the migration worked? Check field mapping, warnings, row outcomes, representative document rendering, open balances, currencies, taxes and approved opening totals. A successful upload or matching row count is not enough. What happens to data that has no target field? Document it in the migration register and either preserve it in the source archive, attach it through a supported operational process, or rebuild it deliberately. Never silently discard it. Test with copies before moving live work Create the archive, normalize a representative set, inspect warnings and skipped rows, and reconcile the result before the production cutover. Start free See pricing Source history preserved Visible mapping review Reconciled activation gate --- ## Migrate From Wave URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/migrate/wave/ Move from Wave to Invoice Crowd with complete exports, normalized customer and document files, test imports, and a balanced cutover. Migration guide Move from Wave with a preservation-first cutover Move from Wave to Invoice Crowd with complete exports, normalized customer and document files, test imports, and a balanced cutover. Use the migration plan All migration guides Home Migrate Wave Preservation before transformation CSV and Excel mapping Reconcile before activation pop Safe cutover A four-part migration control, not a file upload Invoice Crowd may fit a service business that wants proposals, purchasing, projects, time, multi-business profiles and broader payment choices. Wave remains attractive to eligible US and Canadian businesses that want its Starter accounting and invoicing plan or native payroll options. Preserve before transforming The source remains the evidence for history the target does not recreate. Build a read-only migration archive Preserve customer, product/service, invoice and estimate exports plus transactions, account balances, receipts, payments, payroll and tax records relevant to your obligations. Keep the source accessible until every historical and statutory requirement is covered. Dated original exports PDFs and attachments Source access retained Define the historical boundary Decide which records must operate in Invoice Crowd and which remain in the source archive. Record the cutover date, owners and retention requirements. Operational records Historical evidence Retention owner Normalize and test Invoice Crowd analyzes CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files before supported imports. Map the supported record types Current analyzers cover items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Auto-detection suggests columns, but required fields and warnings must be reviewed before import. Customers and vendors Items Invoices and estimates Use a representative test set Test duplicate names, foreign currencies, taxes, discounts, long descriptions and open documents. Review the preview and skipped-row output instead of assuming a successful request means every row was accepted. Representative edge cases Preview and warnings Skipped-row report Reconcile and cut over Activation follows totals, document meaning and ownership, not a raw row count. Prove the target working set Wave accounting transactions, bank connections, reconciliations, receipt images, payroll, tax filings, payment processing, recurring invoices and attachments are not recreated by importing customers, items and sales documents. Establish opening balances and an archive boundary deliberately. Counts and totals Open document balances Currencies and tax context Run a controlled switch Pause or sequence writes, take final exports, import approved deltas, reconcile opening and open-document totals, and keep a documented fallback path before inviting the wider team. Final dated export Approved opening position Rollback and archive links Migration checklist The evidence to collect before you switch Use this checklist with the people responsible for bookkeeping, operations, retention and customer communication. Source archive Keep dated, immutable source exports and access. Supported files Use CSV, TXT, XLS or XLSX within the configured upload limit. Customers Map required identity and contact fields. Vendors Map supplier identity and contact fields. Map product and service fields deliberately. Invoices Preserve document number, dates, customer, currency, lines, tax, discounts and totals. Estimates Preserve quote identity, dates, customer and line details. Preview Review detected headers, suggested mapping, required fields and sample rows. Warnings Resolve missing required fields before committing the job. Skipped rows Download and review rejected records instead of hiding them. Reconciliation Match open documents, customer balances and approved opening totals. Historical boundary Record what remains in Wave and why. Questions Wave migration, answered Is this a one-click migration from Wave? No. Invoice Crowd currently analyzes and imports supported CSV or Excel data for items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Historical records and provider-specific structures need an explicit archive, rebuild or reconciliation decision. Which file types can I upload? Invoice Crowd imports CSV, TXT, XLS and XLSX files within the upload size limit. Item imports are checked in batches of up to 1,000 rows or 2 MiB. Which records have dedicated analyzers? Items, customers, vendors, invoices and estimates. Item imports show a full preview first, and one invalid row stops the whole batch until you fix it. Bank reconciliation has a separate import workflow and is not a substitute for migrating a complete accounting ledger. Should I close the old account after importing? Not immediately. Keep source access and immutable exports until financial, tax, contractual and audit retention needs are covered and every material balance has been reconciled. How do I know the migration worked? Check field mapping, warnings, row outcomes, representative document rendering, open balances, currencies, taxes and approved opening totals. A successful upload or matching row count is not enough. What happens to data that has no target field? Document it in the migration register and either preserve it in the source archive, attach it through a supported operational process, or rebuild it deliberately. Never silently discard it. Test with copies before moving live work Create the archive, normalize a representative set, inspect warnings and skipped rows, and reconcile the result before the production cutover. Start free See pricing Source history preserved Visible mapping review Reconciled activation gate --- ## Accounting And Invoicing Glossary URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/glossary/ Search 80 plain-language accounting, invoicing, purchasing, payment, tax, and reporting definitions with related Invoice Crowd workflows. Plain-language reference The accounting and invoicing terms behind the workflow This glossary defines 80 accounting, invoicing, payment and tax terms in plain language. Search a term, see the related concepts, and move into the relevant Invoice Crowd guide when a term belongs to a workflow the app supports. Search the glossary What is Invoice Crowd? Home Glossary 80 visible definitions Alphabetized and searchable No hidden search-engine terms pop Search and learn Find the term behind the document, balance or report Search by term, definition or a related concept. Use the A–Z index to browse; every definition remains visible without JavaScript. Search glossary terms Search invoices, tax, journals… No glossary terms match that search. Try a broader word or use the A–Z index. These definitions are general education, not accounting, tax or legal advice. Product links describe the current Invoice Crowd workflow and may have additional limitations. Records create balances Follow sales and purchase documents into open customer or vendor balances. Entries support reports Trace balanced postings from the journal through ledgers and financial statements. Payment needs evidence Separate customer checkout from provider-verified settlement and allocation. Account A category used to organize and report financial activity, such as cash, sales revenue, accounts receivable or an expense. Chart of accounts; General ledger Accounts payable Amounts a business owes to vendors for goods or services received but not yet paid. Bill; Vendor; Payments made Accounts receivable Amounts customers owe a business for invoices issued but not yet fully paid. Invoice; Aging report Accrual accounting A method that records income when earned and expenses when incurred, rather than only when cash changes hands. Cash accounting; Journal entry Advance payment Money a customer pays before an invoice exists. It is held as a liability until it is applied to an invoice or refunded. Prepayment; Customer credit; Payment allocation Aging report A report that groups unpaid customer balances by how long they have been outstanding. Accounts receivable; Due date Asset A resource controlled by a business that is expected to provide future economic benefit. Liability; Equity Balance sheet A point-in-time statement of assets, liabilities and equity, linked by the accounting equation. Asset; Liability; Equity Bank feed A connection or imported stream that brings bank transactions into an accounting workflow for review and matching. Bank reconciliation; Transaction Bank reconciliation The process of comparing recorded transactions with a bank statement and explaining the differences. Bank feed; Cleared balance Bill A vendor document that records an amount the business owes for a purchase. Accounts payable; Vendor Billable expense A cost a business intends to recover from a customer, subject to its agreement and accounting policy. Expense; Invoice Cash accounting A method that generally recognizes income when cash is received and expenses when cash is paid. Accrual accounting; Payment Cash flow statement A statement that explains cash movements from operating, investing and financing activities over a period. Cash accounting; Balance sheet Chart of accounts The organized list of account categories a business uses to classify transactions and prepare reports. Account; General ledger Cleared balance The balance represented by transactions that have cleared the bank or have been confirmed during reconciliation. Bank reconciliation; Statement balance Cost of goods sold The direct cost of the goods or services a business sold in a period, reported above gross profit on the profit and loss statement. Expense; Profit and loss statement; Revenue Credit note A sales document that reduces an amount previously billed to a customer without erasing the original invoice. Invoice; Customer credit Customer credit An amount available to reduce a customer's current or future balance, commonly created by a credit note or overpayment. Credit note; Overpayment; Accounts receivable Debit One side of a journal entry. Its effect depends on the account type; it is not simply a synonym for decrease. Credit; Double-entry accounting Direct debit A payment arrangement in which an authorized provider collects funds from a payer's bank account. ACH; Payment gateway Discount A reduction applied to a listed price or document amount, usually expressed as a fixed value or percentage. Subtotal; Total Double-entry accounting A system in which every journal entry has equal debits and credits so the accounting equation remains balanced. Debit; Credit; Journal entry Due date The date by which a payment or other obligation is expected under the document or agreement. Invoice; Payment terms Equity The residual interest in a business's assets after liabilities are deducted. Asset; Liability; Balance sheet Estimate A pre-sale document describing expected scope and price before work is finally agreed or invoiced. Proposal; Invoice Expense A cost consumed in earning revenue or operating the business during a period. Bill; Purchase Fiscal year The twelve-month reporting period a business uses for accounting and financial statements; it may differ from the calendar year. Reporting period; Year end General ledger The detailed record of postings to all accounts used to support balances and financial statements. Chart of accounts; Journal entry Gross amount An amount before specified deductions such as discounts, withholding or some taxes, depending on the document context. Net amount; Total GST Goods and Services Tax, a consumption tax used in various jurisdictions. Rates and rules depend on the relevant law. Tax; VAT Input tax credit Tax paid on business purchases that a registered business can offset against the tax it collects on sales, subject to local rules and eligibility. GST; Reverse charge; VAT Invoice A document requesting payment for supplied goods or services and stating the customer, lines, amounts, dates and payment terms. Invoice number A business-controlled identifier used to distinguish and trace an invoice within its numbering policy. Invoice; Audit trail Item A reusable product or service definition used on sales and purchase documents. Inventory; Line item Journal entry A dated accounting record that posts balanced debit and credit lines to one or more accounts. Debit; Credit; General ledger Late fee A charge for overdue payment that must follow the contract and applicable law; it may be fixed or calculated by a stated method. Due date; Payment terms Ledger balance The balance produced by posted entries in an account over the selected period. General ledger; Trial balance Liability A present obligation expected to require the transfer of an economic resource. Asset; Equity Line item An individual product, service, quantity, rate, tax or description row on a commercial document. Item; Invoice Manual journal A journal entry entered deliberately by a user rather than generated automatically by an operational transaction. Journal entry; Double-entry accounting Multi-currency The ability to issue or record transactions in more than one currency while preserving the chosen currency and exchange-rate context. Exchange rate; Base currency Net amount An amount remaining after specified deductions or excluding a stated component, depending on the calculation context. Gross amount; Subtotal Opening balance The starting balance carried into an account or system at the beginning of a reporting or migration period. Migration; Trial balance Outstanding balance The portion of an invoice or obligation that remains unpaid after credits and recorded payments. Accounts receivable; Payment Overpayment The part of a customer payment that exceeds the amount due. It is usually kept as customer credit for a later invoice or refunded. Customer credit; Advance payment; Outstanding balance Payment allocation The link that assigns all or part of a payment to a particular invoice or obligation. Payment; Outstanding balance Payment gateway An external provider that handles a supported payment step and returns evidence used to verify the transaction. Payment link; Settlement Payment link A shareable URL that lets a customer open a defined payment or offer flow. Payment gateway; Invoice Payment terms The agreed timing and conditions for payment, such as payment on receipt or a number of days after issue. Due date; Invoice Payments made Recorded outgoing payments to vendors or against purchase-side obligations. Accounts payable; Bill Peppol A network and set of specifications used for structured electronic business documents between registered participants. E-invoice; Access point Period lock A control that stops transactions dated on or before a chosen date from being added, edited or deleted, so closed books stay closed. Year end; Fiscal year; General ledger Prepayment Money received or paid before the related goods or services are fully delivered, with accounting treatment determined by the facts. Deposit; Unearned revenue Profit and loss statement A report of income and expenses over a period, often used to show profit or loss for that period. Revenue; Expense Proposal A pre-sale document that presents scope, approach, terms and pricing for customer review and acceptance. Estimate; Invoice Purchase order A document a buyer issues to a vendor describing an intended purchase and its terms before a bill is received. Vendor; Bill Recurring invoice An invoice generated or scheduled from a repeating billing definition, subject to the configured dates and rules. Invoice; Retainer Retained earnings Cumulative profit kept in the business after distributions, subject to accounting adjustments and local rules. Equity; Net income Retainer An arrangement in which a client pays a recurring fee, often for a set number of hours of work each period, with rules for unused or extra time. Recurring invoice; Time entry; Timesheet Revenue Income arising from a business's ordinary activities, recognized under its applicable accounting method and policy. Expense; Profit and loss statement Reverse charge A rule under which the buyer, rather than the seller, accounts for the tax on a purchase, commonly for cross-border or specified supplies. Input tax credit; GST; VAT Settlement The provider-confirmed movement or completion of funds, which may occur after a customer finishes the checkout interface. Payment gateway; Payment verification Statement balance The balance reported by a bank or other statement source at a particular date. Bank reconciliation; Cleared balance Subtotal The sum of relevant line amounts before later document-level additions or deductions such as taxes or discounts. Tax; Total Tax exclusive A pricing treatment in which tax is calculated in addition to the stated net amount. Tax inclusive; GST Tax inclusive A pricing treatment in which the stated amount already contains the tax component. Tax exclusive; VAT TDS Tax Deducted at Source, an Indian form of withholding tax in which the payer deducts tax from a payment and deposits it with the government. Withholding tax; Gross amount; GST Time entry A dated record of work duration, often connected to a person, task, project and billable status. Timesheet; Billable rate Timesheet A collection or report of time entries for a person, project or period. Time entry; Project Total The final calculated document amount after the applicable lines, discounts, taxes and other adjustments. Subtotal; Outstanding balance Trial balance A list of account balances used to check that total debits equal total credits for the selected period. General ledger; Double-entry accounting Utilisation The share of a person's or team's available working hours spent on billable work over a period. Timesheet; Time entry; Project VAT Value Added Tax, a consumption tax applied in many jurisdictions according to local registration, rate and place-of-supply rules. GST; Tax inclusive Vendor A person or organization from which the business buys goods or services. Bill; Purchase order Vendor credit A purchase-side credit that reduces an amount owed to a vendor while preserving the original purchasing record. Vendor; Accounts payable Void An action that cancels an issued document while keeping it and its number on record, reversing its accounting effect instead of deleting it. Invoice number; Credit note; Write-off Withholding tax Tax retained from a payment and remitted under applicable law instead of paying the full gross amount to the recipient. Gross amount; Tax Write-off An accounting action that removes or reduces a balance judged uncollectible or no longer recoverable, according to policy and evidence. Bad debt; Accounts receivable Year end The close of a fiscal reporting period when balances, adjustments and financial statements are finalized. Fiscal year; Closing entry Use the reference well Definitions explain meaning and source records prove the result Keep the vocabulary consistent, but return to the document, account, period and jurisdiction before making a financial decision. Accounting language Debits, credits, journals, accounts and statements use precise relationships. Sales documents Proposals, estimates, invoices, credit notes and payments represent different stages. Purchase records Purchase orders, bills, vendor credits and outgoing payments preserve purchase-side history. Payment state Checkout, verification, settlement and allocation are distinct events. Reports A report is defined by its period, accounts and source records. Tax and currency Jurisdiction, currency and rate context remain explicit decisions. Plain language Definitions explain the concept without replacing professional judgment. Related workflows Selected terms link to the page where Invoice Crowd implements the workflow. Visible source The search-engine data for each term is built only from definitions shown on this page. Search in the browser Filtering happens locally and does not submit the query to WordPress. Dated review Product-specific links and language were reviewed on October 6, 2026. Team reference Use the same vocabulary in migration, bookkeeping and customer conversations. Questions The Invoice Crowd glossary, answered Is this glossary accounting or tax advice? No. It provides general plain-language definitions. Apply the rules and professional guidance relevant to your jurisdiction, business and transaction. How many terms are included? 80 visible accounting, invoicing, purchasing, payment, tax and reporting terms are included in the current glossary, from Account to Year end. Does searching send my query to Invoice Crowd? No. The glossary filter runs in the browser against the already rendered terms and does not submit the search text to WordPress. Why do some terms link to feature pages? A link appears when Invoice Crowd has a relevant public workflow guide. The definition remains general and does not claim that every possible accounting treatment is automated. Are tax terms the same in every country? No. VAT, GST, withholding and other tax rules depend on jurisdiction, registration and the facts of the transaction. The definitions are orientation, not a rate or filing decision. How is the glossary structured for search engines? The page uses semantic definition-list markup and emits a DefinedTermSet containing only the visible terms and descriptions. It does not add hidden definitions or claims. Put the terminology into a real workflow Create a representative document, trace its balance and review the resulting report with the same definitions in view. Start free Explore accounting No card required to start Plain-language product guides Visible limitations --- ## Customer Reviews URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/customers/ Read nine existing Invoice Crowd reviews about setup, recurring invoices, multiple businesses, professional documents, and payments, without invented case-study metrics. Customer proof Customer voices, presented without invented case-study numbers Nine existing reviews describe an approachable setup, recurring invoices, multiple businesses, professional documents and integrated payment paths. The quotes stay intact, and the page adds no unsupported outcome metric. Read the reviews Explore the product Home Customers Nine existing reviews Source labels retained No invented case-study metrics pop What customers mention Three themes worth testing in your own workflow The themes summarize what appears in the visible reviews. They are starting points for evaluation, not a statistical survey or performance promise. Start with the first document Several reviewers describe a short path from account setup to a professional invoice. Setup that feels approachable Reviews mention adding a business profile, customer details, brand colors and documents without a long implementation project. Business identity Customer records Branded document Treat reviews as experience, not a guarantee A prior customer experience can help frame a test, but it does not prove the same speed, outcome or fit for another business. Use representative data Verify the current product Keep plan limits visible Operate more than one workflow Reviewers mention recurring invoices, company management and everyday financial visibility. Connected daily work The visible reviews point to recurring documents, multiple companies and money-in/money-out tracking as useful parts of the routine. Recurring invoice controls Multiple business profiles Operational overview Confirm the exact current boundary Feature depth, plan allowances and accounting requirements can change. Use the detailed product pages and a trial to decide. Read current guides Check plan allowance Review accounting fit Make the payment path clearer Some reviewers call out built-in PayPal or Stripe functionality and a simpler customer payment experience. A shorter route from document to checkout Payment integration can reduce handoffs, while the provider still controls merchant eligibility, fees, settlement and disputes. Invoice or payment link Provider checkout Verified settlement Do not infer a speed or revenue promise The page preserves the review wording but adds no new payment-speed percentage, savings figure or guaranteed outcome. Provider terms apply Results vary No invented metrics The existing customer reviews, in their saved wording Names, titles, dates, source labels, quotes and ratings are reused from the current site content. External source links appear only where the source record provides one. Richard Tee Feb 14, 2022 via Trustpilot A Solid product with good support I’ve been using another well-established accounting software which has worked well but the Covid took a major toll on my business and I’ve needed to cut my costs which included looking at another accounting solution. After a little searching, I came across Invoice crowd, and again after performing a little due diligence, I could see that they were a relatively new company and from my experience sometimes this is not a bad thing. Anyway, I decided to purchase the Invoice crowd and give it a try and I was pleasantly surprised, and have now made the decision to transfer all my accounting requirements to Invoice crowd. I also recommend this product. https://www.trustpilot.com/review/invoicecrowd.com Chamaiporn Biedrzycki January 16, 2022 via Trustpilot Invoice system I’ve been looking for I’ve been looking for an easy to use Invoice System. We were previously using a different system that was much more expensive and required too many steps to add customers and create invoices. After looking at many different options I decided to give Invoice Crowd a try. Being able to quickly create reoccurring invoices is what sold me. The setup process was very easy and intuitive. Other things I like include the roadmap. What has already been added along with the plans for the future are very impressive. The developer appears to be very responsive to customers needs based on all of the questions asked and reviews. Will January 11, 2022 via Trustpilot Made the switch to Invoicecrowd It’s saved my team and I alot of time. We receive payments faster and it takes less than a minute to set up all of our accounts. You can set recurring invoices, edit or pause them if needed, schedule out your start date, and customize the look/brand of the invoices. The stripe and paypal integration also allows you to get the funds deposited quickly. I’ve been using simpleinvoices, another similar platform for many years but it nevers gets updated and is getting quite buggy. I’m happy i made the switch to Invoicecrowd Andrew M. March 7, 2022 via Capterra “Invoice Crowd Review – Thumbs up from me! “ I spent a lot of time researching invoice software to replace my old system. I had the difficult task of finding the right product that was easy to use, not expensive, and had all the features I needed. I was impressed by how simple and professional Invoice Crowd looked and it really did meet my needs. It’s really amazing, it has changed the way my company manages it’s financials and I am proud to recommend this simple and user friendly tool to anyone who needs invoice software. It’s is the hub of my business. I use it to get paid faster, keep track of my money coming in and going out, and much more. It’s a great tool for any business owner! Angie N. September 13, 2022 via Capterra “Simple, User-Friendly, Exactly What I Needed” I recently started a consulting arm of my business and was looking for a simple, but robust invoicing software that didn’t overwhelm me. I searched and found Invoice Crowd, which has been the perfect solution. I was able to purchase Invoice Crowd, set up my business profile, add client profiles, integrate my payment options, add my own brand colors and logos, and create several invoices within minutes of joining. I’m pretty amazed at how easy they have made it. I researched many invoicing systems and this by far was exactly what I was looking for in order to get invoices out with a quick turnaround. I’d highly recommend it. David Invoice Crowd has saved us money! We have been using IC for about 6 months now, and it has saved us such a large amount of money that we are now able to spend it on other things we need for our company, ncluding other licenses for needed software. The convenience is the key to this program’s success. We are now able to manage all of our companies from one, single dashboard, and even allow each to use different payment methods to collect funds. The developers and support have been very helpful, and they even added features my team and I requested. I am confident this will be our invoice solution for life, I am so thankful to have found them. Ursula L. July 5, 2022 via Capterra “Invoice Crowd is an invoicing tool that makes it easy to create and send invoices” Overall, I’m extremely happy with Invoice Crowd and would recommend it to anyone looking for an easy-to-use invoicing tool. The service support is available to help with any questions or issues and they are already working on correcting some minor bugs! Mike A. Nov 23, 2021 via G2 “Invoicing that is simple, effective and even pretty!” The simplicity of Invoice Crowd makes it pleasing to use. I found it intuitive and easy to deploy the first time. https://www.g2.com/products/invoice-crowd/reviews Jake Walker Invoice Crowd has streamlined our ability generate and send professional quality invoices to our customers. The PayPal functionality built into the documents really helps to simplify the payment process for our customers. In addition, the beautifully designed web based user interface makes it easy for us to use wherever we are! I highly recommend giving Invoice Crowd a chance to simplify your day. Questions Customer proof, answered Are these real customer reviews? They are the nine review records already published in the Invoice Crowd site content, including the displayed reviewer name, date or source where available, title, quote and rating. Source links are retained where the original content includes one. Are the quotes edited into case studies? No. This page reuses the existing visible review text and does not invent customer metrics, company profiles, before-and-after figures or outcomes that were not supplied. Why are there no percentage results? Invoice Crowd does not have consented, evidence-backed case-study metrics in the provided content. Adding a conversion, time-saving or revenue percentage would be an unsupported marketing claim. Do the reviews guarantee my result? No. Reviews describe individual experiences at a point in time. Product capabilities, configuration, plan limits, provider eligibility and business requirements must be checked for the current account. Where can I verify a review? The page retains an external source link when the saved review record includes one, including the Trustpilot and G2 profile links. Some saved Capterra entries identify the source without a per-review URL. How should I evaluate Invoice Crowd? Use representative customers, documents, currencies, taxes, team roles and a payment provider in a limited trial. Compare that result with the workflow and retention requirements your business must preserve. Test the workflow instead of borrowing someone else’s result Use the reviews to form a shortlist, then verify the current product with your own documents, team boundaries and payment requirements. Start free Compare plans No card required to start Current limitations visible Your result may differ --- ## Changelog URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/changelog/ October 2026 Invoice Crowd release notes: Payments Received, gateway refunds, retainers, automatic late fees, Lock Transactions, Void and new timesheets. Product updates What is new in Invoice Crowd: October 2026 The Invoice Crowd changelog lists what changed in the app and when. October 2026 brought Payments Received, refunds through eight payment gateways, retainers, automatic late fees, Lock Transactions, Void and a rebuilt Worklog, and every change below is live now. Read the release notes Explore all features Home Changelog Updated October 6, 2026 Every entry is live Paid-plan features marked pop The October release Getting paid, keeping the books and billing your time Most of the October work lands in three places: how money comes in and goes back, how the books stay closed and taxed correctly, and how logged hours turn into invoices. Getting paid Every receipt in one list, and refunds that go back through the provider. Payments Received Invoicing → Payments Received lists every invoice payment, advance payment and overpayment credit. One receipt can pay several open invoices, oldest first, and whatever is left is kept as customer credit. Advance payments get a numbered receipt you can download. Record Invoice Payment or Record Advance Payment Unused advances and overpayments shown as tiles Use Credit applies them to a later invoice Refunds through the gateway Choose Refund on an invoice and Invoice Crowd sends the money back through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex or GoCardless, then books the refund once the provider confirms it. For PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, Payoneer and M-Pesa you refund in the provider account and record it in Invoice Crowd. Booked only after the provider confirms Online invoice-page payments Payments Needing Review holds unmatched money Keeping the books Closed periods stay closed, and purchase tax is recorded where it belongs. Tax on expenses and item costs Expenses and invoice item costs now take a purchase tax rate or group, with amounts entered tax inclusive or tax exclusive. Recoverable tax posts to Input Tax Credit and the rest stays in the cost. In India, vendor GSTIN, ITC eligibility and reverse charge feed GSTR-3B Table 4. Amounts Are: Tax Inclusive or Tax Exclusive Recoverable tax to Input Tax Credit India: reverse charge and GSTR-3B Table 4 Lock Transactions Accounting → Lock Transactions lets the owner lock everything dated on or before a date, for all areas or just Invoicing, Purchases or Accounting. A date can be partially unlocked for a while, and Lock History records who changed a lock, when and why. Creating or editing a lock needs a paid plan. Lock All or lock one area Partially Unlock for a fix Lock History with who, when and why Billing your time Worklog grew a week view, approvals, profit per project and retainers. Timesheets, approvals and profitability The Timesheet now has List, Week, Approvals and Utilisation views and a CSV import. Weeks can be submitted and approved, clients can approve hours in the customer portal, and each project has a Profitability tab. A new invoice wizard bills time up to a date, with rounding and project expenses. Week entry and team approvals Utilisation against capacity Profit and margin per project Retainers A retainer is a monthly recurring invoice with hours included. Billable hours logged on the chosen projects count against it, unused hours carry over or expire, and extra hours go on the next invoice, so retainer time is never billed twice. Retainers are on paid plans. Hours Included Each Month Carry over or expire unused hours Clients see an hours bar in the portal Release notes October 2026 changes, newest first Each entry is dated by when the change was completed, and every entry here is live in Invoice Crowd today. Features that need a paid plan say so. October 5, 2026: Square sets itself up Square payment notifications are now set up automatically when you save your Square details or switch between Live and Sandbox, so there is no Set Up Now button. Since October 4, customers can also start a card-on-file Square subscription from a subscription invoice. October 5, 2026: Item imports with a preview Item imports now show a full preview before anything is saved. Choose add only, update only or both, matched by SKU or Item ID. One invalid row stops the whole batch, and each batch takes up to 1,000 rows or 2 MiB. October 4, 2026: Payments Received and advances A new Payments Received page under Invoicing lists invoice payments, advance payments and overpayment credits. Record Payment replaces Mark as Paid, and Manage Payments replaces Manage Pay. October 4, 2026: Retainers, and recurring on paid plans Retainers bill a monthly invoice with hours included. New recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers now need a paid plan; recurring schedules already running on the free plan keep running. October 4, 2026: Automatic late fees Switch on Late Fees in your business options and Invoice Crowd adds one flat or percentage fee the day after an unpaid invoice is due. The invoice shows a notice first, you can Waive Late Fee or Keep Fee, and in India GST is added on the fee. October 4, 2026: Timesheets and project profit Worklog gained a week view, timesheet approvals, utilisation, client approval of hours, an invoice wizard with rounding and expense re-billing, a Profitability tab and idle-timer detection. Worklog is on paid plans. October 4, 2026: Tax on expenses, and TDS for India Expenses and item costs take purchase tax, with recoverable tax posted to Input Tax Credit. TDS is now India only, with a Default TDS Rate (%) and a TDS Receivable account. October 4, 2026: Estimates customers can decline Customers can decline an estimate with an optional reason, and you get a bell notification. Estimates can carry an Expiry Date and can ask for a deposit when the customer accepts. October 3, 2026: Refunds through the provider Refund on an invoice now sends the money back through Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex or GoCardless and books it once the provider confirms. Other gateways are refunded in the provider account and recorded here. October 3, 2026: Void, and numbering you type A sent invoice or credit note can be voided: it keeps its number, is stamped VOID and is reversed in the books. You can also type any number, prefix included, on a new document and the next ones continue from it. October 2, 2026: Lock Transactions Owners can lock transactions on or before a date, for all areas or for Invoicing, Purchases or Accounting, unlock a date range for a while, and see every change in Lock History. Creating or editing a lock needs a paid plan. October 1 to 5, 2026: Smaller changes Payments Needing Review holds gateway money that cannot be applied automatically. The avatar menu now reads My Account, Integrations, Billing and Plan and Sign Out. Age Debt uses Current, 1-30, 31-60, 61-90 and 91+ Days. Dark mode uses a neutral grey palette. Questions The October 2026 release, answered Are these changes live in Invoice Crowd? Yes. Every change on this page is live in Invoice Crowd as of October 6, 2026. Some need a paid plan or have to be switched on, and those entries say so. Do I need to switch anything on? Late fees are off until you switch them on in your business options, and they apply only to invoices due on or after October 5, 2026. The reorder-point bell alert is also opt-in. Square notifications and gateway refunds need no setting. Which of these features need a paid plan? Retainers, new recurring invoices and subscriptions, the Worklog changes (timesheets, approvals, profitability and the invoice wizard), creating or editing a lock in Lock Transactions, and the AI Assistant need a paid plan. Payments Received, refunds, Void and estimate decline work on every plan. What happens to recurring invoices I set up on the free plan? They keep running. Only new recurring invoices, subscriptions and retainers need a paid plan. On the free plan, Recurring and Retainers show a lock icon in the sidebar. Where did Settings and Notification Settings go? Settings in the avatar menu is now My Account, and Notification Settings is the gear at the bottom of the notification bell panel. Roles moved to the Team page, and webhooks moved to the Integrations page in the avatar menu. Which gateways can refund from inside Invoice Crowd? Stripe, PayPal, Razorpay, Square, Braintree, Authorize.net, Airwallex and GoCardless. Choose Refund on the invoice and the refund goes through the provider. For PayFast, PayTabs, Telr, Payoneer and M-Pesa, refund in the provider account and record it with Refund on the invoice. See the October changes in your own account Sign in to try Payments Received, gateway refunds and Lock Transactions, or start a trial to see retainers and the new timesheets on a paid plan. Start free --- ## Invoice Crowd Blog URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/blog/ Read practical guides on invoicing, proposals, payments, cash flow and accounting for freelancers, agencies and growing small businesses. --- ## Contact Invoice Crowd URL: https://invoicecrowd.com/contact-us/ Contact Invoice Crowd for product questions, account support, billing help or partnerships, and choose the right route for a faster response. Reach the team behind Invoice Crowd Most questions already have a written answer, so the quickest route is usually the documentation or the support launcher on this page. When you do need a person, the routes below say which one to use, and the form on this page reaches all of them. Try Invoice Crowd Read the documentation Home Contact us Most replies inside one business day Documentation open to everyone Support launcher on every page Where to send it Four routes, so a message lands with the right person One form covers all of it. Saying which of these you are writing about is what gets a useful answer back rather than a question in reply. Product support Something is not behaving as you expect, or a setting is not where you thought it was. The documentation covers most of that in detail, and the support launcher in the corner of the page gathers the docs, this form and the roadmap in one place. doc.invoicecrowd.com Sales and plans Which plan fits, what happens when you grow out of one, how team members and business profiles are counted. Pricing is published in full, so write only about what the page does not already answer. Billing on your account A receipt you need, a plan change, a renewal you would rather stop. Send it from the email address the subscription is registered to, or name that address in the message, and it can be found without a round of checks first. Partnerships and affiliates Referrals, resellers, integrations and anything else that means working together. The affiliate program page sets out the commission side, which is worth reading before you write so the first exchange is a short one. Affiliate program Send a message One form for all four routes. Choose the topic that fits and it reaches the person who deals with it. [contact-form-7 id="1319" title="Contact"] An automatic acknowledgement goes to the address you enter, so you know the message arrived. The reply from a person follows separately, usually inside one business day. Before you write Twelve places that answer most of it Support and sales both end up linking to these, so it is usually quicker to look first. Product documentation Setup, every module and the settings behind them, written out in full and open without an account. Public roadmap What is planned, what is being built and what has already shipped, listed in the open. Plans and pricing Every limit on every plan, monthly and annual, with the free forever tier listed alongside them. Blog and guides Longer pieces on invoicing, quoting and running the money side of a small business. The feature index Every module with a page of its own, from proposals and estimates through to payments and reports. Accounting and books What the ledger does, what ships in the chart of accounts and which statements come out. Proposals and estimates How a quote is built, sent for approval and signed, before any of it becomes an invoice. The client portal What a customer sees after signing in: their documents to approve, download and pay. Payment gateways The multiple provider integrations that can sit on an invoice, and what a client does to pay through one. Recurring billing How a schedule is set, when the next invoice is raised, and how to stop one. Outbound webhooks How the account connects outward: Outbound webhooks send selected events to a receiver URL you control, and Pabbly Connect is the alternative. About the company The company behind the product, and what Invoice Crowd sets out to cover for small businesses. Questions Getting help, answered How quickly will someone reply? Usually inside one business day. Weekends and public holidays push that out. A message that includes the email address the account is registered to, plus a link or a screenshot of what you are looking at, tends to come back with an answer rather than a request for more detail. Can I talk to someone rather than write? Support runs in writing, through email and the launcher on this page. Keeping it in writing means the thread stays attached to your account and whoever picks it up can read what was already said. We do not publish a phone number for support. Can I ask about plans before I sign up? Yes. Send the form on this page, choose Sales and plans, and say what you bill for and how many people are involved, and we can point at the plan that matches. The pricing page lists every limit, and every paid plan starts with a free trial that does not ask for a card. Where do I report a bug or ask for a feature? The same routes. A bug is worth sending with the steps that produced it and the browser you were in. Feature requests go to the same inbox, and the public roadmap is where planned and shipped work is listed, so it is worth reading first. Is there documentation I can read instead of writing in? Yes, at doc.invoicecrowd.com, and it is open without an account. It covers setup, the modules and the settings behind them, which is where most support questions end up pointing anyway. The feature pages on this site cover the same ground in less depth. Or skip the message and open an account Much of what people write in to ask is quicker to see than to describe. The trial runs for 30 days and does not ask for a card at any point. Compare plans One form, four routes Documentation open without an account A public roadmap for what is next